;/\v -/V' //%1 * 4 ^ ,%^ :\ \^ \w "<.% ,.< "0 v v ^^ -J o„ '/ C -9 , °<> \v f^' ?ss%-\ w V ts V * * * ° , *%> °,^J S V ^ ,*«. %, ^ ^■A .* := ^>„A -^ &.V s .tf> o, '/ s^ NEJV EDITION. WHEN we reflect on the nuniber of great men in every department of sciences and arts, whom Italy lias been continually producing since the glorious age of Leo X. as likewise on the pleasure and instruction to be obtained by visiting that happy country, and the necessity of understanding the Italian language, to make that visit to any purpose; it is no wonder that the Gram- mars and Dictionaries, written to propagate the know- ledge of the Italian tongue, have been so greatly multi- plied. Without a proper acquaintance with this idiom, all the treasures of Italian learning and literature, ail the discoveries and inventions of genius and industry in that nation, would be lost to the rest of mankind. No doubt, a translation, which requires a knowledge of the original in one man only, may supply the want of that blessing in thousands. But where the interpreters are few, the mistakes and inaccuracies must, from man's natural aversion to much trouble, when his interest does not lead him to discoveries, be proportionably numerous. Be- sides, there is a fine spirit so peculiar to every language, ay to evaporate, almost entirely, in the most studied and cautious endeavours to transfuse it into others: and, though the bulk of mankind may take up with the body only, there will always be, in every civilized nation, a number of refined and philosophical minds, ambitious of possessing the better part sufficient to justify any pains taken to help them to the acquisition of that rational and sublime enjoyment. It was upon these principles, the editor undertook, some years ago, a translation from the French, with im- provements and additions, to make it suit the English A 2 idiom, PREFACE. idiom, of the then best as well as newest edition of Vene- roni's Grammae, a work far surpassing all other in- troductions to that elegant tongue, which, for its richness and softness, and the stores of every kind of useful know- ledge and polite entertainment locked up in its authors, is inferior to no language in Europe. These improve- ments consisted of an Introduction to Syntax; an Essay on Italian Poetry, or a Treatise on ihe Italian Ver- sification; the different Compositions in Verse, and Poetic Licences; a Treatise on compound Words Capitals, and Stops ; and finally, a Discourse on Exple- tives, the' energy and beauty of which constitute great part of the merit of most languages. But, non omnia possumus omnes. Such is the reputation of Veneroni's Grammar on the Continent ; and so great the number of those Who wish to be able not only to understand but to speak the Italian language ; that very material observations _upon that work have been pub- lished abroad since our iast edition of it in English. This consideration, joined to that translation's being out of print, has induced us to offer the public the following New Edition, in which we have combined the fruits of our own enquiries and remarks, with those of learned foreigners. We "have likewise added some new Gram- matical Observations on the Italian language ; with Remarks on the Letters of the Alphabet; some new Dialogues, new Phrases, Letters, and Stories; also the Italian words properly accented, to facilitate the pro- nunciation to learners. After all, we must not take upon us to say that it is impossible any better edition of this Work should ever appear. But this we may safely liffirm, that it will be many years before Veneroni's Grammar of the Italian language can be carried to a greater degree of perfection than that in which we now offer it to the English reader; and, therefore, we venture not only to offer it, but recommend it: and besides, stake our credit on the justness of that recom- mendation. INTRO- INTRODUCTION ITALIAN TONGUE, For the Use of those who do not understand Latin. THE most expeditious am] the surest way of wilt- ing ami- -speak i#g Italian, French, and all other languages, with propriety, is to learn therm by fl*e principles of Grammar. Yet, nobody has hitherto un- dertaken to explain the terms of that art, which arc puzzling to such as do not understand Latin, and parti- cularly to the Fair Sex. In order therefore to facilitate the method of acquiring this agreeable language, I have given an explanation of the necessary terms in the follow- ing Introduction. But hefore I enter upon the subject, I must acquaint the reader, that in the present Grammar, I have made use of the orthography embraced by the modern Ita- lians, as the safest, and best adapted for rendering the study of this language easy to foreigners ; as also with a view of serving a great many Italians themselves, who perhaps are not perfectly acquainted with the orthogra- phy which now prevails among the best writers of their own nation. N.B. In order, therefore, to establish this modern orthography, I have omitted a great number of accents with which most Italian Grammars were formerly crowded; and I have retained only a few grave ones, where they may be of use to distinguish one word from another, or for the right pronunciation of some par- ticular term. For which reason, 1 have retained the grave accent on the last vowel of the third person sin- A 3 gulur 2 INTRODUCTION to the gular in the preterperfect definitive, whose first person of the same tense terminates in ai, ei, and ii, (the latter is always written with a j, agreeable to the principles of the new orthography) ; as amid, I loved ; amo, he loved ; tre'dei, I believed ; crede, he believed ; sentn (sentj), I felt; sent), he felt. Were it not for this accent amo, the third person of the preterperfect definite, would be confounded with amo, the first person of the present in- dicative ; and credit, the third person of the preterper- fect definite, could not be distinguished from crede, the third person of the present indicative; sent), the third person of the preterperfect definite, might be mistaken for senti, the second person of the present indicative. I have likewise continued the grave accent on the first and third person singular of the future tense ; as sard, I shall be 5 sara, he shall be; for without this accent, saro would have no signification, and Sara would denote the wife of Abraham. I have moreover suffered it to re- main on ail nouns substantive of the feminine gender, which in Latin terminate mtas, as bonitas, ckaritas ; in English in ty ; and in Italian in ta, with the grave ac- cent ; as bounty, bonta ; charity, carita : and on all Italian words ending in u ; as virtu, virtue ; Giesu, Jesus; piii, more; fit, he was &c. Yet many . of the modern Italians, and even men of great learning, are against retaining this grave accent on words terminating in u; for they look upon it as superfluous, since u is always u, whether it be marked with a grave accent or not. In short, I have preserved the grave accent on la, an adverb of place, signifying there, in Latin Ulic, to distinguish it from the feminine article la; as also on cost?, and costa, signifying at that place, to distinguish them from cost i, thou dost cost; and costa, he does cost: the second and third persons of the verb costare, to cost : though indeed I think it needless on this account, since the context points out the feminine article, and the adverb of place; yet it may be proper to retain it for another reason, that. of the difference of pronunciation; as the words marked in that manner are uttered with a greater emphasis, and longer pause, than those which, are ITALIAN TONGUE. 3 are not accented. This new method of orthography, or pronunciation, you will find in the second Treatise of this Grammar; whereas the former editions give you only the rules and explication of the grave and acute accents. I shall mention a word or two concerning the vowels e and o, the pronunciation of which, to some persons, appears more difficult. The vowel e has always a clear and acute sound, like the French 6 masculine in malgrt, particularly when it is the penultimate vowel of the in- finitive mood, and of the future and indefinite tenses i as crtdere, to believe; amerb, I will love; anura, I should love : for, if you do not pronounce the vowel e full and strong, it will sound* like credre, amrd, amrei. The vowel o is pronounced as in Latin and English; and if there be any difference, it is so trifling, that it would be needless to mention it here, since it is best learned by the ear, and the instruction of a master. An INTRODUCTION to tk* An Explanation ofthcTzRMS of Grammar. TTHE first terms of grammar are the Letters. There are no more than twenty letters in the Italian tongue, according to the opinion of some grammarians, Viz. a, b y c, d y e,f, g% h, i, I, m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, w, z. According to others there are twenty-two : and the letters which they add, are j and v consonants. The latter opinion deserves the preference. The Italians do cot make use of k, x, y. The letters are divided into vowels and consonants. The vowels are a f e, i, o, u. They are called vowels, from their forming a perfect sound alone, without the assistance of the other letters; as a is pronounced single; e the same ; and hi like manner the other vowels. The consonants are the other letters, b, c, d, f, g,j f 1, m, n, p, q, r, s, t f v, z. We give them the name of consonants, because we cannot pronounce (hem without the help of a vowel before or after them : example, b is pronounced as if there was a b and e together, to wit, be ; f, as ef, and so of the rest. H, especially at the beginning of a word, is not pro- perly a letter, but only a note of aspiration ; therefore it is never pronounced in Italian : yet the use made of it in the middle of words, is greater than most people imagine. See what we say of it, in treating of the pro- nunciation of consonants. It is the mixture of the letters, that generally forms the different words which every language is capable of producing-: and, that seme order may be observed in the infinite number of words< they have been reduced to nine heads, or parts of speech, though most Italians reckon no more than eight. A speech is composed of sentences. Sentences are composed of words. Words of syllables. Syllables of letters. Letters ITALIAN TONGUE. 5 Letters are certain marks or characters, which serve to form the syllables and words, as, a t h, c, d, t> &c. A syllable is part of a word pronounced with a sin- gle sound, aud composed of one, two, or three letters, as, astrologo, an astrologer, is composed of four sylla- bles, as-tro-lo-go, the second of which is composed of three letters, and the rest of two. ' A-mo, I love, is composed of two syllables, the former of a single letter, and the latter of two. Sometimes a word contains but one syllable, and then we call it a monosyllable (a term of Greek derivation),, that is to say, having but one syllable ; as re, a king ; me, nic ; tc, thee, &c. A word consists either of one or more syllables ; as rp, cmbre. A sentence is composed of many words, that form a complete sense y as, per ben parldre Italiano, bisogna parhire Toscdno, e prununcidre come i Romani ; to speak good Italian, we must speak as they do in Tuscany, and pronounce as they do at Rome. A speech, or discourse, is composed of nine parts; which are-Mhe Article, Noun, Pronoun, Verb, Parti- ciple, Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction, aud Interjec- tion— rWe cannot name any word but what is contained under one of these parts, which are all comprised in the following Treatise. Those who reckon but eight parts of speech, leave out the Article, AS An INTRODUCTION to thi An Explanation of the Parts of Speech. JN order to understand a language with ease, we should endeavour to attain -\ perfect knowledge of the parts of speech, and their meaning ; otherwise it is impossible ever to understand, or speak it correctly. According to the above order, I should begin with the Article ; but, that I may be the better understood, I shall commence with the Noun. Of the NOUNS. A Noun is a word which serves to name and distin- guish some thing; as, Dm, God; dngelo, an an- gel ; nemo : a man ; cUlo, heaven ; terra, earth ; c a- x>allo, a horse ; libro, a bock ; capptllo, a hat ; tdvola, a table 5 pane, bread ; vino, wine, &c. There are two sorts of nouns : one is called a noun- substantive, and the other a noun-adjective. The noun-substantive is that which subsists by itself, or that expresses the name of a thing, which we presently understand upon the first mentioning ; as heaven, earth, the king, a horse, a book; we know the meaning of the words, heaven, earth, the king, &c. The noun-adjective is a word that denotes the qualities of the substantive, and that cannot be understood when mentioned by itself; as great, grande ; tme,bello; little, piccolo; red, 7^6sso : we know not what is great, fair, little, or red, unless we join a substantive to it; as, a great book, a fine book, a little book, a red book ; a great hat, a fine hat, a little hat, a red hat. Every noun is either of the masculine or the feminine gender. The masculine gender is marked by the article il, or lo, in English Me. The feminine gender is marked by the article la, in Engtah also by the. All nouns, before which we may place il or lo, are of the masculine gender; and those, before which we place ITALIAN TONGUE. 7 la, are of the feminine gender; example, il libro, the book : il fubco, the tire ; lo specckio, the looking-glass- ; are of the masculine gender; La terra, the earth, la camera, the chamber, la penna, the pen; are of the femi- nine gender. %* Observe, that the noun substantive is riever but of one gender ;- that is to say, either masculine or feminine, as Dio, God, cielo, heaven, gia'rdmo, garden, are always of the masculine gender, and never of the feminine. Ter- ra, the earth, camera, a chamber, are feminine and never masculine. The noun adjective ought to agree with the substan- tive: when it terminates in 0, it is masculine ; and when it terminates in a, it is feminine. Take notice, that all nouns adjective masculine, ending in 0, may become feminine, by changing into a ; Mllo, bella, handsome ; piccolo, piccola, little ; Jnibno, bubna, good; santo, sunta, holy. There are some nouns adjective, which, without changing their termination, are of both genders ; and they are those which, in Italian, end in e in the singular number, as, illustre, ammirabile, facile,, &c. One may say, un' uorno illustre, an illustrious man; una donna illustre, an illustrious woman ; una spirit o ammirabile, a wonderful wit ; ana bdUzza ammirabile, a wonderful beauty; un libra facile, an easy book ; una lezione facile, an easy lesson. *** Observe, that all nouns adjective, which end in e in Italian, are of the common gender. All nouns before which il or lo and la, in English the, may be placed indifferently, are adjectives; as, il prudtnle, la prudente, prudent ; il dbtto, la dot fa, learned. The nouns, before which il or lo, and la, in English thr, must not be placed indifferently, but only one of them, are nouns substantive ; as, il sole, the sun ; la lima, the moon; il giardino, the garden; il frutto, the fruit; la virtu, virtue ; la prudenza, prudence. Nouns that can change into a are also adjectives ; thus of dbtto, learned, you may form dbita, learned ; 'AG' „ but i INTRODUCTION to the but of luna, giardmo, terra, &c. which are nouns subs-tan* live, you cannot form luno,giardina t terro, &c. A noun is also of the singular or the plural number. The singular number is used where we speak of one thing only; as, the prince, il principc, the body, il corpo; the horse, il cavallo : where we speak but of one priute, of one body, and of one horse. The plural number is used when we speak of more than one; as, the princes, i principi; the bodies, i cbrpi; the horses, i cavalli : here we speak of many princes, many bodies, and many horses. These little words of two or three letters, as ■// or lo, la, in English the ; gli or ?', which signify the in the plural, tuid are placed before nouns to mark the gender, number, and case, are called Articles. Of the ARTICLES. TTIE Article is a declinable word, of one, two, or three letters, which is put before the nouns to shew their gender, number, and case. The gender and number have been explained al~ leady. But, not to perplex ttie memory, I have inserted the ex- planation of the cases after the parts of speech, as it will be time enough then to learn them ; and it is sufficient, at present, to know that -he articles in English are the, of the, to the, from the; and they are used both in the singular arid plural number. You cannot always know the gender, number, or case of nouns, except by the article that precedes them. If one should ask, for example, what gender the word piide, a loot, is of, it would be impossible to know, without prefix- ing an article to it: the articles il and lo serve for the masculine, and la for the feminine ; so that in saying il pudr, the foot, the article il shews it is of the masculine gender. In like manner, if a person should ask what number any ITALIAN TONGUE. £ any other word is of, the question could not always be resolved, without putting the articles il, lo, i, or gli, before^ it, to mark the singular or the plural number. *** Observe, that when an article comes before a Word beginning with a vowel, the last letter of the article must be cut off; that is to say, you retrench the vowel at the end of the article, and in the place of it, you put an apostrophe, which is made thus('). Example : in prefixing an article to amore, onbre, dnima, you must not pronounce, or write, lo amore, lo onbre, la dnima ; but remove, V onbre, I 'dnima, &c. In like manner you retrench the vowel in other cases : deir amore, dtlV onbre, d ell ' dnima ; alV amore, all onbre, clT dnima; dalV amore, dalV onbre, dull' dnima. The Italians never make an elision before words beginning with a j or r, because the letters j and v are properly consonants ; and those who confound them with the vowels i and u, are mistaken. Of the PRONOUNS. A Pronoun, which the Italians call Pi online, or Vice- name, is a declinable part of speech ; so named, be- cause it is used instead of a noun. There are seven soits of pronouns ; to wit, fPersonal, I Conjunctive, Possessive, Pronouns -{ Demonstrative, Interrogative, Relative, Improper. Some, by useless subdivisions, have, to the preceding* added f Reciprocal Pror,ou D .J £ euter >., ,. j Monosyllabic, \ Disjunctive, &c» I shall 10 INTRODUCTION tq the I shall mention a word or two, by the way, of the for- mer seven. Of Pronouns perfonaL The pronoun personal marks the three persons ; to wit, the first, second, and third, as well in the singular as plural. The first person is he, or she, who speaks ; and it is ex- pressed by I, ig ; we, ?ioi. The pronoun persona], io, marks the first person sin- gular; as, I speak, io parlo ; I sing, io canto; T believe, h credo: not marks the first person plural; as, we speak, not parUdmo, &c. The pronouns personal I, io ; we, mot ; belong as well to the masculine gender as to the feminine : so that a woman as well as a man may say, I sing, io canto ; I see, io vedo : we sing,- not cantidmo', we see, no i redid- mo, &c. The second person is that to whom we speak ; and it serves also for the masculine and feminine; to wit, thou, tu, in the singular number ; you, voi, in the plural ; example, thou speakest, tu pdrii; thou dost sing, tu cdnti; you speak, vol parldie : you sin?, vci centals, &c. The third person is that of whom we speak; to wit, he, eg7/, for the masculine ; she, elia, for the feminine; and, in the plural, the masculine makes iglino, they; the femi- nine, eltino : as, he speaks, egli pdrla ; lie sings, egU canto. : she speaks, ctla parla : they speak, eglino pdrlano, m. elltno pdrlano, f. * # * Observe, that there is only / and ive for the first person ; there is also only ikcu and you for the second ; consequently, every sentence, in which there is neither /, we, thou, nor you, must be of the third person ; as, the king is willing, il re vuble ; the master teaches, il maestro insfgna, &c. both which sentences belong to the third person, because they have neither /, we, thou, nor you. Of ITALIAN TONGUE. II Of the Pronouns conjunctive. The pronouns conjunctive in Italian are mi, me or to me; ti, thee or to thee ; si, himself or to himself, herself, or to herself; ci, us, or to us ; vi, you, or to you; foro, them or to them. The pronouns conjunctive have a very great resem- blance and affinity with the pronouns persona 1, as they are always put before the verb, except loro ; but with this difference, that the pronouns personal make the action of the verb, before which they are placed, and the pro- nouns conjunctive receive it ; example, io canto, I sing ; vbi parlate, you speak; it is / and you that make the action of the verbs sing and speak, before which they are placed ; and, consequently, they are pronouns personal. But when we say, Dio ml vede, God be- holds me, it is God makes the action of the verb be- hold, and me receives it. In like manner, when we say, w vi prego, I pray yon ; vbi ci considerate ; you consider us; I want to know which are the words in these wo phrases, that make the action of the verbs, pray and consider ? It is / that pray ; therefore io, I, is the pronoun personal ; and ci, you, is the pronoun con- junctive. In the second phrase vbi ci consider ate, you consider us; it is vbi, you, that is the pronoun personal, and causes the action of the verb consider : but the word ci, us, that re- ceives it, is the pronoun conjunctive, &c. Of Pronouns possessive. The pronouns possessive mark the possession of a thin?: the pronouns possessive are my, thy, his or her, their, our your : example, my horse ; thy hat ; his or her book ; my chamber ; thy daughter ; his house ; our judgment ; our intention ; your wit ; your pen ; my children ; my land ; thy pleasures ; thy actions ; his glass ; his chaise; our horses ; our towns ; your clothes ; your hands ; their father ; their kindred. Of 22 INTRODUCTION to the Of Pronouns demonstrative. iTie pronouns demonstrative serve to point" out, as if Here, to a person or thing; as this, and that ; these, and those: example, this coach ; this ivoman ; that man ; these hooks, &c. Of Pronouns Interrogative. The pronoun interrogative is used in asking a ques- tion ; there are but three in English, to wit, who? what t wHch ? example, what would you have? who is there? what woman is thai ? what do you mean? which man do you mean ? Of Pronouns relative. A pronoun relative has reference to a thing or person spoken of before; as, which, who, that, when they are not intei rogatives; example, the book that I read; the mas- ter who teaches ; the lesson which I study. Of Pronouns improper. The pronouns improper are, every, c.'jry one, all, any ; or, nobody, none, several, some other, &c. They are called improper, because, strictly speaking, they are not pronouns. %* Note, that those pronouns improper are very much like adjectives, being most of them of the masculine and feminine gender in Italian: but as there is no such distinction as masculine and feminine in the English pronouns improper, tli^re can be no example of them given here: so that I refer beginners to the third chap- ter, concerning pronouns, where it will be rendered more intelligible to them. The pronouns improper have also their distinction of singular and plural number; but this, as well as the gender, cannot be explained here by example ; it shall be done with more convenience and perspicuity in its proper place. 0/ ITALIAN TONGUE. U Of the VERBS. HPHE Verb, and the Noun, are the two principal parts of Speech. The Noun serves to name any thing. The Verb serves to denote every action that may bt performed, by expressing the person and tense ; us, to laugh; to love; to sleep ; to ?un ; to nourish ; to die; to si fig; to teach: I love, we love; [laugh, we laugh, &c. ; / will love, w& will love ; I will laugh, we will laugh, &c. The verb lias neither masculine nor feminine gender; but is distinguished by three times, viz. the jtresent ; Xhepreter- perfect, or time past; the future, or the time to come. Generally before the verb, there is a pronoun personal; as, I sing, he sings, we sing; you dance; the?/ sing ; J sing, I sung, I will sing, ye shall sing. In which exam- ples the difference of the time of performing the action is obvious. The change of time or lenses is, in the grammatical phrase known by the name of conjugation. The conjugation of verbs is composed of four parts, viz. of moods, tenses, persons, and number. Of the MOODS. A Mood is a grammatical term, used to express the internal operation of the mind and will, and the different ways and manners of acting. Now this may be done after five manners or moods ; and these moods are called indicative, imperative, opta- tive, subjunctive, and infinitive. The indicative, or demonstrative, as others call it, is the first mood: it shews and declares simply and abso- lutely, and without any condition, the thing signified by the verb; as when 1 say, I sing; T have suns;; 1 will sing; one may plainly perceive, that there are in !hese three examples, the time present, past, and to come ; without our being obliged to enquire, whether this verb depends on some particle, or mark, as that, provided ihat k 34 INTRODUCTION to the that, &c in which case, the verb would not be in the indicative, but in the subjunctive. The imperative marks the action of the verb in com- manding and fojrbidding: example, sing; y on, do not sing; go thou, do not go. It is obvious that, in the foregoing examples, the person speaks either in the way of com- mand or prohibition ; and of course, in the imperative. The optative expresses the action of the verb by wish- ing and desiring; as would Iliad fifty thousand pounds a year ; could I but go to Rome ; had I but that, how happy should I be ! The subjunctive or conjunctive, is so called, because it is generally used, with conjunctions before it; such as, that, although, to the end that, provided that: example, my master is willing that I do my duty ; although he say that I may write ; provided that he come ; he desires that I may sing. The verbs, do,, say, write, come and sing, which follow the conjunctions, are of the subjunctive mood. The manner of applying conjunctions to verbs will be illustrated when we come to speak of tbe syntax of verbs, in the second part of this grammar, to which we refer the reader. TJfe infinitive represents the action of the verb, with- out marking either the number or person; as, to love, to ivrite; one cannot tell what number of persons this action to love, or to ivrite, is to be done, nor who is to do it: GJ the TENSES. \7ERBS have properly but three Tenses; the present, the preter, and the future. The present denotes a thing done at the very time we are speaking; as, I sing, you sing, &c. The preter, or time past, denotes an action which is no lor.ger present; as, 1. I did sing; 2. 1 sung; 3. lhave sting ; 4. / had su?ig. These four examples plainly shew that an action may be past in four different manners, which is the reason v that ITALIAN TONGUE. IB that there are four different bdases that mark the time past ; they are, 1. The preteriinperfect, | 3.- Tlie preterperfect, 2. The preterpeifect definite, | 4. The preterpluperfect. The preterimperfect serves for the actions which were present at a certain time; example, / did sing, or I was singing, when yen came in : the word, / did sing, shews that the action of singing was doing when you came in. The preterimperfect definite marks and defines the time, the year, or the day, when the action was done; as, / $ung yesterday ; I spoke to the king last year. We also make use of this tense, in telling or relating any action : example, last year the king took the field ; he made himself master of several toivns, and conquered whole provinces ; he defeated the enemy, who made a vigor ~ ous defence ; he struck a terror into his neighbours, and at last forced them to accept of such a peace as he pleased to prescribe. All the verbs of this example are in the preter- perfect definite. Those who do not understand Latin, have some difficul- ty to distinguish the preterimperfect from the preterperfect definite : in order to clear this matter, let them read the two following observations. *** 1. Note, that the preterimperfect may be applied to a time past, or to that which is still in being. By the time still in being, or not quite past, we are to understand a day, a night, a week, a month, a year, the age we live in. By the time past or that which is no more, we under- stand yesterday, the day before yesterday, last week, last month, last year, last age. Hence we may use the preterimperfect thus : I did write to-day, I did sing this week, I did read this month. On the contrary the pre- terperfect definite is applied to the time past, and never t > that in being ; we may say, / ivrote yesterday ; I read- last week; but we must not say, I wrote to-day, I read to-day. c 2. But, to make the difference between the preterim- perfect, and the preterperfect definite, more plain and easy 16 INTRODUCTION to the easy to the ladies, it suffices to know that the first person of the pretei imperfect is always terminated in v* ( or va, in Italian ; as amavo, I did love ; cantdvo, I did sing ; godtvo, I did enjoy, &c. The preterimperfect definite never has that termination: as am/ii, I loved: godti, I enjoyed, &c. The preterperfect expresses actions perfectly past ; as, I have sung, ho eantdto ; I have enjoyed, ho goduto. Observe, that we always make use of two verbs to express the preterperfect or compounded tense; as, 1 have written, ho scritto; I had written avevo scrittb. It is obvious, that ho is one verb, and seritto } another. These two verbs are expressed in Italian, as well as in English ; but in Latin they make use of a single verb only. We generally use the preterperfect, to express an action done at a time v. hich is still in being, and not entirely elapsed, as, I have given ; I have written ; / have spoken to-day, this morning, this week, this month, in my life.' time, &c. and not as some people, who confound the pre- terperfect definite with the preterperfect, saying,, I game, I spoke to-day, this month, &c. because to day, this month, &c. are times still in being, which we ought to express by the preterperfect, I have given, I have spoken, &c. to-day, this month, &c. The preterplupeifect denotes not only an action per- fectly past, but likewise shews that it was over before another action, of which we are speaking, began: example, I had supped, when ycu was singing ; I had done ivriting, when yon entered. Here it appears plainly that there are four preterits, or past tenses; viz. two simple, and two compound. The simple are the pi etei imperfect, and the preterper- fect definite, which in Italian are expressed by a single verb, with a pronoun personal before it; as, leggtvo, I did read ; hggtvi, thou didst read; tegg&sa, he did lead ; llssi, I read; Jeggesti, thou readest; lesse, he read. In those examples, there is no more than one verb. The two compound preterits are the preterperfect and the preterplupeifect ; which arc always expressed by two verbs, ITALIAN TONGUE. 17 ter'is, with a pronoun personal before them ; as, / have written, thou hast written, he has written, &c. / had given, thou hadst given, he had given, &c. In these ex^ aniples there are two verbs. The future is a tense that signifies something to come; as, I will sing, I will speak, &c. It is either simple or compound ; simple in the examples above mentioned ; compound when I say, / shall have read; I shall have written, &c. Of the PERSONS. TTHE tenses of verbs are composed of three Persons. The first is always expressed by / in the singular number, and by tee in the plural; as, I sing, we sing. The second person is marked by thou iu the singular* and you in the plural; as thou singest, you sing. The third is he and she in the singular, and tliey in the plural; as, he speaks, she speaks, they speak. Of the NUMBERS. HPHE tenses of the verbs have also two Numbers, the singular and the plural; singular, J love, thou lovest, he loves ; plural, we love, ye love, they love. Of the PARTICIPLES. '"PHE Participles are so called, because, although they are verbs, they partake of the nature and quality of adjectives; as amato, amata, loved; ornato, ornata, adorned : one may say, / loved, and / liave loved; I adored, I have adored; which are verbs: we also say, a man beloved, a woman loved, a God adored, a divinity adored; then those words loved, beloved, adored, &c. are nouns adjective, and consequently par- ticiples, from their partaking of the nature of adjec- tive! 18 INTRODUCTION to the tives and verbs, and from their serving to form the pre- terperfect. *** Observe that whenever two verbs follow one another in the same phrase, and that the first-is one of the tenses of the verbs to have or to he, the second, is a participle ; as, I have seen, you have spoken, he had written, I am loved, we are commended: the words seen, spoken, written, loved \ and commended, are participles. The former five parts of speech, namely, the Article, Noun, Pronoun, Verb, and Participle, change their termi- nation in Italian : example, il cavullo del pr'mcipe e hello, the prince's horse is handsome ; i cavatli de pr'mcipi sono lelli, the princes' horses are handsome. By those two examples, you may see the change of the articles, nouns, and verbs, f By the two following you will see a change of the pronouns and participles : La vbstra Uttera € scritta in una maniera affettubsa e famiglidre ; your letter is written in an affectionate and familiar style : Le vostre let tere sono scritte in termini off ettubsi efamiglidri; your letters are written in affectionate and famiiiar terms. The other four parts of speech admit of no alteration: as, mblto, a great deal, which is an adverb ; con, with, a preposition; die, that, a conjunction; oime, alas, an interjection : they are constantly pronounced and written in the same manner; and it may be observed, that those words have neither gender, number, case, nor time. --'.■"".", ■ -'' , :•• ',- ' '■■»■ .■" ' ■ ': r =i— ^, , r . ', ' ■ ..n ., i Of ADVERBS. AD VERBS are words that help to express in a better manner what the verb denotes, and add more or less force and significancy to it ; as, well, ill, more, clearly, better, hardly: example, when 1 say, I teach, this expres- sion shows what I do, that is, / teach; but it does not point out the manner how I teach. To convey this meaning, I add an adverb, thus, / teach plainly. We have already observed, that adverbs have neither gender, number, nor case. There ITALIAN TONGUE. W There are a great many sorts of adverbs ; but I shall here only give examples of two or three cf the most com- mon sort Adverbs of time; such as, when, yesterday, to-night, to-day, to-morrow, late, soon, a long while, always, never, &c. Adverbs of place ; as, where, here, there, above, below, towards, far, near, &c. Adverbs of quantity ; as", how much, how many, much, as much, little, &c. Of PREPOSITIONS. ■•T'HE Prepositions, like the Adverbs, have neither gen- der, number, nor case : they are always prefixed to nouns, articles, and verbs, and therefore are called pre- positions from the Latin word prceponei'e, to set before ; as, upon, near, before, without, out, in, against, for; as, upon the house, near the palace, in the garden, against reason, in court. '%* Observe, that there is a great difference between the adverb and preposition ; as the adverb requires no- thing after it, but the sense is complete without the addi- tion of another word; example, he teaches well, you speak learnedly, you write fast. But on the contrary, the pre- position always requires some word to follow it ; fo v ex- ample, you are before me, it is upon the table, they are in the garden, &c. %* Observe also, that the prepositions sometimes be- come adverbs, when we speak absolutely, and there is neither article, noun, nor pronoun, after the prepositions : for example, my brother walks before, he ivill come after, they are behind, she is near. In those four examples, before, after, behind, and near, are adverbs ; but if we said, my. brother ivalks before his company, he will come after us, the servant is behind us, she is near ws ; then before, after, behind, near, are prepo- sitions. 20 INTRODUCTION to the Of CONJUNCTIONS. 'T'HE Conjunctions serve to join and connect words and sentences together ; such as, and, or, but, though, that, as, provided that, in short, &c. example, Peter or Paul, black or white ; I promised it to you, but you must give it me again. . " ■ i . ■■ '"— — ' - ■ Of INTERJECTIONS. "T^HE Interjections are words that make sense of them- selves, and serve to express any violent emotion ; as, alas! fie! courage! halt! hush! There are also inter^ jections of cursing and swearing. An explanation of the CASES. TX/'E have already taken notice, that there are four parts of speech which never change, viz. Adverbs, Conjunctions, Prepositions and Interjections ; for example, prudently, and, upon, alas! These words are always writ- ten and pronounced after the same manner; and have neither masculine nor feminine gender, neither singular nor plural number. The live others, which are, the Article, the Noun, the Pronoun, the Verb, and *he Participle, alter their termina- tion ; the, as, day ; I, we; I love, I loved. This variation of articles, nouns, and pronouns, is called a Declension. The Aange of verbs is called a Conjugation. A declension has six variations, which are called Cases ; viz. nominative, genitive, dative, accusative, vocative, and ablative. The case, or variation of nouns, is known only by the article. I must * A greut part of this treatise of cases is applicable only to tfte learned, and to some foreign languages, such as French and Italian ± for in English zve h«vc no variation in the noun, except the genitive, as man, man's ; and none at all in the article, since u>e only male use of the Utile signs, or particles, to distinguish the cases ; as, of, to, for, from, &c. ITALIAN TONGUE. 21 I must put you in mind of what I observed before, when treating of the articles, viz. when an article happens to precede a word beginning with a vowel, the vowel at the end of the article is retrenched, and an apostrophe is placed in its stead. The articles of the nominative are the, both in the singular and plural in English : as the sun, the earth, the ladies. This case is called the nominative, from nominare, to name ; because it declares the name of any thing with the article the, and this article, with the following noun, makes the nominative ; as, the sun, the moon,the earth, the horses, the men, the women. The articles of the genitive are of the, and of: for ex- ample, of the sun, of the moon, of the men, of London. We give the name of the genitive to this case, because it shows the author or cause of the noun of which we speak: an example will make it clearer. When we say, the heat of the sun; in thi3 example, of the sun is the genitive, because the sun is the author and the cause that produced the name heat : and so, in the following examples, the length of the earth, the father s son, the fruit of the tree, the beauty of Paris. The word genitive comes from gignere, which signiiies to beget, or produce. The dative is marked by the articles to the, and to, for the singular and plural: example, to the sun, to the prince, to London, to the men, to the houses, &c. The dative serves to make known to wbom, or to what, we give or address the thing spoken of; as, to give alms to the poor ; to write to the king, to the queen, to London, to Rome. The word dative comes from dare, to give. The accusative is like the nominative, and the ar'ucles are the same; as, the sun, the earth, the women, The word accusative is derived from the Latin accusctre, to accuse. The only difference between these two cases is, that the nominative is before the verb, and the accusative after it. To distinguish the nominative from the accusative, you have only to remember, that the nominative names B the 22 INTRODUCTION to the the person or thing that makes the action of the verb, and the accusative accuses or names that which receives it ; ex- ample, the king loves ike queen. The king is the nominative case, because it is the king that makes the action of loving; and the queen is the accu- sative, because it is the queen that receives the action of loving from the king. %*Note, that the accusative is generally put after verbs aclive, and prepositions; as, I behold the sun, with the princes, for the king, &c. ' The vocative is always distinguished by the article 6 : it is used in calling Gut to a person : example, 6 Peter, 6 Paul, dec. Most commonly we put no article at all to express the vocative: as, sir, madam, Mary, Peter, &c. The word vocative comes from voeare, to call. The ablative, in English, is expressed by the articles from the, from, and by. The ablative is generally put after the verbs passive. Now the ladies, and those who do not understand Latin, will easily know what a verb passive is, being always com- posed of two verbs ; the first of which is some tense of the verb esse re, to be; a*id the other a participle; so that these two together make a verb passive, after which the ablative case is put : example, / am esteemed by the king. The ablative is also used after the following verbs ; to take away, to receive, to obtain, to separate, &c. Ex- ample. To take from the hands, "J J have received from the prince, f The last words ar« He is separated from me, ("in the ablative case. I am driven from London. ) The ward ablative derives its original from the Latin ab- Jatum, which signifies taken away ; / am beloved by the prince. I have received a hundred croivns from the prince* It is the same thing as if I should say, / have taken from the prince love, and a hundred crowns. V Remember, that though the articles of the genitive and ablative are the same in English in both numbers, yet they are differently expressed in the Italian. After a master i as exercised his scholars in these parts of ITALIAN TONGUE. 23 of speech, and made them understand the meaning of tenses, genders, numbers, and persons, he ought to propose parts of speech contained therein ; for example, the sol- diers that fight bravely for the king, are esteemed and praised by the whole kingdom. The, is a definite article, of the plural number, of the masculine gender, and the nominative case. Soldiers, is a noun substantive, of the same number, gender, and case. That, a pronoun relative of the plural number, and no- minative case. Fight , a verb of the present indicative, and third person plural. Bravely, an adverb. For, a preposition. Their, a pronoun possessive. King, A noun substantive, masculine* in the accusative singular. Are, a verb in the third person plural, and present mdk cative. Esteemed, a participle. Are esteemed, a verb passive, of the third person plural, and present indicative. And, a conjunction. Praised, a participle. Are praised, a verb passive, of the third person plural, and present indicative. By, a preposition. All, a pronoun improper. The, an article definite. Kingdom, a noun substantive, masculine. By the whole, in the ablative; because are esteemed, and are praised, are both verbs passive, and require an ablative case after them. It is extremely difficult for those who do not under- stand Latin, ever to speak or write Italian correctly, with- out perusing this short introduction ; which will not only be a great assistance to them in learning it, but also save them much time and trouble, as those, whom I have had the honour to teach, can testify. b 2 After m INTRODUCTION, &c. After this iutroduction is perfectly understood, the next thing to be done is, to learn how to find out the words in the Dictionary, where they are all placed in an alphabetical order. The nouns substantive are to be found by their singular number, and not by their plural: therefore you must not look for heavens, horses, but heaven, horse, The nouns adjective are sought for by the masculine, and not by the feminine : for example, to know the Italian of fair, you must look for hello, and not bella. The way of finding out the verbs in the Dictionary, is by their infinitives. In English, the infinitive is known by the particle to, placed before the verb ; as, to love, to sing. In Italian, the infinitives terminate in are, ere, or ire. So that, if I want to know the infinitive of amidmo, credidmo, sentiamo, I must not look for dmo, credo, stnto, but for amdre, credere, sentire ; and so form them according to the rules of each conjugation. The End of the Introduction. t 25 ] THE ITALIAN MASTER, PART I. r THE first thing that ought to be learnt, is the Italian Pronunciation: this is confined to some syllables, which the Italians pronounce after a different manner from the English, as may be seen at the end of this discourse, where the whole difficulty of the Italian Pronunciation i* included in a Period of seven lines. Of the Italian Pronunciation, Hp II E Italian tongue has two and twenty letters, which are pronounced after the following manner, by the Tuscans : the difference between them and the other Itali- ans is, that the latter pronounce the letters b, c, d, g, p, t, z, with a single e after them, saying be, tche, de> &c. Al " aw, KT Cemme, B bee, N enne, C tehee, O o> D *d dee, P *6 pee, E i I a © efe, dgee, 11 S a erre, esse, H ace a, T £ te, 1 ee, U • 00, J j consonant, V v consonant L, fc 3 £. s dstta. Hence 26 The ITALIAN PRONUNCIATION. Hence it appears, that the Italian pronunciation is very different from the English, and we must take care to .sound the letters exactly as they are marked in the preced- ing alphabet: The Italians have no such letter as k, on, or y; at least they never make use of them, but in mentioning foreign names, as Stockholm, Xenocrate, &c. and then they pro- nounce the former word, as if it were a c instead of k ; and the latter, as if it were an s in the room of the letters. You are also at liberty to write Stccolm, and Senocrate. The tetters are divided into vowels and consonants, as I have already remarked in the Introduction. Of the Pronunciation of the Vowels, *~Y H E vowels, which are a, e, i, o, it, are pronounced aw, a, ee, o, oo. The vowel o has two sounds; one open, like o in fibre and store: the other close, like u in stumble or turret. It is close in words where o is ac- cented ; in words ending in one, bra, ere, oso, except when u goes before, and then it is pronounced open, as in Eng- lish; thus, cuore pronounce core, a heart. It is also close before I, in, n, r ; as cblmo, ponte, sound nilmo, pimte, except when t or u comes before it. It is close too before gn: as Bologna, sound Bolunnia ; but every Where else it is pronounced open. %,* Observe, that u, when a vowel, is pronounced like og In English, as pubheuzibne read pooblkattibne. You see, by this example, the pronunciation of the five vowels. Note also, that u becomes a consonant, when it begins a syllable with another vowel; and then it is pronounced as in English ; example, voso, vt.ro, vbsiro, virt,}. The diphthongs, which arc nothing more than the union of two or three vowels, are prouounced distinctly, and yet form but one syllable; as, m/;i, never; i mitt, mine; v ;', thine; i subi, his; but to pronounce them properly, we should hear them sounded try a master. See the collec- tion The ITALIAN PRONUNCIATION. 27 Hon of syllables and words, the most difficult to pro- nounce, when we speak of-w before o, after treating of the pronunciation of consonants. Of the Pronunciation of Consonants. COME of the consonants vary from the English pro- nunciation, especially, c, g, %, to which may be added h, £, and s, upon each of which there are several particu- lars to be observed. C, before the vowels a, o, u, and before the consonants /, r, is pronounced the same as in English ; for instance, cam, cqIIo, euro, Chrkto, clemtnza, crud&le, a house, a neck, care, Christ, clemency, cruel. C, before the vowels e, or i, rounds like che and chi, in the English words cherry and chick: example, Chare, Caesar; cecita, blindness; citta, a city; pronounce Chesare, chechita, chitta. \* Observe, that to speak according to the nicety and delicacy of the Italian language, we ought to sdund a t in Chesare, chechita, chitta, &c. so smoothly as not to be able to distinguish whether we pronounce a t or a d. If two cc's come before the vowels e or i, the former is sounded as a t, and the latter like che'm cherry : example accent o, an accent; braccio, an arm; pronounce atc/ientc, hrdtchio. When, after ci, there is a vowel ; as, cia, cie, cio, ciu, you must pronounce them in one syllable, so as to drown, in some measure, the sound of the vowel i: example, Frdn~ cia, cielo, bdcio, pronounce Frimchia,chizlo, bachio. The syllables see, sci, are pronounced she, shi: example, sctmare, diminish ; lascidre, to let alone ; read shemare, lashiure. The syllables che, chi, whether in the beginning, or at the end of a word, are pronounced ke, Id: example cheru- b'mo, a cherubim; chiodo, a nail; giovmchi, heifers; pro- nounce kerubmo, kivdo, giovmki. b4 G, before 28 The ITALIAN PRONUNCIATION. G, before the vowels, a, o, u, and before consonants, is pronounced as in English: example, gabbia, a cage; gbbbo, hunchbacked; gusto, taste; grudo, a degree ; grido, a cry. G, before Use vowels e or i, as ge, gi, is pronounced as if there was a d before the g: example, gelo, frost ; giro, a turn : pronounce dgalo, dgiro. When two gg's come before tiie vowels e, f, the former g is pronounced as a d, and the latter as a g : for example, oggetto, an object; o^, to-day ; read odgtfto, odgh But as well in gP l0 , and g$r* f as in oggctio, and oggi,&c: we must not lean too hard on the d, but pronounce it so smoothly, as to render it ah nost imperceptible to the ear. W-hea after the syllable gi there is a vowel, as gia, gio, giu, the g must not be rounded at all, and thel' is pro- nounced like an English J consonant: for example/ gi- ordmo, givrno, giudioe, pronounce jardino, jcrno, job- dliche. G, -before an /, is melted into another /.• example, figUo, fbgllo, piglidre, read fill lo, follio, piUiure; except isegH- genza, negtitto, Ingltee, glbbo, and conglutinare, where the sound is the same as in English. - The syllables gna, gne, gni, gno, gnu, are pronounced as nnia, nnie, nni, tniio, nniu : for example, guadagnare, to gi:in ; agntllo, a lamb; ignudo, naked; incognito, un- known ; read guadannidre, anniello, inniudo, inconnito. In short gn, before a vowel, retains the same sound, as in the French words Espagne, Allemagne. The syllables ghe, ghi, are pronounced like gue, and gut, in the English words guest and guide ; as, botttghe, shops, sound bottcgue ; lubghi, places, sound lubgui. The letter h is never aspirated, nor pronounced at the beginning of words ; as, hbra y an hour ; ho, I have ; hu.rtta.no, humane. But, according to the modern or- thography, all those words are written without an h ; except the three persons singular, and the third person plural of the present indicative of the verb avere ; and tbis in order to distingush the verb ho from the sign of the vocative 6, or from o the conjunction : as likewise hui from ai the article, in the dative plural Thb ITALIAN PRONUNCIATION t§ plural masculine gender, at signbri, to the lords ; and, lastly, ha from the dative indefinite, a Pietro, or Pietri, to Peter ; and hdnno from anno, which signifies a year. The Italians never pronounce the letter h, and in their present practice they even omit it in writing, ex- cept when it happens to be preceded by a c or g, as in the words chidro, clear ; chidve, a key ; pidghe, wounds, &c. However, there are but very few words in which they make use of the letter h, for now they write ubmo, onbre, wnxno, &c. and not hubmo, honfae, humdno, &c. The letter j is not the same as the vowel i, as some would have it, but a real consonant, being written in a different manner ; and besides, of itself, it is incapable of forming a syllable ". example, ajuto, help; we do not say a-i-uto, but a-ju-to. This letter ought to be pro- nounced in the same manner as i in the French words voielle and bdionttte. N. B. The letter j is used at pre- sent in the beginning of words, which were formerly spelt with an h, followed by a vowel : example, jeri, instead of kltri, yesterday; jdrbpico foxhidrbpico, dropsi- cal, &c. It is likewise put in the room of y, which was formerly made use of at the end of words : for example, it was the custom to make the plural of studio, study; but now they write siudj, study, and studies ; senty, I felt ; but now stmtj. Is is, moreover, inserted in all words, where ihc-re are three successive vowels, in order to sepa- rate them: example, aiuto, help, now, ajuto, &c. The letter s, in the beginning of words, is pronounced as in English : for example salute, sole, sale, singoldre 9 servo, sbpra. So, in these words ; cosa, a thing; rbso % gnawed; must be pronounced like the first syllable of salute, that is to say, strong. The same may be said of all adjectives ending in 6so ; as gloribso, glorious ; vittoribso, victorious ; as well in the singular as in the plural, masculine and feminine. With regard to adjectives terminating in ese, and to words in use, the letter s must be pronounced as in the b 5 English 30 The ITALIAN PRONUNCIATION: English words, misery, desire, Sec. except fuso, a distaff where the letter s must be sounded, as in salirfe, Cos), in like manner, is pronounced cossi, that is, with a strong hissing, as if there were two ss.% and dwelling, upon the last. The Neapolitans say cousi, which pro- nunciation must be avoided. Pronounce then the letter s between two vowels, like as; as sa, se, si, so, read and pronounce them as if they were written za, ze, zi, zo; but in all words that have si added to them; s.s scrivesi, they write, s preserves its na- tural sound. Observe, that all other pronunciations of the letter s are condemned at Rome and Siena, which are the two cities where they speak the best Italian : and from thence came the proverb, lingua Toscana in bocca Rmndna. The syllable ti is pronounced tsi ; as natwne, gratia, p-ronounce natsibne, grutsia. But the modern Italians write those words, and the like, with a z, instead of the letter t ; as nazione, grazia, vizio, silcnzw, ike. In the following words, the syllable ti is pronounced hard; as simpatm, sympathy; natio, native, genuine; ma- lattia, distemper ; question?, question ; moitstia, trouble ; and a few verbs, as tUne, potiate, patiamo, patiate, which are to be learnt only by practice. Z is" pronounced three ways, like, as, like s, and like ts : the general rule is to pronounce it like ds in all word3 that are written in Italian and English with a z: for example, zona, a zone; zodtaco, the ^odiac ; Ldzaro, Lazarus ; gazttta, a gazette ; read dsona, dsodiaco, LZ- dsaro, and gadsttta. Z is pronounced also like ds in the following words; mho, or mezzo, the middle; rozzo, homely; zibttto, civet; z'fffera, 2l cypher ; zigrino, chagrin ; ztnzero, ginger. Take notice that both the single and double z are al- ways pronounced like ds, when they happen to come after the vowel e, as mezzo, middle; and after the vowel o t as rozzo, homely. Z is pronounced like s in safe, in all Words terminating m tnza ; as prudvnza, diligenza, pazitnza, &c. pronounce j)rud(nsa, ddigtnsa, patsiensa, &c. The THE ITALIAN PRONUNCIATION. 31 The same may be said in regard to words terminating in amen or in onza, and when the z follows the letter I : for example, ignorfmza, Magonza, pblzo, hoho, &c. Nay, we find some of these words written with an s : yet most people make use of the s. All the other z% single as well as double, are pronounc- ed like te: example, ^faizoUtto, a handkerchief; gen- tilezza, a genteel air ; pozzo, a well ; nozze; a wedding ; orazibne, prayer ; pronounce faisolttto, ge/itilttsa, pbtso, nptse, oratsione ; and be sure to dwell a little upon the sound of the t before s. The other consonants, b, d,f, I, m, ii, p, r, are pro- nounced as in English. Instead of k, we use ch ; instead ofph,f. The Italian v is pronounced as in^ English ; but it is not the same letter as the vowel w, as some pretend. See what has been said concerning j consonant, and apply the arguments to the present case. *k< Observe that when two vv's come between two vowels, we ought to pronounce only one of them. The Italians make use of two, to show that those verbs" a re de- rived from the Latin. Only you must mind to dwell somewhat longer upon the vowel which precedes the two it's. Hence it ought to be pronounced as if it were de- tached from the remainder of the word, as if they wrote a-venire, a-venlhio, instead of avvenire, avventizzio. We meet with some Italian words, which are written \$Sth two vv's, and yet are not of Latin origin ; as for instance, avvantaggio, avverare, &c. But I apprehend it is wrong to spell them after that manner, and that the right ortho- graphy is avantaggio, averare, &c. - b6 m *»* ITALIAN PRONUNCIATION. A Collection of Words and Syllables \ the most diffi- cult to be pronounced, T> EFOttE you read this collection, mind the pronun- "*^ ciation of the syllables, cia, cie, do, ciui see, scii gia, gic, gid, giu / gli, gtia, glio. Ce, ci, pronounce as che, chi, in cherry and chicle. Cicerone, ceci, cecitd, cenere, cena, cendre, cerchio, cibo, eittd, citdrt, accknto, baccio, ciascheduno, citlo, cioc, ci* iirma. Che, chi, pronounce he, hi. Che dite ? chefdte 1 che votcte 1 chi ceredte ? chi voltte? chi domanddte % Ge, gi, gli, prdnounce dge, dgi, Hi. Gesto,gcnio, geto 9 gintti giro, giudice, ma^gibre, leggid- dro, leggiddra, gibrno, zibvane, giiigno, figlio, figlia, pig- Hare; gionchiglia, fbglio, orgbglio,fdggio, mdggio. Gna, gne, gni, gno, gnu, pronounce nia, nie, ni, nio, niu, in one syllable; as we have already observed, wherl treating of the pronunciation of consonants. Bagndre, guadagtidre, Ugnd, ingegnero, magnjfico, p'tgno, Itgno, signbre, ingigno, igfiudo. Scia, scie, sci, scio, sciu,pionounce shia, shie, she, shio, skin. Sciatica, sciegliere, discifrdre, discibgliere, asciutto. Sd, se, si, so. Mind the pronunciation of salute, cbsa, rbsa, rbso, spbsd^ c4sa, virtuoso, cosh Ti, pronounce si. Natibne, ostinatibne, inclindtibne, gratia, giurisditibne, attibne. The present orthography of all those words and such like derived from the Latin, is with a z instead of t ; thus they write nazione, vhio, grdzia, &c. This is the most approved orthography, as we have already observed. U, pronounce oo. Tu, virtu, pugndre } pugno, mdti this, that, those, these, who, &c. Who, or which, in Italian quale, may be declined by the definite articles : for we say, il quale, and la quale, del quale, and delta quale, &c. The indefinite article may also be prefixed to all other sorts of nouns, as I have already observed : for we say» una libra di pane, a pound of bread; un capptllo di pdglia, a hat of straw ; una tdzza aV argenio, a cup of sil- ver ; un vestito di pdnno, a suit of cloth. If the indefinite article di, or. da, precedes a noun, begin- ning with a vowel, we must make an elision in the genitive and ablative, and use ad in the dative, as, nominative, An- tonio; genitive, d' Antonio ; dative, ad Antonio; accusa- tive, Antonio ; ablative, d' Antonio, or rather da Antonio, the better to distinguish the ablative from the genitive, which makes d' Antonio. fj* Observe, that in speaking of any part of the body, it is more elegant to make use of the indefinite than definite article: hence we say, mi trarraV dnima di cbrpo, he will tear my soul from my body ; mi toglie il libro di mdno, &c. he snatches a book out of my hand, fyc. The indefinite article is also put before infinitives, and signifies to ; as, it is time to speak, to sleep, to read, to study, to write, to love, to go; e tempo di parldre, di dormire, di Uggere, Of the ARTICLES. 41 leggere, di studidre, dl scrivere, d' amdre, d f anddre : but we make an elision when the verbs begin with a vowel ; as d' amare, d' andare. %* Note whenever you meet with of and to in Eng- lish, remember they are the indefinite articles ; and then you must make use of the indefinite article a or ad in Italian. Remarks on the Articles. First, TJJM or it before a verb is always expressed by lo : as, I see him or it, io lo vedo ; we know it, not lo sappidmo, I know it, io lo so. Secondly, Her or it before a verb is expressed by la : example, I know her, io la conbsco, I do not know her, non la conosco. Thirdly, Them before a verb is expressed by li for th« masculine, and by le for the feminine : example, to li vedo, or io le vedo, according to the gender. Fourthly, The words lo, la, li, le, must be always put after the adverb ecco, and also after the infinitives and gerunds ; as, there he is, eccolo ; there she is, eccol* ; there they are, eccoli for the masculine, and eccole for the feminine ; to see him, instead of saying, per lo vedere, we must say, per vederlo, because vedere is in the infinitive : in like manner, to express seeing him, we must not say, lo vedendo, but vedendolo, because vedendo is a gerund, and the Italian rule requires that these words lo, la, li, le, should always follow the infinitive and gerund, as also the word ecco, but never precede them. %? Remember, that I have been speaking of the words lo, la, li, le, and not of the articles lo, la, li, le, and that a little above I said also the words, lo, la, li, le, because these words lo, la, li, le, when they precede the verbs, are not articles, bnt pronouns relative. They are articles only, when they precede the nouns or pro- nouns. Fifthly, The preposition in is sometimes expressed in Italian by in; as, in Paris, in Parigij in France, in Francia ; in a chamber, in una camera ; in a fire, in ttn fuoco ; in all the earth, in tutta la terra ; in.a glass, in un bicchierre ; in a bottle, in una botttglia* Whea 42 Of the ARTICLES* When the preposition in is followed by the article the or by a pronoun possessive, as, in the, in my, in thy, in his ; we must render it by nel, nello, nella, nei, negli, nel mio, nel tuo, nel suo : example, in the garden, nel giar- dino, and not in il giardmo. In the spirit, nello spirito, and not in lo spirito : the ancients made use of in lo and in la. Come in lo specchio il sol, non altrimente, La dbppia fera dhiti^o vi raggibva. And as for the feminine, we find in Petrarch, Ma hen ti prego in la terza sfera. II dl sesto d' April in I' bra prima. We say, nello spirito, because spirito begins with an s followed by a consonant. In the bouse, nella casa. In the gardens, nei or ne giardini. In the iires, nei, or ne fubchi. In the spirits, negli spirit L In the houses, nelle ease. In my garden, nel mio giardino. In thy book, nel tuo libro. In his bed, nel suo letto. In her chamber, nella sua camera. In his books, ne' subi libri. In her chambers, nelle sue camere. When in precedes the pronouns possessive of the mas- culine gender, in the plural, it is expressed by ne' with an apostrophe, and not by nei ; as, in my book, ne' miei libri; at least this is the common practice. Sixthly, You see by these examples that in the is ex- pressed in Italian by nel or nello; in the feminine by nSlla. Nel is placed before the same nouns that we put the ar- ticle il, and in the plural it makes nei or ne', in the. Nello is put before the same nouns that we put the ar- ticle lo, and in the plural it makes negli. Nella is put before the same nouns as the article la, and in the plural it makes nelle. We may express in by in, when it is before a pro- noun possessive feminine, by transposing the pronoun possessive at the end of the phrase ; as, in my chamber, or a pro- 's; . coi, cipe, \ Oethe ARTICLES. 43 hi camera mia ; in your house, in cdsa vostra ; in her shop, i>i bottega sua ; but this rule is only. for feminine nouns, and not masculine. Seventhly, When after the preposition with, which in Italian is expressed by con, we find the article th noun possessive, as, with the, with r we must not say, con il, con lo, con. la, con gli, colle: example, with the prince, coi ]/r not con il principe. Willi the hand, colla memo. With the scholar, collo scblare. Willi the princes, coi prmcipi. With the princesses, colle principesse. With the scholars, con gli scolari. With my book, col mio libro. With my pen, colla mia pinna. With your friends, co' vostri amid. With my books, co 1 miei libri. Col makes the plural coi and co'. Collo makes con gli ; colla makes colle. Nevertheless, when the following words begin with the letter s and another consonant, it is more elegant to write con lo and con gli ; thus you will say, con lo stride, con lo scholar e t con gli studi ; and coll or coV when the word begins with a single consonant, or with a vowel. Eighthly, When the preposition with is followed by a pronoun possessive, and this by a noun of quality, or kin- dred ; as, with your majesty, with your highness, with your excellency, with his brother, with her mother, with her sister: with must then be rendered by cow, as, con vostra rnaestd,con sua alihza, con vostra eccellvnza, con suofrdtel- lo, con sua madre, consua sorella, without using the article. \* Observe, we may also make use of co/ and colla, by transposing the pronouns possessive after the noun, and say colla maestd v6stra, coll' eccellhtza sua, col fratello suo, colla madre sua, &c. Ninthly, If the pronouns possessive are in the plu- ral, then we must express with by co' for the masculine, and by colle for the feminine : example, with my brothers, co' miei fratelli, and not con inieifralelli\ with my 441 * Of the NOUNS. my sisters, colle mie s&relle, and not con mie sorelle: if you have a mind to insert the article, you must use the same transposition, and say, coifratelli misi, coi parent i vbstri, colle sorelle tue, colic mddri nbstre, &c. %* Note, that the ancient authors, and some modern ©nes say, con il t con la, &c. CHAP. II. Of NOUNS. 'T'HE Italian nouns have but five terminations, viz. those of the five vowels, a, e, i, o, u. They have but two genders, the masculine and the femi- nine. The Italian nouns have no variation of cases, like the Latin; and it is the article only, that distinguishes the case: example, nom. il signore; gen. del signore; dat. al signore; ace. il signore ; voc. 6 signore; abl. dal signbre. Nom. plur. i signbri; gen. del signbri ; dat. ai signbri, &C. \* Take notice as a general rule, that all masculine nouns make their plural in i ; example, ilpdpa, the pope, t pdpi; It padre, the father, i padri; il libido, the book, t libri, &c. Of Nouns ending in a. If^OUNS ending in a are feminine, and form their plural in e; as, la cdsa t the house ; le case, the houses; ia chiesa, the church ; le chitse, the churches ; la carrbzza, the coach ; le carrbzze, the coaches. Exceptions.— First, All nouns ending in ca and ga, have an h in the plural between the c ot g and the final vowel, to avoid the harshness of sound; as, la mdnica, the sleeve, h m&niche ; la pidga, the wound, le pidgke, Secondly, Of the NOUNS. 45 Secondly, Nouns ending in Italian in t(), and in Eng- lish in ty, never change their termination in the plural ; as, la pur ita, le paritc), purity; la castita, le castita, chas- tity, S)C. * # * Yet observe, that those nouns are syncopated or shortened, and their real termination is in ade or ate, ac- cording to the most ancient poets. In the plural they change their termination into i ; so we say, beltade or heltate in the singular, and beltadi or beltati in the plural. I do not remember to have ever seen these nouns written in the plural with a t. Though they make use of the termi- nation in ade, yet it is better and more usual to say bontd than bontade, and generosita, than generositdde, &c. Thirdly, Nouns masculine ending ih a, form their plu- ral in i, as papa, papi; prof eta, prof eti. We must except potesta in the masculine , which signi- fies a power or state, and retains in the plural the same ter- mination ; for we say, tutt' i potesta uniti, all the powers united. I say in the masculine, because in the feminine, when this word denotes capacity or ability^ it follows th« general rule. Of Nouns ending in e. A LL Nouns ending in e, whether masculine or femi- nine, substantives or adjectives, form their plural in i ; example, il padre, the father; ipddri, fathers ; la madrt, a mother; le mddri, the mothers: prudent e s prudenti, prudent. Exceptions. — First, Mille, a thousand, which makes in the plural mila. Secondly, These five nouns, re, a king ; specie, a sort ; superficie, a superficies ; effigie, an effigy ; Vesequie, a fune- ral; which have no change of termination in the plural; for we say, il re, i re ; le specie, la specie ; la superficie, le superficie; Vejfigie, Veffigie; le esequie, leesequie: without C curtailing 4,6 Of the NOUNS. curtailing the article of the two last nouns in the plural to distinguish it from the singular, /' effigie, Vestquie. Observe that we seldom make use of the word esequie in the singular. I have taken no notice here of the noun rtquie, repose, coming from the Latin word requies ; because I never saw an instance where it was used ill the plural. However, it would admit of no variation in the plural more than re, &c. Rules for Jin ding out the Gender of Nouns in e. First, J^OUNS ending in me are masculine: example, il costume y a custom ; il flume, a river ; il rdme, brass ; il vbrme, a worm. There are two feminine nouns in me, viz. la fame, hun- ger, and la speme, hope. Secondly, there are but four feminine nouns in re ;. viz. la fibre, a fever ; la mddre, a mother ; la tbrre, a tower ; la pblvere, dust. All the nouns in ore are masculine : as il fibre, a flower; il colore, heat; il furore, rage ; lo splendor e, splendor; il more, the heart ; il predicatbre, a preacher. There are four nouns in re of both genders, viz. il and la car cere, a prison; il and la centre, ashes; il and lafbl- gore, lightning; //and la lepre, a hare. Thirdly, The Italian nouns ending in ine, ione, and one, are some masculine and some feminine, as, Vbrdine, order; la gr Undine, hail; laprigibne, a prison; ilbdstbne, a stick; we say, il fme, when we take it for aim or design; and la fine, when we mean the end; though in the latter signification it is usual also to say, il fine and la fine. Fourthly, There are but two nouns in nte, feminine ; to wit, la gtnt.e, a nation, and la mvnte, the mind : all the other nouns ending in nte are masculine : as il dhite, a tooth ; il pbnte, a bridge; il mcmie, a mountain; il gigdnte, a giant, &c. We are soeaking here only of nouns-sub- stantive, but not of adjectives; There Op the NOUNS. 4r There are three nouns in nte that have two genders; viz. il and la f ante, a servant, il and lafronte, the forehead ; il and lafonte, a fountain. Fifthly, The other different terminations in e keep the same gender, as in French aud Latin : example, il pesce, fish; la voce, a voice; la croce, across; illdtte, miik; la lode, praise : except, La siepe, a hedge ; la gregge, a flock or herd. We say likewise il gregge, in the masculine. rpHE Of Nouns in i. Italian language has hut seventeen nouns termi- nated in i ; they are the same in the plural as in the singular, and are distinguished by the articles ; To wit, il di, the day, i d), the days, il Lunedt, Monday, i Lunedi. il Martedl Tuesday, i Martedh il Mercord), Wednesday, i Mercordi. il Giovedi, Thursday, i Gi&vedt. U Venerd), Friday, t Venerd). la dibcesi, a diocese, le dibcesi. il barbagianni, an owl, i barbagiannu r ecclissi, an eclipse, le ecclissi. V estasi, an ecslacy, gli estasi. la yerifrasi, a periphrasis, le perifrasi. V enfasi, an emphasis, le enfasi. la metambrfosi, a metamorphosis, le metamorfosi. la crisi, a crisis, le nisi. la thi, a thesis, le lesi. la Genesi, Genesis, un pari, such a one, i & le pari. This last noun is of all genders and numbers; and we say, u?i pari vvsfro, such a man as you ; una pari vbstra, such a woman as you. Genesi has no plural, and is of all genders- In Dante we meet with to Genesi, but the generality of good writers say la Genesi c 2 There 48 Of the NOUNS. There are also some proper names in i, as, Giovanni, Parigi, Ndpoli; and the numeral nouns, as, died, undid, dbdici, tredid, quatlbrdici, quindid, sedici, vtnti. Of the Nouns in o. C\Y all the nouns in o, as well substantive as adjective, there are but very few feminine; la memo, and I'eco, are of this gender. Generally speaking the rest are mas- culine, and make their plural in i: for example*, ilfraUllo, a brother ; i fratelli, brothers : il fazzoletto, a handker- chief; i fazzoletti : la mono, le mdni ; ubmo, a man, makes ubmini in the plural. %* Note, that the nouns substantive in aro frequently change their termination into aio : for we say, Genndro and Gennaio, January. Febrdro, and Febraio, February. Calzoldro and calzoldio, a shoemaker. Mortar o and niortdio, a mortar. There are some nouns in o that end more elegantly in the plural in a than in i, and then they are feminine in the plural ; they are as follow : I' anello, le an'ella, the rings. il brdecio, le brdecia, the arms. il budello, le budella, the guts. il calcdgno, le calcdgna, the heels. il cerchio, le cerchia, the hoops. il ctglio, le ciglia, the eyebrows. il cbrno, le coma, the horns. U dito, le dita, the fingers. il ditello, le ditella, the armpits. il filo, lefila, the threads. il frutto, lefrxdta, fruit. il gesto, le gesta, actions, feats. il grido, le gr'ida, the cries. il guscio, le gusda, the shells. il ginbechio, le ginbechia, the knees. il labro, le Idbra, the lips. il lenzublo, le lenzubla, the sheets. il tegnc, Of the NOUNS. 4-9 il legtiOf le Ugna, the sticks. il melo, le m'ela, the apples. il membro, le membra, the members. il tnuro, le miira, the walls. il miglidio, le miglidia, thousands. il miglio, le miglia, miles. V orecehio, le orecchia, the ears. V bsso, le bssa, the bones. il pdio, le pdia, pairs. il pbmo, le pbma, apples. il pugno, le pugna, fists. lo stdio, le stdia, the bushels. il riso, le rka, laughters. V ubvo, le ubva, the eggs. il rubbio, le riibhia, the measures, it vestigio, h vestigia, •the footsteps. Nouns ending in co and go, of two syllables, take an h in the plural to avoid a harsh pronunciation : example, il fubco, the fire, i fubchi, the fires ; il lubgo, the place, i liibghi, the places. Two are excepted. llpbrco, a hog ; iporci, hogs : il Greco, Greek ; i Greet, Greeks. » The other nouns in co and go, of more than two sylla- bles, do not take an h in the plural : as, amko, amici, friends ; domestic o, domestici, domestics; canbnico, canbnici, ca- nons; cattblico, cattblici, catholics ; medico, medici, phy- sicians; mendko, mendlci, beggars. The following words are excepted. Albergo, alMrghi, dwellings. Antko, antkhi, ancients. Astrblogo, astrologer, makes astrbloghi "andastrologL In like manner mbnaco, a monk, forms in the plural mb- nachi, and mbnaci. Antko, antkhi, the ancients. Beccafko, beccaficki, beccafigos. BifblcO, bifblchi, labourers. Catafdlco, catafdlchi, scaffolds.. Didlogo, didloghi, dialogues.. C a Fia~ 50 Of the NOUNS. Fiamriigo, Fiaminghi, Flemings. Recrproeo, reciproclti, reciprocals. Siniscalco, siniscalchi, stewards. Tedesco, Tedtsch^Gemvdns. Trajjico, trdjfichi, tradings. %* Some authors are generally for retrenching the final o, in the words ending in io, to form their plural. They are in the right, if the final io makes but one syllable; as ba- ch, baci, kisses; figlio,figli, sons; saggio, saggi , sages ; bcchie, bcchi, eyes: but if the final io happens to be a dissyllable, then there must be a long j m the plural; as natw, native, in the plural we ought to write notj. In the other examples above produced, the reason why we do not put the long j, is to avoid the harsh pronuncia- tion which would follow from the junction of two its. And yet the long j is sometimes admitted in order to avoid any ambiguity in the sense. And for this reason we write tempj, temples, and principj, principles, which otherwise would be confounded with tempi, times, an4 principi, princes. Nouns ending in cio, chio, gio, and glio, generally make but one syllable of io, and their plural by changing io into i : as impaccio, trouble, implied ; bechio, an eye, bcchi ; pdggio, a page, paggi ; figlio, a leaf,fbgli. Of Nouns in u. r T'HE Italian language has but very few nouns in w; they do not change their termination in the plural : ex- ample : . la grit, a cane, le gru. gioventu, youth, le giaventii. la servitii, servitude, le servitu. la tribu, a tribe, le tribii. la virtu, virtue, le virtu. la schiavitii. slavery, le, schiavitii. Rem aria Of the NOUNS. 51 Remarks on the Nouns, *,* When the letter / is found in Latin and French after Ub,p, we must change I into /. Example, fieur, fibre; Wane, bumcho; blanche, bidnca ; piein, pltno ; temple, ttmpio ; plumb, piombo. %* Note, the Italians never put a c or p before a t, but the p and c are changed into i : example, doctus, dot to ; doctor, dbttore ; act, at to ; aptitude, attitudine ; adoption, adozione. Ph is changed into/: example, philosopher^/t/so/b ; x is changed into s or ss, and sometimes into c ; as Xerxes, Strse ; Alexander, Alessdndro ; excellent, eccelltnU. Of the ' Augmentative* . T HE Italians "have this peculiarity in their language, that they can augment or diminish the signification of the nouns, by only adding certain syllables to \\\t end oi them, which they' call augmentatives or diminutives. Augmentatives are words which by the increase o( a syllable, increase also in their signification. There are two sorts of augmentatives ; the "first termi- nated in one, to express any thing great and large ; as, cdp- pello, a hat, change the last Jetter o into one, and you make- it cappellbne, a great large hat ; said, a hall, change a into one, and you will find salbne, a great large hall ; frate, a friar, jratbne, a fat overgrown friar ; casa, a house, casbne, a great house ; libro, a book, librene, a huge large book: and so of the rest. %* Observe, that the augmentatives ending in one are always masculine, though the nouns from whence they are formed be feminine ; example, una porta, unportone; la camera, il earner one, The other augmentatives are formed by changing the last letter of the word into accio, for the masculine, and into accia for the feminine: but then these augmentatives declare the thing somewhat contemptible ; as cappello } a hat, cap- pelldccio, a great us-lv hat. c 4 Sdla, 32 Of the NOUNS, $ un0 > una, ditoi, & five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen, fifteen, sixteen, seventeen, eighteen, nineteen, twenty, twenty- one, twenty-two, twenty- three, &c. thirty, forty, fifty, sixty, seventy, eighty, ninety, a hundred, two hundred, three hundred, a thousand, two thousand, a million, a tenth, a dozen, a score, a thirtieth. due, tre, qudttro, cinque, set, sette, otto, nbve, died, undid, dbdici, tredici, quat- tbrdici,qiimdici,sedici,dieci- setie, or dcciasette, died ot- to, or dida-otto, dicci-nove r or dicw-nbve, venti, vent- uno, ve?iti-iliie, vertti-tre,&;c* trtnta, quardnta, cinqudn- ta, sessdnta, sett ant a, ot- tdnta, nondiita, cento, du- ctule, trecento, mille, \ due mila, millibne, or migUbne, una decina, una dozzma, una ventina, una trentina. Ordinal JTIRST, second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, se- venth, eighth, ninth, tenth, eleventh, twelfth, thir- teenth, fourteenth, fif- teenth, sixteenth, seven- teenth, twentieth, one-and- twentieth, thirtieth, forti- eth, fiftieth, sixtieth, se- ventieth, eightieth, nine- tieth, the hundredth, the thousandth, the last. Nouns. pRI'MO, seecndo, terzo? quarto, quint o, sesto, set- timo, ottdvo, nono, decimo, undecimo, duodecimo, deci- mo-terzo, dedmo-qudrto, de- cimo-qumtOidecimo-sestOyde- cimo-settimo, decimo-otiavo, dtcinio-nbno,ventesi'mo y ven- tesirrto prrno, irentesime, quarantesimo, cinquantss i- mo, sessantesimo, settantesi- mo, oiiantesimo, nonantesi- mo, centesimo, millesimOy ultimo. 58 Of the NOUNS. The proportional numbers are semplice, dbppio, tripli- catOy quadruplicate, centuplicato, single, double, three- fold, fourfold, a hundredfold. The distributive nouns are ad uno ad uno, one by one : a due a due, two by two, &c. In French and English all ordinal numbers may be formed into adverbs, but in Italian they have only primi- eramenie, and secondariamente. To express thirdly, fourthly, &c. they say in terzo luogo, in qudrto luogo, &c. in the third place, in the fourth place, &c. A Method (for those who understand FRENCH) to learn a great many ITALIAN IVords in a short time. nrHOUGH Italian is said to be corrupted Latin, yet it has a greater conformity and resemblance with the French than with any other language ; for the French words, with a very little variation, are all Ita- lian, as may be seen by the following examples; only we must observe, that the French syllable cha is always expressed in Italian by ca, rejecting h : example, Charbon, chariie, chastete, chapon, charette, chandelle, chapeau ; the Italians say, Carbbne, caritd^ castitdfcapbne, earretta, candtla, cappello. To learn a great number of Italian words in a short time, we must observe the following rules. FRENCH Terminations that end in ITALIAN in a. French words ending in ancc ; as Constance, vigilance* he. in Italian end in anza fcost&rtza, vigilanza, &c. Those in ence in French ; as clemence, diligence, prudence, end in Italian in enza ; clembnza, diligenza, prudenza. Agne makes agna; montagne, montagna ; campagne, campagna. Ogne makes ogna; Catalogue, Catalbgna; charogne, carbgna. Ie makes ia ; comedie, comedia ; here you lean the ac- cent upon the e, and not upon the i as in French, poesie, pocsia. OlEE Of the NOUNS. 59 Oire makes orla ; gloire, gloria ; victoire, vittbria. Te makes t a ; purete, purita ; liberalite, liberalitd. See what has been said in the exceptions of nouns termi- nating in a. Ure makes ura ; avanture, ventura; imposture, imposturq* FRENCH Terminations ending in ITALIAN in e. Al, ale ; cardinal, cardinale ; mal, mule. Af.le, evole ; charitable, caritatevole ; honorable, onore- vole ; louable, lodevole. Ant, ante; vigilant, vigiUtnte ; amant, amdnte. Ent, adjective, ente ; prudent, prudente; diligent, dili- gente. Eur, ore: honneur, onwe ; chaleur, colore. Ier, iere ; cavalier, cavalitre ; picquier, picchiere. Ion, ione ; union, unibne ; portion, porzibne. Ison, gione : raison, ragibne ; prison, prigibne. On, one; charbon, carbbne; canon, canbne ; baron, ba- rbne. Ont, onte; front, fronte ; pont, ponte . Ois, names of nations, ese; Francois, Fruncese; Hollan- dois, Olandese ; Anglois, Inglese. Ude, udine ; inquietude, inquietudine. Ulier, olare ; regulief, regoldre ; pzxlicnMer, particolare* FRENCH Terminations ending in 17 ALLAN in o. Age, aggio; page, pdggio ; equipage, equipdggio. A in, ano ; vilain, villano ; humain, umano. AiN and Ten, names of nations, ano and mo; Romain, Romano; Italien, Italidno; Napolitain, Napolitdno ; Parisien, Parigino. Aire, ario; salaire, saldrw; temeraire, temerdrio. Eau, elh; chapeau, capcllo; manteau, mant'tllo. Ent, substantive, ento ; sacrement, sacramento. Eux, oso ; genereux, generuso ; graoieux, grarMso. In, ino ; vin, vino ; jardin, giardino. I F, ivo ; actif, attivo ; passif, passivo. C, co ; pore, pbrco ; Tare, Tiireo ; Grec, Greco ; escroc, scrbeco, doubling the letter c. Change 60 Of the NOUNS. Change of Terminations of VERBS and PARTICIPLES. Er, are ; aimer, amare ; parler, parlare. Endre, endere ; prendre, prendere ; rendre, rendere. Is, he; partir, partire ; sentir, sentire. The participles in t make ato; aime, amuto; orne, orndto ; chante, cantuto ; parle, parldio. The particles in i make tYo; dormi, dormito; senti, sentUo ; pati, patito ; menti, mentito. There are a great many Italian words that have no manner of analogy or resemblance with the French ; as h ciglia, the eyebrows; fazzoleito, a handkerchief; gbbbo, crooked ; chiamare, to call ; scherzdre, to play ; and many others, which hinder these rules from being general. Other Terminations of the ITALIAN Nouns, derived from the Latin. The Latin ablatire generally makes the Italian no- minative; as, colore, onhre, petihic, vcrgine. The natural nominatives change their lalt syllable intoa; as sacerdotium, sacerdbzio, &c. But if the last syllable of the nominative begins with a consonant, the consonant continues, and the vowel o is added to it : examples, tempus, say tempo ; cornu, corno ; retaining the p and n, which are the first letters of the last syllable of the nominative tempus, tempo, and the nominative cornu, corno. The neutral nominatives in en drop the letter n ; as nomen, nbme; flumen, flume; changing also the letter I into i, as hath been already observed, where we treated of nouns ending in u. The greatest part of the Latin infinitives, of the se- cond and third conjugation, make the Italian infinitives ; as, dolere, tenere, solere, tcmere, vedere, credere, leggere, dijendere : but the e } in those words which are accented, is pronounced in a different manner, being the close f, like that in the French word malgre. Of the PRONOUNS. €l . CHAP. II. Of PRONOUNS. HPHE pronouns are either personal, conjunctive, pes sessive, demonstrative, interrogative, relative, or im~ proper. Of Pronouns Personal. HTHE pronouns personal are io and noi for the first person, and they serve for the masculine and femi- nine. Ikt and voi, for the second, and these serve also for the masculine and feminine. Egli for the third person of the masculine gender, and it makes eglino in the pluml. Ella or m&z (because lui for the musculine, and let for the feminine, are never used in the nominative) for the third person in the feminine gender form in the plural elleno; but esse is preferable. Hence we never say lui or tee mi dia una presa di tobacco, give me a pinch of snuff. But signbre, V. S. or essa, or la di lei persona mi dia una presa di tobacco. The pronouns personal are declined by the article inde» finite, di, a, da. The Declension of Pronouns Personal First Person. Sing. Nom. I io. Gen. of me, di me. Dat. to me, a me, or ml. Ace. me, me, or mi. Abl. from me, dame. Plur. Nom. we, noi. Gen. of us, di noi. Dat. to us, a noi, or ci. Ace. us, noi or ci. Abl. from or by us, da noi. With €2 Of the PRONOUNS. With me, is rendered by con me, or mico ; me after the imperatives, is expressed by mi ; as speak to me, parla* iemi ; tell me, ditemi ; send me, mandattmi ; write to mc, scrivetenii. Us, after the imperative, is rendered by cj; example, tell us, diteci: give us, dated; show us, mostrnttci. . In these examples gu is not a pronoun personal, but con- junctive as you will see hereafter. Second Pe rson. Sing. Nom. thou, iu. Gen. of thee, di te. Dat. to thee, a te, or ti. Ace. thee, te, or ti t Abi. from thee, da ie^ Plur. Nom. you or ye, voi. Gen. of you, di voi, Dat. to you, a voi, or vi Ace. you, voi, or ti. Abl. from you, da voi. With thee, is rendered by con te, or teco, with you; after imperatives, by vi, and not by voi ; as, be you contented, content&tevi ; show yourself, mostratevi : hide yourself, nascondetevi : dress yourself, vestitevi; thee, or thyself, is expressed after imperatives by ti ; as, most rati, show thyself. 1 Third Person. Fer the masculine. Sing. Nom. he, egli. Gen. of him, di lui. Dat. to him, a lui, or gli. Ace. him, lui. Abl. from him, da lui. Plur. Nom, they, eglino. Gen. of them, di loro. Dat. to them, a loro, or loro. Ace. them, loro. Abl. from them, da loro. Re* Op the PRONOUNS. €3 *i* Remember that the pronoun him, or to him, when joined to a verb, is always rendered in Italian by gli, and her, by le, as you will see in the pronouns con- junctive. Third person. Feminine. Sing. Nom. she, ella, or esse. Gen. of her, di lei. Dat. to her, a lei, or le. Ace. her, lei, or la. Abl. from or by her, da hi. Plur. Nom. they, elleno, or esse. Gen. of them, di loro. Dat. to them, a loro, or loro Ace. them, loro, or le. Abl. from or by them, da loro. Though there are instances of lui, lei, and loro, being used hi the nominative, .yet it is better to say egli pdrla, ella cdnia, than lui pdrla, lei cdnta ; because lui is not commonly used in the nominative, but in other cases, in which it is better to make use of lui, lei, and loro, than of egli, ella, eglino, elleno. We therefore say, for him, per lui ; for her, per hi ; for them, per loro ; with him, con lui, or seco ; with her, con lei, or seco ; with them, con loro. Of the Pronoun se, one s self, or himself. There is another pronoun personal, that serves in- differently for the masculine and feminine : this is se, one's self; it has no nominative. Gen. of one's self, himself, or herself, di se. Dat. to one's self, S$G. a se, or si. Ace. one's self, fyc. se, or si. Abl. from or by one's self, 8fc. da se. It is often joined with the pronoun stesso or stessa, and then it is more elegant: per se stesso, by, or for himself; per se stessa, for herself. r Of 64, Of the PRONOUNS. 6f Pronouns Conjunctive, npHE pronouns conjunctive bear a great resem- blance to the pronouns personal: the pronouns personal are, /, thou, he, we, ye, they. There are seven pronouns conjunctive, viz. to me, or me ; to thee, or thee; to himself, or himself; to herself, or herself ; to him, or him; to us, or us ; to you, or you ; to them, or them. They are expressed in Italian by mi, ti, si, gli, or le, ci, w t loro. It is easy to remember, that the pronouns conjunc- tive, me, thee, one's self or himself; to him, them 4 , or to them, fyc, are always rendered in Italian by mt t ti^ ti, gli, or le, loro : example, that pkases mi, q uedo mi pm§» God sees thee, Dio ti vide. The sun rises, il sole si Uva% I will tell biin, io gli dirb. I will tell her, io le dirt). I promise them, promitto loro ; as well for the mascu* line as the feminine. %'* The pronoun conjunctive loro h always put after the verb in Italian: as, you will tell them, dirtte loro. The pronoun conjunctive, to him, is expressed in Italian by gli, and to her, by le: example, I speak, to him, io gli pdrlo ; I speak to her, io le pdrlo. We like- wise make use of gli in the plural, to signify loro ; but then observe, that you are to put gli before the finite mood ; as, io gli ho initso dire cose mirabili ; and lor o after the infinite mood, as ho veduto far loro cose mirabili. JSf. B. But gli for loro is seldom used in prose. %.* The pronouns we and ye are expressed in Italian by Hoi and mi, when they precede the verbs whose ac- tion they make, and to whieh they are nominatives ; as, we pray, noi preghidmo ; you sing, voi cantate. We is the nominative of to pray, of which it makes the action ; and so ye is the nominative of to sing : then we and^e are pronouns personal. *#* When we and ye, in Italian noi and voi, precede verbs to which they are not the nominative, and there is. Of the PRONOUNS. 65 is some other word that goes before and makes the action of the verb, then they are pronouns conjunctive, and must be expressed by ci and vi, in English us and you : exam- ple, the master speaks to us, il maestro ci parla, and not not parla: because the master makes the action, and is the nominative to the verb. In like manner, to render in Italian, we speak to you, we must say, not vi parliamo, and not noi voi parliamo ; because we is the nominative, and makes the action of the verb, and not you, which in- stead of making it, receives it. Yet we may say, il ma- estro parla a noi, noi parliamo a voi. \* One of the chief difficulties to the learners of the Italian language, is to express the pronouns conjun- tive mi, ti, ci, gli, ci, vi, when tuey are followed by the particles lo, la, li, le or ne. To clear up this matter, you must express them here as underneath, changing the letter i of the pronoun conjunctive into e; as to say to me of it instead of mine, you must say mene ; in like manner, instead of mi lo, you are to say melo, pronouncing the two syllables short. And the same is to be observed in all the following pronouns conjunctive. * T r. C it, to me, melo, mas. Me, mi ; me of).' . , £ .. < it, to me, mela, rem. (.them, to me, meli, mele, m. &. f. rru .. ., rCn, to thee, telo, mas. Thee, ti ; thee of J ..* .. ., •' . , ■'■ 1 it tene ) ' ° ' ' m * Ctheni, to thee, teli, tele, m. and f. himself, selo, mas. himself, sela, fem. himself, seli, sele, in. and f. rr< u: 7 - . C it, to him, g-lielo, mas. To him, %li, to ) . ' . . ■ te /. 7 r i • c I i- \ it, to him, gliela, fem. him or it, grliene. ),,' , • fe ,. 7 . ' 7 . , « ~ & C them, to him, glieh, gliele, m. & f. T r . c -. ( it, to us, celo, mas. Ls, ci : us of it, j - * . , ' c \ < it, to us, ce la, fem. cene. tt. ,/. , • fit, to hu Himself, se ; him- ) ..' . ,. ie c •* % »t, to hi! self of .t,^. ^^ em> to hil him, gli, tojj' of it,«-/iene. "^ of it, j i'- ' < it, to us, t them, to us, l, vi; you offc * J "' it, vene. 1 '*• fJ w - Cthem, to you, «*,*'.*» rfte *** S&ST: cefl, cele, m. & f. re/o, mas. vela, fem. »«//, t>e&, m, k f. To 66 Of the PRONOUNS. To them, loro ; to them of it, ne loro ; putting always loro after the verb. If the verbs are in the infinitive, or the gerund, the pronouns conjunctive must be transposed ; as to tell me, per dirmi ; to tell me of it, per dirmene ; to give it to me, per darmelo ; in telling me it, dicendomclo ; to give it to us, per darcelo ; so as to make, it as it were, but one word of it, remembering that we must always pro- nounce short melo, mene, telo, tene, celo, celi, cele, and the rest after the same manner. Other examples concerning the pronoun conjunctive loro, them. I promise them, prometto loro. To promise them some, per promttterne loro. In promising them some, promettundone loro. After imperatives, and before infinitives and gerunds, the pronouns are never personal, but conjunctive ; ex- ample, give us, dated ; to see you, per vedervi ; in speaking to you, parldndovi. After verbs, when a question is asked, the pronouns are personal, and not conjunctive : example, have you 1 avfte voi? shall we sing ? canter emo noil The poets always use ne, instead of ci, to express the pronoun conjunctive us, as we may see irr Guarini's Pastor Fido. Perche, irudo destin, ne drsunisci tu, s' amor ne strtnge? E tu perche ne str'mgi, se ne parte il destin, perfido amort ? Why, cruel fate, dost thou part us, if love unites us ? And thou, perfidious love, why dost thou unite us, if fate parts us. Of Pronouns Possessive. T H , E E English have no article in the nominative be- fore the pronouns possessive, but the Italians have ; as my, il mio, la tnta, fern. Plur. i miti, le mie, fern. There are six pronouns possessive, viz. /'/ mio, il tiio, il suo, il nostra, il vbstro, il loro : my, thy, bis, our, your, their : in the plural they make t mki, i tuci, i suci, i nostri, i vbbtri, i loro. The Op the PRONOUNS. 67 The feminine pronouns possessive are, la mta, la tua, la sua, fa nostra, la vostra, la 16? : in the plural, le ink, le tue y le sue, le nostre, le vbstre, le loro. Loro, as you see, never changes, but is always loro ; it is put before the masculine as well as the feminine, before the singular as well as the plural number. The pronouns possessive are declined by the definite ar- ticle il for the masculine, and by la for the feminine. To render them easy to decline, I shall give the follow- ing example. Sing. Norn, my book, il mio libro, Gen. of my book, del mio libro. Dat. to my book, al mio libro. Abl. from or by my book, dalmio libro. Plur. Norn, my books, i miei libri. Gen. of my books, de* miei libri. Dat. to my books, a' miei lilrri. Abl. from or by my books, da' miei libri. Decline all the other masculines after the same man- ner, and the feminiues by the article la ; as, la mia serva, della mia serva, alia mia serva, dalla mia serva : le mie serve, delle mie serve, alle mie serve, dalle mie serve. \* Note, you must not use the definite article when the pronouns possessive precede nouns of quality 7 , but the indefinite articles di, a, da: example. Your majesty, vostra maesta. Of your majesty, di vostra maesta. To your majesty, a vostra maesta. From your majesty, da vostra maesta. %/ ;: Remember also, that names of kindred conform to this rule ; thus we say, mio padre, a mio padre, da" mio padre ; mia mddre, di mia madre, a mia mddre, da mia mddre ; mio fraiello, di mio j'rateUo, a miofratello, da mio fratello ; inia sorella, di mia sorella, a mia sorella, da mia sorella ; mio marito, &c. %* From the above examples it appears, that nouns declined by the iudeiinite ariicie have no article in the nominative. If the nouns of ..quality or relation be in the plural, we must make use of the detinite article i or le, de or delle : example. Your &S * Of the PRONOUNS. Your brothers, i vbstrifratelli, or ifratelli vbstrL Your sisters, It vbstre sorelle, or le sorelle vbstre. Of your brothers, de' vbstrifraUlli, or de'fratelli vbstrL Of your sisters, delle vbstre sorelle. To your brothers, a' vbstrifratelli. To your sisters, alle vbstre sorelle. Their highnesses, le altezze loro, or le loro altezxe. Of their highnesses, delle altezze loro. To their highnesses, alle altezze loro. Though the definite article" sometimes occurs in ancient ■and modern authors before nouns of kindred in the singu- lar number, yet we ought not to imitate them ; according to the old proverb, tu vivendo bonos, scribendo sequerc peritos. Take notice, that when the pronoun possessive is ac- companied by a pronoun demonstrative, they do not put the article in the nominative. We do not say, il questo mio Jibro, but questo mio Ubro. In all other cases they make use of the indefinite article : thus they say, di questo vbs- tro Ubro, a quella nostra casa, &c. Of Pronouns Demonstrative. HTHE pronouns demonstrative are the following: this, that, these, those. They are called pronouns demonstrative, because they serve to point out or demonstrate any thing or person ; as, this book, tliat man, that woman, &c. They are expressed in Italian after the following man- ner : This man or thing, Questo Sf questi, or quelle, quel $f quegli, colui, costiii. This woman or thing, Questa, quella, or colei. He, or that thing, Quel, or quello, or colui. She, or that thing, fyc. Quella, or colei. This, fem. questa, questa-qut, costei. That, fern, quella, quella-la, colei* This thing, questo or cio, These Of the PRONOUNS. 69 These men or things, Questi, quelli # costbro. These women or things, Queste, quelle, 3f costbro. They, or those, fyc. Quelli^quei, masc. or colbro. They, or those, Sfc. Quelle, fern, or colbro. That, Questo, or do. These here, fem. queste or costbro. Those there, fem. quelle, or costbro. They make use of questo, questi, questa, queste, ia shewing a thing near at hand ; and quel, quello, quelli, quel, quella, quelle, in shewing or speaking of a thing at a distance. Cosiiri, colui, costei, colei, are also pronouns demonstra- tive, and never used but in speaking of a rational sub- stance ; as, of a boy, a man, a woman, Sfc. and not a horse, a dog, fyc. example, it is for this man, do not give it to that, e per costuj, non lo date a colui ; pay this wo- man, and send away that, pagdte costei, e rimanddte colei ; you may also say, e per questo, non lo date a quello ; pagdte questa, rimanddte quella. They do not often make use of colui, costui, colei, costei, in the nominative. Costui and costei, form in the plural, costbro, these men or women ; colid and colei make in the plural colbro, they or those men and women. They seldom make use of colbro or costbro, either in the feminine or nominative. We make use of costui, colui, costei, colei, costbro, colbro, when they are the last words of a sentence, but never in the beginning or middle of it. We frequently meet with cotesto and cotesta, and they signify that man or thing, that woman or thing : but you are to observe, that there is a difference between questo, and cotesto. Foreigners, and sometimes the Italians them- selves, are mistaken in the use of those two pronouns. We ought never to use cotesto, but in speaking of a thing which concerns the person who hears us. Therefore you must not say, cotesto mio dbito, but questo mio dhito. * # * Observe, questi and quegli are often used for the singular number; as this man was happy, that unfor- tunate, questi fii felice, quegli sfortundto ; but it is used D only 70 Of the PRONOUNS. only in speaking of a rational substance, as of a man, a woman, an angel, &c. and not in speaking of a beast, or any inanimate thing, for then we are to make use of qucsio and quel. %* Note, what is often expressed by il che ; but in that case it must refer to some antecedent phrase; exam- ple, my father is dead, which obliges me to go, mio padre e morto, il che m obliga a part ire. In the beginning of a sentence, we must say, cie che: example, that which pleaseth me, I have not, cio che me pidce, non Vho. •yHE Of Pronouns Interrogative. pronouns interrogative serve to ask questions, and are as follow; who? what? which? chi? che! quale? Example, Who is it? chi el Who told you so ? chi vlia dttto cio ? What will you have? che volete? What are you doing? che fate? What book is this? che libro t? What house is it ? quaV e la casa ? What ? che ? of what ? di che ? to what ? a che ? * # * Che is often used for quale ; and then the phrase is more elegant ; example, what man is thai? che u'omo e? what affairs have you; che affari avete? instead of saying, qual' ubmo e? quali affari avete? Of Pronouns Relative. THERE are three pronouns relative in English, that f ■*■ who, and ivhich. That, when it is a pronoun relative, is expressed in Italian, by che, or by il quale in the masculine, and by la quale in the .feminine: example, il libra che io tfg'go, or il quaV io leggo, the book that I read. La mbglie ch' ho' or la qual' ho, the wife that I have. But it is better lo make use of che than of qu.h. I said when it is a pronoun relative, because when it is a conjunction or adverb, it is rendered by che ; yon Of the PRONOUNS. fl vou must therefore say, credo ch' andrb, &c. I believe that I shall go, &C Who, except it be interrogative, is also expressed by che: example, the master who teaches, il maestro che insegna : the fools who laugh, gli sciecchi che ridono* But if it be interrogative, it is rendered by chi. Of whom or whose is expressed by di chi or di cut, ' To whom is expressed by a cki or a cui. From whom, in the ablative, by da chi. Which, 'masc- is expressed by il quale; of which, del quale ; to which, al quale ; from which, dal quale ; which, plural, i qudli; of which, dei or de* qudli ; to which, ai, or a qualt ; from which, dai or da* qudli. Which, feminine, la quale, della quale, alia quale, dalla quale ; in the plural, It qudli, &c. * # * Observe, that the pronouns relative, that, ivho, which, are also expressed by che ; so that instead of saying quale, qudli, il quale, i qudli, la quale, le qudli; we may say and write che, which is more received. *. x .* The purest authors place the pronoun cui between the definite article of the noun. See the following examples ; but observe, that you will never find this pro- noun there in the nominative. Whose fair visage, il cui bel viso, or il di cui Uel viso, for il hel vrso di cui. YY hose beauties, le cui bellezae, or le di cui bellezzc, for le bellezze di cui. To whose father, al cui padre, or al di cui padre, for al padre di cui. From whose brother I have received, dal cui, or dal di cui fratello horicevuto. See Boccdcio, Lodovico, I>ulce, Man/mi, Davila, and cardinal Bentivbglitr, who often make use of these examples. The French relative, dont, of ivkich or of whom, is rendered in Italian by di cui. Dont le, il di cui, or il cui. Dont la, la de cui, or la cui. Dont les, i di cui, or * cui, for the masculine. Dont tes, le di cui, for the feminine. %* Lo, la, li, le, are the pronouns relative, when before verbs. o * Him. 72 Of the PRONOUNS. Him, as we have already observed in the chapter of articles, is rendered by lo : example, I see him, io lo vedo ; you know him, rot lo conoscete. If the verb begins with a vowel, there must be elision ; as, I caress him, io Vaccarezzo. Her, is expressed by la ; example, I know her, io la conosco ; you want her, vol la volete. Them is expressed by li for the masculine, and by le for the feminine ; as, 1 see them, li vedo, or le redo. * # * Remember that the pronouns relative, lo, la, li, le, must be transposed after infinitives, gerunds, and the word ecco. Esso, he himself, or it, is likewise a pronoun relative ; it makes in the plural essi, themselves ; essa, she herself, or it, makes esse, themselves, fern. Of improper Pron ouns. TpHESE pronouns are called improper, because indeed they are not properly pronouns, but have a great resemblance to pronouns as well as lo adjectives. They are the following, Tidto, tutti, m. tutta, tirfte, f. all or every ; bgni, each or every ; dltro, dltra, dltri, dltre, other, others, qudlche, some, chiunque, whosoever; qualcheduno, qualcheduna, some one ; alcuno, some one man or thing ; uleuna, some one woman or thing ; ciascheduno, ciascheduni, rnasc. cia- tcheduna, ciaschedune, fern, every one ; nissuno, nobody ; ilmedesimo, il mtdcmo, to sttsso, mas. la medtsima, la jnedv- ma, la sttssa, Visthsa, fern, the same; ciascuno, masc. eiascuua, fern, each or every one ; alirui, dltri, others, &c. Veruno, veruiia, not one man or woman, is used for the affirmative as well as for the negative. Tutto, comprehends a totality, and agrees with the thing spoken of; example, all the world, tutto il mbndo, or tutto 7 mondo; all the men, tutti gli ubmini. The whole earth, tutta la terra. All the women, tutte le dbnne. * * We Or the PRONOUNS. 73 * # * We must use tiltto and tiitta, when the word c// is followed by an article or a numeral noun ; as, all the world, tulto 'I mbndo ; all the eartii, tutta la terra ;, all three, tutt' i ire. But if after the word all there is no article, we must use ogni; example, all men that say so, speak amiss, ogni umno die dice questo, pdrla male ; all women that, ogni donna che. Observe, nevertheless, that this pronoun is used with- out the article; and is productive of great elegance, especially in verse, Che tutte altre vellhze indietro vanno. Sciblti da tutte qtialitdde umdne. *** Ogni is put with the singular number, and never with the plural ; and it is indeclinable. It is used be- fore masculines as well as feminines, and especially when the pronoun all may be rendered by each or every; exam- ple, all or every scholar, ogni scblare ; for all or every thing, per ogni cosa. There are some examples of ogni in the plural. Cres. 236', says appresso la feat a d'ogni sdnti, after the feast of All Saints. Fiam. 29, i miei affdnni ogni dltri trap&ssano. But the examples are so uncommon, that they hardly de- serve notice. Altro makes in the plural altri; altra, feminine, makes altre. The oblique cases are always altrui; nom. dltro; jren. altriU\ or d' altrui ; dat. altrui or ad altrui ; ace. The feminine, as well in the singular as plural, always makes, like the nominative, Altra. AltrOy when it is not followed by a noun, signifies another thing. Altri is often put for the singular number; as, dltri pidnge, dltri ride, one weeps, another laughs. %* Qudlche is only placed before the singular, and never witli the plural:. it is not right to say, qudlche signori, qudlche donne, some gentlemen, some ladies ; you must say, alcuni signori, ale line donne. - Qualsivvglia, whatsoever, is likewise used as an impro- per noun; whatsoever book, quahivbglia libro ; what- soever wax, qualsivoglia cera» D3 CHAP. [ 74 ] CHAP. IV. Of VERBS. WHATEVER relates to the verbs, will be rendered much easier to learn by attending to the following remarks. Important Remarks on the Conjugation, Before you begin to learn the conjugations, it will be proper to observe, that all the verbs may be conjugated without the pronouns personal, io, tu, egli, noi, voi, eglino, so you are at liberty to form them -with or without the pronouns ; and it will be right in you to follow the Latin rule, Supprimit orator, que rustic us edit inept e. %* You must also mind, that the tenses marked with a star, in the conjugation of the verb avere, to have, are terminated, and conjugated, after the same manner in all the other verbs: example, we say in the preterimperfect of the verb avere, * Avtvo, or aveva, avevi, aveva, avevamo, &c. All the verbs follow the same rule ; example, Amdvo, or amdva, amdvi, amdva, amavdmo, &c. Credevo, or credeva, credevi, credeva, credevdmo, &c. Sentivo, or sentiva, sentivij, sentiva, sentivdmo, &c. And in like manner all other tenses are distinguished by a star, except the single verb essere, to be. Conjugation of the auxiliary verb avere, to have* INDICATIVE. Present. Singular. I have, io ho, or ho. Thou hast. tu hdi hoi. He has, egli ha, Jia. * The best writers in the Italian language terminate the first person of the preterperfect of all verbs in a ; aveva, not aveya , umdva, not amdvo \ and the latter termination is used by the vulgar. Plural. Of the VERBS. 7$ Plural. We have, noi abbiamo, abbiamo You have, voi auete, avete They have, eglino hanno, hanno. Preterimperfect. I had, *ioavevo, or aveva Thou hadst, tu avevi He had, egli aveva. We had, noi avevamo You had, voi avev/tte They had, eglino avevano. Preterperfect Definite. I had, io ebbi Thou hadst, tu a vest i He had, egli ebbe. We had, noi avemma. You had, voi avSste They had, eglino ebber You shall have had, vpi air etc aviUo They shall have had, e^Ihwavrhmo avuto.. INFINITIVE. Present. To have, avere. Preterperfect. To have had, aver avuto. Participles. it j S avulo, avuta ; plural, avuti, 9 I avirfe. Gerunds. Having, or in having, Having had, avendo avuto. * Jj * We often use the verb avtre, with the particle da or a, instead of the verb dovcre ; example, I ought to do, ho da fare ; being to speak, avdndo a dire : instead of dtvof&re; dovfndo dire. By the generality of tenses of the verb avere, you plainly see how necessary it is to be perfect master of them in order to attain a speedy knowledge of all the rest, since there is such an entire conformity between them, except in the present, preter-imperfect definite, and the subjunctive. *** Upon our first learning the Italian, the interro- gation creates some difficulty ; and we are at a loss how to express shall I have! have we? hast thou? has he? yet there is nothing more easy; for it is hut, putting the pronouns personal after the verbs, as in English, and we shall never mistake in saying avrb io ? abblarno noj? haitu? ha egli? And if we would express our- selves Of the VERBS. 79 selves with greater elegance and ease, we ought not to mention the pronouns at all; example, shall I have this? avro questol does he do well? fa bene? shall we sing? canteremo? When we speak by negation, we must use the word non ; example, I have not, non ho ; you must not know, non dovete conoseere ; thou hast not, non hai; he has not, non ha. In the like manner, to express, I have some, thou hast some, he has some, say, ne ho, ne hai, ne ha, ne abbi- amo, &c. We may also make an abbreviation, and say, nho, n'hai, nha, &c. And to express, we have none, thou hast noue, he has none, &c. you may say, non ne ho, non tie hai, non ne ha, or non nho, non n'hai, non riha. But to express, have I none] hast thou- none? we say, non ne ho io ? non ne hai tu ? or non nho to ? non nhai tu? Conjugation of the auxiliary Verb essere a to be, INDICATIVE. Present. I -am, io sono, or sono Thou art, tu set, set He is, egli e, e. We are, noi si amo, siamo You are, voi siete, or sete, siete They are, eglino sono, sono. Preterimperfect, I was, io ero or tro Thou wert, tu eri,- tri He was, egli era, ■ era. We were, noi eramo, or eravamo, eramo, or cravdmo You were, voi, traie, or eravate, erdte, or cravtit* They were, eglino erano, . erano. d 6 ' Preter- tO filly fii tufusti, or fbsii, fusti eglifu, /«• noifvj/imo, fummo voifuste, or fbste. Jbste eglino furono, furono 80 Of the VERBS. PrETERPERFECT DEFINITE. I was, Thou wert, He was, We were , You were, They were, Preterperfect. It is compounded of the present indicative, io sono, and its own participle stdto or stata. I have been, io sbno stdto Thou hast been, tu sei stato He has been, tgli e stdto. We have been, noi siiimo stdti You have been, voi siete stdti They have been, eglino sono stdti. If we speak in the feminine, we must say, sono stata, sei stata, t stdta ; shhno state, siete state, sono state; and so in all the compound tenses. Preterpluperfect. I had been, io ero stdto Thou hadst been, tu eri stdto He had been, tgli era stdto. We had been, not trdmo stati, or eravdmo stdti You had been, loierdte stati, or eravdtt stati They had been, tglino erano stdti. Future. I shall or will be, to sard Thou shalt be, tu sardi He shall be, tgli sard. 'We shall or will be, noi sartmo Yoa shall be, voi sarete They shall be, eglino sardnno. IMPERA- O* the VERBS. 81 IMPERATIVE. Be thou, sii tu, or sia tu Let him be, sia egli. Let us be, siamo noi Be you, slate toi Let them be, sidno, siino, or skno eglinc. OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. That I may be, che or cliio sia Thou mayst be, che tu sia He may be, ch'egli sia. We may be, che noi siamo You may be, che vol sidte They may be, th'tglinosiano, siino, orsieiw, First Preterimperfect. That I were or might be, che or cliio fbssi, or fussi Thou weit, che tufossi, or fussi He were, ch' egli fosse, orfussc. We were, che noijossimo or fussittw You were, che voi foste, or Juste They were> ch' eglinofc$$ero,orfussero, Second Preterimperfect. I should cr would be, w sarei Thou shouldst be, tu saresti lie should be, egli sartbbe. We should be, noi sarhnmo You'sliould be, voi sartsie They should be,. egihio sarebhero t ox sarchbeno, Preterperfect, It is compounded of the present conjunctive, io sia, and the participle stdto or sidta, of the same verb. That I have been, che or cfiHo sia stato t orstdla Thou hast been, che fu sia stdto He has> been, c he cgli sia stdto, Th,\ S2 Of the VERBS. That we have been, che noi sidmd stdti, or state You have been, che voi sidte stdti They have been, ch'eglmo siano stdti, PRETERPLUPERFECT. It is compounded of the first preterimperfect subjunc- tive, and the participle. If I had been, se io fbssi stdto Thou hadst been, « se tu fbssi stdto He had been, s egli fosse stdto. We had been, se noifbssimo stdti You had been, se voifbste stdti They had been, s'eglinofbssero stdti. Second Preterpluperfect. It is compounded of the second preterimperfect subjunc- tive and the participle. I should or would have been, io sarti stdto Thou shouldst have been, tu saresti stdto He should have been, egli sarebbe stdto. We should have been, noi saremmo stdti You should have been, voi sareste stdti They should have been, tglino sarcbbero stati. Future. When I shall have been, quand' io sard stdto Thou shalt have been, tu sardi sidlo He shall have been, egli sard stdto We shall have been, noi saremo stdti You shall have been, voi sareie stdti They shall have been, eglinosar anno stdti. INFINITIVE. To be, essere. Preterperfect. To have been, essere stdto. Participle. Been, stdto, for the masculine; stdta, for the feminine. Gerunds, Or the VERBS, S3 Gerunds. Cessendo, or sen do ; or colV essere ^ Being, or in being, < nelV essere. {in essere. Having been, essendo stdto. The verb essere has no need of any other auxiliary verb j and we must never put any of the tenses of the verb avere before the participle stdto ; as, I have been, you must say sbno stdto, and not ho stdto ; 1 had been, ero stdto, and not avevo stdto. And this rule must be particularly at- tended to, because here it is that foreigners are apt to make blunders. Of Conjugations. T^HE Italian verbs have three different terminations in the infinitive : to wit, f amdre, cantdfe, saltdre. \ temere, credere, godere. ( sentire, dor mire, mentire. For which reason, I shall use but three conjugations. Amdre shall serve as a rule for the verbs in are. Credere for the verbs in ere, Sentire for the verbs in ire. It is proper to observe here, that the infinitives of verbs, derived from the Latin, retain the same quantity as they have in Latin. I explain myself: the verb cant are, in La- tin, has the second syllable long: and. so it has the same syllable long in Italian. On the contrary, credere, cres- cere, having the second syllable short in Latin have it also short iii Italian. If you observe this rule ill pronouncing infinitives, you will avoid the mistakes which most learners of the Italian language are apt to commit. Yet this rule lias some exceptions, Easy S4 Of the VERBS. Eafy method of learning to conjugate, the Verbs, J HAVE reduced all the tenses of the verbs to seven, four of which are general, and have the same termi' nations in all the verbs; and the other three, by changing the one leiter in the third person, may be likewise made general, and all the conjugations reduced to one. The general tenses are the preterimperfect, the future, the first and second preterimperfect subjunctive. The preterimperfect is terminated, in all the verbs, in vo, vi, va ; vdmo, vdte, vano. The future indicative is terminated in re, rai, ra ; rcmo, rtte, ranno. The imperfect subjunctive in ssi, ssi, sse ; ssimo, ste, ssero* The second imperfect in rei, resti, rtbbe ; rhnmo, reste, rtblero. Change re of the verbs amcire, credere, seniire (and generally of all the other verbs ) into vo, and rb into ssi and rei, &c. and you will find the imperfect, the future indicative, the first and second imperfect subjunctive of all the other verbs, without any exception ; which will be of great ease to the learner. * # * Note, the future, and the second imperfect, of the verbs in are are terminated in erb and erti, and not in arb and arei. Therefore, in these tenses, after having made thechangeof re into rb for the future, and into rei for the second imperfect, you must also change the vowel that pre- cedes rb and rei, and say amerb, amerti; and so of the other verbs terminated in are. The present indicative, the present definite, and the present subjunctive, are the oniy tenses you have to learn; for the other four, that I have given above, are ge- neral, IB Of the VERBS. 85 In order to form those three tenses, you must cut oft" the last syllables of the indefinite, and then change the last vowel which remains. For the present indicative, you change it into o through all the conjugations, so that of amdre, credere, sentire, you make amb, credo, scnto. For' the preterperfect definite of the indicative, you change it into ai in the first conjugation ; thus of amdre you form amdi ; but when you come to words of the second conjuga- tion, you change it into ei\ thus of credere you make cre- dei; verbs of the third conjugation have it changed into j; thus, sentire makes sentj. As for the present subjunc- tive, the vowel that remains is changed into i in the first conjugation, and into a in the others; thus, ami, creda, senta. Present. are, o, i, a, idmo, ate, ano. ere, o, 1, e, idmo, ete, ono. ire, o, i, e, idmo, ite, ono. *,* Take notice, that in the singular you are to change the letter in the third person only. Preterperfect definite indicative, are, ai, tisti, b, ammo, dste, drono. ere, ei, teti, e, emmo, este, erono. ire, j, isti, 1, immo, iste, irono. Present subjunctive. are, i, i, i, idmo, idte, ino. ere, a, a, a, idmo, idte, ano. ire, a, a, a, idmo, idle, ano. *** Observe, that, through all the conjugations, there is no change made in the singular. The participles are, are, dt.o, dta, dli, ate. ere, ido, ■ ta, uti, ute. ire, ito, it a, Hi, He* Change So Of the VERBS. Change the termination, are, ere, ire, with the letters and syllables opposite to thera, and you will find the present, the preterperfect deiinite, and the present subjunctive, oi" all the regular verbs. First conjugation, of the Verbs In are. INDICATIVE. V I shall put the pronouns personal to, tit, egli, &c, no more. Present. I love, dm-o Thou lovest, am-i He loves, am-tb. We love, am-idmo You love, am-ate They love, dm-ano. PRETERIMPERFECT. I did love, am-dvo, or am-dva, Thou didst love, am-dvi He did love, am-dva. We did love, am-avdmo You did love, am-avute They did love, am-dvano. Preterperfect Definite. I loved, am-di Thou Iovedst, am-dsti He loved, am-o. We loved, am-dmmo You loved, am-dste They loved, am-drcno. The poets often use amdr and amdro, for amdrono ; and so in all the verbs in are. Prefer- TPIi,** f an Of the VERBS, $7 Preterperfect. This tense is composed of the participle a-mdto t and the present indicative of the auxiliary verb averc, 1 have loved, ho am-dto Tliou hast loved, hdi am-ato He has loved, ha am-dto. We have loved, ubbidmo am-dto You have loved, avete am-dto They have loved, hdnno am-dto, Preterpluperf ect. This tense is composed of the participle amdtc, and the imperfect of the auxiliary verb avere. I had loved, avevo am-dto Thou hadst loved, avevi am-dto He had loved, aveva am : dto. We had loved, avevdmo am-dto You had loved, avevdte am-dto They had loved, avevano am-dto. Future. I shall or will love, am-ero Thou shalt love, um-erdi He shall love, am-erd. We shall love, am- ere mo You shall love, am-erete They shall love, am-erdnno Formerly they used amarb, but now they write amero, and so of all the verbs in are. IMPERATIVE. Love thou, dm-a iu Let him love, ami egli Let us love, am-idmo noi Love you, om-dte. voi Let them love, amino eglino. OPTA- 88 Of the VERBS. OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. That I may love, che or cliio tm-i Thou mayest love, c he tu ani-i He may love, che or ch'egli dm-i. We may love, che am-idmo You may love, che am-idte They may love, che or cliam-ino. N. B. You may put the pronouns personal iu the present of this tense, i>, tu, egli, to distinguish the persons, which are all terminated in the same manner : but it is superfluous to put them in the plural, the persons being sufficiently dis- tinguished by their terminations. The same rule is appli- cable to the following preterimperfect, and to the present optative and subjunctive of the second and third conjuga- tion. First Preterimperfect. That I might or could love, che or ch'io am-dssi Thou mightest love, che tu am-dssi He might love, che or ch'egli am-dsse. We might love, che am-dssimo You might love, che am-dste They rmght love, che or tliam-dssero, *** When we find the conjunction si before the indi- cative imperfect, we must use the imperfect of the subjunc- tive or optative ; as, if I did love, se amdssi, and not se amdvo; if I had, se avessi, and not se avevo: and so in all the verbs, because, when we speak by way of wish or desire, we should make use of the subjunctive or opta- tive. Young beginners are apt to transgress against this rule. Second Preterimperfect. I should love. am-erei _ Thou shouldest love, am-cresii He should love, am-erzblc. We Of the VERBS. 89 We should love, am-eremmo You should love, am-ertste They should love, am-erebbero. Preterperfect. It is composed of the participle amdto, and the present subjunctive of the auxiliary verb az'ere. That I have loved, c he or ch'io abbia am-dto Thou hast loved, che tu dbbia am-dto He has loved, che or ch'egli abbia am-ato. We have loved, che noi abbidmo am-ato You have loved, che vol abbidte am-dto - They have loved, cheoxclieglinodbbianoam-dto. Preterpluperfect. It is composed of the participle amdto, and the first pre- terimperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary verb avert. If I had loved, se io avessi am-dto Thou badst loved, se tu avessi am-dto He had loved, se or s'egli avesse am-dto. We had loved, se azessimo am-dto You had loved, se aveste am-dto They had loved, se avesscro am-dto. Second Preterpluperfect. It is composed of the participle amdto, and the second pre terimperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary verb were, I should have loved, avrri dm-dto Thou shouldst have loved, avresti am-dto He should have loved, avrtbbt am-dto. We should have loved, imrimmo am-dto You should have loved, avreste am-dto They should have loved, avrebbero am-dto. Future. It is composed of the participle amdto, and the future indicative of the auxiliary verb avere. When I shall have loved, qua?id' arrb am-dto Thou shalt have loved, avrdi am-dto When 90 Of the VERBS. When he shall have loved, quand' avra am-dto We shall have loved, avremo am-ato You shall have loved, avrete am-ato They shall have loved, avrdnno am-ato INFINITIVE. To love, am-dre. To have loved, avere am-ato. Participles. Loved, am-dto, masculine, Loved, am-dta, feminine. Gerunds. r • • i • C am-dndo, coil' am-dre, con am-dre, Loving, or m loving, «; „, ' , . % ° c I netl am-are, in am-are. Having loved. aoendo am-dto. Remarks on the Verbs in are. A LL the verbs ending in are, are conjugated in the same manner as amdre ; except four, which only devi- ate from this rule in some of their tenses; they are an- ddre, dare, fare, stare. You will find their conjugations after the regular verbs. %* Note, the verbs terminating, in the infinitive, in care, and gdre, lake an h in those tenses where the c and g* would otherwise meet with the vowels e or? ; that is to say, in the present indicative, imperative, optative, future indi- cative, and the second prei erimperfect subjunctive; which are the tenses I shall give you by way of example in the verbs pec i are , and pogdre-. Peccdre, to sin ; present, pecc-o, pecc hi, (and mipceci), pecc-a, pecc-hidmo, pecc-dtc, pecc-ano, I sin, &c. FvAiwe, pecc -herd, I shall sin; pecc-herdi. pecc-herd, pecc- hertmo, pecc-hertte, pecc-herdnno, and not pecc-erb, pecc- erdi, &cc. Imperative, pecc-a, pecc-hi ; pecc-hidmo, pecc-die, pecc- hhio, sin thou, let him sin, &c. Optative, che pecc-hi, pecc-hi ,ptcc-hi ; pecc-hidmo, pecc- hidie, pecc-hino, that I may sin, &c. Pecc- Of the VERBS. 91 Peec-herli, I should sin ; pecc-heresti, pecc-herebbe, peccheremmo, pecc-hereste, ptcc-herebbero. Pagan:, to pay, present, pdg-o, pdg-hi, pdg-a ; pag- hidmo, pag-dte, pdg-ano, I pay, &c. Future, pag-herb, pag-herdi, pag-herd ; pag-heremo, pa- gherete, pag-herdnno, I shall or will pay, &c. Imperative, pdg-a, pdg-hi ; pag-hidmo, pag-dte, J m Q~ kino, pay thou, let him pay, &c. Optative, che pdg-hi, pdg-hi, pdghi ; pag-hidmo, pagin- ate, pdghino, that I may pay, &c. The second preterimperfect, pag-herci, pag-lieresti, pa- gkerebbe ; pag-keremmo, pag-hereste,pag-herebbero, &c. that I should pay, &c. The other tenses are conjugated like amdre. Conjugation of the verbs passive. Before we proceed to the second conjugation, it is ne- cessary to know, that the verbs passive are nothing more than the participles of verbs active, conjugated with the verb essere: example, Conjugation oj the verb passive, essere amato, to be loved. INDICATIVE. Present. I am loved, sbno am-dto Thou art loved, set am-dto II e is loved, e am-dto We are loved, sidmo am-dti You are loved, siete am-dti They are loved, sono am-dti. Preterimperfect. I was loved, ero am-dto Thou wert loved, eri am-dto He was loved, era am-dto We were loved, eracdmo am-dti You were loved, eravdte am-dti They were loved, erano am-dti. Pre- 92 Of the VERBS. PRETERPERFECT DEFINITE. I was loved, fid am-dto Thou wert loved, fbsti am-ato He was loved, fit am-ato. We were loved, fiimmo am-dti You were loved, fbste am-dti They were loved, furono am-dti, PRETERPERFECT. I have been loved, sono stdto am-ato Thou hast been loved, sei stdto am-dto He has been loved, e stdto am-dto. We have been loved, sidmo stdti am-dti You have been loved, siete stdti am-dti They have been loved, sono stdti am-dti. Preterpluperfect. I had been loved, tro stdto am-dto Thou hadst been loved, tri stdto am-dto He had been loved, era stdto am-dto. We had been loved, ercvdmo stdti am-dti < You had been loved, ercvdte stdti am-dti They had been loved, erano stdti am-dti. Future. I shall or will be loved, sard am-dto Thou shalt be loved, sardi am-dto He shall be loved, sard am-dto. We shall be loved, saremo am-dti You shall be loved, sareie am-dti They shall be loved, scrdnno am-dti. I shall go no farther with the conjugation, because it is only a repetition of the verb sono, joined to the participle am-dto. %,* Observe, that the participles and adjectives change their gender and number after the tenses of the verb tssere ; example, T v , C sono am-dto, for the masculine 7 . , I am loved, < ,. f tt r • • } singular. ' £ sono am-ata, lor the feminine J b We O* the VERBS. 93 %X r i j f siaiM am-dti, for the niasc. 1 . . We are loved, j ^ y^JJ for ^ fem { plural. VlSS 1 for ^singular. You are learned, V *'. , * /,.,. ' I (SS } for the plural. Observe, that in the construction of the passive, the Italians make use of da or dal, and per, by, which answer to the French dti and par ; with this difference, that the latter more frequently use par than du, whereas the for- mer generally put da or dot : thus they say, Pietro £ ama- to dal principe, and not per il principe ; which learners are apt to confound. Second conjugation, of the Verbs in ere. INDICATIVE. 1 Present. I believe, Thou believest, cred-o. cred-i. He believes, cred-e. We believe, cred-iamo. You believe, They believe, cred-ete. cred-ono. • Preterimperfect. I did believe, cred-evo. Thou didst believe, cred-evi. He did believe, cred-eva. We did believe, cred-evamo* You did believe, cred evate. They did believe, cred-evano. Preterperfect Definite. I believed, cred-ei or cred-etti. Thou believcdst, cred-esti. He believed, crede, or cred-ette. We believed, cred-emmo. You believed, cred-este. SThey believed, cred-erono, or cred-htero. £ Preter 94. Of the. VERBS. PRETERPERFECT^ I have believed, ho cred-uto. Thou hast believed, hdi cred-uto. He has believed, \ha cred-uto. We have believed, abbidtno cred-uto. You have believed, avete cred-uto. They have believed, hdnno cred-uto. PRETERPLUPERFECT. I had believed, avevo cred-uto. Thou hadst believed, avivi cred-uto. He had believed, aveva cred-uto. We had believed, avevdmo cred-uto* You had believed, avevate cred-uto. They had believed, avevano cred-uto. Future. I shall or will believe, cred-ero. Thou shalt believe, cred-erdi. He shall believe, cred-erct. We shall believe, cred-eremo. You shall believe, ered-erete. They shall believe, cred-erdnno. IMPERATIVE. Believe thou, cred-i. Let him believe, cred-a. Let us believe, ered-idmo. Believe you, cred-ete. Let them believe, cred-ano. OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. That I may believe, che or ch'fo cred-a.. Thou mayst believe, che tu cred-a. He may believe, che or ch'egti cred-a. We may believe, che cred-idmo. Youroay believe, che ered-idte. They may believe, che cred-ano, PRETER- Of the VERBS. Preterimperfect. That I might or could believe, Thou mightest believe, He might believe, We might believe, You might believe, Thoy might believe, the cred-essi. che cred-essi, che cred-esse. che cred-essimo. che cred-este. che cred-essero. Second Preterimperfect. I should believe, Thou shouldst believe, He should believe, We sh^e'd believe, You should believe, They should believed, cred-erei. cred-eresti. cred-erebbe. cred-ertmmo. cred-ereste. cred-erebbero t orcred-erebbon$, Preterperfect. That I have believed, Thou hast believed, He has believed, We have believed, You have believed, che or cKio dbbia cred-uto. che tu dbbia cred-uto. che or ch'egli dbbia cred-uto, ch'abbidmo cred-uto, ch'abbidte cred-uto. They have believed, ch'ebbiano cred-uto. Preterpluperfect. If I had believed, Thou -hadst believed, He had believed, We had believed, You had believed, They had believed, se io avessi cred-uto. se tu avessi cred-uto, se aveste cred-uto. se av'essimo cred-uto. se aveste cred-uto. se avessero cred-uto. Second Preterpluperfect. I should have belie* ed, Thou shouldst have believed, He should have believed, We should have believed, You should have believed, They should have believed, avrei cred-uto. avresti cred-uto. avrebbe cred-uto. avremmo cred-uto. avreste cred-uto. avrebbero cred-uto. I 2 FUTURI. 9<5 Of the VERBS. Future. When I shall have believed, quand' avro cred-uto. Thou shalt have believed, avrai cred-uto* ,He shall have believed, avra cred-ido. We shall have believed, avremo cred-uto. You shall have believed, avrete-cred-uto. They shall have believed, avrdnno cred-uto. INFINITIVE. To believe, credere. Gerund. Believing, or in believing, cred-endo, col cred-ere, &c. Participle. Believed, cred-uto, masc. Believed, cred-ida, fern. Conjugate in like manner the following verbs, which are the only verbs in ere that follow the rule of cred-ere, *,* Note, that all the regular verbs in ere have two terminations in the preterperfect definite, as they make ei, est i, e ; vmmo, este, erono, or, etti, esti,ette; emmo, este, ettero. Infinitive. Preterp. Def. Participle. 'beat, Uttere, ei or etti uto, drink, bevere or here ei etti uto, yield, cedere & etti uto, cleave,/ewrfere ** etti uto, fret, fremere ei etti uto, groan, g'emere ei etti uto. To enjoy, godere ei etti uto, reap, mietere ei etti uto. feed, pdscere ei etti uto. ^haug, pendere ei etti uto. Of the VERBS \ Infinitive. Preterp . def. Participle. ~ vomit, recere ei or etti iito. receive, ruevere ei etti iito. shine again, riliicere ei without a participle. sit down, sedere ei etti uto. shine, splendere ei etti uto. j slide, serpere ei etti uto. murmur, 1 fear, st rider e ei etti uto. temere ei etti uto. Lsell, vendere ei etti uto. # To All the other verbs in ere are irregular. The regular verbs end with two vowels in the pre- terperfect definite ; as, am-ai, cred-ei, sent-ii or sent-j. All the regular verbs, in the same tense, end with the vowel i : and this vowel i is preceded by a consonant ; as, ebbi, credetti, scrissi. Thus credere, which makes credei and credetti, is both regular and irregular. You will find, in the chapter of the irregular verbs in ere short, a very easy manner of learning the irregularity of the verbs, which I have reduced to one general rule. Third Conjugation oj the verbs in ire. INDICATIVE. Present. I hear, sent-o. Thou nearest, sent-i. He hears, shit-e. We hear, sent-iamo, You hear, sent-ite. They hear, senUono, PRETERPERFECT. I did hear, sent-ivo. Thou didst hear, sent-ivi. He did hear, sent-iva* We did hear, sent-ivamo, You did hear, sent-ivdte. They did hear, sent-ivano. PRI< $S Of the VERBS. PRETERPERFECT DEFINITE, I heard, sent-J. Thou heardst, sent-istL He heard, sent-i. We heard, sent-immo. You heard, sent-iste. They heard, sent-irono. Preterperfect. I have heard, ho sent-ito. Thou hast heard, Mi sent-ito. He has heard, ha sent-ito. We have heard, abbidmo sent-ito. You have heard, avtte sent-ito. They have heard, hdnno sent-ito. Preterpluperfect. I had heard, avevo sent-ito. Thou hadst heard, avivi sent-ito. He had heard, avivd sent-ito. We had heard, avevamo sent-ito. You had heard, aievate sent-Uo. They had heard, avevano sent-itoo Future. I shall or will hear , sent-irb. Thou shalt hear, sent-irdL He shall hear, sefit-ird. We shall hear, sent-iremo. You shall hear, sent-irete. They shall hear, sent-iranno* IMPERATIVE, Hear thou, sent-i. Let him hear, sent-a. Let us hear, sent-idmo. Hear you, sent-ite. Let them hear, sent-ano. OPTA- Of the VERBS. 99 OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. That I may hear, che, or ch'io sent-a. Thou may'st hear, che tustnt-a. He may hear, ch'egli sent-a. We may hear, che sent-iamo. You may hear, che sent-idte. They may hear, che stnt-ano, Preterimperfect. That I could or might hear, che sent-issi. Thou mightest hear, che sent-issn He might hear, che sent-isse. We might hear, che sent-issimo. You might hear, c he sent-isie. They might hear, che sent-issero. Second Preterimperfect. I should hear, sent-ivei. Thou shouldst hear, seni-iresti. He should hear, sent irebbe. We should hear, sent-iremmo. You should hear, sent-ireste. They should hear, sent-irebbero, Preterimperfect. That I have heard, che, or ch' to oibbia sent-ito. Thou hast heard, che tu tibbia sent-ito. He has heard, ch'egli ctbbia sent-ito. We have heard, ch' abbidtno sent-ito. You have heard, ch' abbiate sent-ito. They have heard, ch' abbiano sent-ito, Preterpluperfect. If I had heard, se io ave'ssi-scnt-ito. Thou hadst heard, se tu avessi sent-ito. He had heard, se egli avem sent-ito, G4 If i©o Of the VERBS. If we had heard, se avessimo sent-it&, You had heard, se aveste smt-ito. They had heard, se. avessero sent-ito* Second Preterpluperfect. I should have heard avrei sent-ito. Thou shouidst have heard, avresti sent-ito. He should have heard, We should have heard, You should have heard, They should have heard, avrebbe sent-ito. avremmo sent-ito, avreste sent-ito. azrebbero sent-ito. Future. When I shall have heard, quand' «r>ro sent-ito. Thou shall have heard, avrai sent-ito* He shall have heard, avrd sent-ito. We shall have heard, avrimo sent-ito* You shall have heard, avrete sent-ito* They shall have heard, air anno sent-ito. INFINITIVE. To hear, sent-ire. Participle, heard, sent-ito. Gerund, in hearing, sent-endo. Conjugate after the same manner the following verbs, which are the only verbs in ire, that conform to the rule of sent-ire. Pres. Pret. def. Particip. apro aprj aperto. bollo bollj bollito. consento consent) consentito. convlrto copra cucio dormo fuggfl mento mbro pkrto mi pinto mipentj pentitost §dtgo To-! Infinitive. 'open, aprire boil, bollire consent. c&nsentire convert; convertire cover, coprire sow, cucire sleep, dormire %, fuggtre lie, mentire die, morirc depart, partire repent, pentirsi ascend, salire convert) convertito* coprj cucj dormj fuggj mentj morj partj coperto. cucito. dormito. fuggito. mentito. morto. partito. $a:j salito. T* Ow the VERBS. 1 gidccio go do giacqai giacciuto. godei goduto. avere - have, ho ebbi avuto. 118 par ere - appear, pujo # pdrvi par so. ll6" piacere - please, pi actio pidcqui piacciuto. 1 1 9 persuadei •« persuade, persuddo persuasi persuaso. 112 potere - be able, pbsso potci potuto. 119 rimantre remain, rimango rimdsi rimdso. 11.0 sapere - know, so stppi saputo* * sedere - sit, sedo stdei seduto. 120 so/ere - be accustomec , sbglio solei solito. very little used. 119 tacere - be silent, tdccio tdcqui tacciuto. 120 tewere - hold, tmgo tenni teniito. * temere - fear, tfmo ttmei temuto. | vedere - be worth, vdglio vdlsi valutOo see, vedo vldi veduto. 112 volere - * Thf thrp< be willing, >. vprhis mnrlrpr vbglio with a « vblli volido. figures in the margin refer to the pages where the other verbs are found conjugated at full length* Th% 110 Of the VERBS. The compounds of these verbs make ere also long; as ricadere, riavere, &c. Of those two-and -twenty verbs there are but three re- gular, viz. temtre, godere, and seder e ; and they are con- jugated like credere. Of the other verbs that make their infinitive in ere long, some are irregular in the present, others in the preter-deri- nite and future, and some in the participle. The conjugation of the verb avere has been given al- ready ; calere and capvre are not in use. Conjugation of the irregular verbs in ere, long* [Begin with saptre, potere, and vaUre t because they often occur in discourse. SAPERE, to know, * Present. Sd, Mi, s£; sappidmo, sapete, sdnno: I know, thou knowest, he knows; we know, you know, they know. Imper. Sapfoo, sapevi, sapeva ; sapevdmo, wpetdte, sapdvano ; I did know, thou didst know, he did know ; we did know, you did know, they did know. * Preter-def. Seppi, sapesti, seppe ; sapemmo, sapeste, seppero : I knew, he knew ; we knew, they knew. Preterperfect. Ho saputo, hdi saputo, ha saputo, &c. * Future. Sapro, saprdi, saprct ; sapremo, saprete, sa~ pranno : I shall know, thou shalt now, he shall know ; we shall know, you shall know, they shall know. IMPERATIVE. * Sdppi, sdppia ; sappidmo, sappidte, sappiano : know thou, let him know; let us know, know you, let them know. OPTA- Of the VERBS. Ill OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. * Che sdppia, sappia, sappia ; sappidmo, sappidte, sap- piano: that I may know, thou may'st know, he may know, we may know, you may know, they may know. * Imperfect. Che sapessi, sapfasi, sapesse ; sapessimo, sapeste, sapessero: that I might know, thou Brightest know, they might know. * Second Imp. Saprei, sapresti, saprebbe; sappremmo, sapreste, sapprebbero: I should know, thou shouldst know, he should know ; we should know, you should know, they should know. INFINITIVE. Sapere, to know. Gerund, $aphulo> knowing. Partk ciple, sap&to, known. POTE'RE, to be able. INDICATIVE. * Present. Posso, puoi,pub; possidmo, poteHe, phssono: I can or am able, thou canst, he can ; we can, you can, they can. Imperf. Potevo, potevi, Sec. I could, &c. Pret-def. Potei, potesti, pott ; potemmo, poteste, pote- rono ; or potttti, potesti, potette ; p@t£mmo, poteste, pottt- tero: I could, thou couldst, he could; we could, you could, they could. Preterp. Ho potuto, I have been able. * Future. Potrb, I shall be able. There is no imperative. OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. * Che pbssa, pbssa, pbssa ; possicimo, possidte, pbssano ; that I may be able, thou mayest be able, he maybe able ; we may be able, you may be able, they may be able. Imp. Che potfesi, potessi, potesse ; potessimo, poteste f fothsero x that I might be able, thou mightest be able» he 112 Of the VERBS. he might be able ; we might be able, you might be able* they might be able. * Second Imp. Potrbi, potrbsti, potrtbbe, &c. N. B. In conjugating the verb potere, to be able, we do not say in the future potero and in the second preter- imperfect poterei ; because pot era and pottrei are the fu- ture and secojid preterimperfeet of the verb potdre, to prune. INFINITIVE. Potere, Gerund, potendo. Participle, potuto. V O L E ' R E, t o be willing, * Present. Vbglio, vubi, vuble ; voglidmo, volute, vb- gliono: I will or am willing, thou art willing, he is wil- ling; we are willing, you are willing, they are willing. Imperf. Volevo, volevi, voleva ; volevdmo, valerate, volevano : I was willing, thou wast willing, &c. *fif Preter-def. Villi, volesti, voile; volemno, vo- ttste, vbllero : I was willing, thou wast willing, &c. Pre terperf. Ho voluto, I have been willing, &c. * Future. Vorrb, vorrdi, vorrd ; r.orremo, vorrete, vorrdnno : I shall be willing, thou shalt be willing, he shall be willing, we shall be willing, &c. It has no imperative. OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. * Che vbglia, vbglia, vbglia ; vbglidmo, vbglwte, vogli~ ano ; that I may be willing, thou may'st be willing, he may be willing ; we may be willing, you may be willing, they may be willing. Imperf. Volessi, volessi, volesse ; volessmo, vtileste, vo» Usseroi that I were willing, thou were willing, he were willing; we were willing, you were willing, they were willing. * Second Imp. Vorrei, vorresti, vorrebbi ; vorremme, vorriste, vorrebbero : I should or would be willing, thou shouldest or wouldest be willing, &c. INFI- Of the VERBS. INFINITIVE. VoUrt. Gerund, volendo. Participle, volute. * * Remarks on the Verbs terminated in ere long, VOLE'RE. 1. Remember that voter -e makes in the preterde- definite vblli, volesti, voile ; volemmo, voleste, vbllero ; and not volsi, volesti, vblse ; volemmo, voleste, volsero ; because volsi, vblse, volsero, comes from the verb vblgere, to turn. Yet we find vblsi, vblse, and volsero, in a great many au- thors, which js only to be attributed to a poetical li- cence. %* Take notice, that it is sometimes an elegance to put the verb voter e instead of dovere. For instance, ma eio non si vubl con dltri ragiondre, for non si dove, ought not. 2. The verbs terminated in the infinitive in lere ; as volere, dolere, solere, valere, and their compounds, have a g before the letter I in the first person singular, in the first and third plural, and in all the persons of the present sub- junctive : in the present ; as, Vbglio, vubi, vuble ; voglidmo, volete, vbgliono. Dbglio, dubli, duble ; doglidmo, dolete, dbgliono. SbgliOy subli, suble ; soglidmo, solete, sbgliono. Vdglio, vdli, vale ; vaglidmo, valete, vagliono. 3. The verbs terminated in the infinitive in nere 9 and n'ire ; as, rimanere, tenere, venire, have also a g in the irrst person singular, and in the third plural ; but not in the first person plural ; as, tengo, tieni, tiene ; tenidmo, tenete, tengono. Rimdngo, rimdni, rimdne ; rimanidmo, rimanete, n- mungono. Vengo, vieni, tiene ; venidmo, venite, vengono. They have also a g in the first, second, and third per- son of the present subjunctive in the singular, and in the third of the plural. 4. All the verbs ending in lere, nere,nire, require two r's in the future, and in the second imperfect tense. Example, Of the VERBS. Volere, vbglio, zorrb, vorrei. Tenere, tengo, terrb, terrei. Venire, vengo, Terrb, verrei. Volerb, tenerb, venirb, &c. in Example, And not %* Except^mre, punire, svellere, to root up, that fol- low the common rule, and make^wiro, punirb, svellerb ; and in the present, Jinisco, punisco, svello. CADE'RE,tofall. Cddo, ciidi, cade; cadidmo, cadete, cddono: I fall, thou fallest, he falls ; we fall, you fall, they fall. Imperf. Cadevo, cadevi, cadeva ; cadevamo, cadevate, cadevano ; I did fall, &c. * Preter-def. Cdddi, cadesti, cddde, cademmo, cadeste, edddero : I fell, thou didst fall, he fell ; we fell, you fell, they fell. Preterf. Sono caduto, set caduto, e caduto; sidmo caduti ; siete caduti, sono caduti ; I have or am fallen, thou hast or art fallen, &c. Preterpl. Ero caduto, eri caduto, era caduto: eravdmo, caduti, eravdte caduti, erano caduti : I had or I was fallen, thou hadst or was fallen, &c. Future. Caderb, caderdi, caderh ; caderemo, caderete, taderdnno : I shall fall, thou shalt fall, he shall fall, &c. Imperative. Cadi, fall thou ; cdda, let him fall, cadi- amo, let us fall: cadete, fall you ; cddano, let them fall. Optative. Che cdda, cdda, cdda ; cadiamo, cadidie, cddano : that I may fall, that thou mayest fall, &c. Imperf. Cadessi, cadessi, cades&e ; cadessimo, cadeste, cadessero i that I might fall, that thou mightest fall, &c. Second Imperf. Caderei, caderesti, I should fall. Infinitive, cadere. Gerund, cadendo. Participle, ca- duto, DOVE'RE, to owe. Dover e is conjugated through all its tenses like credere. It is irregular only in the present, by putting an e for an o : * devo, devi, deve ; dobbidmo, dovete, dtvono, and deb- bono: I owe, thou owest, he owes; we owe, yfr a fit per plum, quod potest fieri per pauciora. And it is in pursuance of this maxim, that I have reduced all the irre- gular verbs in ere short to one single rule; in order both to avoid the intricacy, and embarrassment of other grammars, and to smooth the way to the Italian language, which has hitherto been rendered difficult of access by unqualified teachers. These five verbs, conbscere, crescere, ndsctre, nvocere, romper e ; to know, to grow, to be bom, to hart, to break, form the preterperfect definite, and the participle, as fok lows. Preter-de'f. Participle. conobbi conosciuto. crebbi cre&ciulo. ndequi nuto. n&cqui nocewto. ruppl rot to. Generally speaking, all the other verbs ending in the in- finitive in ere short, form the preterperfect-deriuile in si, and the participle in so, to, or sto. t|-t Thougli this rule might suffice for all the preter- perfect definite of verbs terminated in ere short ; yet v.e mav also observe, that the same verbs may be terminated after thirteen different manners, which will make however but one and the same rule. * You will see in the terminations, which, are - placed Of the VERBS. m placed in direct lines, that there is a star at the end of some of them, and there are others without that mark. The star at the end is to show that those verbs make the participle in to ; the verbs that have no star make the par- ticiple in so, or in esso. X 125 1. 12$ 2. 129 3. 130 4. 131 5. r6. I Terminations of the f^erbs in crejliorf. THE verbs in ere, short, are terminated in the infinitive. In cere : as, mnccre, tbreere, cubeere. In dere : as, drdere, chiudere, ridere. Ingere: as, pidngere, spmgere, Itggeie. * In gliere: as, cog-Here, scibgliere, togliere. * In here : as, tr/diere, or Irarre, kc. In I ere: as, svtlkre. * In mere: as, imfrhnere, oppriniere. Preter- 132 «4 def. impressi, opprcssi. Participle, im presso; oppresso. 8. In nere: as, pbnere, riponerc. 129 9- 1° ndere: as, prCndere, rtndere, rlspbn dere, nascbndere. Participle, preso, r£so, ox rcn~ dido, rispbsto, nascbso, or nascbsto. f 10. In pere: as, rompere, makes in the perfect- 134 < derln. ri/ppi, rbtto in the participle. ill. In rare .- as, clrrere, concarrere. 135 12. latere: as, meitere, misi, messo, 13<> 13. In were: as, scrivere, vivere. % # Change all these terminations into si, and you will find the preterperfcct-definite of them all, in which consists the greatest irregularity : example, to find the preter-defi- nite of mncere, tor cere, drdrre, prendere, pidngere, rispbn- dere, do but change their terminations, cere, dere, gere, ndere, into si, and you will find, vinsi, torsi, drsi, prtsi 9 pidnsi, rispbsi. %* Observe, that the verbs written with tv*o gg's before the penultima, drop them, and double the s in the preterdefinite, and the t in the participle; ex- ample, Uggere, reggere, &c. To form the preterper- $ The ciphers in the margin refer to the pages where the verbs of a similar termination are conjugated, F -1» fe<* 124 / Of the VERBS. feet definite, we must change the termination ggere into ssi, and for the participle into tto, and we shall rind lessi, ressi, Utto, retto,&c. Take notice likewise, that the verbs terminating in gKere, always retain the /, and only lose giere in the preter-defmite : the same rule serves for the participle : example, cbgliere, scibgliere, sciegliere, tbgliere, &c. take from those words giere, there remains col, sciol, sciel, tbl ; and by adding si to them in the preter-definite, and in the participle to, we shall find, cblsi, sciblsi, scielsi, tblsi, folio, sciolto, scielto, tblto, &c. %* To conjugate these words with ease, remember that there are always three irregular persons, and three regular ones in the preter- definite. The three irregular persons are the first and third singular and the third plural, which are very easy to be formed, if we do but observe, that the first person is always terminated in i; vinsi, drsi, pidnsi; change i into e, and it is the third singular, v'mse, arse, pidnse; and by adding ro to the latter, it becomes the third plural, vin- sero, drscro, pidnsero ; and so of the rest. Example. presi, scrissi, f prese, scrisse, resi, lessi. J rese, Itsse, presero, scrissero, resero, lessero. The three regular persons are, the second singular, and the first and second plural. There is frequently more difficulty in finding out these than the irregular persons, because we confound one with the other. •■ Now the true way to avoid being mistaken in this point, is to remember that the second person singular of the preter- definite in all verbs, as well regular as irregular, is formed from the infinitive, by changing re into sti; as Vincere, vincesti, ardere, ardesti ; pidngere, piangesti ; except the verb esseret The first person plural is also formed from the infinitive, by changing re into mmo ; as, amdre, amdmmo ; vedere, vedemmo; teggere, leggemmo. The second person ^plural of the preterperfect defi- nite, is formed in all the verbs from the second of the singular, by changing its final i into e ; as, vincesti, vin- ccste ; ardesti, ardeste ; piangesti, piangeste. Thus we shall Of the VERBS. 125 shall find, vinti, vincesti, vinse ; vincemmo, vinceste, vin- sero ; drsi, ardesti, arse ; ardemmo, ardtste, arsero. Remember to peruse these observations carefully, as being very necessary for conjugating the irregular verbs. *«* We must also remember, that the verbs terminated in here and vere, as, trdhere,scrivere, double the letter * in the preterperfect definite, and the letter t in the parti- ciple : example, trdssi, scrissi, tr&tto, scritto. The above rule would be sufficient for learning the it- regularity of the verbs in ere, short; yet, for the greater conveniency of scholars, I have thought proper to explain these thirteen terminations more at large, in order to ob- viate all the difficulties that may occur. Of the Verbs terminated in cere. '"PHE verbs in cere form the preter-definite, by changing ■ cere into si, and the participle into to: as, Cuocere, to bake. Present, cubco, cubci, cubce; cno- cidmo, cuocete, cubcono : I bake, thou bakest, he bakes ; we bake, you bake, they bake. Imp. Cuocvvo, vi, va ; vdmo, vdte,vano: I did bake, thou didst bake, he did bake, &c. * Preter def. Cbssi, cuoctsti, cbsse ; cuoce'mmo, cuoceste, cbssero: I baked, thou didst bake, he baked, &c. Preterp. Ho cbtto, I have baked. Preterp. Avevo cbtto, I had baked, v Future. Cuocerb, rod, rd ; remo, rete, rdnno ; I shall bake, thou shalt bake, he shall bake, &c. Imper. Cubci, cubca: cuocidmo, cuoctte, cubcano\ x bake thou, let him bake, &c. Opt. che cubca. Imperf. che cuocessi. Second Imp. cuocerti. Infinitive, cuocere. Participle, *cotto. Gerund, cubcendo* . Condtj'cere, or condurre, to conduct. Present condu- co, conduci ; conduce, conducidmo, conducete, cenducono: I conduct, thou conductest, he conducts; we conduct, &c. Imperf. Conductvo, vi, va, &c. I did conduct. * Preter-definite, Condussi, conducesti, condusse; condti- E 5 cemmo, 12(5 Of the VERBS. eemnuf, conduceste, condussero: I conducted, th nite, conbbbiy conoscesti, cdnbbbe ; conoscemmo, conoceste, eonbbbero : I knew, &c. Imperative, conbsci, conbsca, &c. know thou, let him know, &c. Optative, che conbsca. Imperfect, che conoscessi. Se- cond imperfect, conoscerti. Participle, *cono'sciuto. Cre'sco, cresci, cresce; crescidmo, crescete, crescono : 1 grow, thou growest, he grows : we grow, you grow, they grow. Imperfect, crescevo, I did grow. Preter-definite, crebbi, crecesti, crebbe. Future, crescerb, I shall grow. Imperative, Cresci, cresca, &c. grow thou, let hint grow, &c. Optative, c he crhca. Imperf. che crescessi. Second im- perf. cresce\ti, I should grow, &c. Participle, *cresciido. Na'scehe and nuoccre make the preterperfect definite in qui. Na'scere, to be born. Present, nasco, nasri, nasce ; nascidnw, nascete, ndscono: I am born, thou art born, he is bora ; we are bom, you are born, they are born. Im- perfect, nascvvo, I was born. Preter-deiinice, nacqui, nascestiy ndcque ; nascemmo, nasctste, ndcqutro : I was born. Future, nascerb, I shall be born. Optative, che ndsca. Imperfect, che nascessi. Second imperfect, nascerei. Participle, *nato. Nuocere, to hurt. Present, nubco, nnbci, nubce ; nuocidmo, nuocete, nubcono: I hurt, &c. Imperfect, nuocevo, I did hurt. Preter- definite, * nbcqui, nuoctsti, nubcque ; nuocemmo, nuoceste, nbcqutro : I did hurt, or 1 hurt, &c. Imperative, Nubci, nubca, &c. hurt thou, let him hurt, &c. Optative, che nubca. Imperfect, che nuocessi. Second imperf. nuocerzi, Participle, *nuociu to. G er mid, nuoccn do. F £ Of 12S Of the VERBS. Of the Verbs in dere. HPHE verbs in dere form the preterperfect definite in si, and the participle in so : as, A'rdere, to burn. Present, drdo, drdi, drde ; ardid- mo, ardete, drdono: I burn, thou burnest, &c. Imperfect, ardevo, I did burn. * Preter-definite, drsi, ardesti, arse; ardemmo, ardeste, drsero: I burnt, he burnt, &c. Future, arderb, I shall burn, &c. Imperative, drdi, drda; ardidmo, ardete, drdano: burn ibou, let him burn, &c. Optative, che drda, drda, drda; ardidmo, ardidte, dr- dano: that I may burn, &c. Imperfect, che ardessi. Second imperfect, arderei. Participle, *drso, burnt. Ge- rund ardendo : burning, or in burning. I shall put no more tenses of the verbs than the present, the preterperfect definite, and the participles, none but these being irregular, * ' ■ Chiu'dere, to shut ; chiudo, *chiuso, chiusi. And so of the rest ; except, Chie'dere; to ask: which makes in the preter-def. * chiesi, and in the participle, * chiesto, and not chieso. Pe'rdere, makes in the preter-definite, perdei, or per- dtiti and *persi; in the participle, perduto, and *perso, Ri'dere, to laugh; rido y *risi, *riso. Rodere, to gnaw; rbdo, *rosi, *rbso. Observe, that all these verbs have the preter-definite in ei, and in etti. Nay, it is more elegant to say, cMudei, perdei, &c. than chiusi, persi, &c. This is to avoid the ambiguity that might arise between chiusi, persi, &c. the first person of the preter-definite, and chiusi, persi, &c, nouns adjective. The participle of the verbs in dere, short, is always ter- minated in so. Except the verbs chiedere and pet dere, which make chiesi, and persi, chieduto, or chiesto, and perduto. %* You perceived, after the conjugation of the verb. credere, that cedere is a regular verb ; its compounds are not ; for they form the preter-definite in essi, and the par- ticiple in esso. Example : Succe- Of the VERBS. 129 SucCe DeRe, to succeed, succedo, * successi, * successo. Conce'deRe, to agree, or yield to ; concedo, * concessi, * conctsso. I apprehend that those two verbs, as well as perdere, to lose, are regular and irreguiar, since we may likewise say, succedti, succedetti, succeduto ; concede!, concedttti, con- cediito ; perdei, perdetti, perduto : and in like manner all the compounds of the verbs cedere and perdere. Of the Verbs in endere. nPHE verbs in endere form the preter-definite in ei and 51, and the participle in eso : example, Atten'dere, to attend ; attendei, * attest, * etteso* Pre'ndere, to take ; prendei, * presi, % preso. , Re'nde re, to render ; >rendei, resi, * mo, This verb also forms the participle in uto, as renduto, The latter is better than reso. Fendere, to cleave, and pendere, to bang, are regular, In the preter-definite they wake fendti, or fendetti, pendei 9 or pendetti, in the participle fenduto and penduto* Take notice nevertheless, that the compounds of those two verbs are irregular, and they make the preter-definite in est, the participle in eso, like dij endere, to defend, * difesi, * difeso : apphidere, to hand ; or fix up, * ap~ pesi, * appeso, &e. Of the Verbs in gere. HTHE verbs in gere make the preter-definite in si, and the participle in to ; as, Ci'ngere, to gird ; cingo, preter-definite, * cinsi, cingesti, chisel Participle, * cinto. Spi'ngere, to shove ; * spingo, spinsi, * spinto* Po'rgere, to offer; porgo, * porsi,* porto U'ngere, to anoint; ungo, * imsi, * imto, Spar'gere, to sprinkle. Present, spdrgo* Preter- definite, spar si. Participle, * spdrso. To which we. may also add estinguere, estinguo, * es* tinsi, * e&tinlo. E'rgere, to erect ; ergo, * ersi, * irto* All 130 Of the VERBS. All these verbs have the preter-definite in ei and etti \ but regularly their participle is in to. Immtrgerc, dispb'- gere, ttrgtre, an obsolete verb, and some others of the like sort, have it in so. Both those participles are formed of the first syllable of the present indicative joined to the syllable to or so. For instance, of c'mgere we make c t nto, ©f sydrgere, sparso. If the infinitive of those verbs are accented on the second syllable, the participle is then formed of the two first syllables, added to to or so. Thus of immergere you form immerso, of disgiungere, disgiunto, &c * # * Remember that the participle of the verb spargere, is sparto, and sparso, not spargiido, except in poetry for the sake of rhyme, or to serve the measure of the verse. And even there we ought to use it as little as possible. Observe, that the verbs that have a vowel before gen must be written with two gg\ and that they double tht letter s in the preter-definite : as, Friggere, to fry ; friggo,frksi,friggtsti, Scc.fritto. Leggere, to read; Itggo, Ussi, leggcsti, Sec. Parlk'- ple, let to Take'care you do not say frigiuto, or leggiuto* *** Of ^ ie Vtrhs in gliere. "VOU are to observe that besides the irregularity in the preter-definite, and the participles of verbs end- ing in gliere, they are also contracted or abridged in the infinitive, and in the future and second imperfect tenses ; as, Cog li ERE, or corre, and cor, to gather. Future corrb. Second imperfect, correi. The verbs in gliere, change their terminations into /si, to form the preter-definite; and in Ho, to make the par- ticiple. The conjugating of cogliere, cotsi, colto, will serve as a rule for those verbs that are of the same termi- nation. %* Indicative, present, colgo, and coglio, I gather; cogli, coglie; cogliamo, cogliete, colgono, and cogliono. "Imper- fect, coglievo, I did gather. * Preter-perfect-definite, coh/, ceglUsii, Of the VERBS. 131 cogtihie, cblse, cogliemmo, &c* I gathered. Future, corro, &e. I will or shall gather. * Imperative, Cbgli, cblga, or cbglia ; cogtiamo, cog- liete, cSgliano, or cblgano : let him gather. * Optative, che cbglia, or cblga, &c. Imperfect, * che cogliessi, Second imperfect, correi. Participle * col to. Tog'l i e r e, or tbrre. Present, *tblgo or tbglio, Pre- ter-definite, * tblsi, togliesti, &c. Future, * torro. Optative, * Volga. Imperfect, togliessi, * Second im- perfect, torrei. Participle, tblto. Scio'gliere, or sciorre, to loosen. Present, * $ciolg& % or scioglio. Preterperfect definite, * sciolsi, scioglitstu Participle, sclolto. Sci/gliere, to chuse, is not abridged in the infinitive;, like the above verbs: it forms in the present, *scelgo, scegli^ srtglie ; sceglidmo, seeglitte, scelgono. ' * Preterperfect- de finite, set hi, * Participle, sctlto. *** Qf tf te Verbs in here. TF there were any such tiling in the Italian tongue as* a verb terminated in here it would be trahere, to draw, with its several compounds. But the present orthography is to write them without an h* This verb is also contracted in the infinitive. Of trdere, we form trdrre or trdr. Trdssi is the pre- ter-deflnite, and trdito, the participle. * Indicative, present, trdggo, or trdo, trai, trde ; t rag- gliamo or trqjdmo, tract e, trdggono,-and trdono, I draw, &c. Imperfect, tratvo. * Preterperfect-definite, trdssi, traedi^ Sec, * Future, trarrb. * Imperative, trdi, trdgga, and ink; tragghidmo, or trajfimo, tratte, trdggono. % Optative, che trdgga, or trda. Imperfect, che traesiu * Sec. imp. trarrCi. Pi-.rticiple, trdito. Gerund, tratndo* Observe the same rule in its compounds. Contrdere, attrdere, distrdere, &c. make contrdrre, ailrdrre, distrdrre, ice. They form the preter-definile in ssi, as contrdssi, *ttrdssi> 132 Of- the VERBS. attrdssi, dUtr&m, and the participle in to, as, contrdtto, attrdtto, dutrdtto, &c. O Of the Verbs in lere. F all the verbs in le e, there is only the verb svellere, "to pluck, that change e into st, to form the pre- terperfect -definite, and into to, for the participle. Pre- sent, * svehi, svelltdi Future, svellerd. Participle, svelio. Of the Verbs in mere. pRE'MERE, siimere, and their compounds, are the only regular verbs for this rule. Premere, to press. Present, premo. Preterperfect-defi- nite, *pressi and premei, or premetti. Participle, pre- miito* Its compounds in imere make the preterperfect-definite in ssi, and the participle in sso; as, Opprimere, * oppresn, oppresso. Jmp- Y changing ondere into si, or re into i, as in the case of •^ regular verbs, you form the preterperfect definite. The participle is in osto, uso, or oso. Rispo'nd ere, to answer. Present, rispbndo, rispbndi, rispbnde; rispondidmo, rispondUe, rispbndono. Imperfect, nspondevo. * Preterperfect-definite, rispbsi, rispondesti, yispbse ; rispondemmo, rispondeste, risposero. Future, rispondero. Imperative. Rispbndi,rispbnda; rispondidmo, rispon- dele, rispbndano. Optative, cherisponda t da,da; rispondidmo t rispondid'e, rispbndano. Imperfect, che rispondessi. Second imper- fect, rispondertu * Participle, rispbsto. Nasc'ondere, to hide. Present, nascendo. * Preter- perfect definite, nascbsu Particiciple^wiscosJo, or nascbso. The 134 Op the VERBS. The verb f'ondere, to melt, does not make the preter- definite in osi, but in usi or ei, You must therefore say fondti, or fusty fondest r,fondc, or fuse ■ ; fondtmmo, fon- dtste, fonder ono, or / user o. * # * Note, that Jusi, fuse, &c. is nol used at present, except in compounds ; as in the verb covfbndere, diffbndere, &c. which in the preter-defimte makes confusi, and confon- dti\ diffiisi, diffondei, &c. and in the participle, confuse, diffusa, &c. Though in the preter-deflnile we meet with confusi, and diffiisi, yet it is more adviseable to. make use of confondei, and diffondeL This is because of the ambiguity in those words, when they form the first person of the preter-defi- nite, and when they are nouns adjective, as we have ob- served of chiesi and persu The participle of the verb fbndere makefiisoondfondiito* The last is the best ; the other is used only for compound verbs. To'ndere, to shear, does not make tcsi, but tondei, ton- dhti, tonde. Participle, tonduto, and not tbso, the latter being abridged from tesdio, which comes from tke verb to- sare. Of the Verbs in pere. "D oMPERE, to break, is, with its compounds, the only irregular verb of thi3 termination ; in the present it forms rbmpo, rbmpi, rbmpe ; rompiamo, rompete, rbmpono. Imperfect, rompevo. * Preterperfect-definite, ruppi, or rompt:i , rempesti, ruppe, or rompv ; rompemmo, rompeste, ruppero, or romptTono, Future, rowperb. * Participle, rotto. Of the Verbs in rere. £*6RRERE, with its compounds, to run, is also the only verb that ends in rere short ; it makes the preter-defi- nile in si, and the participle in so ; as, Corre re, to run. Present, cbrro, cbrri, cbrre ; corriamo, corrtte, cbrrono. Imperfect, correvo. Preteq^erfect-de» finite, Pret. cbrsi, corresti, cbrse; eorrCmmo, eorreste, cbr~ sera. Future, correrb. Imperative, cbrri, corre, &c. Optative* Of the VERBS. 135 Optative, the corra, cbrra, corra ; corriamo, corridte, $brrano. Imperfect, corrzssi. Second imperfect, corrt'?, corrtsti, &c. * Participle, cbrso. Gerund, corrtndo. Asgorrere, to ruu to. Preter-defm. accbrsi. Parti- ciple, accbrso ; and all the other compounds in the same manner. Of the Verbs in tere. \/Te'ttere, to put, does not make in the preter-deflnife m&ssi, but mist, mettesti, mise; meftcmmo, metttstc, m'tsero. I put, thou puttest, &c. Participle, mtsso ; we sometimes meet with mtssero, promtssero ; but it is more in verse than in prose. Prome'ttere, to promise, makes promtssi, and pro- mhi. Participle, promtsso. Riplet'tere, to reflect, is irregular only in the participle. We do not say in the preter-definite rejless?, but refletlei. The participle makes refiettuto ; but this word is grown obsolete. It is customary now to use the participle of the verb fare, joined to the word rijiessibne. As, having reflected, avendo fdtto rijiessibne, I have re- flected upon that, io ho fdtto rejlessibne sbpra do, SfC. Riscuotere, risebssi, riscosso, to receive. Scuotere, to shake, makes *scbssi, sebsso. Percuotere, to strike, makes, perebssi, percotei, perebsso. Of the Verbs in ucere. '"FHE verbs producer e, adducere, riducere, inducere, sedtU cere, conducere, deducere, trcducere, which in English •ignify, to produce, to allege, io reduce, to persuade, to se- duce, to conduct, to deduct, to translate, are also contracted m the infinitive. We say produrre, addurre, &c. Their preter-definite kprodussi, addussi; and their participle is terminated in otto, as, prodbtto, addbtto, &c. %* Note, That we likewise say, addiir, produr, Sec. which makes a third infinitive. But in prose, we; must make use of that in itrre. The other two are proper only" for verse, though there are some authors of reputatiou that have only used them in prose. Th& 136 Of the VERBS. The other verbs, terminating in ucere, do not change the infinitive. Therefore we must take care to say rilucere, but never rilurre, and so of the rest. ^0 Of the Verbs in vere. form the preterperfect definite of verbs in vere, you must change vere into ssi, or si. The participles are different. Movere, to move. Preter-definite, mbssu Participle, mbssa. It is more usual to write mubvere than movere. But we do not put the u in the preter-definite, nor in the participle : therefore we must say mbssi and mbsso. And the same holds good in regard to it's compounds ; for instance, *prombssi,prombssQ; ccmmbssi,commbsso, &c. All those verbs likewise form the preter-definite in ei, as, promovei, commovei. In that case, you make use of the u and write, promuovei, commuovei, &c. Scrivere, to write ; scrissi, scrivei, scritto. VIvere, to live; *vtssi, vivesti, visse. Participle, vissiito, or vivuto. It makes also vivetti in the preter- perfect-definite. Assolvere, to absolve, having a consonant before vere, makes in the preterpeifect-detinite assolsi, assolvtsti, assblse, &c. or assolvetti. Ris6lvere, to resolve. Present, risblvo, Preterper- fect definite, *risblsi, risolvesti ; or risolvei, or risolvetti. Participle, risoluto. *„* Rcmon»i>or tUtti tht optative of verbs, ending in ere and in ire, is forced of the first person indicative, by changing o into a ; as, vedere, vedo, veda ; scrivere, scrivo, scriva ; cogliere, ctlgo, cblga; credere, credo, creda; dor- mire, dbrmo, dbrma ; sentire, stnto, senta ; Jinire,Jinisco, fin'isca ; dire, dco, dka. And so of all the other verbs, except tssere, saptre, avere, and dovere. Irregulars of the Third Conjugation. IN the third conjugation there are six verbs more ir- regular than the rest, viz. dire, to say ; morire, to die ; satire, to ascend ; udire, to hear ; ventre, to come : uscire, to go out. DIRE, Of the VERBS. 137 DI'RE, to say. I apprehend the verb dire is only an abridgment of di- cere, which was used by the ancients. I give it however a place among the irregulars of the third conjugation, in or- der to comply with fe custom of other grammarians. * Present. Dico, did, dice; dicidmo, dite, dkono, I say, thou sayest, he says ; we say, you say, they say. Imperfect, Dkvw, vi, va ; vamo, vdte, vano. * Preterperfect-defmite. Dissi,dktsti,disse,', dktmmo, diceste,dissero : I said, thou didst say, he said ; we said, you suid, they said, Preterperfect. Ho dttto, I have said. Future. Dirb, I shall say. * Imperative. Di, dka ; dicidmo, dite, dkano ; say thou, let him say; let us say, say you, let them say. * Optative. Che dka, dka ; dicidmo, dicidte, dkano : that I may say, thou may'st say, he may say, &c. Imperfect. Che dicessi. Second imperfect, direi. * Participle, detto. Gerund, dicendo. MORl'RE, to die. Morlrehzs no irregularity, but by making the present tense in two different manners. * Indicative ; present. Mbro, mori, more ; morilimo, mo- rite, mbrono: or mubjo, mori, more ; muojdmo, morite, mub- jono : I die, thou diest, he dies: we die, you die, they die. Imperfect. Morivo, vu va ; vamo, vdte, vano. Preierperfcct-definite. Morj, moristi, mori ; morimmo, moriste, morirono, and not 7tibrsi, which comes from mbrdtre. Preterperfect. Sono mvrto, I am dead. Future. Morirb, I shall or will die. * Imperative. Mori, mora, or imibja; moriamo, or muoja- mo, morite, mprano, or mubjano : die thou, let him die, &c. * Optative and subjunctive. Che mora, or muoja, mora ; moriamo, moridte, morano, or muojano. Im- 1SS OF THE VERBS. Imperfect, die mortssi. Second imperfect, morirei. * Participle, motto. Gerund, morendo. SALI'RE,*o go up, Salire, is irregular, like morirei because its present tense is formed two ways. * Indicative present. Sdlgo, or sdglio, sail, sale ; sagli- &mo, or salghidmo, sal'ite, sdlgono, or sdgliono : I go up, &c. Imperfect, salivo, &c. Preter-definite. Salj, satisfy salt ; or salimmo, saliste, salirono : I went up. Future, saliro, I shall go up. * Imperative. Sdlghi, saiga, or sdglia ; saglidmo, •salite, sdlgano : go up thou, let him go up ; &c. * Optative, Che saiga, or saglia, saiga, saiga, &c. Imperative. Che salissi, salissi, salisse. Second Imperfect. Saliret, salirtsti. Participle, sal'do. Gerund, saltndo. Take care you do not say sdli and saliamo, instead of salghi and saglidmo, or salghidmo ; because the former words come from the verb saldre, and not from salire, to mount. V VI' RE, to hear. The irregularity of udire is only in trie present tense, by changing u into o, in the first, second, and third person singular, and in the third person plural. * Indicative, present. O'do, bdi, ode ; udidmo, udite, odono ; I hear, thou nearest, he hears ; we hear, you hear, they hear. Imperfect. Udivo, vi, va ; vdmo, ndte, vano. Preterperfect-def. Udj, udisti, udl ; udimmo, udtste i udirono ; I heard, &c. Future, Udirb, rdi, rd ; remo, rete, rdnnc : I shall or will hear, thou shalt hear, he shall hear. * Imperative. Odi, bda ; udidmo, vdite, bdano. * Optative. Che bda, that I may hear. * Imperfect. Che ud'issi, that I might hear. Second imperfect, udirei. Participle, uddo. Gerund, Aidhido. V Take Of the VERBS. 139 * # * Take notice that you are never to say odidmo for itdidmo; odidmo being the first person plural of the present indicative of the verb odidre, to hate. VENIRE, to com*. * Indicative, present. Vengo, vieni, viene; veniamo, or venghidmv, venite, vengono: I coine, thou comest, he comes ; we come, you come, they come. Imperfect. Vemvo y I did come. * Preterperfect-def. Venni, venisti, vtnne ; venimmo, vcniste, vennero : I came, thou earnest, he came ; we came, you came, they came. Preterperfect, sbno venuto. Future, verro, I shall come. * Imperative. Vieni, vtnga^ veniamo, venite, vtngano : come thou, let him come ; let us come, &c. * Optative, present, che venga. Imperfect, che venissu Second imperfect, verrei. Participle, venuto. Gerund^ ventndo. All the compounds of venire, as pervenire, rivenire, are conjugated in the same manner ; and so are all the other compounded verbs, USCrRE, to go out. Uscire is irregular, only by changing u into t m the pre- sent, viz. in the first, second, and third person singular, and the third plural. * Indicative present. JE'sco, esci, tsce ; uscidmo, uscite 9 escono : I go out, thou goest out, he goes out ; we go out, you go out, they go out. Imperfect. Uscivo, Preterperfect-def. Uscj, uscisti, uscl ; uscimmo, usciste, uscirono : I went out, thou wentest out, he went out ; we went out, &c. Preterperfect. Sonb uscito, I am gone out. Future. Usciro, uscirdi, uscira, &c. * Imperative. Esci, hca ; uscidmo, uscite, tscano* * Optative. Che hca, esca, hca ; uscidmo, uscidte, tscano. Imperfect, che usdssi. Second imperfect, uscirti. Participle, uscito* Gerund, usctndo. Aprire $ 140 Of the VERBS. Aprire, to open, makes in the preterperfect-defiuite aprj, or apersi. Participle, aperto. Ceprire, to cover, makes in the preterperfect-definite coprj, or coper si. Participle, coperto. The third conjugation of the verbs terminated in the in- finitive in ire has another sort of verbs irregular only in the present, which are formed from the infinitive, by changing ire, into isco ; as, ardire, to dare, of which I have given the following conjugation, to serve as a rule for the rest. Of the Verbs in isco. TN order to lay down a general rule for the verbs that have the termination /see in the present tense, observe, that some of them do not follow the verb ard'isco ; and they differ only from the verb sentire, in the preterperfect- demrite, and in the participle. They are as follow: Present, Aprire, Apparhe, Coprire, Comparire, Ojferire, Prqferire, Soffrire, SeppelUre, apro apparisco, copra, compamco, offerisco, proferiscc, f sqffro, $? 7 \sojfrisco, J Preterperf. Partcip. aprj, & apersi, aperto. fj apparj, fy ctp-1 i parsi, apparso. coprj fy copersi, copetro. C comparj Sf conn- 1 , 1 parsi, l^parso offer), $ ffrsi, offerto. '-Iproferto. \ firsi, s °ffrj> soffersi seppellisco, seppelj, sofferio, C sepolto$sep- \ pellito. I have made a collection of the regular verbs in ire, which are conjugated like seniire, as you have already seen in this chapter, page 100, where we treated of the third conjugation of verbs. Ail the other verbs not contained in that and the preceding collection, form the present in isco, and ought to be conjugated like ardisco* In this collection there are even some verbs, that Of the VERBS. 141 that are also irregular ; as, consentire, mentire, partire, when the latter signifies, to divide. We meet with consentisco, mentisco, and partisco. When the latter sig- nifies to share, I should prefer partisco to pdrto. On the contrary, when it denotes to go away, you must say pdrto, and not partisco. Bollire, convertire, soffrire, also make the first person of the present indicative in isco. *«* Before you read over radisco, remember the two remarks concerning the irregularity of the present tense. The first teaches you, that the irregularity of the pre- sent indicative is continued in the present imperative and subjunctive. By the secon4 you find, that the first and second per- sons plural of the present tense are never irregular. ARDI' RE, to dare. Indicative, present. Ar disco, ar disci, ardisce ; ardidmo 9 ardite, ardiscono : I dare. N. B. I am of opinion that we ought to say, abbidmo ardire, and not ardidmo. The lat- ter seems proper only for the verb ardere, to burn ; for ar- didmo implies we burn. Neither can we say, ardischidmo, as this is not an Italian word : the same is applicable to any of the persons, which may be confounded with those of the verb drdere, to burn. Imperfect. Ardivo, I did dare ; ardivi, va ; &c, Preterperfect-def. Ardj, ardisti, ardl ; ardimmo, ar* diste, ardirono ; I durst, &c. Preterperf. Ho ardito. Future, Ardiro. Imperative. Ardisci, ardisca ; abbidmo ardire, ardis^ cano ; dare thou, let him dare, let us dare, &c. Optative. Che ardisca, ardisca, ardisca ; che abbidmo ardire, che abbiate ardire, ardiscano : that I may dare, thou may'st dare, he may dare, &c. Imperfect, ardissi. Second imperf. ardirei. Participle, ardito. > Gerund, avtndo ardire. Conjugate the following verbs after the same manner. G Abbolire 9 142 Of the VERBS. Abboltre, Abborrire, Arrichire, Arrossire, Bandire, JEtianchire, Capire, Colpire, Compatire, Concepirey Digerire, Eseguire, Finire, Fiorire, Gradire, Impazzire, Incredulity JLanguire, Patirey Spedire, Traitire, Ubbidire, Unirey iSCO j ito m iscoj ito iscoj ito iscoj ito iscoj ito isco ) ito iscoj ito iscoj ito iscoj ito iscoj ito iscoj ito iscoj ito^ iscoj ito iscoj ito iscoj ito iscoj ito iscoj ito iscoj ito iscoj ito iscoj ito iscoj ito iscoj Ito iscoj ito abolish. abhor. enrich. blush. banish. whiten. comprehend. strike. agree, or bear with. conceive. digest, to *{ execute, j finish. | blossom, or bloom. approve of. grow mad. grow cruel. languish. suffer. make haste. obey. betray. unite. ** Note, that the poets do not always observe this irregularity, for they indifferently say offro and offerisco, miigge, and mugisie; Idngue, and languisce ; fere and/e- risce; as may be seen in Pastor Fido, and in Tasso's Aminta. Mugge in mdndro V armento. Pastor Fido. Qvalarme ftroy qual dia vita, quale, Sdniin ritorni in vita. There are also some verbs that end inure, and in ire: as, Cclordre y colorire, to colour. Jnanimdre, inanimire, to animate. Inacerb&re, inactrbirc, to sharpen. Indurdre, indvrire, to harden. The poets also frequently use the verbs ire, and girt, instead of anddre ; which is all I had to say in regard to irregular verbs. b Of Of the VERBS. U3 Of the Verb ire. •"THE following tenses are all that occur in good writers. Indicative, imperfect. Tva, he did go ; ivano, or ivan, they did go. Future, irb, irdi, ira\ iremo, irite y iranno, or irdn. Imperative, Ite, go you. Infinitive, Pre, or ir, to go. Participle, I'to, gone. The other tenses are not used. Of the Verb gire. There are no more than the following tenses in use • Present, Glte, you go. Imperfect, Givo, givi, giva, or gia; givdmo, givdte, givano: I did go, &c. Preter-def. Gist ?, gi, or gib ; g'mmo, giste, girono. Imperative, Gite, go you. Optative, imperfect. Che gissi, gissi, gisse ; gi$$imo 9 giste, gissero: that I might go. Infinitive. Gire, or gir. Participle, gito. We have still something to say in regard to verbs neuter, reciprocal, and impersonal. Of the Verbs Neuter. HPHE Verbs Neuter are those which in their compound tenses are seldom or never conjugated with the verb tssere, to be ; as, / speak, I sleep, f tremble, &c. we may indeed say, / have spoken, I have slept, I have trembled ;. but not, / am spoken, &c. But to express myself more properly, verbs neuter are those that make a complete sense of themselves, and do not govern any case after them, like the verbs active ; for instance, I enter, I tremble ; io 6ntro, io trtmo. Take notice, however, that we meet with some verbs neuter, which may govern an accusative ; as, io vivo una lunga vita, io dbrmo un lungo sonno, io corro un lungo cor so, &c. G2 It H4 Of the VERBS. It is necessary to be acquainted with the nature of a verb neuter, in order to prevent mistakes or errors in the participles, as may be seen in the Second Part, where we treat of the Syntax of Participles. Of Reciprocal Verbs, '"jpHE name of Reciprocal Verbs is given to such as are conjugated through all their tenses with the pro- nouns conjunctive, mi, ti, si, ci, vi, after the same manner as dolere is conjugated in the irregulars of the second con- jugation : example, Indicative present. Mipento, tipehti, si pente; cipen- tidmo, vi pentite, si pent ono : I repent, &c. Imperf. Mipentivo, tipentivi, sipentiva; cipentivdmo, vipentivate, si pentivano : I did repent, &c. . Preterperfect-def. Mi pentj, ti pentisti, si penti; ci pentimmo, vi pentiste, si pentirono : I repented, &c. Preterperfect-def. Mi sbno pentito, I have repented. Future. Mi peniiro, I shall repent. Imperative. Phititi tu, pentasi egli ; pentidmoci not, pentitevi voi, pentansi eg lino. Subjunctive. Che mi p&nta, that I may repent. Indicative, present. Miricbrdo, ti ricbrdiysi ricbrda ; and so of the rest. * # * Note, all the verbs active may become reciprocals : example, I love myself, io m'dmo. Thou lovest thyself, tu t'dmi. He loves himself, egli s'dma. We love ourselves, not ci amidmo. You love yourselves, voi v'amate. They love themselves, eglino s'amano. And so of all the other tenses, and all the other verbs. Yet we are to take notice, that the pronouns mi, ti si, vi, which gave the reciprocality to the verbs, may be placed either before or after it ; but in the impe- Of the VERBS. 145 imperative, infinitive, gerund, and participle, they ought to be placed after the verb : example, dmami, love me ; amdndomi, loving me ; amdrsi, to love oneself: amdtosi 9 loved by oneseLf; and so in all the other verbs. Of Impersonal Verhs. r r , HERE are three sorts of verbs impersonal, which have only the third person singular. The first are properly impersonals of themselves ; as, Accade, it happens. Bdsta, it is enough, or it suffices. Bisbgna, it must, or it behoves. Piove, it rains. Tubna, it thunders. The second are derived from verbs active, preceded by the participle si, which renders them impersonals ; as s'dma? they love ; si dice, they say. The third, which have a great affinity with reciprocal verbs, are conjugated with the pronouns-conjunctive, rrii, ii, gli, or le, ci, vi ; as, mi duble, ti duble, gli duble, &c» The impersonal verbs of themselves are, Accade, it happens. Avviene, it falls out. Bast a, it is enough. Bisbgna, it must. Grdndina, it hails, JVevica, it snows. Ndn occbrre, it is not necessary. Pare, it seems. Piove, it rains. Lampeggia, it lightens. Tubna, it thunders; and the like, which are conjugated with the third person singular of each tense ; as, Indicative, present. Bisbgna, it must, or it behoves. Imperfect. Bisogndva, it did behove. Preterperfect-def. Bisogno, it behoved. Future. Bisognerd, it shall or will behove. G 3 Optative, 146 Of the VERBS. Optative. Che bisbgni, that it may behove. Imperfect. Che bisogndsse, that it might behove, Second imperfect. Bisognerebbe, it should behove. Infinitive. Bisogndre, to behove. The participle si, which composes the second sort of impersonal verbs, is placed indifferently before or after the verbs; as si dice, or dicesi, they say ; sdma, or amdsi, they love. -In the like manner all the verbs active may become impersonal. They are conjugated with the third person singular and plural ; as, Present. Amasi, or s'dma: s'dmano, or dmansi, they love. Imperfect. S'amdva, or amdvasi : s'amdvano, or amdvansi, they did love. f4-f In regard to these verbs, take notice, that when the noun that follows them is in the singular number, you must put the verb in the singular ; if the noun be in the plural, you put the verb in the plural; example, They praise the captain, si loda U capitano. They praise the captains, si lodano i capitdni. They see a man, si vede uriubmo. They see men, si vedono itomini. %* We must also take notice, when the participle si is put after a verb that is accented, the letter 5 is doubled, and the accent dropped : example, Fdssi, for si fa, they do. Dirdssi, for si dird, they will say. The third sort of impersonal verbs are such as are conjugated with the pronouns personal, nil, ti, gli, or ?e, ci, vi, lorOy with the third person singular: example, Indicative present. Mi dispidce, I am displeased, or it displeases me. Ti dispidce t thou art displeased. Gli or le displace, he is displeased, or she is displeased. Ci displace, we are displeased. Vi dispiuce, you are displeased. Displace loro, they are displeased. Tmperfect. Mi dkpiacpva, 1 was displeased. Preter-def. Mi dispideque, I was displeased. Future. Mi dispiacerd, I shall be displeased. Optative, Of the VERBS. 147 Optative. Che mi dispiaccia, that I may be displeased. Imperfect. Che mi dispiacesse, That I were displeased. Second Imperfect. Mi dispiacerebbe, I should be dis- pleased. Conjugate after the same manner, M'accdde, it happens to me. M'aggrada, it agrees with me. M'aviene, it happens to me. Mi bisbgna, it behoves me. Miduble, I am ill or it grieves me. M'occbrre, it happens to me. Mi pare, it seems to me. Mi pidce, it pleases me. Mi rmcresce, it displeases me. Mi sovviene, I rememher. Many of those impersonal verbs have the third person singular and plural ; as, My leg pains me, la gdmba mi duble. I have sore eyes, mi dbgliono gli bcchi. Your coat appears new to me, il vbstro vestito mi pare nno vo. Your shoes seem to me too long, le vbstre scdrpe mi pdjono troppo lunghe. How to express, there is, there was. CT'HERE is, there was, are expressed by the help of the Italian particle ci, which answers to the French par- ticle y, and is sometimes an adverb that denotes the place where we are ; as, Since I am in this place, I will dine in it, or at it ; giacche sbno qui, ci pranzero. But mentioning a place where we are not, we must use vi ; as, I have been in England, but I will never go thither again, sbno-stato in Jnghilterra^na non vi tornerbpiu. But there is this difference between the Italian ci, and the French y : that whereas the latter is used in speaking of time, as, il y a un an, it is a year since ; the former is not ; as e un anno, or un' dnno fa: sbno due mesi, or due mesi ft. And so of all the. tenses, putting the verb, G 4 csstre, 148 • Of the VERBS. issere, to be, in the third person singular or plural, accord- ing to the number in which we express ourselves. Yei for the conveniency of beginners, I will conjugate this impersonal verb c % c'ere> &c. there is, there was, there has been, &c. through all its tenses, and point out its use in mentioning a place. Conjugation of the Impersonal Verb essere. Ci is changed into vi when you speak of different places? but mentioning time, you must drop the ci and w. Singular. Plural. Ind. pres. There is, c% There are, ci sono, or vi or v'e. sono. Imperfect. There was, There were, c'erano. c*era. Preter-def. There was, There were, cifurono* eifit. Preterp. There has been/ There have been, ci sons c'e stdto. stdti. Preterplup. There had The same, c'erano stdti. been, c'era stdto. Future. There shall be, The same, ci sardnno. ci sard. Imper. Let there be, The same, sianci. siaci. Opt That there may be, The same, che ci skno. che ci sia. Imperf. That there were, The same, che ci fSssero. che ci fosse. Sec. Imp. There would The same, ci sartbbero. be, ci sarebbe. Preter-perf. That there bad been, che ci or vi si& stdto, or che ci sidno stdti, or vi sidno stdti. Preterpluperf. If there had been, se ci, or vif6sse stdto, or ct or vijossero stdti. That there had been, che vi Of the VERBS. US vi fosse stdto, or che vifbssero stdti. There would have been, ci sartbhe stato, or vi sarebbero stati. Future. When there has or shall have been, quando vi sard stdto, or quando vi sardnno stati* Infin. There to have been, esservi stato. Gerund, in there having beeu,.essendovi stdto. %* Note, in speaking of the feminine gender, we are to use stdta, state, instead of stdto, stati. \* Remember, that if after the adverb ci or vi, you find the verb to have, and the tenses of the verb to have are followed by a participle, as, he has dined there ; then the tenses of the verb to have must be expressed by those of avtre, and not by those of essere: example, I have dined there, ci or vho pranzdto. Thou hast dined there, ci or v'hai pranzdto. He has lain there, ci or vha dormito. We have read in it, ci or v'abbidmo lelto. You have said to it, ci or v'avtte dttto. They have drunk there, ci or vhamio bevido. Observe the same rule through all the tenses, except the participle stdto, which is never joined with the tenses of the verb avtre ; example, I have been there, ci or vi sbno stdto or stdta. Thou hast been there, ci or vi sei stdto or stdta. And in like manner through all the tenses and persons. \* Observe, the particles ci and vi are often omitted in the present tense ; thus we say, e u?i' uomo, instead of ci t uri uomo ; sbno ubmini, instead of ci sbno ubmini. * # * Those who learn Italian are greatly at a loss how to render the following expressions; there is of it, oxthtm; there is not of it ; is there of it? is there not of it ? there was of it ; there was not of it, &c. As the ladies, espe- cially, find those ways of speaking extremely difficult, I have explained them at large, for their greater ease, in the following conjugation. - O 5 Con- 150 Of the VERBS. There is of it or them, { cen , ( i 1 or f ' I vene J \ Conjugation of the verb impersonal there is of it, when marks the place, through, all its tenses. eene sono. vene sono* There is not of it, non eerie; non cene scno. Is there of it ? eerie? cene sono ! Is there not of it? non eerie ? non cene sono 1 . There was of it, veriera ; ven'erano. There was not of it, non veriera ; non verier ano. Was there of it? veri era ? verierano? Was there not of it? non veriera T non verier ano T There was of it, venefii ; vene fur ono. There was not of it, non venefii; non vene fur ono; Was there of it? venefii ? vene fur ono? Was there not of it? non vene fit? non vene fur ono? There shall be of it, vene sard ; vene sardnno. There shall not be of it, non vene sara; non vene sardnno* Shall there be of it? vene sara? vene sardnno? Shall there not be of it ? non vene sard ? non vene sardnno ?' «<• That there may be of it, che vene sia; che vene siano. That there may not be of it, che non vene sia: che non vene stano. That there were of it, che vene fosse ; che vene fbssero. That there were not of it, che non vene fosse ; che non vene fbssero, There would be of it, vene sarebbe; vene sarebbero. There would not be of it, non vene sarebbe ? non vene sa- rebbero. Would there not be of it? non vene sarebbe? non vene sarebbero 1 If there had been of it, se vene fosse st at o ; se vene fbssero ttdti or state. If Of the VEJiBS. _ i5i If there had not been of it, se non vene fosse stdto ; se non vene fbssero stutt or state, Had there been of it ? vene sarebbe stdto ? vene sarebbero stdti? Had there not been of it ? non vene sarebbe stdio 1 or non vene sarebbero stdti. If there had been of it, se vene fosse stdto ; or se vene fbssero stdti. If there had not been of it, se non vene fosse stdto; senon vene fbssero stdti. There would have been of it, vene sarebbe stdto ; vene sarebbero stdti. There would not have been of it, non vene sarebbe stdto ; non vene sarebbero stdti. Would there have been of it? vene sarebbe stdto \ vene sarebbero stdti? Would there not have been of it ? non vene sarebbe stdto ? non vene sarebbero stdti ? There will have been of it, vene sai*d stdto ; vene sardnno stdti. There will not have been of it, non vene sard stdto ; non vene sardnno stdti. Shall there have been of it? vene sard stdto ; vene sardnn* stdti? Shall there not have been of it? non vene sard stdto ? non vene sardnno stdti ? For there having been too much of it, per esservene stdto trbppo. In there having been too little of i\ t essendo vene stdto trdpp& pbco. %* But if you express yourself in the feminine gender* you must use stdta, state, instead of stdto, stdti. We must also render, there is of it or them, by cene % in speaking of a place where we are; and by vene, m mentioning a place where we are not; but it often G 6 kappens, 152 Of the VERBS. happens, and especially in speaking of the time, that they leave out the ce entirely .- example, How many months is it I it is ten at least : qudnti mesi sono ? sono died almeno. Sometimes they express, there is of it or them, by ne only ; as, how many months is it ? ten of them are past ; qudnti mesi sono ? ne sono passdti died. Sometimes the whole is expressed/ as, how many months is it from this to new-year's day 1 there are ten of them : qudnti mesi sono di qui all' anno nuovo ? cene sono died. * # * When, after the pronouns conjunctive, mi, ti, ci, vi, me, thee, us, you ; you- rind the particle d followed by a verb, there is no occasion to express it ; example, He will see me there, mi vedrti : he will give thee there, ti darci. We shall see you there, vi vedremoy you will write to ms there, ci scriverete. CHAF. V. O/ - PARTICIPLES. '"FHE Participle (which ought to be called a supine) ir a tense of the infinitive, which serves to form the preterperfects and preterpluperfects of all the verbs ; as ho amdto, avevo amdto. Amdto is a participle, and all the verbs in are form the participle in ato; as amdto, cantdto, yarldto, cinddtoyduto, confessdto, adordto, studidfo, &c. Of all the verbs in are, the verb/are alone has two tt's in the participle, where it makes fdtto, to distinguish it from fdto, signifying destiny. Amdto, is likewise a noun adjective: example, uomo amdto, donna amdta, libri amdti, lettere amdte. Some participles of the first conjugation are frequently abridged; as, Accondo Of the PARTICIPLES. 3 53 Acc6neio r " " acconcidto, fitted. Adbrno adorndto, adorned. Asciutto asciugdto, or aschdtdto, dried. Avvezzo avvezzdto, accustomed. Cdrico caricdto, laden. Desto destdtOy awaked. Fermo fermdto, stopt. Gbnfio gonfidto, swelled. Gudsto guastdto, spoiled. Lcicero lacerdto, torn. Mdcero , macerdto, bruised. Manifesto manifest at c >, manifested. Mbzzo ^for 4 mozzdto, cut. Mtto nettdto, cleansed. Pago pagdto, paid. Phto pestdto, pounded. Privo privdto, deprived. Scemo scemdto, lessened. Scbncio sconcidtOj disordered. Secco seccdto, dried. Stdnco stancdto, wearied. Tbcco toccdto, touched. Trbnco troncdto, cut off, Trbvo trovdto, found. Vblto volt at O) turned. Vbio ^voidtOj emptied. And several others which the use of authors will point out to you. The regular verbs ending in ere, form the participle in uto ; as creduto, ricevfdo, temido, godido* The irregulars in ere have the participle in so, or to : as prendere, preso; render e, reso ; pidngere, plant o ; pim- gtre, punto ; leggere, Utto ; scrivere, scritto. The verbs terminated in ire, in the infinitive, make their participles in ito ; as, sentire, sentito ; finire,finito. Except apparire, which makes appdrso ; applaudire, ap- plduso; aprire, aperto ; comparire, compdrso; dire, dttto, morire, mbrto: offrire, offeri f o ; venire, venuio. *** There are three sorts of participles, namely, active, passive, and absolute. The 154 _ Of the PARTICIPLES. The active participles are composed of the verb avere : as, ho amdto, avevo amdto ; ho detto, hdi detto; ho creduto, ho sentito. The passive participles are preceded by the verb tssere ; as sono amdto, essendo creduto, &c. The absolute participles are of the same nature as those called absolute in Latin, and are composed of the gerunds of the two auxiliary verbs, having and being ; as, having loved, avendo amdto ; being loved, essendo amdto ; essendo creduto. Having and being are often left out in Italian : ex* ample, Having done that, fdtto questo* Having said so, detto questo. That being done, fdtto questo. The sermon being done, ^/wita Id predica. %* Observe that the Italians have a particular manner of rendering the adverb after, by turning the expression ; example, After he had done, fdtto eh'ebhe. After he had spoken, parldto ch'ebbe. After he shall have written his letter, scritto ch'av?*d la sua letter a. After they had supped, cendto ch'ebbero. See, in the Second Part, the Concord of Participles, where you will find a full solution of the several difficulties relating to that part of speech. CHAP. VI. O/ADVERBS. T^HE Adverb is that which gives more or less force to* the verb. The adverb has the same effect with the verb, as the adjective with the substantive, it explains the accidents and circumstances of the action of the verb. There are a great many sorts ; as adverbs of time, place, and quantity, &c. Adverbs of time; as, at present, now, yesterday, to-day, never, always, in the mean time. Adverbs Or the ADVEUB& 155 Adverbs of place; as, where, here, from whence , there, from hence, above, below, far, near. Adverbs of quantity; as, how much, how many, sa much, much, little, too much. *** A g reat many adverbs are formed from adjectives, changing o into amente ; as, sdnto, santamente, holily : ricco, riccamfaite, richly ; dotto, dottamente, learnedly; eitto, altamente, highly. From adjectives in e, we likewise form adverbs, by adding mente to them ; as, Costdnte, costantemente, constantly. Diligente, diligentemente, diligently, Prudente, prudeniemente, prudently. \* But if the adjectives happened to end in le, we must remove the e, and put mente in its stead. Fedele, fedelmhite, faithfully. tf mile, mnilmente, humbly. Tale, talmente, so. In order to assist the memory of those who are learning the Italian language, I have here collected a great number of adverbs, which, by frequent repetition, may be easily retained, especially those terminated in mente. A Collection of Adverbs. I. Abbondantemente, abundantly. Con ragibne, merit amente, justly. A capo, at the end, or at the head. A briglia sciolfa, full speed. Assolutamtnte, absolutely. A cavalcioni, a-straddle. A dirbtte Idgrime, with downright crying. Adesso, or a, or, at this time, Adtsso adesso, or' ora > now immediately. A pie zbppo, lamely. A pdtti, upon condition. Con pdtto che, upon condition that. Ma2 volentihi, against one's will. Da 156 Of the ADVERBS. Da parte, da banda. aside* Attualmente, actually, Appbsta, purposely. Con pensier di, in order to. Addio, farewell. Mirabilmente, a maraviglia, admirably, Accortamhtle, sagacemente, cunningly. In ginocchibni, kneeling. Alia smascelMta, with open mouth. Leggiadraintnte, agreeably. Altrbve, elsewhere. Cosl, so. Cosl sia, so be it. Agevolmente, easily. At exphto, al ripdre, * under shelter. AW oscuro, in the dark. In sbinma, alia fine, , in the end. In fret fa, in haste. A lungo andure, at long run. Amichevolmtnte, amicably. A discrezibne, at discretion. Supino, backwards. Tacitamente, silently. In dispdrte, apart. Peril drttto, the right way. Per il rovescio, the wrong side outward. A gara, in emulation. A prbva, proof against. AW improviso, at unawares. Stnza la sapid a, unknowingly. Su, su, or via, via, come, away, away. Con tempo, con agio, at leisure. Allbra, then. Anticamtnte, anciently. Quasi, pretty near. Appiinto, giusio, just so. Posdimani, dimati I'dltrO, after to-morrow. Adesso, bra, now. Alia rovescia, against the hair or grain. In ditiro, backward. MahoUntUri, con rincrcscinivnto, with regret. Go?, ©F the ADVERBS. 157 l Cioe, to wit. Abbastdnza, enough. Brancolbne, tentbne, groping along* L'dltro jeri, jeri I altro 9 the day before yesterday. Prima di, before that, Al belzo, at the rebound. In capo, at the beginning. In maniera alcuna, by no means. Alia sprovista, at unawares. Di sbpra, above. °gg}> to day. In vece, instead of. Prima, before. Qudnto prima, as soon as possible. A'ncke, * also. Si, cost, as, so. Tdnto, cost, as, as much as. Grande qudnto, as great as. Subito, as soon as. Nel resto, moreover. Tdnto, as much as. Qudnto, as much as* Altre volte, formerly. Altramente, se non, otherwise. Altrbve, somewhere else. Laggru, 2. below there. Mblto, much* Via piu, mblto piu, much more. Bene, well. Presto, mblto presto, quickly. Via piu presto, very soon, much sooner, or quicker. Rigidamente, aspramente, rudely. Bestialmente, brutishly. Or sii, via, Via dunque P come away. come along* St* 15$ Of the ADVERBS. Sta mattma, Sta notte, Sta stra y questa sera, Fin a tdnto, in Unto, Certo, sicuro, Bdsta, Cioe, Per cib, Caldamente, Cdro, moltocdro, Chiaramente, Qudnto, Qudnto, quanta, qudnti, quunte, Come, siccbme, Come, Di continuo, continuamente, Correttamente, Questa volta, adesso, Di prima Idncio, Animosamente, coraggiosamente, Sordidamente, Crudelmente, Di pbi, di qua inndnzi, Per Vaddittro, qui avdnti, Di sbtto, qui sol to, Di sbpra, qui sbpra, this morning. this night. this evening. in the mean time. certainly. it is enough. that is to say. it is therefore. warmly. dear, very dear. clearly. how much. how many. as. how? continually. correctly. now. all of a sudden. continually. sordidly. cruelly. hereafter. heretofore. hereunder. hereupon. Subito, di Mlla prima y D J dIlra parte, Pericolosamente, Davvantdggio, di piu, A cdso, Tdnto meno, Tdnto piu che, Imperoche, Sinceramente, Per tempo, a bubriora, Di qud a died dnni, Di gran lunga, Sii, in piedi, at first. from another place. dangerously. over and above. by chance. so much the less. so much the more. whereas. sincerely. early. in ten years. by far. up, up. Per Of the ADVERBS. 159 Per tenia che, Sin ddi fondamenti, affdtto, Fuori, Gid, digia, Quindi, Domdni, dimdni, Domattina, Delia medesima maniera, DalV una, e dalV ultra parte, Di sdito, In bltre, di piu, oltracib, Dopo, doppo, Dajeri in qua, Da die tempo ? dopo auando ? Da quel tempo in qua, Dacche, dopo che, Di che sbrte ? in che maniera ? Ultimamente, Dietro, In dietro, Fin' adesso, Subito che, Ormdi, Sot to, di sot to, Sbpra, di sbpra, Di seguito, Di qudndo in qudndo^ Avdnti, inndnzi, Per Vavtnire, Aschiena d'dsino, DYinde, Doppiamente, falsamente, Da parte a parte, Almino, for fear that, from top to bottom. abroad. already. from hence. to-morrow. to-morrow morning. just so. on both sides. at one jump. moreover. since. since yesterday. since when ? since that time. since. after what manner ? lastly or lately. behind. backward. till now. as soon as. hereafter, under. upon. in continuance. from time to time. before. henceforwards. sharply pointed. from whence. doubly. through and through. at least. Sfacciatamente, Ugualmtnte, Ancora, dnche, Rotolbne, 5. impudently. equally. again, yet, already. smoothly. hisieme. 160 Of the ADVERBS. Insieme, together. Dipoi, dbpo, afterwards. All' improviso, unawares. In sospeso, in dubbio, in suspence. Intieramente, affdtto, entirely. Intbrno, about. Inddrno, in vain. Intbrno, circa, about. Capricciosamenle, perdutamhite, alV eccesso, desperately. Spaventevolmente, dreadfully. Giustamente, •justly. Stranamente, strangely. A post a t a bella post a, a hello studio, 6. on purpose. Facilmente, agevolmente, easily. Per mancdnza di, for want of. Fissamente, stedfastly. Pazzamente, madly. Mblto, very. Ldberamente, freely. Via, via, a voi, a voi, 7. make way, out of the way. Gratis, gratis. Pbco, little. Di cdso pensdto, wilfully. Arditamente, 8. boldly. Altamente, highly. Oime ! aime ! aid lasso ! alas ! Felicemente, happily, leri, yesterday. Ier sera, last night. Vergognosamente, shamefully. Fubri, 9, out. Mai, never. Qui, qua, here, there. Subito, Of the ADVERBS. 161 Subito, immediately,, Appimto, exactly* Sin, fin, insin, in/in, until. Per fin dove? 10. how far? Li, lei ; Non lungi di Id, there ; not far from hence. Vilmente, basely. Lontdno, lungi, far. E un pfazo, 11. it is a great while. Adtsso, bra, now. Male, ill. Malgrddo mio, hi spite of me. Gudi a, woe be to. A'nehe, dneora, eziandio, also. Nelmedesimo tempo, at the same time. Meglio, - ■ better. Medidnte, provided that. Minor e 9 ' 12. least. 1 Non, not. Nondimeno, nulladimeno, nevertheless. Liberamente, freely. Ne, neither; ne dnche, nor also. No, s ignore, no, no, sir. Nonostdnte, 13. notwithstanding. si yes. Si, it is. Non si, it is not. Dove, ove, where. Oltre, besides. Scopertdmente, apertamente, openly. 14. Zittof ZittO, hush! not a word, A cdso, by chance. 1 \ - ■ 1 A mente 162 Of the ADVERBS. A mente, by heart. Di gud, on this side. Di la, on that side. Verbi grdzia, per estmpio t for example. Pero, therefore. Poco, a little ; bgni pbco y un tantino, never so little. Fbrse, perhaps. Piu, more. In qudnt'a, as for. Pero, however. Quasi, 15. almost. Qudndo, : when. In quant* a me, as for me. Alle volte. sometimes. Alqudnto, somewhat. Pace, pari, quits. Comimque sia, however. 16. " Di rddo, seldom. Scambievolmente, reciprocally. In somma, in short. Mente, J 7. nothing. Saviamente, wisely. Senza diibbio, without doubt. Secbndo, according. Sossbpra, alia rinfusa, confusamente, topsy-turvy. Verso la sera, towards the evening. Sta sera, questa sera, this evening. Abbastdnza, 18. sufficiently. Tdnto, so much. Ogni poco, un tantino, never so little. Adesso,p6cofd t or' bra, presently. Or qutsto, or quello, sometimes one, and some- times the other. Tdrdi, late. Trbppo, Of the ADVERBS. 163 Tropptf, too much. Presto, quick : Stmpre, cost presto, so soon. always. Aff&tta. altogether. Ad un trdtlo, all of a sudden. Adagio ! 19. softly! softly! Presto, quick. E'cco, behold. Volentieri, willingly. Veramente, 20. truly. Ci or vi, there, to it, &c. CHAP. VII. 0/-PREPOSITIONS. HTHE Preposition is a part of speech prefixed to the ar- ticles, nouns, pronouns and verbs, as has been men- tioned in the Introduction. Every preposition requires some case after it, as you will see in the following collection. Gen. Per rispetto di, because of. Per rispetto vbstro, or di voi, on your account. Per rispetto mio, or di me, on my account. Dat. Ir qiiant'a all', or alio, with respect to. jyintbrno a. Gen. alVintbrno di, round the. Gen. Ace. dbpo and doppo, after. Gen. Dietro, behind. Gen. and Dat. in dietro, behind. Gen. Aldto, mcivo di, by the side of; or a Dative. Gen. and Abl. Di Id del or dal, on that side of. Gen. and Abl. Di qua del or dal, on that side of. Ace. Avdnti. Gen. prima, before, Gen. Prima di me, before me. Avdnti vbi, prima, di voi, before me. Ace. 1(34. Of the PREPOSITIONS. Ace. Con, with. Gen. Dat. In mezzo del, in mezzo al, in the middle of. Gen. Appie della, at the feet of the. Appresso di, near to. Gen. and Dat. AH' inter no del, intbrno al, round the. Da, in edsa, at. Gen. and Abl. Dal, ddllo, in edsa del, at the. Ddlla, in edsa della, at the. Gen. and Ace. Contra del, cbntra'l, against the. Contra me, contra di me, against mc. Ace. In, in. Nel, nello, nella, in the. Fra due giorni, in two days. Abl. Di qua dal, on this side of the, Di Id dal, on that side of the. Dat. and Ace. Dentro al or nel, within the. Gen. Fubri del, within the. Dat. and Ace. Dietro al, dietro'l, behind the. Gen. and Dat. Sbtto del, sbtto al, under the. Gen. and Ace. Sbpra del, sbpra'l, upon the. In, before a noun, is expressed in Italian by in. Dat. Di nasebsto al suo pddre, unknown to his father. Ace. Fra, trd, between. Gen. and Ace. Vers\> di me, or me, towards me. Ace. Incirca, round about, thereabout. Ace. Eccetto'l, except the. Gen. Fubri del, without the. Gen. A Into della mta edsa, close to my house ; or a lata a edsa mia, Dat. Gen. Dat. Ace. Rasente del, al, il miiro, close to the wall. Dat. Sin, fin, insin, infin, until, Gen. Ace. Abl. Lungi or lontdno della cbsa, or la edsa, or ddlla edsa, far from the house. Lontdno, lungi, far. Gen. Dat. Ace. Li'ingo del) al, iljiume, along the river. Ace. Of the PREPOSITIONS. 16> Ace. Per, by or for. Gen. dat. ace. Pre&so;vichio, near. Gen. dat. ace. Senza, senza di, del,ox delta, without. Secondol, according to. Gen. dat. ace. Sbtta la tavola, or della, under the table. Sopra, upon. Bat. ace. Circa alVaffare, Vaffdre, concerning the busi- ness. Ablative. In quant'al, concerning. Gen. and ace. Versol, verso del, al, il, towards the. Gen. dat. ace. Dirimpetto del, al, il, over against the. CHAP. VII. Of CONJUNCTIONS. "HnHE Conjunctions serve to connect the phrases to- gether ; most of the words terminated in che and que are conjunctions; as, benchd, dnche, adunque. There are others of a different sort, as you will find in the following collection : Con\natt& che, A'nzl, dl covtrdrio, Accib eke, acciocht^ Con tut to cid, A'nche, upon condition that. on the contrary. to the end that. notwithstanding all that. also. Benche, Perehe, imperoehe, ContiosiacoMckz, although* for. whereas. Adunque, Percioche, then, forasmuch as. Ancora, Qwantunque, x In somma, still, yet. although. in fine. H JH 166 Of the CONJUNCTIONS. In vltre, besides, over and above. Di maniera eke, so that. In quant o, as. E Sf ed, and. Ma, but Nientedimeno, f Nondimeno, £ nevertheless. flulladimeno, J Ne, nor. Ne anch'io, ne mtn'io, nemmeriio, nor I neither. Ne meno, nor this. Nonostdnte che, notwithstanding that. O, overo, oppure, or. Overo, or else. Percte, because. In edso eke, in case that. Perb, therefore. Datochl, suppose that. Per che? why 1 Perb, notwithstanding. Purcke, provided that. Piu tosto che, rather than. Qudndo dnche, though. Benche, sebbene, con tutto eke, although that. Se, if. Cbsi, *s. St mite che, seeing Mat CHAP. Of the INTERJECTIONS. 167 CHAP. IX. Of INTERJECTIONS. The last part of Speech, AN interjection is an expression of affection or passion, introduced among the other parts of speech ; as, Ajuto! ajuto! help! help! Bravo! bravo! O brave! Alfuoco, ' fire ! fire ! AlVdrmi! to arms! Bubno ! bubno ! good ! good ! Animo, cordggio! come, cheer up! Oh! uh! puh! fie! fie! A vdi ! a vox ! stand away ! Alto! halt! O hime I dhi Usso ! woe is me ! O lack ! Zitto! zitto! hush! peace! SiUnzio! , silence ! THE END OF THE FIRST PART, H 2 THE [ 165 3 THE ITALIAN MASTER. PART II. f T t HE Second Part contains Eight Treatises, extracted from the best authors ; and particularly from those who have written on the purity of the Italian language. I. Of the Italian Orthography* II. Of the Italian Accent, III. Of the Italian Syntax. IV. Remarks on some verbs and prepositions. V. Of composition, and the rules to write and speak Italian well. VI. Of poetical licences, and of the different synony- mous names of the Gods. VII. Of improper and obsolete words. VIII. Of expletives , compound words, capitals, and stops. FIRST ( 169 ) FIRST TREATISE, CHAP. I. Of ORTHOGRAPHY. ^HE Italian orthography has this convenience, that all the words are written in the same manner as they are pronounced. %* Observe as a general rule, that you 'must double the consonants in the beginning of compound words ; as, abbdlfere, affanndre, appoggidre, oppresso, difficile, diffe- rire, offendere, raccogliere, rastrellure, raddoppidre. %* They write djfftndere and difendere, but difesa ought to be written with a single/. See Lod. Dolce, cdpitoli del raddoppiamtnto delle consonant!. You must also double the g, when the vowels io and ia 9 which come after it, make but one syllable; as, appoggio, loggia, piSggia, Mdggio, rdggio; a support, a lodge, rain, May, a ray. When the vowels io and ia constitute two syllables, or when the letter i is pronounced harder than in the preceding examples, you must not double the g ; as, dgio, easy ; privilegio, privilege ; malvdgio, bad. See Dolce, Buon Mattel, and Bdrtoli. The letter g is also doubled in the infinitive of verbs, and in all their tenses, when they have a vowel before gere ; as, leggere, reggere, friggsre : but if there be 'a consonant before g, then g remains single ; as, finger e r pingere, pergere. Those words which the English begin with a j conso- nant, that is, with an i followed by a vowel, as Jesus, just, judge, are written with a g hy the Italians, in ord r to render their pronunciation more delicate ; as, Gtesu, giuato, giudice. Capfllo, with a single p, signifies hair. Cappillo, with a double pp, signifies a bat a 3 There 370 Of the ITALIAN There is also another difference between those two words ; that, in the former, the letter e has a close sound, and in the latter, open. Dopo we often find with one p in verse, and in prose with two, as dbppo. But now we write indifferently, dopo or dbppo in prose. Sol has two significations : when preceded by an article, it is a substantive, and signifies the sun; il sol, del sol, al sol, for il sole, del sole, al sole. Sol, when it is an adjective, or without an article, signifies alone, or sometimes only. Subl has likewise two significations : when preceded by an article, it is a noun, and signifies the earth ; as, il subl, or sublo, &e. Sucl, a verb, signifies he is wont ; as, subl venire, he is wont to come. Modern authors write, grkzia, azibne, divozibne, instead of gratia, attibne, divbtione. Z is put single, when preceded by a consonant ; as, spednza, lictnza : but it must be doubled between two vowels ; as, Bellezza, ptzzo, nbzze, except Ldzaro and a few other words. N. B. I shall now give my opinion in regard to the modern orthography, and repeat what I have said in the beginning of this grammar, that the Italians never make use of the grave accent, but where it is necessary to dis- tinguish words, and to fix the pronunciation: therefore we have placed it only on words marked in the introduction, and on some others which you will find in the second treatise, on the Italian accent. We do not double the letter z, when it is in the midst of three vowels, the first of which immediately following the z, is an i : therefore it would be wrong to write az?ibne., action; benedizzione, benediction ; dizziondrio, dictionary; pigrlzzia, sloth; not izzia, notice ; but azibne, benedizibne, diziondrio,pigr'izia } notizia, cVc. except pazzia, folly, and a few more. Piazza, a square, being a word that deviates from the above rule, is spelled, like a great many more of the like qualitv, with a double z. The ORTHOGRAPHY. 171 The letter x before a c is changed into c : example, to ex- cite, eccitdre, excellency, eccellenza; and when it does not happen to be before the c, it is sometimes changed into a double s, and sometimes into single s : as, to exalt, esal- tare ; graciously to hear, csaudire, &c. ; but it is doubled in all the other syllables ; as, the maxim, la massima, Alexander, Alessdndro, &c. A great many of the Academicians of the Crusca, chuse to put the letter z before the vowel t where the com- mon orthography uses the letter c ; for instance, instead of pronouncing and writing Franstce, French ; Francia, France ; pronuncidre, to pronounce, &c. they write and pronounce Franzcse, Frdnzia, pronunziare> &c. ; and I approve of this orthography sometimes myself. We write the masculine relative plural U with a g when followed by a vowel ; example, I have some books, and I purchased them at Frankfort fair ; Ho libri, e gli ho com- prdti all&fi&ra di Frdncoforto. It is better to write chtrico than chttrico, cirusico, than ceriisico or chiHirgo, a surgeon. Many of the mo- derns have such an aversion to the letter A, not only~ in the beginning, but iu the middle of words, that they leave it out wherever they can, so as to pro- nounce and write, for instance, occio t an eye, and occi, eves, instead of bcchio, and bcchi ; but this orthography and pronunciation seem to me to be somewhat too eon- fined. The syllables de and re> in the beginning of English words, generally become di and ri in the beginning of Italian; as, to destroy, distruggerej; to renew, rinovdre? &c. It was formerly the custom to write several adverbs and prepositions separate ; which now make but one word ; but they double the first consonant of the latter word, which is joined to the' farmer ; for instance, gia chc since, giaccht ; in tdnto, fra tdnto, in the mean while: intdnto, frattdnto ; a cio ehe y a fin che, to the end that ; acchiocht, affinecht*, or offinchc ; si come, as, riccome ; a dbsso ilmo nimico, upon his enemy; addosso al H 4 SU9 172 Of the ITALIAN sua nimico ; blira a cio, besides, oltraccib ; di nanzi at giudice, before the judge, dinndnzi al giudice', ubmo da bene, an honest man, ubmo dabhene. After is expressed by dippbi with the verbs, and by do- po, with a single p, before the nouns. It is true nevertheless, is elegantly rendered in Italian by egti e certamtnie vtro, and this egli is a kind of ad- verb. Non v'e scuse, signifies there is no room for excuse ; and this is altogether an Italian idiom.- We express several by parecchi for the masculine, and by parecchie for the feminine : example, several teachers of a language, parecchi maestri di lingua ; several women, pa- rtcekie donne. For which, or wherefore, is expressed in Italian by per to cte, or per la qual cbsa, or percib. Ne', with the apostrophe, signifies in the in the plural, when we are speaking of the masculine gender : example, in the gardens, ne' or nei giardini. To forget, is rendered by the verb dimenticdrsi, and not by scorddrsi, which is applicable only to instruments of music, when we wact to signify their being out of tune. As triere is no future tense, no second preterimper- fcct in the Italian language, that terminates in aro and arei, except sard, I shall be, and sarei, I* should be ; staro, I shall remain, starei, I should remain; faro, 1 will do,f&- rei, I should do ; darb, I shall give ; darei, I should give; saprb,\ shall know, saprei, I should know ; hence we neither say nor write amard and amarei, &c. but amero, and amerti. The Italians are fond of placing the particles si, vi, or the relative ne, and such like, after the persons of verbs marked with a grave accent; but then they drop that grave accent, and repeat the consonant of those particles : for example, my brother will repent, mio frattllo pentcMssi ; I will give you an inkstand, darbvviun calamdjo', the king has given an hundred thousand livres to the cilv of Paris, and he will give fifty to the town of Lyons, il Re ha ddto cvnto mila lire alia cittd di Parigi, e daretnne chiqudnta a qutlla di Libne.. CHAP. ORTHOGRAPHY. m CHAP. 11,/ Of the APOSTROPHE. THE apostrophe is a. mark made like a comma, inserted between two letters, to denote the retrenchment of a vowel ; as, I'amore, Vmiimo, Vonore, Vubmo. The Italians still observe the rule of old authors, never to make use of the apostrophe, but when it renders the pronunciation more delicate ; and noi so frequently as those, who have but a superficial knowledge of the language. The apostrophe is generally placed after the articles, if they precede a word, commencing with a vowel ; as, Vdnime, delY&nimo ; V amine, dell'anima ; Vonore, delV- onbre, &c. . See what we have said concerning the apostrophe, treating of the articles, p. 8. and 39. We sometimes meet with lo'mpero, for Vimpero ', le'nsidie for Virisidie; but this ought rather to be avoided than imi- tated. *1* Sometimes there is an elision of the article il, by cutting off its first letter, which is quite the reverse of other elisions, by which we drop the vowel at the end of words; and when the article il happens to follow a word terminating in a vowel, the i of the article il is cut off, and the preceding word continues entire, without any abbrevia- tion : as, sopra'l tcito, for sopra il tttto. .E'l piit garbato, el piu corttsc, for il. Tut to' I mbndo sa, for tuito il mhndom* Fra'l si el no, for fra it, &c. Stil mezzo di, for su il, &c. Se'lcapitano comanda, e ragionevole chel soldutoubbi- disca, for se il and che il. N. B. Observe, in regard to this elision of the article «7, the best modern authors constantly make use of it ; H 5 and 174 Of the ITALIAN and the reason they allege is, that the i has a harsher sound than any of the other vowels. Sometimes we make an elision of the article le, even before w r ords beginning with a consonant, and the two words coalesce into one; as, nol so, set crede, velpromeito, ) ( ve lo promttto. The apostrophe is also pnt after mi, ti, ci, vi, di, si, da, ne, when they precede a vowel, or the letter h ; as, m'amdte, Vascblto, Vinitndo, s'importa, m'avete, s'inttnde, vingdnna, Vdnima, (F Antonio, n'drde, n'avrb, rihai, n'hdnno. Words abbreviated are written with an apostrophe ; as, de signori, for dii signbri ; pit for pitte ; me' for meglio, in poetry ; co' for cbi or chili. imo one; as, 1 C non lo so, % > for < se lo crede, leito, ) ( ve lo promt 7W CHAP. III. Of the words that must be retrenched. \?OV must retrench the last syllable of the subsequent five words, uno, bvllo, grdnde, sdnto, qutllo, buono, when they precede a word beginning with a conso- nant ; example, un giorno, bel giardino, son Pittro quel, pkne, bubn libro ; and not uno giorno, bello giardino, &c. If the subsequent word commences with a vowel, ©r an h, then you only cut off the final vowel, and put an apostrophe; example,wrcV/«22c«, bell'aspttto,grand'ingtgno, sanV Antonio, qutlVubmo, bubnaspttto. Before the feminine nouns, grdnde is the only one of those words that we abridge, both in the singular and the plural; as, una cdsa,bella camera, gran famiglia, santa Maria, qutlla signcra, belle case, gran ricchtzze, sdnte chitse, qutlla virtu. The masculine plurals of the six preceding words are, urti, belli, grdndi, sdnti, qutlli, bubni. The ORTHOGRAPHY. 175 The feminine plurals are, ime, belle, gran, sdnte, quelle? bubne, without any other abbreviation than of grant and even this sometimes makes grandi before nouns commencing with a vowel ; as, grdndi 6nime, or anime grandi. You may also retrench the final vowel of the word* that have one of these four letters, /, m, n, r, for their pe~ nultima. N. B. But with this rule, that, in making the retrenchment, you do not put an apostrophe, except when the subsequent words begin wkh a rowel, or they happen to be some persons of the verbs; as, il cieV oscuro ; il signbr' onordto / amidm', dman! ; credidni, ertdori ; and this in order to conform to the general rule, which is, to put an apostro- phe whenever there is an elision of one vowel before ano- ther; as, // carnovdl passdto, qudl signbre, instead of il carno~ vale and quale. Andiairi presto, for andidmo presto, Aman* per I'onde, i velbci delfmi, instead of dmano. Fior grdto, cubr generbso, instead oijlore and eUbre. Those words, that have m or n for their penultima, are not so frequently retrenched as those that have I or r. If we would be directed by the opinion of the best authors, the following chapter would be sufficient for our purpose. N.B. When a masculine or feminine article comes after the preposition per, we frequently retrench the r of the per, and put an apostrophe before the article : as, pel, pe'lo, or pello, without an apostrophe, for the masculine, and pela or p6lla for the feminine ; example, we do every thing for the world and for our reputation ; but scarce anything to extirpate vice out of our souis ; si fa tirtto pel mbndo, c> pela or pella riputazione ; ma quasi nulla pclo, or ptlfo p scadkameniQ del vizio dall'dnima. H 6 CHAP. 176 Of the ITALIAN C H A P. IV. Of the words that must not be retrenched. T\7"E must never retrench the word which terminates a sentence, or which precedes a comma; or any other point; therefore, we must not write v. s. ha una bellaman, ehi t quel signbr? quellubmo e gr/in; but v. sv ha {ma be lid memo, ehi e quel sign ore ? quell' ucmo e grdnde ; il libra t buono ; and so of the rest. Neither must we retrench the words terminated in a t when they are before a consonant, except era an adverb, and ancbra ; for we may write, or su signori, aveer non viene ; but it would be wrong to write, una picciol casa, una bel mrino, instead of una bet la rhdno 7 ima pkciolu edsa. Accented words must never be abbreviated; as, faro, diro. In not retrenching, in the plural, the words that have an / before the last letter, you are warranted by the authority of the best authors ; therefore you must write amdbiU persons, fckole, ben trovctte, parole sc<e, nbbili cstalihi. The singular number is more apt to admit of this abbreviation. If you mean to write correctly, you must never abridge Apcllo, off anno, tbllo, ditro, ingimno, pegno, owuro, so$- U.gno, sirdni, vela; therefore you must not write Apol, affdn, col, dur, &c. * # * The words beginning with an s, followed by a con- sonant, oblige the preceding word to terminate in a vowel ; as, bello studio, grdnde stdto, qiiello spirito, tssere stdto ; and not bel studio, grdn stdto, quel spirito, esser stdto. ORTHOGRAPHY. Vff *,* Observe, that if the preceding word cannot ter- minate in a vowel, that which commences with an j, followed by a consonant, takes an i before it ; as, per i$~ degno, in iscubla, instead of per sdzgno, in scuola. Sec Ferrdnte, Longobdrdi, Lod. Dolce, and Bentivbglio. N. B. in the beginning of a period, or when the sense is interrupted by a: colon, or semicolon, we may omit the insertion of the vowel L We never retrench the e of se, signifying if, except it be followed by another e ; for instance, we do not say, s'amo lo studio, if I love study, but se dmo lo studio* On the contrary, we do not say, se esercitdsse Vdrte, if he exercised the art, but s'esercitdsse Mart's, by reason that esercitdsse begins with m e: example, I have seen my mother, and given her a gold snuff-box; ho visto mia mddre, e Vho ddto una sea" tola d'ero r or, he luveth Antony, dm' Antonio. If we were to cut off thee from le, in the former sentence, we should not know whether this /' was in the accusative or dative, in the singular or plural; and if we were to retrench the final a from the word dma, we should not be able to tell whether it was the -first or third person of the present indicative, or the subjunctive, or the third per- son of the preter-definite. You must therefore write, without any elision of t lie vowel, ho visto mla mddre, e le ho ddto, &c. dma Antonio, and the rest in the same manner. You must not retrench the e in che, when the follow- ing word begins with an ?, for it is the i that ought rather to be retrenched: but when this i is the plu- ral of the definite article, which does not admit of this elision, then you are to pronounce the che and i both together, as if it were only one word: example, food grant the times may be good, and the winds be not - very high next winter : then, if my brother Antony is well, and my cousin Harry is in town, I will go to Paris : Dto vbglia che I tempo sia bubno, e che i venti non sieno gaglidrdi 'I verno prbssimo ; allbra, se Antonio mio . fratello stard bene, e s' Enrico^ mio cngtno sard in cittd, mdrb a Parigi, We 178 Of the ITALIAN We never retrench tbe i from ci, us, before the vowels a and o ; because it would render the pronun- ciation too harsh : hence we do not say, for example, it principt c' aveva promtsso cento snidi, the prince had pro- mised us a hundred crowns, but ci avtva ; V. S. c'o- nira, you do us honour, but ci onora. It would be extremely proper, if, before words be- ginning with the letter z, we were not to retrench the vowel, so as not to say, luCn zurchero, good sugar; gran zazztra t a large head of hah ; but btiono zucchero, grande zdzzera. In Dante, Petrarch, Aricsto, Guarim, Tasso, Marini, and all the poets, we find several tenses of the verbs abridged. See farther on this head, in the treatise of poetic licenses, where. I have ranged them in their al- phabetical order. SECOND TREATISE. Of the Italian Accent, ^HE accent, which is the very soul of pronnncia- tion, is the stronger or weaker elevation of the voice on particular syllables, and the manner of pro- nouncing them shorter or longer. I ktend to speak here only of the accent which the Italians make use of in writing, and which we find in their printed books. The Italians, indeed, are acquainted with two accents, but they make use of one only, namely, the grave, which is figured by an oblique stroke from the left to the right, after this manner ( ' ). It is put only on the last syllable of some words ; as, amb o, when it happens to be a verb, as, parlerb. N. B. The Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. \7$ N. B. The other accent, "called acute, is a contrary mark to that of the grave, as may be seen in the fol- lowing words dmano f amdvano, &c. The Italians ne- ver note .it down ; so that if we sometimes meet with it in books that teach the principles of their language, as is now the case in this grammar, it is with a view of conveying thereby a just idea of the Italian pronun- ciation. CHAP. I. Of the grave Accent. r pHE Italian nouns in td, which in English terminate in ty, and in Latin in tas, are marked with a grave accent ; as, puritd, castitd, sarititd, maestd, gravitd, &c* These words form the plural in td, without any al- teration. But they do not place an accent on the a in visit a, because it does not come from a Latin word in tas i neither are we to lean upon the last syllable ; and, moreover, it makes the plural visit e, and not visita. The Italians also place a grave accent on nouns ter^ minating in u ; as, virtu, servitu, &c. Monosyllables ending in o, or a, according to some grammarians, are accented ; as, do, da ; jb,jd : ho, hd ; pud, sd ; stb, std. But I should prefer the opinion of those who do not accent them, because a monosyllable ever preserves the same quantity, "whether it be ac- cented or not ; so that the accent, in that case, only serves to distinguish one word from another ; as, dd, he gives, from the indefinite articled. They likewise put the grave accent on the first and third person singular of the future tense ; as, cantero, goderd, daro, canttrd, goderd, dard. %* Observe, ISO Of the ITALIAN ACCENT, \* Observe, that we may transpose the mo lifts} Ha- stes which we happen to find before verbs accented or* the last: and then we must double the first letter of the monosyllable, and drop the accent of the verb ; as, I have them, hoik, for le ho ; I will do it, farcllo, for h faro ; he shewed me, mostromrai, for mi mostro ; he heard me, gcniimmi, for mi smtt. This manner of transposition, after the tenses of ac- cented verbs, is very common in poetry. The verbs are marked with a grave accent in the third person singular of the preter-defmite, whenever the first person terminal es in two vowels ; as, amui, amb ; credei, ereds ; dormj, dormi. If the first person of the preter-defiuite does not ter- minate in two vowels, there is no accent on the third. For which reason we put no accent on the last syl- lable of v'mse, arse, prtse, ditde, ftce, stttte, which, in the first person, make vtnsi, ami, prcsi, ditdi, feci, steiti. N. B. The Italians also put a grave accent on di, a day ; and on di, the imperative of the verb dire, to say ; on e, it is ; on It and Id, there ; to shew that these words are to be pronounced with greater em- phasis, and with a somewhat longer pause ; as also to dis- tinguish the abovesaid two di's from di the -genitive in- definite, which is sounded without a pause at all : they likewise mark a grave accent on U, there, to distinguish it from 11, the relative masculine plural ; as, I promise three crowns* and I give them, prompt to ire scidi, e li do ; m\d on Id, to distinguish it from la, the relative femi- nine singular; as the princess writes a letter, and causes it to be put into the post: la principCssa scriae una Ut- ter a, e la fa metier' alia pbsta. The ,urave accent is also put on qui and qua, here ; on costi and costd, there ; on, no no ; giu, below ; sii, up; piu, more; cost, so, or thus; s.' t yes; because those words are to be sounded somewhat stronger, and, in some measure, with a greater pause ; but, on the other monosyllables, they do not mark a grave accent, for it would be entirely superfluous, as they are always pronounced in the same manner, We Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. r&l We therefore do not accent da, from the ablative indefinite : a, to ; ma, but ; ne, neither, in ; re, king.; o, or ; and others of the like nature ; because no con- fusion or obscurity can arise from thence, as you will perceive by the following example ; particularly with respect to da and a, the two monosyllables which seem to be somewhat equivocal, but are so by no means. Alexander gives his word as an honest man, and lie has no difficulty to give it to Peter and Paul, or to any other person. Alessdndro da la sua parola da galani' uomo,e non hu veruna difficoltd di parlar a Plttro ed a Paolo, o a cki che sia. You see therefore, very clearly, that in this example the first da is the verb, the second is the ablative indefi- nite ; and that the first ha is in like manner a verb, being particularly written with an k, and that the other as are datives indefinite. CHAP. II. Of the Pronunciation of Nouns, "VfrJ E have mentioned, in the preceding chapter, that the Italians sometimes make use of the grave accent, and particularly in the examples above given ; but as to what concerns the acute accent, we may ver*- ture to affirm, that it is used by no modern Italian, at least that understands his own language ; because with- out insisting that it would be impossible for the printer, though ever so exact, to mark it wherever it was wanting, it would occasion such a strange embarrassment and confusion in the letters, that it would be scarce possi- ble to read them. In order therefore to avoid the fre- quent repetition of the grave and acute accents, I have discovered a method which to me appears very easy - and* 2 82 Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. and clear ; and which will be of great use to such as are desirous of learning this language, and even to the Italians themselves. But, before I enter upon an explanation of the particular rules which are ranged here in alphabetical order, you must pay the greatest attention to the general rules contained in the five following numbers. No. I. All nouns must be pronounced either short or long % and their short or long sonnd depends intirely on their penultimate syllable, that is, the last but one ; for all the other syllables are to be pronounced steadily and uni- formly, that is, without making use of any brevity, ex- cept these two nouns, augure, an augor; clausola, a clause ; which have the antepenultiina (that is, the last but two) short ; and some others mentioned in the exception of the letter c. In order to know in what manner you are to sound this penultimate syllable, observe the penultimate letter of the noun you want to pronounce, and look for that letter as ranged here below in its alphabetical order, where you will see the rule with its exceptions ; as,. for example, if you want to know whether the noun rammdrico, regret, ought to be pronounced short or long, you must look for the letter c, which is the penulti- mate letter of the noun, rammdrico, marked here below in the alphabetical order ; you must also examine the exception; and if you do not find it there, then you are to conform to the rule which says, all nouns, that have the letter c for their penultima, are pronounced short. No. n. Nouns of two syllables have no rule at all, because they are subject to neither brevity, nor length ; except a very small number, which will be found in their proner places of exception. I shall give you here, as a general rule, all such nouii3 as have two consonants before the final vowel, as macilente, cangidmtnto, make the penultimate syllable long, of w hatsoevcr number of syllables Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 183 syllables they consist ; except a few, which you will find under the letters r and t . No. III. Neither is there any need of a rule for nouns that have a grave accent marked on the last vowel ; it is suffi- cient to know how to pronounce one of them properly ; for example, carith ; and you will be capable of pro- nouncing calamita, veritd, virtu, bonta, and all others of the same kind, because you are to sound them all with the same degree of quickness. No. IV. All feminine nouns follow the rule of the masculines from which they are derived. All the plurals follow the rule of their singulars, and compound nouns those of their simples. No. V. There are some nouns which the Italians pronounce as they please, that is, either long or short ; and of these I have mentioned some in the exceptions to the rules. With regard to poetic nouns, we must be di- rected by the measure of the verse ; for poets have a licence to abbreviate and lengthen a great many words. You pronounce according to the custom of the country, when they happen to be all barbarous and foreign names, and all of Hebrew and Greek derivation. Like- wise the proper names of persons, families, towns, pro- vinces, &c. Remember the proverb, In pacse, ove vii* iisa che trovi. Let us now proceed to the particular rules. Nouns that have the letter a for their penu-Itima, are in a very small number among the Tuscans, and yoa must pronounce them long ; as, Arcfcldo, JMcoldo, 8ta~ nislcio. B. Noun* !S4 Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. Nouns that have the letter b for their penultima, are also in a very small number, and must be pronounced short; as A'rabo, Bdrnaba, Ctlibe, 1'ncabo, succubo ; but pro- aounce Crabba, a Carob bean, long. C. All nouns, whose penultimate is the letter c, are short ; as Rammarico: Except Alice, Ferbce, Panic o, panic, a Am ico, Festuca, sort of grain. Antino, Filuca, or Feliica, Pappafko. Appendice, Imbridco, Penaice. Aprko, Intrico, Pernke. Arciduca, Lattuca, Pndico. Alrbce, Lettica, Pa dice. , Beatrice, Lombrka, Rubi'iia, a rubric Beccafico, Lories of a missal, of Bernice, Lud&vko, other book. BiblioUca, Lumaca, SamMcOr Caduto, Mammal iic o, Sommdco. Capifnbco, Manteca, Tamerke. Cervice, Matrice, Tarlice. Ciridca, Mendico, Tartaruca. Clodca, Molica, Tiridca, or tridca, Colic a, Morice, Velbce. Cornice, ]\ r arice f Vernice. Cot ur nice, Is emit o, Verriica, Dappbco, Opdco, Vesska. Enrico, Oricho, gum Ubbridca. Funfuluco, Arabic, Ulderko. Falica, Orlica, Umbilko, or fal- Federico, Pagliuca, lico, the navel, Felic e , Pompaliica, a kind Fcnke, of sea-fish, And all nouns terminated in ace ; as, auddce, fomdce T spindce. Likewise such as express feiuale qualities, and end in ice ; as, meretrke, possediirke, vendicairke^ &t\ D. Noun* Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 1S5 D. Nouns that have the letter d short ; Except for their penultima are Alcide, Arreddy, Belgrddo, Canicida, Congcdo, Contddo, Contrddo, Corrddo, Corrtde^ equipage, Cupido, Cupid, tusfcde, Biomvde,, Gmkida, Disfida, Palude, Erede, Parentddo, Erode, Parenticide Fratrkida, Parrkida, Ganimede, Rugidda, Gqffredo, Squassacbda, Ignudo, Tancrede, Lampreda, Toledo, MercMe, Tripiede, Niccmede, Zendado, Nouns ending is the syllable de, and formed from other nouns which have a grave accent on their final vowel, are also pronounced long; as, cittdde, povertdde, virtide, formed of lliat have the letter i for their penultima : Except, Ahlto, Epiteto, pdlmite, 'Acvvlito, Esausto, Perdita, Aconite, Escrcito, PldutCy A'dito, Eslto, PldcitOy A'gcta. a christian Esplicito, PremitOy name. Edusto, PrSstito, A'lito, Etgato, Preirito, A'mbito, Elduto, Propositi), Audita, ^Eomite, PulpitOy Anelito, Eortuito, RicdpitOy Antidoto, Erfmito, Recdndito, Antistite, Gdlata, Renditdy Apostate, Gemito, SdhatOy Arkte, Genito, SeguitOy Atomato, Gombito, or Go- Soccitffy Attcnito, mito. JSoi rate, Canto, Implicit o, So/ito, Cognito, Inctito. Solitcito, Cumito, Spirito, Cbmpito, the work Interpret e, Stimmate, or Sti- of a day, or of Intiiito, matey marks of a certain time, Ipbcrate, wounds. Ccmputo, Ipocrito, Sclpite, Crtdito, Ippblito, Strepito, Cibito, JLdutOy Sdbito, DtbitOy Lbcito, Suddito, Decrepito, Libito, Tdcito, Dedito, Lifvito, Trdnsito, IhposiiOy Umile, Tremito, Disputa (some pro- Merito, Vendita, nounce it long, Ndscitdy Vtneto, Domito, Olocdusto, Visita, jE'mpitofor Tmpeto O' spite, Vimito. * When it is a noun adjective y it is pronounced almost always short; but when a supine, it is long* 1 3 U. Pro- 154 Op the ITALIAN ACCENT. U. Pronounce all nouns short ; that have the vowel w for their penultima : example, drduo, pervetuo, residua. Except, Altrui> Me, due, and its compounds, as, ambidue, vin~ tidue, &e. colid, costui, cui, lui, suo, iuo. V. You are to pronounce those nouns short, that have v consonant for their penultinm: example, concavo, Gtnova P tritavo, vfacovQ. Except, Bisavo, discianove, and the other numbers of the same termination; Geneva, or Genevra, inedvo, saave, ottdvo, and all the nouns terminating in ho and iva t as sostantivo, motivo, gentiva, invettcva. Z Pronounce all nouns long that have the letter z for their penultima, except the noun polkza. CHAP. III. Of the Pronunciation of Verbs and Adverbs, No I. T*\ISSYLLABLES, whether verbs or adverbs, observe no rule, because they are pronounced indifferently. See the preceding chapter, No. I!, and with regard io words of two or more syllables, that have a grave accent on the last vowel, I refer you to what l»s been said in the same chapter, No. III. p. 1 83. No. II. The infinitive of the verbs is terminated in are, ere, and ire. Those which terminate in are and in .are pronounced long, without any exception ; and such as end in ere short, the following excepted : avere, cadire, dissuadtrc. dolire, dovtre t gktctre, godare,partre,pe?^su^dt;re, piuetrt, potere, rimanere, sapere, sed(re y soUrz, tacere, iemere, tentre, valere, vedere, volere, and all their compounds, as accadere, QtUnvre, jtravedire. &c. it being a general maxim, * , - Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. Ijtf »- fn&*im, that the compounds follow the rule of their simples. No, TIL All third persons plural are pronounced short, except in the future tense, Leuiuse of the two consonants which precede the final Vowel 7 ; IB like manner, the first person plural of all the preterimperfect subjunctive, which In the first person singular terminate in ed must be pronouueed short ; as, amassi, amussimo, legg.cssi, leg- gessimo, &e. No. IV. All other persons, of whatever tense or number, are made long; except those of some verbs of the first con- jugation, which, in the first person of the indicative, have the penuitima short, and preserve this shortness in the other persons, not only of the indicative, but of the imperative and subjunctive moods: for instance, riedpito, the first person indicative of the verb rivfipitare, has the syllable pi short j and the same quantity is preserved in ricapiti, and riedpfta. Farther ; this and other like verbs receive, by way of augment, in the third perse us plural of the said moods, another syllable, which is sounded as short as the penuitima : for instance, rkapito, ricapitano, rlcapiiino ; dissmmlp, di.wmulano, dissimulime ; and since there are several who mispronounce those third persons plural, 1 have thought lit to adjoin a particular description of them in the two following numbers. No. V. In the first place, all verbs, whose infinitive terminates in care, without any other consonant before c, as autenti- cdre, ghrificare, masticdre, make the first person of the present indicative short, and of course the other persons just now mentioned in the exception to the preceding number: except afficc&re, orroctire, and such as you will find excepted in the following number. 2. All verbs, whose infinitive terminates in oldre, as immpl&re, stimoldre, brancvlare. .3, As likewise all verbs formed of nouns that have i 4 the 196 Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. the penultimate syllable short; for example, regoldre, formed of regola ; generdre, of genero ; sol lee it are of solle- citc. To the three foregoing numbers, you must add the following verbs, which are contained therein, viz. Affocdte, Agitdre, Alter are, Anfandre, Annihilate, Assiderdre, Sucker dre, Cahitrdre, Capiidre, Commemorate, Comperdre, Confederdre, Considerate, Contaminate, JQffictrure, Defindrc, TJissipdre, l)omindre, Dubitftre, JSccettudre, Felicitare, Gratuldre. Imitdre, hicorpordre, Insolferdre, Interrogdre, Investigdre, Irritate, Istigdre, Iterate, Litigdre, Lumindte, Meditdre, Merit ware, Moderate, Mormordre, Munerdre, Navigdre, . Kecessiidre, Nominate, JSoverdre, Occvpdre, Palpitdre, Penetrdre, Precipitate, Procrastinate, Pulluldrt, Rammemordre, Recitdre, to repre- sent on a stage. Refrigerdre, Rtcuperdre, Rubor are, Ruminate, or Rumigdre, Scalp irate, Schiccherdre^ Seguitdre. Seminar e. Sgombrdre, Simuldre, Smtmordre, Spettordre, Super are, Suppcditdre, Suscitdre, Toller dre, Tumultudre, Vent Hare, Vigildre, Vituperdre. To the above we may also add the verb offrire, belong- ing to the conjugation of verbs in isco. There are some who pronounce the foregoing third persons indifferently, short or long, in the verbs migliordre, peggiordre, and riputdre, but they are pronouueed short in the verbs con- citdre, eccitdre, incUdre. No. VI. From the whole we may conclude, that infinitives of two or three syllables, as, fare, cecdre, with their compounds, as, disfdre, accecdre, do not shorten the first person indicative, nor the other perions, n«r even the Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 197 *he infinitives derived from nouns whose penultima is Jong, example, avventuare, derived from ventura: in- tricate, from intrico ; minchiondre, from minchiono ; con- trastdre, from contrast o ; architettare, from architttio, &c. But I am very sure, that pcrsevtro, I persevere, is oftener pronounced short, though it comes from severo, which is long ; this, perhaps, to distinguisli it from the Latin verb per sever o, which is sounded long. No. VII.. With regard to the conjunctive pronouns, mi, ti, si, &c. the four relatives, to, la, It, le, and ijje particle ne if they happen to be at the end of infinitives terminated in ere short, scrivermi, rispondfvti, vtnderne ; and at the end of the thin 1 parsons singular of the preterperfect simple, marked with the grave accent, as also at the end of the first and third persons singular of the future ; as, rimproveroffi, lracconter6vvi,racconterassi, &c. tbere arises from thence no change at all in the pronunciation, though this union is productive of two consonants before the final vowel ; since the foregoing words, being placed after the said persons, are always reduplicated, according to what has been observed, p. 173. and as you may see by the above examples. If the said particles happen to be united to other persons, as, paria-tegli, tem6vami t invian- dolo, they cause the last verbal syllable, which is the .pe- nultimate of the word, to be pronounced short. No. VIII. When two of the said particles happen to be united together, at the end of the person Which, without this union, is not pronounced short, as parldteglicne, invidndo- mme, porttivamcli, then you shorten only the penultimate syllable of the word, which is the first of the two par- ticles : but when they are joined together, at the end of infinitives, and of the persons marked at the be- ginning of No VII. you make no change, as I have already observed, in the pronunciation ; and the first of the two particles, being the penultimate of the word, I 5 i«- 198 Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. is made short : example, scrivermelo, vender gliene, rimpro^ vervmmela, raccQnterdssene, &c. No. IX. With regard to adverbs, you must follow the rules and exceptions of the preceding chapters, especially as they are derived for the most part from nouns.* for instance, all'improviso, un tantmo, see under the letter 5 for the former, and under n for the latter, and you will find that both of them have the penultimate syllable long. As for such as have two consonants before their final vowel, as ellegramente incontamvnte, you must recollect the rule mentioned in the preceding chapter, No II. and with res- pect to compounds, remember the rule, which says, that compounds follow the nature of their simples. No. X. Here I shall observe, that when the adverb ecco is joined to the conjunctive or relative particles, as Zccoci, eccoli, tccoky the penultimate syllable, thus united, is to be pronounced short ; and it retains the same quantity, when joined to the two^ aforesaid particles : for instance, eccctene, tccovene, tccotdo : you are moreover to observe, that the penultima, which is the first of the particles, is also pro- Bounced short. These two adverbs, altresi and cuppita, have the penul- tima short; but in shrove, ancbr e, assdi, dappbi, giammai, insieme, and overo, it is long. In these two adverbs, adagio, and p6$tia, the vowel i forms a syllable with the final vowel a and a. ( m ) THIRD TREATISE. OF THE ITALIAN SYNTAX. CHAP. I. Of the Division of Syntax. CYNTAX is a Greek word, by the Latins called construct™ ; and signifies the right placing and con- necting of words in a sentence. It is divided into three sorts ; the first of order or arrangement, the second of con- cordance, the third of government. The syntax of order or arrangement is the right disposition of words in a sen- tence. The syntax of concordance is when the parts of speech agree with one another, as the substantive with the adjective or the nominative wiih the verb. The syntax of government is when one part of speecli governs another ; or, as some grammarians express it, when one part of speech is dependent on another. The rules of syntax are much the same in Italian as in English ; however, for the sake of those who have not a grammatical knowledge of their own language, I shall lay down some general rules of Italian con- struction. I. Of the Order of Words. I. The nominative is that to which we attribute the action of the verb, and is always ranged in the first place: it is generally a noun, a pronoun, or an infinitive put for a noun ; as, Thomaso scrive, Thomas writes ; to I 6 parlo, SCO Of the ITALIAN SYNTAX. ptirlo, I speak ; il dor mire giova, sleeping does one good. 2. When the action of the verb is attributed to many persons, or things, these all belong to the nominative, and are ranged in the first place, together with their conjunction ; as, Pittro e Paolo leggono, Peter and Paul read. 3. The adjectives, belonging to the nominative sub- stantive, to which the action of the verb is attributed, are put after the substantive, and before the verb ; as, gli &'coteri morigertti e dihgenti studiano, the mannerly and diligent scholars do study. % 4. If the nominative has an article, this article always takes the first place, that being its natural situation. 5. Sometimes a verb with its case stands for a nominative ; as, umdna cbsa t avere compassibne degli qfflitti, to have compassion on the afflicted is an act of humanity. 6. The Rominative is sometimes understood, as amo, where you understand io ; and so of the other persons of the verb. 7. After the nominative you put the verb ; and if there is an adverb, it is to be placed immediately after the verbs, whose accidents and circumstances it explains ; as, Pietro ama ardenttmtnte la gloria, Peter is extremely fond of glory. 8. The cases governed by the verb are put after it ; they may be one or many, according to the nature of the action ; as, io amo Pietro, I love Peter ; io dbno un iibro a Paolo, I make a present of a book to Paul. i). The preposition is always. put before the case it governs; as, vicino a cdsa, near the house. IO. The. relative is always placed after the antecedent ; as, Pittro, il quale studia, Pete*, who studies. II. Of Concordance. 1. Adjectives agree with their substantives, in gen- der, number, and case : as, tin' ubmo virtubso, a virtuous man; Op the ITALIAN SYNf AX. 201 man ; so?i(uosi palazzj, sumptuous palaces ; donna bella, a handsome woman. 2. When two or more substantives singular come to- gether, the adjective, or participle, belonging to them, must be put in the plural ; as, Perdiccone, e'l padre, e la mddre dtlla Lisa, ed tlla, altresl conttnti, grandissima fesia fecero ; Perdiconne, and the father and mother of Lisa, and she likewise, contented, made great rejoicings. 3. If the substantives happen to be one in the singular and the other in the plural, the adjective or participle may then agree with either ; as, esstndosi Dioneo, con gli dltri gibvani messo a giuocdred tdvole ; Dioneo with the other young men having set down to play at tables: ilrd co' subi compdgni, rimontati a cavdllo, alia redle osteria senelornd- rono ; the king and his companions, having mounted their horses again, returned to the royal inn. 4. Every verb personal agrees with its nominative, ex- pressed or understood, both in number and person. b. If the nominative be a collective noun, the verb may be in the plural, though the nominative is in the singular ; as, il comune pbpolo erano ignordnii del vero T)io ; the common people were ignorant of the true God. 6. When there happen to be two nominatives, one masculine and the other feminine, the preterite an(f par- ticiple of the verb agree with the masculine, if speaking of persons ; but if any thing else is meant, it may agree with the feminine; as, convitdti le donnt e gli ubmini, alh tdvole, the men and women being invited to table ; tlla avrvbbt cost Vnltra cbscia e Vdltro pit fuor manduta, she would have put out the other thigh, and the other foot. 7. The relative quale, with the article, agrees en- tirely with the antecedent ; but without the article, and denoting an absolute quality or likeness, it agrees with what follows ; as, quel ciiore il qudle, that heart which ; seco pensdndo qudli infra piccol tannine dovtan divenire, thinking within himself what was shortly to become of them. Except persona, which, though of the feminine gender, yet, when applied to a male, re- quires 202 Of the ITALIAN SYNTAX. quires a masculine relative ; as, alcuna persona il qudh some person who. 8. The question and answer always agree in every thing ; as, cavalier e, a qual donna se' tu ? ed egli rispose, sono alia regina, what lady do you belong to, sir knight 1 and he answered, I belong to the queen. III. Of the dependence of the parts of speech on each other. 1. The nominative being the basis of the sentence, the verb depends on it, as the other cases depend on the verb. The adjective depends on the substantive that supports it ; and the adverb on the verb whose accidents it explains. 2. The genitive depends on a substantive expressed or understood ; by which it is governed. 3. The accusative depends either on a verb active, as io dmo'Ja virtu, I love virtue ; or on an infinitive, as diss'e se in tib avtre errdto, he owned himself to have been mis- taken in that ; or on a proposition, as, vddo verso la cltiesa,! go towards the church. 4. The ablative depends on a preposition, by which it is governed ; as,pdrto da Roma, I go from Rome. 5. The dative and vocative have, strictly speaking, no dependence on the other parts. The dative is common as it were, to all nouns and verbs. The vocative only points out the persons to whom jou speak. And so much for syntax in general. I come now to the construction of the several parts of speech. 33S CHAP. II. Of the Syntax of Articles. T> EFOUD we come to the syntax of the Articles, re- -*-* member that lo, la, li, le, gli, before the verb, and the word icco } are no longer articles, but pronouns -re- lative. Those I Of the SYNTAX of ARTICLES. g$$ Those who understand Latin will quickly perceive the difference, if they take notiee, that every time they lender to, la, li, le, gli, by ilium, Mam, illud; or by turn, earn, id ; illos, illas, ilia ; eos, eas, ea ; they are relative profcouns. The particles in and to, before the names of cities, are expressed by in and a ; as, in or at Rome, in Rama, to Rome, a Roma. \* The best authors often use the infinitives with the article it instead of substantives; example, singing relieves me, it cdntare mi rallegra, instead of it canto me rallegra. Note, the article it is put before the word signor, sir, or my lord, speaking of all qualities, dignities, and relations, for the masculine; example, my lord the president, it signbre president e ; my lord duke, it signor duca; the gentlemen, i signori; of the gentlemen, dei signori. You must observe the same rule for the feminine article la, which is to be prefixed to signbra, speaking of or to the ladies ; as, la signbra principtssa. If the Italians express madam by madama, they put the article la after it ; as, madam the princess, mad&ma la princessa t of madam the, di madama la, &c. %*■ Sometimes the English particle to, before infini- tives, is rendered in Italian by the article il or lo ; example, it is easy to say, to see, to study ; e facile il dire, il vedere, lo studidre: with the latter we use the ar- ticle lo, because studidre begins with an s followed by a consonant. We generally use the article, when the Latins express the infinitive by the supine in u : as, facile dictu, facile visu. We may also make use of the indefinite article a ; as, t facile a dire, a vedtre, a studidre: it is easy to say, to see, to study. See farther, in the syntax of verbs, when it is proper to express the articles del, dcllo, delta, delle, degli, &c. after the verbs, when and not. It is also to be observed, that the Italians frequently make use of the masculine articles plural dei, di, ddi, with 204 ' * Of the SYNTAX of NOU$S. with the apostrophe, before possessive pronouns, and before all indeterminate nouns: for example, de miti libri, of my books ; a tubi partnti, to thy relations ; da subiamici, from his friends; la libertd de' pbpoli, the liberty of the people ; epermesso a' viaggiato?i,irave\ltts are permitted ; si scrive da paesi lontani, they write from distant countries. CHAP. III. Of the Syntax of Nouns. HTHE adjectives, as we have before observed, agree with their substantives in gender, number, and case: ex- ample, uomo virtuoso, derma beUissima, casa nvova. The Italians sometimes use a noun adjective instead of a substantive ; as, il caldo del fubco, for it calbre; Vdlto dclle miir a for Vdliezza, &c. *_* The comparatives govern a genitive ; and the parti- cle than, which is after them, is expressed by di, or del, or ddlo, &c. as you may see in the first part. We have taken notice, in the chapter of compa- ratives, p. 55, that the particle than is rendered by eke, v, hen it is before a noun adjective, a verb, or an adverb. %* If the comparison is made between two substantives, than must also be rendered by the: example, Virgil pleases me more than Ovid, Virg'dio mi place plii die Ooidio. He is a better soldier than captain, e migllbr solddto che eapitfoio* Rome would please me more than Paris, ml piacertbbe piu Roma che Par'ig-i. * # * When t'ae comparison is made by so as, as much as, so as, they must all be rendered by quanto: ex- ample. The prince is not so powerful as the king, it principe non v poUnte qutinto 'I re. My Of the SYNTAX of PRONOUNS. 205 My book is as handsome as yours, il mio lihro e hello quant o' I vostro. You shall have as much of it as you please, n avrete qttdnto vorrete. The poor are as much despised as the rich esteemed, sono vilipcsi i pbveri qutinto sono siimdti i rkchi. CHAP. IV. Of the Syntax of Pronouns. T DO not intend to treat here of the pronouns personal ; they have been sufficiently explained already in the first part, from p. 6l to p. 64: to avoid any farther repetition, I shall only give the following rule. The English make use of the verb to be, put imper- sonally through "all its tenses in the third person, before the pronouns personal, thou, he, $ke> we, you, they ; it is I, it is he, &e. In Italian the verb to he, on this occasion, is not impersonal ; and they express, it is I, by sono io ; it is thou, sei tu : it is he, e iui ; it is we, sidmo noi ; it is you, siete voi ; it is she, e lei ; it is they, mas. sono iglinq, or sono tssi; it- is they, fem. sbuo tileito, or sono esse ; and in like manner through all the tenses ; as, it was f, ero io ; it was we, erdmo noi ; &c. %* To express in Italian, it is mine, it is"thine > it is kis, it is oui*s, it is yours, we must say, in the singular number, Masculine- Feminine. It is mine, i mio, or e mia. It is thine, i tuo f or £ tua. It is his. t suo, or e siia. It is ours r t nbstro. or e nostra. It is yours, e vostro, or e vbstra. In the plural we must say, scno mUi, or mie ; son tuci, or tue ; son subi, or sue ; son nbstri, or nbslre, son wstri, or vostrs. 206 Of the SYNTAX of PRONOUNS. Me, thee, him, to him, &c. are expressed always by the conjunctive pronouns mi, ti, si, gti, &c. when* thev are before or after a verb. See p. 64. ?4? The conjunctive pronoun gli requires a particular remark ; to wit, that, whenever it is found before the arti- cles lo, la le, or the adverb ne, it takes an e at the end to join the following particle: example, To give it to him, per ddrglielo, and not dargTilo ; the vowels i and e ought to be pronounced as one syl- lable. To give it to her, per darglida. You shall return them to him, glieli rendertle. You shall ask him 'for some gliene domanderete. You shall speak to him of it, gliene parkrete. %* When the pronouns conjunctive happen to meet with the particle si, they must be transposed, and si is placed next to the verb : example, Tiiey tell ine, mi si dice, and not si mi dice* They tell thee, ti si dice, and not si ti. They tell him, or her, gli, or le si dice. %* The l pronouns conjunctive mi,ti,si>ci x vi, change i into e when they are before lo, la, le, gli, or the adverb ne ; example, He gives it me again, mefo rt?ide. The following words, me some or of it, thee some or of it, him some or of it, us some, you some, &c. are ren- dered in Italian by mene, true, sene, gliene, cene, vene, as we have already observed in the chapter of conjunctive pro- nouns, p. 64. JJyro, their, before s noun, is a pronoun possessive in- declinable; as, their book, it loro libro; theii chamber, la loro camera ; their goods, i loro btrti ; their swords, le loro spade : when loro is a pronoun possessive, you put an article before it. Loro after a verb is a pronoun conjunctive ; as, the master teaches them, il maestro insegna loro. L6ro is always made to follow the verb, to whatsoever tense it be. %* To render the Italian more agreeable and com- plaisant, you are to use the third person instead of the second : thus, you are in the right of it, is expressed by V* S. ha ragibne, instead of avete ragibne, pronouncing Of the SYNTAX of PRONOUNS. 207 mssignorla, which is always marked by V. S. And to prevent the frequent repetition of V. S. they use the pro- noun el fa, or essa, in the nominative, in conversation, Example, Nom. EVa, or hsa V. S. Gen. di lei di V. Sr Dat. a lei a V. S. Ace, lei V. S. Ah}, da lei da V. S. In the plural we say, h signorie lore, delle signorie loro : idle signorie loro, dalle Signorie loro. *^*That is always expressed by che ; example, the book that I read, il Hbro cheleggo ; what do you want 1 eke va- lefe, or che vuble, V. 8. 1 Che oftentimes denotes because: especially wben it follows the negative particle non : example, do not drink it, because k will hurt you, non to bevC4e, che vi far& mdle. * # * CIri is frequently made use of to express he that, and is more elegant than quel che : example, chi dice quest o ha ragibne, for quel che dtce, &c. * # * The -particle it h never expressed in Italian before the third person of the verb to be : example, It is well sard, e ben detto. It shall be well done, saraben fatto. The poets often make use of altri for dltro : example,. Altri fu vdgfl di spiar tra h stelle, altri di seguir Vbrme di fugHivnjha, altri d'atterrdr' 'or so, Gmuimjicl Pastor Fido. 53=2: CHAP. V. Of the Syntax of Verbs. > T i HE verbs, through every tense and mood (except the infinitive) ought, as we have already observed, to be preceded by a nominative case, either expressed or understood, with which they should agree in number and person. The nominative is expressed, when we say-, 20$ Of the SYNTAX of VERBS. saVj to dmo, tu canti, Pittro scrive : understood when they sav, canto, andidmo, dtco, ridono. The Italians as well as the English use the second person plural, though they address themselves but to a single person : example, My brother, vou are in the wrons:, frat&llo mio, avite tirto. Sir, you are in the right, signcre, avete ragibne. And if we would speak in the thud person, we must say V. S. ha ragiine. The verb active governs the accusative ; as, studio la leziune, ama la virtu. The verb passive requires an ablative after it; as, the learned are envied by the ignorant, i dbtti sono invididti dag I' ignordntL The verbs, to take away, to separate, to be distant from, to receive, and obtain, govern also an ablative and accu- sative; as, To take something from the hands, levdre qudhhe cosa, ' dalle mdni. To separate one from the other, separdre Vun d'aW altro. Get you away from me*, scostdtevi da me. \ have received a letter from my father, ho ricevuto da mio padre una Uttera. I have obtained leave from the king, ho ottenuto licenza dul rk fif|The verbs, to go out, to depart, to come, to return, govern a genitive and an ablative. The genitive, when the nouns have the indefinite article before them ; as, I go, I depart, I come, I return, from Paris, from France ; tsco, par to, vtngo, tbrno, di Pangi, di Frdncia, The ablative, when the nouns are preceded by the definite article ; as, I go, I depart, I come, I return, from the garden, from the meadow, from the church ; esco, pdrto, vtngo, torno, dal giardino, prdto, ddlla chitsa. You must always put the particle a or ad after the verbs of motion ; as, anddre, manddre, invidre, venire, when they precede an infinitive ; example. Let OF the SYNTAX OF VERBS. QOQ Let us go see, andidnw a vedere. Send to look for, mandate a cercdre. Come ask f or, venite a domanddre. They do not say, andidmo vcdcre, mandate cercdre, venite domanddre. They make use of ad, when the following verb begins with a vowel ; as, let us go and give notice, andiamo ad avisdre, &c. After verbs, we must express yes and no by di si and di no; and not by che si and cite no: example, I believe yes, credo di si. I believe not, credo di no. I say not, dko di no. I think not, penso di no. I say yes, scommetto di si. Have you a mind to lay not 1 volete scommtttere di no! I have observed, in the first part, p. 83, that when we find the particle if, which in Italian is expressed by se, before the impel feet indicative, we must use the imperfect subjunctive in Italian: example, if I had, se avessi: if we could, se potessimo: and not se aveva, se potevdmo. This rule is not general, because we frequently are oblig- ed to put the imperfect indicative after se, and not the im- perfect subjunctive. * # * When 'we find in English if before a prelei im- perfect, it is to be observed, that we speak either of a time past, or a time to come; as if I had riches, I tvas not master of them ; if I studied, it was to become learned: in those two examples we speak of a time past ; for which reason we must use the imperfect indicative, and say, se avevo beni, non nero padrone : se studidvo, era per diven- tdr dbtto. But if we happened to speak of a future time ; if I studied, I should become learned; if I had riches, I would give something to the poor; then we must make use of the imperfect subjunctive, and say, se studidssi, diven- terti dotto; se avessi beni, ne darii ai poveri; because in the latter examples, we speak by wish, and therefore we place the verbs in the optative ; and in the former we do not express ourselves either by wish or desire, but concern- ing a thing or time past. VThe 210 Of the SYNTAX of VERBS. \* The English are apt to put the first imperfect of the subjunctive, where the Italians make use of the second: example. He had dene me a kindness ; the Italians will not say, rnavtsse fit to pidcere, but m'avrebbe fdtto piaccre ; be- cause one may say, he would have done me a kindness. I have been in the wrong, avrti uvuto torto, and not avessi aviito tbrto ; because one may say, Ts/tculd have been in the wrong. You had been blamed, sareste stato bkisimdto, and not foste stato biasimdto: because youliad bcen-msy be turned by w oid d have. XT Note, that to express in Italian, though that should be, we must say, qudndo cib fosse, and not surtbbe. N. B. Because the phrase, though that should be, may be turned by, if that was ; and as often as you can turn the second preterimperfect by the imperfect subjunctive, or the second preterpluperfect by the pluperfect subjunc- tive, you ought to do it ; and then those second preterim- perfects are put in the subjunctive mood in Italian ; for example, if I had been at Rome, or if I were at Rome, I should endeavour to live with the Romans. S^Iiere you may turn the phrase, and say, if I was at Rome ; in Italian you must say, sefbssi stato a Roma, o se vi fbssi, procu- rer ti di viver co'Romani. * # * The Italians use the future tense after the conjunc- tion if when they speak of a future action; but the Eng- lish, the present : example, to-morrow, if I have time, do- ?ndni 9 se airo tempo, and not se ho ; if he- comes we &hall see him, se verra, lo> vedrtmo, and not se viene. $T When they speak of visiting a person at his house, they use the verb venire instead of a?iddre: example, I will go to-morrow to your house, verrbjda voidomdni. * # * When we forbid a person, to whom we say thee and thou, to do a thing, we ought to use the infinitive, and not the imperative: example, don't thou do that, non far questo-, «ay thou nothing, non dir niente ; don't thou stay, non tijermdte, A con- Of the SYNTAX of VERBS. 211 A conjunction between two verbs obliges the last to be of the same number, person, and tense, as the first: example, the king wills and commands, il rt vuble e com* mdnda ; I see and I know, io vedo e conbsco. To know when to make use of the Subjunctive, read the following remarks, * # * 1. The conjunction che generally requires the subjunctive after it; example, bisbgna che Pittro cdnti, crida, s&nta, esca, &c. {Kr" 2. Take notice, that che makes all the words, to , which it is joined, become conjunctions ; as, accioche, to the end that : prima che, avanti die, before that ; benche 9 although ; ddto che, supposto che, suppose that ; which govern the subjunctive: example, accioche, prima che 9 btnthe, suppbsto che, io pdrli, io esc a, &c. * fr * 3. In order, therefore, to know when to put the verb which comes after che, that, in the indicative, and when in the subjunctive, take particular notice of the following examples : That I may speak, that I may love, that I may sing.' Now these verbs, speak, love, sing, which are after cht^ i that, are in one sense in the indicative, and in another in J the subjunctive mood. The way then of not mistaking the one for the other is, to suppose that the vetbfdre, to do, stands in the place of the verb that follows die. The verb fare makes, in the present of the indicative, fo, fax, fa ; faccidmo,fdte, fdnno. The same verb fare makes, in the subjunctive, fdecia^ fdccia,fdccia; faccidmo, f accidie, fdeciano. To know - whether the above examples, speaks love, sing, are in the indicative or subjunctive, put the verb fare in their stead : example, il mio frattllo vubl ch'io pdrli : if, instead of the verb parli, you put the verb fare, you will say, il mio frattllo vuol chio fdecia: the verb fdecia is in the subjunctive, consequently, pdrli will be in the same mood. I shall 21JI Of the SYNTAX op VERBS. I shall give another example, in which the verb that follows the will he in the indicative, and not in the subjunctive : U mio fratello crede ch'io parlo. Instead of par to, put the verb fare, you will say, il mio fratello crede ch'io fo: the verb to jo is in the indicative, therefore pdrlo must be in the indicative also: and so of. the rest of the verbs. Hence, according to the first example, you will say, mio fratello vu6l ch'io parli ; and, according to the second mio fratello crede ch'io pdrlo: pdrlo is the indicative, and parli in the subjunctive. Observe that, to speak Italian correctly, you should make use of the subjunctive in both cases ; as, vuol ch'io parli, and crede ch'io parli The difference between those two examples is, that in the latter you may some- times make use of the indicative, though not so properly ; in the former you must always employ the subjunctive ; you therefore may say, mio fratello, crede che parli or pdrlo; and vubl che parte, and not parlo. In order rightly to know whether you are to make use of the indicative, or of the subjunctive, read tha following remarks. * # * 4. The verbs that signify will, desire, command, permission, and fear, followed by the conjunction che, require the subjunctive after them: example, I will, I desire, I command, I permit, my brother to love, speak, see, go out, &c. voglio, desidero, comando, permUto, che mio fratello dmi, pdrli, veda, esca, &c. I fear he»,may not sing, he may not say, &c. temo che non cdnti, che non dica, &c. %* 5. After the conjunction although, the English some- times uSe the subjunctive ; as, although he bean ho7iest man, although he may do that. In Italian you must take care how you express though or although ; if it is by bench*-, you must put the subjunc- tive after it : example, though he is an honest man, benche sia galdnt' uomo ; though he does that, benche fdccia questo, t+t But if you Tender although or though, by sebben, then you must not use the subjunctive, but the indi- cative; example, though he is an honest man, sebben ega- Of the SYNTAX of VERBS. 213 v gaUnt* ubmo, and not sia; though he does this, sebben fa questo, and not faccia. %*■ 6. When you inert with two verbs, the former of which is preceded by the particle non, and the second by che, you must put the latter in the subjunctive: example, I did not know you loved, non sapho, che amdste; I do not believe he studies, non credo che studj ; I do not think he walks, nonp'enso che cammini. %* 7- When the pronoun qual precedes a verb, and you do not speak by an interrogation, you must put the following verb in the subjunctive : example, not knowing which was the season proper for sowing, non sapendo qual fosse la stagibne propria da seminar e ; I do not see which is his intention, non vedo qual sia I'intenzibne sua ; I do not know which are your books, non so qu&li siano i vbstri libri. But if we speak by interrogation, you must put the verb in the indicative : example, which is yours ? qual e V vbstro. %* The articles, del, dello, delta, degli, &c. coming after a verb, are apt to puzzle those who learn Italian : and no one has hitherto thought of removing this difficulty. To explain the matter ; *** Observe, that the Italians often put the genitive after a verb active : example, give me some, or of the bread, datemi del pane ; eat some, or of the pye, man- gidte del pasticcio. You see, by those examples, "the geni- tive is put after a verb active : but observe, at the same time, we are not speaking of a whole, but only of a part ; for, give me some pye, some bread, some wine, some meat, denotes only a bit, or a Utile part of the pye, bread, wine, or meat. If we would speak of ?, whole, we must not express the articles del, dello, dcu'la, &c. : example ; I have eaten petty patties, ho mangiato pasticcietti ; I have seen men, ho veduto iiomini ; you owe me a huudred crowns; give me bread, wine, and meat, in payment : mi doitte cento sciidi; datemi ' p&ve,vino, e came in pagamento. In the last examples, the articles, del, dello, delta, &c. are not expressed, because we speak of a sum, a quantity, K a whole, 2U Op the SYNTAX of VERBS. a whole, that, is not separated, and which has no regard or relation but to the person who speaks. %* Note also, that after the particles?, it is, or they, we must not express the articles, del, dtllo, delta, &c. : example; they see men, si vedono uomini ; they tell bad news, si di- cono cattive nubve. You must not express the articles, del, dtllo, delta s dcgli, &c. after the prepositions, as the French express du, de la, de V, des : example, avec des soldats, Fr. con soldati, with soldiers ; your des pay sans, Fr. per contadini, for peasants; dans des paniers, Fr. in canestri, in baskets ; sur des che- vaux, Fr. sbpra cavdlli, upon horses. %* But if the articles, del, delli, delta, signify, concern- ing; as, they speak of your affairs, that is to say, concerning your affairs, the article must then he expressed : Gxample, they speak of you, si pdrla di vbi ; they treat of war, si tratta della gucrra; they talked of affairs of state, si par- lava ddgli affdri di state. It is therefore true, as you have observed, that there are particular cases, in which the articles are not expressed ; nay, it is elegant then to omit them. N. B. We may add to the above rule, that in general when the article is omitted in English, it is also omitted in Italian. The verb impersonal, there is, there was, there will be, has been explained at length, among the impersonal verbs, iu the first part, p. 147. CHAP. VI. Of the Syntax of Participles, "pVERY participle in the Italian language ends in to, or so i as, amdto, crediito, jimta, drso, prtso, sceso, rimdso, sblito. The active participles that follow the verb avere, must «?nd in o ; as, I have Of the SYNTAX of PARTICIPLES. 21* I have seen the king, ho veduto il re, I have seen the queen, ho veduto la regine. I had loved books, avevo amdto i libri. I Irad carried the letters, avevo portdto le lettere. We meet with authors who sometimes make the partf- eiples agree with the tiling of which they are speaking ; as, the moon had lost her rays, la luna aveva perduti i siioi rdggi. If the substantive is before the participle, they ought to agree together : example, the books that I have com- posed, i libri ch'ho compbsti ; the letter that I have written, la lettera ch'ho scritta. One may also say, la luna aveva perduto i suoi rdggi, &c. ; i libri ch'/to compbsto ; la let- tera ch'ho scritto. But it is more adviseable to follow the above rule. * # * If it be a verb neuter, the participle ought always to terminate in o: example, the king has dined, il re ha pransdto ; the queen has supped, la regina ha cendto ; the soldiers have trembled, i solddti hdnno tremdto ; my sisters have slept, le mie sorelle hdnno dormito ; your friends have laughed, i vbstri amki hdnno riso. When the active participle happens to precede an in- finitive, it must be terminated in o : example ; il giudice gli ha fdtto taglidre la testa, the judge has caused his head to be cut off; mia sorella ha creduto partir, my sister had like to have gone. , The passive participles, which are joined to the tenses of the verb essere, agree with their antecedent ; that is to say, those participles must be put in the same gender and number as the preceding substantive : example; th« cap- tain is praised, il capitdno e loddto ; virtue is esteemed, la virtu e stimdta ; the lazy will be blamed, i pigri sa- rdnno biashndti ; your jewels are sold, le vbstre giqje sono vendute. * # * Take notice, it is more elegant in Italian to use the tenses of the verb venire, instead of those of the verb essere, before a participle : example ; he is esteemed, viene stimdto, for e sthndto ; he shall be praised, verrh hddto, for sard loddto ; they shall be blamed, verrdnno k 2 biasi~ 216 Of the SYNTAX of PARTICIPLES. biasimati, iox saranno biasimati ; and so of all the tenses, and all the persons. We generally suppress the gerunds, having and being, before the participles: example ; having said so, quest o detto ; the sermon being ended, finita la predica. *£* In attempting to explain or translate an Italian book into English, we must remember that the participles frequently occur without any tenses of the verbs avere or tssere before them ; as, il quale, inteso'l disegno, maravi* gliatisi i cbnsoli. Then it is a sure sign that the gerunds avhido or essendo are suppressed : and, to explain it properly, we must ren- der it as if it were, il quale, avendo inteso'l disegno ; e$- sendosi maraviglidti i cbnsoli. We must also observe, that although avendo and essendo are suppressed before the particles, we must not suppress the conjunctive pronouns, nor the monosyllables that o light to follow the gerunds avendo and essendo, but we should put them after the participles: example, having seen it, avendolo veduto : in suppressing avendo we must say, vedutolo ; being aware of it, essendosene accorto : in sup- pressing essendo, we transpose sent after the participle, and say accortosene. It is better to place the nominative after the gerund than before; as, the king being a hunting, essendo' I re alia caccia ; the soldiers fighting valiantly, combattendo vato- rosamente i solddti. If after the verb there is an accusative, or any other case, we must put the nominative before the verb ; for instance, the soldiers being afraid of the enemy, in Italian we must say, i soldati ttmendo gV inimki, and not te- mendo i soldati gV inimki. CHAP. VII. Of the Syntax of Adverbs and Prepositions. A.T is expressed in Italian by da, or in casa. When at is expressed by da, we put the pro- nouns personal after it: example; at our house, da not ; Of the SYNTAX of ADVERBS, &c. 217 noil at your house, da voi; at my house, da me; at thy house, da te ; at his house, da liii ; at her house, da Ui\ at their house, mas. dalbro; at their house, fern, da esse. *4* When at is expressed by in edsa, instead of the pronoun personal, we must use the pronouns possessive : as ; at our house, in casa nostra ; at your house, in casa vvstra ; at his and her house, in casa sua ; at thy house, in casa tua ; in their house, in casa loro. *'J*- If after at there be an article or a pronoun possessive, you must render at by dal, ddllo, ddlla, da\ did, ddgli, dulle, or else by in casa, with the articles of the genitive: example ; at the prince's, dal prmcipe, or in casa del prmcipe, \ at the scholar's, ddllo scoldre, or in casa dtUo scoldre ; at the sister's, ddlla sorclla, or in casa delta sorella ; aL the men's house, ddgli uomini, or in cdsadtgli uomini ; at my friend's, dal mio amico, or in casa del mio amk'O ; at his relation's, da suoi parenti, or in casa de snot parenti ; at the abbot's, dal signor ubbdie, or in casa dtl signer ahbute. The indefinite article di is- not expressed after the adverbs of quantity, how much , how mam/, much, Hi lie. as much as, more, &e. ; but these adverbs are made to agree with the following nouu, as if they were adjectives : example ; how much time, quanta tempo ; how much meat, quanta came ; how many soldiers, qudnti solddti ; a great deal of pleasure, motto piacere ; a great deal of pain, mblta pena ; a great many men, molti uomini ; a little time, poco tfmpo ; a little fever, poca febbre ; so much patience, tint a pazitnza; as much courage, tdnto dnimo ; a great many persons, mblte persone ; how many coaches] qudnte carrozze ? I have no more hope, non ho piii sperdnza. **'* A great deal of, is frequently expressed in Italian by gran: example, 1 have had a great deal of pain, ho aiido gran ptna ; a great deal of rain, gran pioggia ; a great deal of time, gran thnpo ; a great deal of pleasure, gran piacere. %* A little of, is rendered in Italian by poco di ; as, a little bread, wi poco di pane ; a little of compassion, un poco di pietd. K 3 Qui 218 Of the SYNTAX of the Qui and qua signify here* Qud is joined with verbs of motion .* example, venile qua, passdte quel, come here, pass here. The Italians often use costi and costd, to point out the place where the person is, to whom we speak or write ; as V. S. mi scriva di costz, or di costd. See Lodovko Dolce, nel capitolo degli averbj locdli; yet I should prefer costi to costd. The best writers have often followed this rule. %* The Italians frequently use the adverb oggi to ex- press after-noon, or after dinner : example, come and see me after dinner, veniie oggi a vedtrmi, veniie oggi da me. Important Remarks on the Participle si, it is, ox they, &c. SI, used with a verb impersonal, signifies, it is or they t example ; si dice, it is said, or they say ; they speak, si purla. They not, is expressed by non si ; as, nan si dice, they do not say ; non si pdrla, they do not speak. They of it, is expressed by sene ; as, sene saprd qu&lche tSsa, they will know something of it. They not of it, is expressed by non sene ; as, non sene p fir hi, they do not talk of it. %* Note, learners are greatly at a loss how to express in Italian, they us of it, they you of it, they him of it, they me of it, they thee of it, &c. ; yet there is nothing more easy, if you do but turn the phrase by the tenses of the verb essere, to be ; example, to render, they will speak to us of it, we must turn it andj say, it will be spoken of to us, ctne sard parlaio. ( will write to you of it, vene sard scritto, They < speak to you of it, gliene vien parlato, ( write to us of it, cene viene scritto. They promise me some, mene sono promessi, or msne ■vu;n promtsso, or mene viingono promessi. By these last examples you find that it is more eiegant to use the verb venire than the verb esstre* Remember^ ADVERBS and PREPOSITIONS. ®i$ Remember that the pronouus Iq, la, /t, h, are no* expressed after the particle si: example, they say so, si dice, and not, si lo dke ; they all know her, si conoseera ; they see them frequently together, sbno veduti spcsso lifetime. See, p. 214, what has been said concerning the articles del, dtlla, dtgli, delle, &e. Observe, nevertheless, that the best writers have often, and even with elegance, expressed these pronouns; but at present they are laid aside except by poets, who use them sometimes to serve the measure of their verse. Hence we no longer say t si dice, but simply si dice ; e si conoscera t or la si conoseera, but si CGnoscerd. Behold the letters, they will be read, tcco le lettere, si leggerdnno. The conjunctive pronouns must be transposed whenever the particle si comes before them, as I have already ob- served, p. 206*. *#* Yet this rule for transposing the conjunctive pro- nouns, when the particle si comes before them, is not ge- neral; for there are. some phrases in which the conjunctive pronouns must by no means be expressed, but the phrase is changed. When the conjunctive pronouns are put after the par- ticle si, and there is neither a noun nor case after the verb that follows, you must change the phrase without ever expressing the particle si ; as, they ask for me, sono demdn- dalo, I. am asked for ; they seek you, sitte cerclito, you are sought for; they will praise us, saremo lodati, we shall be praised. But if there happens a case after the verb, as, they ask me for a crown, you should express the conjunctive pro- noun, and say, mi si domanda uno scudo, or mi vime doman- daio uno scudo ; .they ask some bread of you, vi si doman- da par- c ; they will commend virtue to us, ci sara loddta la virtu. %.* If the conjunctive pronouns, that come after the particle si, be followed by a verb in the preterperfect definite, the phrase must be turned by the verb essere, and you must put the preter-derinite fii, or furono, according as you are speaking, in the singular or the plural ; as, they gave me a book, mi fu dato un libre ; they sent me letters, mi furono mandate Uttere; they K 4 wrote 220 Of the SYNTAX of the wrote us a letter, cifu scritta una leitera. Sometimes the phrase is turned thus; they sent for us to Rome, fummo manddtia Roma; they blamed y w, fbste biasimdto, or V. S.fu biasimdto. When the third persons of the verb avere, to have, are preceded by the particle si, and after those third persons there follows a particle, you are to render the third persons of the verb to have, by those of the verb essere, io be; putting -them in the same number with the thing mentioned : as; if we had said so, se sie detto questo; if they have read the letters, se si fbssero lette ie tettere. When they shall have taken the town, qndndo la cittd sard preset* See, p. 1 46", the remarks on impersonal verbs, with the particle si* But when the tenses of the verb to have, are preceded by the particle si, and there is no particle after the verb to have, we must use the tenses of the verb avere, instead of those of the verb tssere: example; they have some bread to eat, si ha del pane, or pune da man- • giare ; they have servants to wait, si hdnno servitbri per senire. For the better explanation of the foregoing important remarks on the particle si, it will be proper, I apprehend, to add the following observations. The first is, that this particle $i must not be used with reciprocal verbs, but the phrase should be turned; other- wise you would have two si's joined together, which would be disagreeable. Thus you do not say, si serve dille creature per offender Dio, they make use of the creatures to offend God ; but uno si serve, or I'ubmo si serve, &c. The second is, that constant experience shews it to be extremely difficult for those who are beginning to learn Italian, to express, they me of it, they thee of it, they him of it, they us of it, they you of it, they him of it, joined to a verb in the compound preterite. I shall therefore give here the indicative intire, which may serve as a gene- ral rule for all the other moods and verbs ; therefore I shall say, Indicative ADVERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 221 Indicative present. They write to me of it, mene viene, or men' e scritto. They write to thee of it, tene viene, or ten' e scritto, They write to him of it, gliene viene, oxglieri e scritto, They write to us of it, cene viene, or cen' e scritto. They write to you of it, vene viene or ven' e scritto. They write to them of it, ne viene, or rie scritto loro. In the other teuses I shall only put the first person singular, as it is easy to know the rest by means of the present indi- cative, which is conjugated entire. Imperfect. They did write to me of it, mene veniva, or men' era scritto, &c. Preter-definite. They wrote to me of it, mene venne, or mene fu scritto, &«. N. B. in the compound tenses we do not make use of the verb ventre, but of essere. Thus, Preter perfect. They have written to me of it, men 1 e stdto scritto, &c. Pluperfect. They had written to me of it, men' era stdto scritto, &c. Future. They will write to me of it, mene sard scritto, Sec. 1 shall iusert here another indicative, to clear up the difficulty of mi si, ti si, gli, si, &*c. they me, they thee, they him; and I will say thus, Indicative present. They ask me, or I am asked, an Italian and French grammar printed at Basil. Mi si domdnda, or dU mdnda, or mi viene doman- ddta una grammdtica Itali- dna e Franzese, stampdta a, or in Basilea, K 5 They 222 Of the SYNTAX of the C Ti si domdnda, jkc. or ti They ask thee, Sfe. < viene domanddto, or doman- ( d&ta. C Gli si domdnda, &c. or They ask him, fyc. < gli viene domanddto, or I domanddta, &c. C Ci si domdnda, &c or They ask us, fyc» < ci vitne domanddto, or do- I manddta, &e. e Vi si domdnda, &c, or They ask you, %c. < vi viene domanddto, or da- , f C manddta, &c. r Si domdnda loro, &c. or They ask them, fyc. 3 viene domanddto, or domam- ( data loro, Sec. Imperfect, C Mi si domanddva, or mi They did ask me, fyc~ Ivmiva domanddto, or do~ [manddta, Preter -definite. e Mi si domandb, or mi They asked me, $c. \venne domanddto, or do- I manddta. PreUr-perfect. xj, , [stdto domanddto* ._, , , v ^ e \stdta domanddta. They havered me, > t domanddto, or lMtse ^ domanddt ^ Pluperfect* M } ' $ s tdto domanddto ?. gl. ' V •*,.,, ,' , S er l stata domanddta. They had asked we, j \ donmndato, ov Future. ( Mi si domanderd, or mi They will ask me r 5 verrd domanddto, or do- l -manddta. \* Observe, that in using the verb venire, instead of tssere, you do not express the particle si* THE ADVERBS &sv PREPOSITIONS. 223 THE prepositions govern some cases, as maybe seen in the seventh chapter of the first part, where we treated of prepositions. The Italians frequently use the particle pur only as art ornament of speech; as, dite pur quel die vipiacerd, say what you please. It is customary for them to use pur when the English repeat the verb in the imperative mood ; as, go, go, anddte pur ; give, give, date jn'ire. Not is always rendered by non : example, non dite m'* cnte, do not say aviy thing. In, before a noun, is expressed by in ; example, if* Francia, in France. Some or any, before a verb, is expressed by ne ; as, will you have some or any] ne volet e? In, with the article the, singular and plural, as also before pronouns possessive, is expressed by nel f nello, ntlld, nei, &c. as I have already remarked, p. 42: example, in his book, nel suo libra. However, in is generally expressed by in ; as, in Paris, m Parigi ; in me, in me. *,* Observe, that as often as in comes before numeral nouns, to mark the time, it must be expressed by trh or fret ; example; in two hours, fra due ore; in three months, fra tre mesi. * # * But if in precedes numeral nouns, without marking the time, it must be expressed by in : example, in three bottles, in tre ji&schi ; in a garden, in un gi~ ardino. Very is expressed by mblto, &c. : example; he is very merry, 6 mblto allegro ; it is very hot, fd mblto caldo. #* A great deal of, or muck, is rendered by gran* or grande : example ; there is a great deal of folly, v* e grhri pazzia; he has a great deal of vivacity, ha grande spn-ito. Kf* More, ox more of, is expressed by maggibte, whenever you can turn, more, by greater or more great : example; we must have more courage, bisbgna avert muggibr corrdggio ; it may be turned thus, vk must have greater K 6 towage: 224 REMARKS Otf SOME courage : with more boldness, con maggibr' ardire; it may be turned, with greater boldness. * # * When more denotes a greater number or quantity, it is expressed in Italian by maggibr numero di, or maggibr quantitd di; as, we must have more soldiers, more men, more wine ; bisogna avere maggibr numero, or maggibr quantitd di solddti, d'uomini, di vino. * # * When more than happens to precede a word of time, you may put piu at the end or at the beginning ©f the phrase : example, it is more than ten yeais, sono died dnni e piu ; it is more than an hour, e un' bra e piii ; you may likewise say, sbno piu di died dnni, e piu d! un* ora. *** The conjunctive so, before adjectives and adverbs, is rendered in Italian by cos), or si, with a grave accent : example, so great, cosl grdnde ; cosi tdrdi : or si grdnde, si tdrdi; sifdtto, masc. stfdtta, fern, signifies s nch ; they likewise use cost ; as. come, siccome. FOURTH TREATISE. Remarks on some Verbs mid Prepositions that have d iff ere n t Sig n ifica t io n s . T^HE following phrases contain great part of the Italian idioms, which constitute the chief elegance and beauty of that language. Different significations of and are. We may use the verb anddrt, through all its tenses, to express all the actions of the verbs of motion, by putting the same verbs of motion in the gerund, and the verb anddre in the tense and person that the verb of motion ought to be in ; as, He runs ; instead of corre, va correndo. . TUey take a walk, spasseggiano, or vdnno spasseggidndo. He VERBS AND PREPOSITIONS. 225 He will tell every where, andrd dicendo da per tut to* They must run, bisogna che vddano correndo. Make use of the verb and&re through all the tenses for the following phrases. [person Andar dietro, signifies to follow, to press, or to solicit a Andar' in amove, to fall in love Andar' male, to perish Andar ma, to go away Andar' in estasi, to be in an ecstasy Andar' a donne, to visit the ladies Andar' in collera, to put one's self in a passion Andar cercdndo rbgna, to seek misfortune or trouble Andar cercdndo ilpclonelVnovo^ to censure without reason Andar' a gdlla, to float, to swim on the water Andar in buon'ora, to go in peace Andar in mal'ora, to perish, to be ruined Andar par le teste, to be beaten Andar avhiti, to go before Andar alia lunga, to be tedious Andar' allt carte, to make haste Andar' inndnzi, to advance, improve, or go farther Andar' attorno, to go about Andar alttro, to be proud or stately Andar di tro, ad una cosa, to stand trifling with anything Andar col ptggio, to be worse Andar' in semenzia, to run to seed Andar per la mente, to come into one's mind Andar dimal in peggio, to fall out of the frying pan into Andar per viole, to speak impertinently, [the lire A lungo an dare, at long run Ci vd della vita, our life is at stake Andar mal in drnese, to be ill dressed, [estate Andar' a gdmbe levdte, to lose, to squander away one's Andar' a cavdllo, to ride on horseback Andar a dileito, to go to be merry Andar d dipbrto, to go a sporting Andar a soUzzo, to go a solacing one's self Andar a spdsso, to go a walking Andar* 226 REMARKS on some Andar' a girone, Andar' a file, Andar' a Voste, Andar* aldto, Andar' a V area, Andar 1 al bdsco, Andar* alia bttsca, Andar*' alia mdzza, Andar* all* oscuro, Andar* alia straglidta, Andar' a monte, Andar* a montagna, Andar' a onde, Andar' a pSlo, Andar' a riiba, Andar* a ruoto, Andar' a sdeco, Andar' a scidno, Andar* a seconda, Andar' a sccsse, Andar' a sinistra, Andar* a soldo, Andar" a sparvirre, Andar' a vdgna, Andar' a vela, Andar' a verso, Andar a vol lo lone, Andar a zonzo, Andar' a bdndo, Andar barcolcne, Andar carpone, Andar col cahdre di piombo, Andar con le Mile, to ramble about to march in order to be a soldier to loiter up and down to put in pawn to drink diet-drink to go a plundering to go to the slaughter to walk in ignorance to go reeling to prove vain to go out of the world to go waving to succeed in one's wishes to go a stealing to go a wheeling, or to hover to be plundered to go a sideling to go down the tide to go a reeling to miscarry by the way to go for a soldier to go a fowling to thrive well to sail to succeed well to go rowling to lie hulling, as a ship does to be published by proclamation to go staggering to go crawling to go needfully to go handsomely to work Andar come la bisciaall incdntc t \o go as a bear to the stake Andar con la piena, Andar di pdla infdsca, Andar di potdnte, Andar di bubne gdmbe, Andar dieCndo, Andar fallito ilpcndero, Andar gattaldne, to be on the strongest side to leap from bough to bough to go an ambling pace to set willingly about a thing to publish or report to fail in one's purpose to go groping Andar VERBS AND PREPOSITIONS. 22f He, > Andar grosso, Andar' in barberia, Andar' in bestia, Andar in biisca, Andar 1 in cerca, Andar* in cimbtlis, Andar' in cornavdglia, Andar in corso, Andar' infdscio, Andar in cosa materidle, Andar in negozio, Andar in polpegbne, Andar' in piccardia, Andar 7 in rolta, Andar in smcopi, Andar* stidzzo, Andar' in succhio, Andar' in traccia, Andar' in volt a, Andar la ronda, Andar' per il mondo, Andar per la pesta, Andar per la piuna, Andar perfilo, Andar piaggia a piaggia to look big to be in the powdering-tub to fall into a passion to go a sharking to search up and down to be transported with joy to be a cuckold to go a pirating to go to work to go groping up and down to go and be hanged to be routed to fall into a swoon to go sharking up and down to have one's mouth water to go a tracing to go ranging about to walk the rounds to travel up and down the world to follow the vulgar fashion to go the plain Dunstable way to be forced to do a thing to sail close to the shore Andar ramingo, Andar ratio, Andar rattemdOy Andar spdnto, Andar sopra le parole, Andar strttto, Andar capindndo, Andar tentone t Andar vuote, Anddrsene preso alle grida, to be poorly, begging up and down to sneak up and 'down to go warily to work to be extravagantly dressed to believe fair words to go about a thing sparingly to go a begging to grope about to miss one's aim to believe every idle report Different significations of dare. DARE signifies, to give, to fight, to strike Dar d'occhio, to cast one's eyes or* Dap' 228 REMARKS on some Dar* adbsso ad lino, Dar' a gdmle, Dar nel la rete, Dar le carte, Dar dnimo, Dar si 7 cuore, or I dnimo, Darfede, Dar' ad intend 'ere, Dar del tu, Dar* in nulla, Darsi V dcqua a pitdi, Dar' in luce, Ddrsi a fare, Dar nel rosso, Ddrsi pensitro, Dar del signore, Dar del surf ante, Dar parbla, Dar iu Iddri, Dar la uurla ad uno, Dar leva, Dar' in prestito, Dur fubci, Dar sicurta, to throw one's self upon a person to run away to fall into the snare to deal or give the cards to give courage, or encourage to have courage to believe to make one believe to thee and thou one not to succeed to praise one's self to publish to set about a thing to be a little on the red to take care for to call one a gentleman to call one a rogue to promise to fall into the hands of thieves * to laugh at a person - to provoke to lend • to bum, to set on fire to hail - Dar' in stravagdnze, to say things contrary to common sense Dar' nel mdtto, to play the mad-man Dar la quadra, to criticise Dar la cdccia, to put to flight Dar principio, or fine, to begin or eud Dar conto, to give an account Darsi alio studio, to apply one's self to study, [shadow Dar cdlci al v&nto, e pugni all aria, to fight with one's Dar di bbcca da per tidto, to concern one's self with every [man's business Dar da ridere, da parldre, to make one laugh, to make one [speak Ddrsi la zdppa siil piede e la mdzza in cdpo, to wrong [one's self Ddrsi bel Umpo, to divert one's self Dar' a beccdre, to cram poultry Dar 1 a credtnza, to sell upon credit, Dar VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 229 Dar addietro, Dar ddito, Dar' dlla mano, Dar all* drrne, Dar a pigibne, Dar a rwbu, Dar assunto, Dar a tdglio, Dar a t raver so, Dar a vedtre, Dar baggidne, or gonfidre Dar balddnza, Dar bdndo, Dar beccdre alia putta, Dar briga, Dar cagione, Dar cdmpo, Dar cdpo, to Dar capo mano, to Dar carbte, Dar che pensdre, Dar caphnento, Dar credenza, Dar crollo, Dar cucche, Dar da btre, Dar da dormlre, Dar da mangidre, Dar da ride.re, Dar de edict, Dar de edict al rovdio, Dar degV ingoffi, Dar delle bastondte, Dar delle bbtte, Dar delle calcdgna, Dar delle coltella, Dar delle mdni, Dar delle muccie, Dar delle pugrta, Dar dentro, Dar di brbeca, to give back to give access to to bribe to cry out for help to let out for rent to give to be plundered to give charge of to strike with the edge to hit across to give one to understand alciino,to \>i\ff one up with vain to embolden, [hopes to banish by proclamation to sink money at play to trouble one to give cause to give liberty come to the end of the matter go beyond reason in a business to make one believe any thing to give cause of suspicion to finish to give credit to to shake to give one toys to give drink to give one a night's lodging to give one some food to give cause of laughter to kick to be hanged to give a good box on the ear to beat with a cudgel to beat with stripes to kick to wound with any weapon to strike with one's hands to slap one with a fox's tail to cuff' to fall to to hit the nail on the head Dar 130 REMARKS on some Dar di cbzzo, Dar di grappo, Dar di mfino, Dar di mira, Dar di nam, Dar daparlar di se, Dar di ptnna, Dar di petto, Dar di pidtto, Dar di pit" Ho, Dar di punt a, Dar di stoceala, Dar fast idio, Dar Jinocchio, Darfbndo, Dar fondo alia robba, Dar jmma, Dar grbtta caper, D#r il battesimo, Dar il bubn anno, Dar* un bubn gibrno, Dar' il bubn vidggio, Dar' il bubn arrivo, Dar' il c/me, Dar' il cbmpito, Dar 1 ileudre ad una cbsa, Dar' il dbsso, Dar' il gumbo, Dar il grdnde addiO, Dar' il motto, Dar' Up sso, Dar' il suo maggivre, Dar' il viso, Dar' imprestdnza, Dar indiigio, Dar' in sbrbo, Dar- in sbmma, Dar' in sit la voce, Dar' in terra, Dar' in vno, Dar' la bate, dar la bbrta r to butt as sheep do to snatch at to lay hold on take aim at to smell out a matter to give occasion to be talked of to cancel a writing to hit breast to breast to strike flat in to catch hold suddenly of to hit with a thrust to give a thrust to molest to give fair words to sink. to waste one's estate to shapen to put one into a quandary to baptise to wish a merry new-year to bid one good-morrow to wish one a good journey to bid one welcome to watch one;: to give an end to to apply one's self to a thing to turn one's back to give court holy water to bid the world adieu to pass one's word to give free passage to do one's utmost endeavours to turn one's eyes on any thing to lead to to put off time to give in keeping to put out by the great to bid one speak lower to run aground to meetwitji one by chance to mock at. Dar VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 231 Dar la ben venuta, to bid one welcome Dar buona mdno, to wish one good luck Dar la cassia, to discard one Dar la corda, to give the strapado, to importune Dar la Java, to give one's consent Dar lafreccia, to wound with an arrow Dar la mala pdsqua, to vex one sadly Dar V allbdola, " 1 Dar cacabdldole, \ to coax, to flatter, to give fair Dar la quadra, | words. Dar la soia, ) Dar la mala ventura, to wish a man ill luck Dar la ma no, to give a helping hand Dai^ la mddre d'orldndo, to put a jeer on one Dar I'anello, to marry Dar la pdlma, to yield the victory Dar la parlglia, to give as good as he brings Dar la pinta, to shove one Dar la pSsta, to appoint the time or place Dar la sdlda, to stiffen, or starch Dar la stretta a qualcu.no, to overreach one Dar la trdtta^ to give leave to export goods Dar la vdce, to raise a report Dar la vblta, to turn as milk does, to overturn Dar la volta al cdnto, to lose one's wits I^ar le calcdgna, to run away Dar le masse, to give a racer the start Dar h spdlle, to take to one's heels Dar leprCse, to let one take his choice Dar lingua, to let one understand afar off Dar lo stormo, to give the spoil Dar ultimo crblle, to fall down dead Dar martiUo, to make one jealous or suspicious Dar menda, to find fault Dar modo, to help or support one Dar nel berz6gli&, Dar nelT idrbpico, to hit the mark to fall into a dropsy Dar nelle mdni y to fall into one's hands Dar nelle scattdte, to fall into bad company Dar nel vino, to find out the design of a thing Dar noia, to molest one D&r 232 REMARKS on some Dar nome, Dar norma, Dar' oglia, Dar ombra, Dar opera, Dar panzdna, Dar pur te, Dar passdto, Dar pdsto, Dar per Dio, Dar riedpito, Dar sesto, Dar spdlle, Dar sicnto, Dar' una bottisdfiola, Dar una bornibla, to Dar nel cappelldccio, Dar un carpino, Dar vkta, Dar vita, . Dar' unafinta, Dar' unagira volia, Dar' uri occkidta, Dar' un grijbne, Dar' un pax tecum, Dar la pe chiassi, Dar la v'mta, Darn, Ddrsi a che si sia, Ddrsi a credere, Dar si a dileiti, to Darsi ad iniendere, Dar si ad una, Ddrsi attorno, Dor si byiga, ?wia,fastidio, Ddrsi in pre da, Ddrsi in imo, Dd'ni maraviglia, Ddrsi mariello, Ddrsi pace, Ddrsi vdnto, to spread a report to prescribe a rule to sooth one to give suspicion to endeavour at a thing to feed one with vain hopes to impart or share to omit to feed one to give for God's sake to deliver safely to give order to abet to give cause of sorrow to put one into a quandary give false judgment at gaming to reprimand one severely to bear one soundly . to seem to do a thing to give time or life to make a feint to walk a turn.. to cast an eve on to strike one in the mouth to stun one with a blow to get out of the road to yield the victory to apply one's self to to be for any thing for man to persuade himself give one's self over to pleasure to flatter one's self to give one's self up to one to go the round to trouble one's self to }ield one's self as a prey to refer one's self to one to wonder at to vex one's self to live quietly to brag of one's self . Different VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 23: Different significations of fare. FAR unimo, Far si animo, Far' a proposito, Far motto, Far del bravo, Far scelta, Far pbmpa, Far il grvgno, Far dandri, Far gtnte, or solddti, II far delta lima, Al Far del giorno, Su'l Far delta n6tte 9 Far di mestieri, Far guaddgni, Far due volte I'dnno, Farsi inndnzi, Farsi in quit, Fdrsi in lit, Farsi in dietro, Far brindisi, Far capolino, Far la spia, Far pace, Fate pace, Far a bottino, Far a capegli, Far accoglitnza, Far' a cempasso, Fur' a concorrenza, Far acquisto, Far' a creder, Far' a gar a, Far aguafi, Far' a gutckia, Far' a pugni, Far' aiiito, Far' al bdcchio, Far all' amore, to give courage to take courage to be proper, or fit to make a sign to set up for a bully to chuse to boast • to pour at one to heap up money to raise soldiers the new moon at the break of day towards the evening to be necessary to win to bear fruit twice a year to come forward to approach, or advance to go back to retire to toast a health to deceive or ensnare to be a spy to agree agree among yourselves to share alike to pull one another by the hair to shew kindness to one to work by the compass to strive, to vie to gain to make one believe to strive for the victory to lay ambushes to knit to play at fisty cuffs to help one to do, go, or speak Jo no purpose to make love Far' 23* REMARKS on some to toss one about to fight with weapons to play at hanOy cuff* to halt to play least in sight to come to blows to do against one's will to do by halves to mince to do a thing exactly to make preparation to struggle or scramble to roast meat to make one know to throw or fight with stones to make one be silent to thrive to play at bo-peep to proclaim to flout at to sooth or fawn upon to be needful to make a hurly-burly to come to a good effect to keep fair with one's neighbour to be merry and jovial to make a good offer to make one yield to beat a man with his own weapons to grow to a head, as a sore does to have recourse to one for help to meet in some appointed place to pump a man of his secrets to make account of, or esteem to make mouths at to seek after to make a ring to call his wits together Far che. che si sia alia mdechia, to do things in hugger- Far cipiglio, to look frowingly. [mugger Far colazione, to breakfast Far Far\ alia pdlla (lit no, Far' alle coltellate, Far' alle pugna, Far' alto, Far' a chtti, Far' a mano> Far' a malcuore, Far' a m&ta, Far" a miccino, Far' a pennillo, Far' appresto, Far' a regatta, Far' a rosto, Far' a sapere, Far* a sedssi, Far' a tacit. Far' avdnzo, Far' bdeo bdeo, Far bdndo, Far beffe, Far bell'mo bellino, Far bisbgno. Jtar broglio, Far bubna riuscita, Far bubna vicindnza, Far bubnfidnco, Far bubn partito, Far cant are, Far capelldccio, Far capo, Far capo ad uno, Far ctipo in un luogo, Far caselle, ' Far edso, Far ctsso, Far circa, Far cCrchio, Far ceruello, VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 235 Far cblta, Far camparita, Far cbmpra, Far come lo sparvivre, Far congiura, Far conserva, Far cbnto, Far cbpia, Far cordbglio, Far corttggio, Far cose difubco, Far cubre, Far da etna, Far del grdnde, Far del vezzoso, Far de cappello, Non Far di mCno, Far di vieto, Far d'bcchio, to make a collection to make appearance to buy a bargain to live from hand to mouth to conspire to lay up in store to reckon to make a copy to lament to fawn upon one to do wonderful things to encourage to get supper ready to take state upon one to play the wanton to pull off one's hat not to chnse but to prohibit to wink upon one. [world says Far dbsso di buffone, to do a thing, and not care what the Far d' una lancia unfdso, to bring a noble to nine-pence Far dubi chibdi inuna cdlda, to kill two birds with one stone Far entrdre uno in vatigia, to provoke one to anger Far fdccia, Far fagotto, Farfigliubli, Far filar e uno, Far forte, Far fret t a, Far front e, Far fubco nelV bricio. Far gdbbo, Far gala, Far galloria, Far gtnte, Far gorndia, Far grdzia, Far greppo, Far grida, Far gruzzblo, Far osUrta, to set a good face on things to pack up one's awls, and to begone to beget and bear children to make one do any thing to strengthen to make haste to face to do one's business secretly to flout at to be gay and j^erry to show signs of joy- to raise men to fight a battle to do a favour to make up a mouth to cry out to hoard up money to keep an inn Far 23b REMARKS on some Far' i fatti sued, Far'- il balbrdo, Far' il btllo in piazza, to Far UJbubn pro, Far' il compito, Far 7 il didvolo, Far'ilforno, Far' iifigadttto, Far il gattbne, to Far' il giorgio, Far' il Latmo a cavdllo, Far' il rbmbo, Far' il rosso, Far* il sdnto, Far f il verno, Far il seme, Far instanza, Far in piedi, Far la biisca, Far lajtsta ad iim, Far lajischidta, Far la gdtta morta, Far la rimfa, Far la mbtte, Far la rbnda, Far la rubta del pavbne, Far la scdrpa, Far la scoperta, Far la scbrta, F^tr-rtt-bhza, Far le carte, Fa?' le parole, Far la Itprcv&vhia, Far le spdlle gobbe, Far la sica, Far le spese, Far le siimate, Far levdta, Far le volte del libne, Far lo spasimato, Far lo spaventaahio, to follow one's own afiairs to play the ninny [streets shew one's fine cloaths in the to do one good when one eats to end one's task to play the devil to play the baker to speak in the canting language make as if one saw or knew not to strut in fine clothes to be put hard to it to make a rumbling noise to play the minion to play the hypocrite to pass away the winter to come to perfection to be urgent with one to jumble standing to scramble for to endeavour to kill one to make a whistling noise to play at bo-peep to mince it to pass the night to walk the round to play the peacock to cut a purse to keep a watch to be a guide to cuckold one to deal at cards to speak at large to avoid a danger that's seen to shrug up one's shoulders to flirt at one to bear one's charges to esteem one greatly to raise nlen to be still walking in one place to over-play the lover to brag much Far VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 237 Far luogo, or piazza, Far mala riuscitd, Far mala vicindnza, Far maV d* occhio, Far mat pro, Far mdsckera, Far mercdto, Far mtrct, Far merenda, Far mind, Far motto, Far motto ad uno, Far natdle, Far' occhio, Far ogni possibile, Far' opera ' to give place to have ill luck to deal unhandsomely with one's to have sore eyes, [neighbours to do one no good to go a mumming to cheapen to do and shew mercy to eat one's nuncheon to seem to do a thing to give notice of to salute or send word to keep Christmas to wink at to do one's utmost to do the same Far orechio di mercdnte, to hear, and not to seem to hear Far paragone, Far partita, For passdggio, Far passdta, Far pdsto, Far pdtto, Far pecudio, Far peduccio, Far pensiere, Far ponta, Far ponta falsa, Far popolo, Far prezzo, Far prtstito, Far pro, Far questione, Far rahuffo, Far ragione, Far r&ffa, Far ricredente, Far richidmo. Far robba, Far ruota, ,Far Jaccdia, to compare together to make a match or bargain to pass over slightly to get easily through a business to eat a meal's meat to make a bargain to live by one's wits to sooth one to intend to make an end to make a false thrust to make one among the rest to make esteem of to4end to do good to question to chide to do right or pledge one to make resistance to make one change his opinion to appeal unto to heap up riches to wheel or hover about to fret inwardly L Far 238 REMARKS on so Ms. Far sdcco, Far saccomdno, Far salvo, Far sdngue, Far sapire, Far scdla, Far scommtssa, Far sconto, Far sembidnte,ov vista, Far s/oggi, Far sicurta, Far spdl/a, Far stare, Far stare forte, Far stare a segno, Far stare afiecchetta, Far tantdra, Far tavoldcch, For tempbne, Far testa, For trebbio, Far' il tribolo, to hoard up to sack or lavage to give a volley of shot to let blood to let one know to come to a landing-place to lay a wager to make an abatement to make a show of to brave it or be lavish to be bound to back one to over-reach one to over-reach one cunningly to keep one under to force one to his obedience to be gay and merry together to prepare for good cheer to live a merry life to make head to live merrily in good company to weep for money Far tidte V uova in tin paniere, to venture all in one bottom Far vedere laciuola ad uno, to make the fire fly out of one's Far vaUre, to cause to prevail, [eyes Far veduta, vista, finta, to make a show Far veduta, to make one believe what is not Far vtle, Far veto, Far vezzi, Far una brav&ta, Far' un cav&letto ad uno, Far' una drincdta, Far una giostra ad una, Far' una prtdica ad iino, Far' una taglidta. to saii to make resistance to play Ihe wanton to make a bravado to cheat one roguishly to make a merry drinking to put a jest upon one to admonish one fairly to keep a swaggering Far una farfallona, to commit some notorious fault Far 7 unfr&gio ad uno, to mark one in the face Far un manichetto, to point at one in scorn Far' un marone, to commit a great error Far un pamrbtto 9 to do a thing hand over head Far* VERBS and PREPOSITIONS, 4 3* ■'Far un penzolo, to be hanged by the neck Far imo smdcco ad una, to affront one Far uno sidglio, to fix Far' un tiro, to shoot or play a prank Far' vuoidre Is sella, to supplant a man Far' ntva, to lay egg* Different significations of stare. WE use this verb stare to mark an action of repose, hy putting the verb that follows in the gerund, or infinitive, with a, or ad. Sto) studidndo, or sta a studidre, he studies Stdnno scrivendo, or stdnno a scrivere, they write Stare ie leggendo,ox a leggere insieme,yo\x shall read together St are has several other significations ; as Star' in piedi, to stand upright Star ben o male, to be well or ill btar su y to rise ; state su y rise Star giu, t to sit down State giu, sit down Star a sentire, to listen ; sto a sentire, I listen Star a sedere, to be sitting State a sedcre, sit down Std bene, it is well, it is very well Star per uscire, to be just going out Star ben a cav&lh, to sit well on horseback Star in earn, to stay at home Star lesto, to be upon one's guard Star sit le burle, to jest, or banter Star soldo, to hold out stoutly, or fast Star per cadere, to be ready to fall Star per morire^ to be like to die Star' in dubhio, to be in doubt Star' a vedere, to expect the issue Star con le rnfati alia ciriiura, to stand idle, or with one's hands in one's pockots Star su la sua, to look grave L 2 - Q&fet* 240 REMARKS on some Questo vi sta bene, Questo non mi sta bene, Star 1 a bdda, Star' a becco, Star' a bottega, Star' a crepa cuore, Star ad alcuno, Star' in disdgio, s - Star a dormire* Star' a fare. Star' afronte, Star' a gala. Star' a giacere, Star' al detto, Star' alia posta, Star' all'erta, Itar' alle vedette, Btar' allegro, Siar' al mondo, £tar' a locdnda, Jltar' al paragone, Star' a martello, Star' a panciolle, 7 Star' in badidle, 3 Star' in pericolo, Star' a petto, Star a pigione, Star' a polio pesto, Star' appoggidto, Star' a schimbeci, Star' appresso, Stay' a stgno, Star' in sperdnza, Star' aspettando, Star a stento, Star attorno, Star tu per tu, Star' a uno, Star bene a cdsa, Star buona pezza, Star cdldo, that becomes you well that does not become me well to linger Or expect to out-face to mind one's shop to live at heart's ease to be at any man's turn to live in sorrow to lie sleeping to be doing to out -face to float to be lying along to rely on a man's word to watch for an opportunity to look heedfully about to stand centinel on a tower to live or be merry to live in the world to live in a hired room to bear the touchstone to live in anxiety to live in clover to be in danger to be opposite to live in a rented house to be at the point of death to lean upon to haunt bad places to stand or dwell near to stand near the mark to live in hopes to expect to live in sorrow to stand about to be hail fellow well met to depend upon one to be well to pass to stand a good while to lie warm VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 24i Star chdto, Star con dltri, Star delta detta, Star di bubna vbglia, Star di mala voglia, Star di sopra, Star di sot to, Star f Ms co, Star in aggudto, Star' in bildncia, Star innamordto, Star' inndnzi, Star' in drmi, Star' in bilico, 1 Star' in bistdnte, J Star' in cervello, Star' in dozzina, Star in letto, Star' in mblto, Star' in orecchio, Star in pendente, Star' in pbsta, Star in rischio, Star' in se, Star' in sentbre, Star' in sospetto, Star' in su I pontiglio, Star' in villa, Star' in zucca, Star' in ziirlo, Star maggese, Star lontdno, Star per, Star sopra di se, Star punta per punta, Star sdno, Star su'l aviso, Star su'l diiro, Star su'l ritrbso, Star su'l tirdto, Star tra'l si e'l no, to be hushed to dwell with others to answer for a debtor to be merry to be sad to lie over to lie under to be in an ill taking to lie in wait to stand in doubt to be in love to stand before to be in arms to be in doubt to have a care, or be wary to board to be abed to lie asleep to hearken to be in suspence to wait narrowly to be in danger to be positive to listen with suspicion to be suspected to stand upon punctilios to live in the country to lie open to all weathers to stand in a maze to live idle to dwell afar off to stand for, to be about to presume too much on one's self to be always at variance to be in health to be prepared to be obstinate to be coy to stand upon strict points to be between yes and no l 3 Star 242 REMARKS on some Star vielno, Star vigilante, Star zitto x . to be neighbours to be watchful to be mum or hushed Different significations a/avcre. AVE R dell uo mo da bene, to have the qualities of aa honest man Aver del mirdcolo, Aver cdro, aver da cdro, Avtr a bene, Avtrper bene, Avfr per male, - Aver a male. Aver' a more, Aver' il capo altrove, Aver da fare, Aver' in pregio, in istima, Aver in 7 edio, Aver per cqsticme, to look on it as a miracle to be well pleased to approve of to like or consent to to disapprove of to dislike to have at heart to think of other things to be busy to esteem to hate to be wont A"cr signifies to believe; as, Vhc per igncrdnie, I believe him ignorant Aver ipvki'0 neUe 6t'sa, ':•■' a c&pitukj Aver' a cur a, Aver a dare. Aver' a dispetto, Aver a dispiaccre. Aver-' a fasiidio, Aver agintt, Aver agio, . Ave?' 'A grddo, Aver' alle m&m> Aver a niahi^ A } :er a m'tnte, Avf.r dnhno, Ater' a niia, Aver* a petto, A.-er ardire, Aver schsrno, Aver a sch\fo f to be very vicious to esteem much to be careful of to give to have in despite to be displeased with to loath to be well in breath to be at ease to esteem to have in hand to have ready at hand to remember well to have courage or a mind to to loath to have at heart to dare to scorn to loath Aver' VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 243 Avfr a tornare, to be about to return Aver' a mle, to hold very cheap Ater Id ttixpo, to live a merry hie Aver hwna voce, to be well spoken of Aver eke si siaper mi pezzo di pane, to have a thing dog- cheap Avtr chniere ad ogni rfnistto, Av£r del tond-j, Aver detiro, Avtr di the, Avtr dietro, Aver di gratia, Avh'faccia, Avtrjdccia di pallciola, Avtr fa tic a, Aver ~fi.de in, Aitrfreddo in pudi, Aver/rtga, Aver fr tit a, Averfimo, Avtr gola, Aver grand* opinwne, Aver Hfido rosso, Aver d' ubjjo, Aver il capo a grifli, Aver il cervello a oriuoli, Aver il cervello die toll, Aver' il cimurro, Aver Usuo piono, Aver' il toi^to, Aver' hi consegna, Aver' hi cbnto. Aver in guardia, Aver' in negligenza, Aver' in brdene, Aver' in su le d\ta, Aver la gambata, Avtr la scolaziene to be ready for any ;Y to have a Utile wit to have fit occasion to have wherewith to contemn to take it as a favour to blush for shame to have a brazen face to be in want to confide in to be in great want to lust after to be in baste to be proud to have a longing desire to presume much on cl;': to be wrapt in one's mother'?, to have need to have one's wits wool-gathering* to be fickle to have a roving Iwad to have a whimsy in one's ' ?<:i] to have one's full allowance to be in the wrong to have in trust to have esteem of to keep to be careless to have in readiness to have at one's fingers ends to wear ttie willow greeu to have the running of the reins Avtr la palla in mano, to have the law in one's own hand Aver Vasso nel ventriglio, to have an itch at gaming Aver lingua, to have notice of a thing l 4 Avtr 244 REMARKS on some Aver V occhio al panello, to mind one's business Avtr Vbsso del poltrdne, to have a bone in one's leg Aver le campdne grosse, to be deaf Aver le budella in un paniere, to be in bodily fear Aver le raani ad uno, to hold one fast at his pleasure Aver le traveggole, to take one thing for another Aver luogo, to be expedient Aver r uovo mondo, to have any thing without pains Aver mala gdtta a peldre, to have an ill crow to pluck Aver mala voce, to be ill spoken of Aver male campdne, to be deaf Aver mangidte neci, to have spoken ill of the absent Aver martello, to be passionately jealous of Aver mfazo or mode, to be able, or have means Aver neW idea, to bear in mind Avtr obligo, to be obliged Aver' occhio, to have a fair outside Aver* occhio di ramdrro, to have a taking look Aver odor e, to have an inkling of a thing Aver bmbra, to be fearful of Aver paura, to be fearful AvSr pensiere, to be full of care, or thoughtful Avir per scusdto, to excuse one Aver pUde, to get footing Avtr poco sale in ziicca, to have but little wit Aver ragione da vendere, to have reason to spare Avir sde"gno, to disdain Aver sonno, to be sleepy, [crime Aver taccdto la coda di mal pelo, to be tainted with some Aver su la punt a della lingua, to have at one's tongue's [end Av6r titito I suo in su'l tavoliere, to have one's all at stake Different significations of essere. JEfSSER perfdre, to be just going to do E'sser da qudlche cbsa, , to be good for something E'sser da p6co f to have but little wit E'sser da niente, ; to be good for nothing E'sser a cavdllo, to be out of trouble or pain JVow esser da tdnto, not to be capable of, not to be able Esser VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 2U E'sser di giovdmento, Esser di bubna ndscita, Esser per la mala via, to Esser per Jafrdtte, to E'sser fuor di bologna, E'sser' a cavalliere, E'sser accivito, E'sser' a ferri, E'sser' a grddo, Esser' a coste, E'sser' o mal partito, E'sser anddzzo, E'sser' a parte, E'sser' a pbsta, E'sser in questibne, Esser ben vcdiito, E'sser d'aviso, E'sser bene in gdmbe, E'sser brillo, E'sser ddnno, E'sser di poca levdta, E'sser di testa, Esserforza, E'sser' in detta, E'sser' in asset to, E'sser in detto, E'sser' in disgrdzia, E'sser' in esser e, to be Esser' infaccenda, E'sser' injLori, Esser in for tuna, Esser' infrega, » Esser' in pagliuolo, Esser' in piega, Esser' in predicamento, Esser' in precento, Esser in succhio, Esser' in uggia, E'sser largo di bocca, E'sser' Inogo, Esser mala bretta, to help, to assist to come of a good family be ruined, to be in a bad con- be undone or ruined, [dition to be ignorant to have the upper hand to be well provided to lie close together to be acceptable to lie encamped to be in a bad taking to. have the plague reign to be partaker of to be prepared to squabble to be kindly entertained to deem to be strong and lusty to be foxed to be pitied to be of small worth to be hare brained to be constrained to have good luck at plav to be prepared to be' agreed to be in disgrace in state, quality, and condition to be busy to be in one's prime to be lucky to lust after to be in child -bed to be bending to be in consideration to be always ready to have one's mouth water to be troublesome to others to be a great talker to be convenient, to sow sedition among friends L <5 E'sser 246 REMARKS on some Ksser mal veduto, to be unwelcome Efsser pdce, to be quits at play Esser tenuto, to be beholden to E'sser' una coppa d'orv, to be one of a thousand Different significations of sape>e. SAP 1 ERE, signifies to know or perceive Sayer a mente, to know by heart Saper' a mma dito, t© have at one's fingers' ends Super male, to displease, to smell ill Qufcto mi sa male, that displeases me Saper di buono, saper bu6?io, to smell well Saper di cattko, to smell ill Saper di muffb, or di mucido, to have a mouldy smell Saper di niente, to have no smell, to siilell of nothing Saper trovdr il pelo nelV novo, to be cunning, to be sharp Tiso dire, I can tell thee Saper di letter e, to have a smattering of learning Saper di muse kio, to taste or smeR musk Saper de secco, to smell of the cask Saper megllo, to take in belter pail Saper per lo stnno, to know by rots Different significations of tenere. TENERE da imo, to be of one's side Tener' a bdda, to amuse one Tener in contrario, to be of a contrary opinion Tenere per galdnf uomo, to believe one an honest man Lo terigd per mdtto, I ta'ke him to be mad Tenere le Idgrime, to forbear weeping Non ho potirto tener le risa, I could not forbear laughing Tenure le risa, to forbear laughing Tener alia irdecia, to pursue Tener cento a' ixno, to make an account of, to esteem a Tenerla per se, to keep a thing to one's self, [person Tenetelaper vci, , keep it for yourself Tener' a mente, to call to mind Tenere lafavella ad imo, to hinder one from speaking // tale si tiene una tale, such a one keeps such a one Tener 1/EMS ani> PREPOSITIONS. Uf Tener* a battesiino, Tenth* mdno alfurto, Tentr carrbzza e servitbri, Tieni questo, Tenet e la candela, Tener' il sacco, Tenere la battdta, Tener e V invito, Tener' a dieta, Tener' a cimento, Tener a pivolo, Tener' a stent o, Tener a sua post a , Tenere curie bandit a y Tenere dozzina, Tener a bdda, Tenfrr* il bordone, Tenere fermo, lener m Dacca, Tenure la bestia in cavezza, Tenere le ocfie in pastura, Tenere le pesie, Teller e mdno, Tenere mente, Tenere meredto, Tenere ragione, Tenere parlamtnto, Tener' in sospeso, Tenere per fede, Tenere tratt (it o, to stand godfather to be accessary to a theft to keep a coach and servants take that (in the imperative) take the candle to hold the bag to beat time in music to accept of what is proposed to keep low in diet to hold to atrial to live at rack and manger to keep Jn pain to. keep one at his back to keep open house to keep a boarding house to hold in suspence to be still in one's mind to keep one's word to keep a secret to bridle one's appetites to keep wenches at rack and to hold stakes, [manger to lend a hand to to heed to bargain to judge according to law to hold a parley to hold in suspence to take upon trust to hold correspondence with Different sign ficat Ions of i volere. VOLE RE, signifies to believe ;. as r Voo-liono alefmi, some believe Volerla con iaio, to set upon one Vottr bene, , to love Voter male, to hate Voter pin tbsto. to have rather Qvalsivoglia, LG whatsoever Le 249 REMARKS on some Le cose vbgliono essere cost, Si vuble, VoUre dire, Voter emeglio, Voter eja bma 9 Voter e la gdtta, Volere tndle di mdrtp, VoUssepur Dio, things must be so they will, or are willing to mean to have rather to affect mocking to pick a quarrel with one to hate deadly oh! would to God Different significations of venire. VENI'R meno, venir Venir' in succhio, Venir' in sbrte, Venire sbtto il nbme, Venire stimdto, Viene biasimdto, Venir' alle strette, Nbn mi men bene, Questo vi vien bene, Qudnti vene vengonol M.tne vengono due, Mi viene vbglia, Venir' adosso, Venir 7 al di sbpra, Venir al quia, Venir' alle prese, Venir' alle bruit e, Vtnir' a battdglia, Venir' a bene, Venir' a dire, Venir 7 alle 7udni, Venire detto, Venire posti gli bcchi, Ventre fallito, Venire scontrdto, Venir' in tdglio^ Venir' in cdldo, Vtnir trovdto, mdnco, to fall into weakness, or to have one's mouth water, [faint to fall to one's lot to go by the name of to be esteemed he is blamed to come to blows it does not please me that becomes you well how many must you have 1 I must have two of them 1 have a mind or desire to fall upon to have the upper hand to come to the reason of a thing to come to close fight to come to foul words to fight a battle to come to good to import or mean to come to blows to be said to fix one's eyes on to miss one's aim or purpose to meet withal to suit well to grow proud to happen to find Of VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 249 Of the particles ci and vi. CI signifies us ; he speaks to us, d pdrla, &c. Vi sig- nifies you ; he speaks to you, vi pdrla ; he gives you, vi dd. Ci and vi are adverbs of place ; as, Ci sidmo, we are there, or at it. V andremo, we will go thither. Ci and vi are conjunctive pronouns, when they signify us and you; and when ci and vi signify there, at it, thi- ther, &c. they are adverbs of place. Different significations of che. CHE signifies that, who, whom, that he, that she, that they, which, what 1 Che signifies what ? what man is that 1 che uomo e ? Che? what? fem. what house ? che cdsa? Che? what? plural mas. what books have they? che libri hdnno ? Che plural fem. what lessons ? che lezioni 1 Che signifies because ; che la donna net desidr e ben di noi piii frdle, because a woman is much more weak in her desires than we are- Guarini nel Pastor fido. Che signifies so that, or in that manner. I will do it, so that, or in that manner, that you shall be contented, faro che sartte contento. Different significations of via. VI 'A signifies the way ; example, by the way of Paris, per la via di Parigi. Via is put after the verbs anddre,pas$foe, condurre,fug- gire, gittdre, or geltdre, and then these verbs have more force and elegance : as, anddr via, to go, to go away ; vd via, get thee away, pdssa via, furf ante, get thee gone, rascal ; condurre via ; to bring out : faggir via, to run away ; gittdte via qutsto, throw this away. Via 250 REMARKS on sosri Via signifies much : as, much more learned, via mil dotto. r Via signifies away, away ; as, away, away, gentlemen, do not fear, via, via, signori, non temete. ^ Via is sometimes taken for vblta ; example, tre via tre sbnonove, three times three are nine; qiiattro via qudttro sbno sedici, four times four make sixteen. Via signifies the means ; as, by the means of the pas- sages in the holy fathers, per via de' testi de' sanii pddri. Different significations of da. DA is oftentimes the ablative of the indefinite article,, and signifies in English from; example, ho rkevido da Pietro, I have received from Peter. Da* with an apostrophe is the ablative of the definitive article, and signifies from the, or by the : example, c di~ mdto da! Franctsi, he is esteemed by the French. Da signifies he gives ; example, mi da buona sperdnza, he gives me good hope, &c. Da signifies upon the faith „• example, da galdnf uomo, upon the faith of an honest man. Da signifies tike: example, hit irattdto da galdnf uomo, he has acted like an honest man. V. S. pdrla da amico, you speak like a friend. Da signifies of, or to put : example, una scdiola da ia- hdeco, a tobacco-box, or a box to put tobacco in. Dn signifies about : example, un! uomo attempdto da cinqudnta dnni, a man about fifty years old. Da signifies from ; example, from Rome to Paris, da* Roma fin' a Parigi. Da eke vi viddi, since I saw you. J)a before infinitives signifies io be: example, it u easy to be seen, e facile da vedtre* Different significations of pes. PER signifies for ; example, for me, per me. Per signifies through, or alt over ; example, through or all over the city, per tutta la cittd. Per signifies during ; as, during a year, per un dnno. Per signifies to fetch, and seek after : example, go fetch VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 251 fetch some wine, middle per vino ; go seek for a physL cian, anddteper un medico. Per signifies what : example, what good soever it be y per bubno che sia. Per signifies each or every : example, one in each hand, una per mdno. Per signifies just or ready to: example, he is just go- ing away, he is ready to go, ■£ per part ire. Per signifies every one: example, every one, un peruno* Per signifies depending on: example, it does not de- pend on me, non resta per ine. It signifies, as far as : example, as far as I see, per quel che vedo. Per signifies asfor: example, as for me, toper me. Per dnche signifies not yet ; example, I have not seen him yet, non Vho per dnche veduta. Different significations of si, ne, and'yur or p&re, THOUGH the following particles s*V ne, pur or pure, are not prepositions, yet their vast extent and signification ill Italian has induced me to insert the different accepta- tions of them here, for the greater eas« and advantage of the learner. SI Signifies it is, they, men, the world, yet, so, so as r as- much, as well, until, nevertheless, himself &c. Example. Si dice, it is said, or reported. Si ama, or si dmano, they love. Si dira, the world or men will say. Si, signor, yes, sir. Cavalier e si aventurdto non fit mdi, never was there so fortunate a gentleman. St per il mio, qudnto per il vbstro inter esse, as well for my interest as yours. Si la mbglie come il marito, as well the wife as the hus- band. Non si ritenne di correre s?fu a edsa, he did not cease running till he got home. Si 252 REMARKS on sq#e Si vi dmo, perche, nevertheless I love you, because. Egli si ricordb, he remembered himself or herself. %* Note, that when si is accented, it is always an adverb. NE . Signifies nor, neither, in the, with, hence, thence, away* at it, of it, us, from us, none, any, some, thereof, else, &c. Example, TVe questo, ne quello ti conctdo, I grant thee neither this, or that. Spasseggidndo ne cdmpi, walking in the fields. M' incontrdi ne miti amici, I met with my friends. Vdttene per fdtii tudi, get thee hence about thy busi- ness. Egli sene viene alia vblta nostra, he is coming towards us. Luine ha tolto il nostra ripcso,he lias taken our rest from us. lo mene vddo, lam going away. Sene ride, he laughs at it. Sene lament a, he complains of it. Egli ci diede il buvn di, he bade us good-morrow. Jo non ne ho, I have none. Se ne av.essi, if I had any. Venefarti parte, I would give you some. Voi ne poirtte disporre, you shall dispose thereof. * # * Note, that when ne is accented, it is always am adverb. Pur or pure Is a particle of great use and elegance in the Italian lan- guage, and signifies in English, yet, although, moreover, besides, notwithstanding all conditions, in the end, when all is said and done, so much as, not only, in case, surely, even, at least, needs, or of force : as it would be tedious to give examples of all the different significations of this extensive particle, I shall only mention the following phrases. Example, Pur adcsso, even now. Pur or a j now, now. VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 253 Pur mo, at this instant. Pur'' allora, even then. Pur y assdi, too, too much. Pur parole ? what ! nought but words ? Pur pure, yet. for all that. *** Note, that the following particles, di, e, egli, ci, ben, ne, gid, pur, me, die, il, have often no signification at all, but are used as expletives by way of embellish- ing the discourse. See the eighth treatise, chapter 1. of expletives. FIFTH TREATISE. Of Composition, and Pules of Writing and Speaking Italian; contained inafew Themes. A FTER we have learned the auxiliary verbs, and the three conjugations, we may begin to translate English into Italian,; and observe the rules of concordance : and, if we think proper, we may compose the following themes, upon the principles of the Italian language, without looking at the Italian that is put after the English, except it be to compare it with the translation. The first is upon the articles. The second upon the verb wcere. The third upon the verb essere. The third upon the pronouns, mi, ti, ci, vi, gli. The fifth upon the particle si. The sixth upon there is, there was, there will be, there has been. The seventh upon the articles of the, of, &c. Be careful in composing these themes, as they contain a great many niceties in the Italian tongue., I have put them in Italian, word for word, to render them the more easy. The words marked with a number, shew that there are some rules to be observed, as appears by the page which follows the Italian theme. THEME 2J* Of the ITALIAN COMPOSITION. THEME On the Articles. MY brother's fancy and desire for the study of the Ita- lian language, are the cause that the passion he had for hunting, gaming, and musical instruments, is at present much abated ; if he had believed the advice you did give him in Mr. President's garden, when he spoke to us of the wit of that gentleman, who was much esteemed by the king, he would then have begun to have studied the prin- ciples of it, he would at present have known part of the difficulties, and would have made a great many voyages with the nephew of a great prince, who would have had him. I 2 3 LA rbglia, c7 desiderio, dimiofrat'dlo, per lo studio delta 4- lingua Italidna, sow ceigibne che gli ardori cJi attva per la 5 6 1 cdccia, i giuochi, e gli stromenti di miisica, son 1 adesso 8 9 10 mdlto inodtrdti : se avesse credLto gli avvisi che gli U 12 13 It davdte nel giardino dtlsignor Presid'ente, qudndo ci par! diet 15 .16 1? ddlo spirito di quel gentilubmo cVera tdnto sthndlo dal re ^ 18 19 20 avrebbe allora comincidto di studidme i principj, so- 21 Vrebbe adesso una parte delle difficolta, ed avrebbe fd'.to 22 23 24 25 mblti vidggi col nipbtc d"un gran principe che lo voleva avere. This theme, and the following ones, are translated word for word. The number I shews that 7 is in the place of it, see The Of the ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 253. The number 2 teaches that we must say di mity and not del mipn see qage 67. 3. /a, and not«7, p, 36. 4». g/i, and not gl\ p. 37. 5. i is better than li, p. 37. 6. giuochi, and not giuoci, p. 49. 7. gti, and not //, p. 37. 8. se avesse, and notse uvtva r p. 88. 9. gli aVyisi, and not gT avvisi, p. 37. 1 0. gli* and not rot; p. 64. 1 1 . ncl and not in il, p. 42. 12. ate/, and not dello, p. 37. 13. signor Presidente, and not signore, p. 175* ] 4. «, and not rco/, p. 65. 15. delloy and not del, p. 3S.. 16. quel, and not quello^p. 56* 17. c/d/, in the ablative, p. 93. 18. studidrne, and not ncstudi&re^ p. 66, 19. i for ?/, p. 37. 20. principj, and not principi, p. 50, 21. difficoltd, and not dfjficoltJ, p. 45, 22. vidggi, and not viaggii, p.£0, 23. co/, and not co?* ?7, p. 43. 24. grcrn 4 and not.grande, p. 5&» 25* fo, and not il^p, 65. THEME In which all the Tenses of the Verb avere are inserted* I have the curiosity to know if you have done the busi- ness I had recommended to you ? If I had had time, I would have done it ; but not having had it, I have not been able to do it. You would have had it, if you had been willing, and if you had not played so much. I have quitted play altogether, to have my mind at rest. I shall therefore have some hopes that you will work for me. It 256 Of the ITALIAN COMPOSITION. It is reasonable that I have care of your affairs, since you have some of mine. Have some of mine, and I will have some of yours. 1 * 2 HO la curibsitd di sapere se avete fdtto Vaffdre che 3 v'avevo racontmanddto f 4 5 6 Se avessi avuto il tempo, Vavrei fdtto, ma non, avendolo 7 avuto, non Vho potutofdre, 8 V avreste avuto, se aveste voluto, e se non aveste giuo~ cdto tdnto. 9 Up lascidto ilgiuoco a fdtto, per avere lo spiritoinrip6so» 10 Avrb addnque qudlche spefdnza, che lavorerete per me. 11 12 E' ragionevole cliabbia cira de 1 vostri affdri, gidcht 13 n f avete de' miei. 14 15 Abbidtene de 7 miei, e riavrb de' vostri, 1. curiositd, with an accent, p. 179. * se avete, we use the plural, though we speak but to one person ; p. 257. 2. Vaffdre, and not to affdre, p. 36. 3. tf avevo for vi avevo, p. 174, 4. avessi, and not avevo, p. 88. 5. Vavrei for lo avrei, p. 174. 6. avendolo, and not lo avendo, p. 41. 7. Vho, for lo ho, p. 1 7 4-. 8. aveste, and not aveidte, p. 88, 89. 9. avere, without an />, p. 29. 10. avrb, with an accent, p. 179. 1 1. ch'dbbia^ and not che dbbia, p. 174. 12. de is belter than delli, p. 37, 174. 13. rt avete, instead of ne avite, p. 174. U.de 1 Of the ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 257 14. de'is better than delli, p.. 37, 174. 15. rC curb, for ne'avrb, 174. THEME On the Tenses of the Verb essere. I am well satisfied to have been received for a governor of those gentlemen, who have been in the country where you have been. You are in the right to be satisfied, because they are very generous gentlemen. I should be yet more glad if they had not been in Italy, because I should have made that voyage with them. It seems that you were there for some months last year. I should have been there, it is true, if my brother had been here when those gentlemen were with you in the army ; but not being there, I was obliged to stay at Paris. • # * Before you compose this theme, remember that the verb essere is formed or conjugated of itself ; and that you must never put any tense of the verb avere before the participle stdto : for we say sono stdto, sidmo stdti, and not ho stdto, abbidmo stdn. You must use stdto in speaking of a single person only, by you : example, you have been my friend, siete stdto ?mo amico, and not siete statu 1 2 Sono molto contento d' essere stdto ricevuto per governatorc 3 di gue y signbri, che sono stdti nel paese dove si:te stdto. 4 5 Avke ragi'one d 'essere contento, perche sono gcntiluomini molto generosi, 6 Sarei ancora piu contento, se non fossero stdti in 1 alia, 7 8 perchkavre'i fdtto quel xidggio con loro. \ 2*8 Of the ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 9 10 Mi pare che vifosteper alcuni mcsi Vdnnopassdto, 11 Vi sar'ei anduto, c vero, se mi® fratello fosse stdto qui, VI ■quando quel signori erano con v6i alC estrcito : mu ,jn 13 ■essendoci, fid obligdto di resldr in Pcirigi. 1. essere stdto, and not avere sldto,p. 83* 2. essere stdto, and not esser stdto, p. 175. 3. nel, and not in il, p. 42. 4. We do not express they, p, 207, 208. 5.U07H0, in the plural uomini, p. 48. 6. se, before the imperfect, p, 88. 7. quel, and not quello, p. 174. 8. con loro, and not col Idroy because Uro is a pronoun conjunctive, p. 206. 9. vi, and not ci, p. 147. 10. alcuni, and not qualche, p. 73. 1 1 . «e iwjo, and not se il mio, p. 67, 12. quel or qu&lii, p. 68. •1 3. essendoci, and not ci essendo, p. 66. THEME Ott /^e "Pronouns conjunctive mi, ii, ci, vi, gli, le. You had promised me that you would send us the boo^ which we had asked of you. and you have not sent it 1o us. I had promised it to you, it is true, I remember it ; but you should have sent to demand it of me, and I would have sent it to you. Do not put yourself to any more trouble about it. I inow that my sister has one of them : here is my servant. I will bid him go to her house to ask it of her. Go direct- ly to my sister's, do not stay any where ; thou shalt tell her, lhat I pray her to lend me her manuscript ; that I will send it her back in an hour; thou shalt give my service to my brother-in-law; and if thou seest any Of the ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 259 any roses in his garden, thou shalt ask him- for some of them. 12 3 4 5 h/V -wcvate proinisso cite c'im-iereste il libro die v* ave° 6 7 vdmo domanddto, e non eel avete mandato. 8 9 10 VeV avev-j promesso, c vero, mene ricordo ; ?na blsognd' 11 12 13 va tnandar' a domanadrmelo^ e veV avrei invidto. 14 1/5 16 17 Non vene piglidte piufastidio, so die mia sorella rtha uno ; 18 19 - 20 eccdl mio servo, gli dirb d'anddr da lei per domanddrglielo 21 Vd qu&nto prima da mia sorella, non tifermar in nissun 22 23 24 luogo, le dirdi cue la prego di prestdrmi 7 suo manuscritto^ 2.5 26 die le rimandero frd an* ora, fardi i miii baciamdni a mio 27 2S 29 -cogndto, e se vedrdi or vedi rose nel di lui giardino, glienc 30 domanderdi alcUne or qualchedune. 1 . mavevdtc, in the plural p. 208. 2. m[avevdte, for mi avevdte, p. 174. 3. promesso, arid n6t promisso, or promettuto, p. 135, 4. c\ and not ei, p, 65. 5. vi avevdmo, or v'avevdmo, p. 65. 6. eel avete, or ce/o aze/e, p. 174. 7. ce/ avete, and not «7 a&eie, p. 61. 8. p^' avevo, and vi' Vavevo, p. 65. . 9. me?ze, and not miwe, p» 65. 10, of it, before a verb, is expressed by mene, p. $5, 1 1 . manddre a, p. 208. ] 2. domanddrmelo, p. 66. IS. »ef avrei, p. 65. 14. fc>e»£, p. 66. 15. mia sorella, and not /a ?«<«, p. 67. 16. Tr'ta, 260 Of the ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 1ft. riha, and not ne ha, with an apostrophe, p, 174. 17. wrao, and not un, p. 176. ] 8. gli, and not Zw«, p. 65. 19. d'andar, with an abbreviation, p. 174, 175. 20. domanddrglielo, and not /««, p. 6*5. 21. wow tifermdr, and not kow tiferma,\). 2 10, 22. ft <&><&, p. 65. 23. prestdrmi, and not gnt prestar, p. G6\ 24. i/ swo, and not *wo, p. 67. 25. le, and not /mi, p. 64. 26. t wwei, p. 6*7. 27. h vsrdi, or se vedi, p. lrjo. 28. nd, and not m, p. 42. , 2p. glifoie, p. 65. 30. alcwie, and not qudlche, p. 73. It is better to say £wa/cfo*&w.£. * # * In order to write and speak Italian fluently, it will be absolutely necessary to make this> and the three follow- ing themes, more than once. TH EME Containing all the Difficulties of the Particles si Jtis,they, we, Uc. It is said that you do not know if we have received the letters which we expected the last post; and that in case we have not received thein, or do notreceive them, to-day, they will send fifty men into the forest, where it is thought they have robbed the courier, because they knew we had given him letters of great conse- quence : and as it is not doubted but they are enemies that have detained him, because we have had certain advice that they have some of our letters in their hands, we have sent a spy to inform himself of what they say, and we promise him two hundred crowns if we can have any tidings of them. I Of the ITALIAN COMPOSITION. . 361 I do not put the number here upon these two last themes to refer you to the rules, because to make this, it will be sufficient to read the pages 218, 219. SI dice che non sapets, se sono state ricevute le Uttere {orse si sono ricevute le lettere), die $ aspettdvano Vordindrio passdto, e chc in edso che non stand state ricevute, o eke -non si ricevano oggi, mandcrdnno cinaudrita uomini net la sclva, 6:e si cro.de che sia stdto svaligidto } l corriere, perche si sa che gli erano state (or gli s' erano) consegndte lettere di gran consequenza ; e come non si ha dubbio che sidno i nemici, che Vhdnno ritenuto, giacche, si hdnno avvisi certi, che sono state viste alcune delle nostre lettere nelle loro mdni, -s'e in- vidta una spia per informdrsi segretamente di qudnto (or di quel che sipdssa, or rather, di qudnto si dice) e gli si pro- Tncttono ducento scudi, se sene potrd aver nuova, (or se po~ trdnno aver sene nuove.) THEME On the Phrases there is, there was, there will be. Before you compose this theme, look back on the pages 125,127/ Remember also, that you must express there is of it or them y there was of it or them y by cene t or cene sono, cene Ju or "cene furono, and not by ci ne y vi ne. See pages 150, 151. THERE is a man in the street, who says, that yester- day there was an uproar over-against the palace, where there were three men killed ; and he swears that if he had been present, there would have been a great many more, because he has heard there had been two of his friends wounded ; and that two women and three children have also been maimed. They talk likewise of several merchants whom the passengers report to have been cruelly beaten ; and that of the ten soldiers who are in prison, four of them will be hanged, and that the. six others are condemned to the gallevs. M V'B 262 Of- the ITALIAN COMPOSITION*. V-E* (or ce) tin* uomo nella strdda, die dice die vi ,fu j'eri un gran rumore dirimpeito, al paldzzo, ov.e furono uccisi tre uomini; e giura die se vi fosse stdto, vene sareobero stdto molto pid : perciocche ha sapiito die v'erano stdti feriti due amid suoi, e die due donne e tre fanciulli vi sono stdti sfroppidti. Si pdrla dndie di mold mercdrtti, due i vianddnti dicono esservi stdti atrocemente battuti, e die di died solddti chs-sonoin prigione, vene sardnno qudttro impiccdti, e die vene sono sei condanndti in galera. Observe that, according to the rule in p. 12(5, one might leave out v' or c' of the iirst line, and only put e un' uomo nella strdda. THEME To learn idien to express, and when to omit, in Italian, the Articles, the, of the, of. See the pages 215, 214, b;c. where you will find all the difficulties explained. THERE are the men and the women that look on the pictures, who say that they are paintings much esteemed by all the connoisseurs; and the ignorant themselves. - Do not come here with persons of your country, to talk of the affairs of your brother. You will have time to write letters to all your friends. We must separate them from the rest, 'and give nothing to them but bread and water. I received yesterday news of (or from) the prince, and from madam the princess. I have received a hundred crowns from the prince, and fifty from the princess. Talk to me of philosophy, and of the affairs of the times. He labours for ungrateful people, that give pain and sorrow to all their relations. You will be praised by the soldiers, but you shall be blamed by the captains, and the chief of the army. You have had a great deal of pain, and little profit. We Of the ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 253 We have eaten for dinner partridges, quails, and young pigeons. 1. Give us bread, wine, and flesh. 2. Give us some bread, some wine, and some flesh. Your brothers are arrived from the Indies ; they have brought pearls, diamonds, and a great many other goods, in deal boxes, upon horses and camels. * # * I have put the phrase give us bread, usine, andflesk y twice, that you may consider when to express, and whea to omitj the article of the. A Translation according to tlie Rules, E'CCO uomini, e donne, che considerano i quddri, e cite tficono, che sono pitture molto stimdte da tutti i dotti, e dagV ignordnti medesimi. , Non venite qua con persone del vostro paese, per parlar degli affdri di vostro fratello. Avrete tempo per iscrivere Uttere a tutt' i vostri amki. Bisogna separdrli ddgli altrx, e non dar loro che pane ed dcqua. Ricerei jeri nuove del signor principe, e dtUa signoraprin- cipessa. Ho ricevuto cento scudi dal principe, e cinqudnta ddlh principessa. Parldtemi dellafilosofia, e degli qfdri del tempo. Lavora per ingrdti, che ddnno pena, efastidio a tuiCi !6r& parenti. Sarete loddto ddi solddti, ma sarete biasimdto ddi capitdni a e ddi principdli delV esercito. Avete avuto grand' incommodo, epoco profitio. Abbidmo mangidto a prdnso pernici, qudglie, e piccioncmi* 1. Dated del pane, del vino, e della came. 2. Ddteci'pdne, mno, e cdrne in pagamento. 1 vostri fratelli sono arrivdii dalle Indie, hdnno portdte p'erle, diamdnti, e molte dltre mcrcmzie in coffi di pine scprm mvdlli, e canmielt. M 2 [ m ] THE SIXTH TREATISE. Of Poetical Licences, and the divers Synonymous Names of the Gods. rpHE principal difficulty of the Italian poetry consists in the poetical licences, and in the different synonyma; which shall constitute the two chapters of this treatise. CHAP. I. Of Poetical Licences. pOETICAL licences are certain diminutions or aug- mentations at the end of words, which frequently occur in poetry ; to wit, alma, "dnimay the soul. dltri, dltroy one, and some anddroy anddrono, they went. anddr. anddronOy they went. andidnne, andidmoceney let us go away. simdroy amdronoy they loved. augeiy aitgelliy birds. appo, appressoy near to. baccidnne, ^-for^ baccidmoci, let us kiss. bea y bevcty let h'm drink. bedy bevettey he drank. he( y bevevciy he did drink. bee, bevey he drinks. bei, bclliy fair, beautiful. edggioy eddoy I fall. caggidmOy cadldmOy we fall. capeiy capeliy hairs. cavdiy jcavdllif horses. cadeo, Of the POETICAL LICENCES. 265 cC'le, eel an, cel'han, there, china, chino, colieiy cor, correm, cofitdro, cosldr, credtria, dt' or de 9 deggio, deggia, deggidmo, deggianOy deggidie, deggioy digg'io? deggicno, dennoj deoy deonoy dtc, diero, dicv and die dicronsL d/'cetfity disst r, do/no, [ron, h empio, face, fac eariy A "eddde, ceta, celano, ccr/uinnoy chiede, ch India , ciiindto, colt till, coglicre, coglieremoy costdrono, -eostdronoy credcrebbe y deve, devoy deviy debba, dobbidmOy dtbbanoy dohbidley ffar-i debhoy debb'io ? debbonoy debboriOy dtbboy devonOy diedey diederoy diedero % si diederoy dicesti tu\ disscroy domatOy egliy kmyiy fay f facevano, fedc, fece y ^faceta, M 3 he fell. he hides, or conceals. they hide. they have it to lis. he demands. a bending down. bent down. knives. to gather. we shall gather, they cost. they cost. he should believe. he owes. I owe. thou owe^t. he may owe. we may owe, they may owe. you may owe. I owe. do I owe ? they owe. they owe. I owe. they owe. he gave, they gave. they gave. they gave, or applied themselves to. saicist thou, they said, tamed. he. he filled. he does, or makes* they did so. faith. he did, or made, he did do. 266 ©f the POETICAL LICENCES. /«, 1 'feci. I did, or made. fittk lifece, he made them. femmo, facemmo, we made. [them* ferine, nefece, he made some, or of Jerno, fecero, they made. feo, fece, he made. few, fecero, they made. fira, fcrhca, he may strike. fere, ferisce, he strikes. feron, fecero, they did, or made* fironoy fecero, they did, or made. feste, faceste, you did, or made. Ah sard, he shall be. firm, sardfffio, they shall be. M sard, he shall be. fimo, sardnno, they shall be. fh sii, : be thou. for, sarebbe, he should be. foran. sarebbero, they should be. fozsino, fosserO) they were, or might be, fr«, frdte, a brother. M >foH n, he was. fitd) fiironO} they were* ftcro, furono* . they were. g"*i anddva, he did go. giro, anddrono, they went. g ir \ anddrono, they went. gfo> anddte, go you. giva, and/iva. he did go. hdggio, ho, I have. hdlle, k ha, he has them. hdhni, vie I ha, he has it to me. hdn, hdnno, they have. avei, avrci, I should have. nvia, avrcbbe, he should have. avian, avrebbero, they should have. havrdj avrb, I shall have. have, ha, he has. avia, aveva, he had. avrdi, avrebbe, he should have. haw l t Jm ha, there is. hoik Of the POETICAL LICENCES. >67 h6Ue i -] fie ho, I have to him, Roam, ne ho, I have some, Delia. La Dea delle sebe, de' monti. E'OLO. Dio de' venti. FLO'RA. Dea de' Fiori. Dea arnica di Giunone. GIA'NO. Amico di Satumo. II dio bifrdnte. II Iko che porta due chiavi. GIOTE. Of THE DIFFERENT SYNONYMA. 271 GIO'VE. Metlore delle stelle. Primo figlio di Saturno. II gran motore. Re de' motori. II gran Tondnte. GIUNO'NE. La moglie di Giove. La Dea Lucina. La Dea Gelvsa. La regina degli Dei. L'orgogliosa moglie del gran Tonndnte. INFE'RNO. Bolgia ardente. Bdratro puzzente, Aver no. Nero speco. LUCI'FERQ, STE'LLA. Foriera del giorno. Stella nunzia del gi6rno+ LU'NA. Diana, Cintia, E'cate. MA'RE. Pelago, Ocedno, Reggia Cristallina. Regno umido. II padre de' fiumi. MARTE. Dio guerriero. MERCURIC^ Messo, interpi^ete degli Dei. Inventor della lotta. II divin Citarista. II Dio de' ladroni. Cillinio. MINERVA. Pdllade. Dea ricamatrice. La Dea cti Atene adora. La Dea di Sdmo. Inventrke delle prime ulive. NETTUNO. II regnator canuto de 1 jlutii. II gran rettore delle deque. II Tirdnno del mare. Ilfreddo ed' umido Marilo di Ted. m 6- PAL* 272 Of the different SYNONYMA. PALLADE. Quella che senza padre dal gran Giove ndcqiw. JBellona, Minerva, Dea della guerra. Dea che trovd Vuso dell' olio e delta Idna. Inventriee delle prime ulive. PLUTO'NE. Dio delle tentbre. Dio dell' oscuro regno. JJautore della sepoltura. II primo ch' onoro con esequie i morti. PROSERPINA, Lafiglia di Cerere. La moglk di Plutone. I*a regina delle grotie Tartdree. Dea del cupofondo. SATU'RNO. Jl tempo, il Xho del tempo. Ualdto vecchio, il vecchio eddce. SO'LEo 11 principe delle ore. 11 gran ?nondrca de* tempi. II luminoso- auriga, Apollo.. Febo, il Fratcllo di Diana. II pianeta eterno. TE'RRA, La mddre commune de' mortdli. II suole. TETI Regina de y flutti. Dea del mare. VE'NERR Citereay Cipr'ma, Ciprigna. La Dea Ericina. Verticordia. Figlia del mare. Dea che per Aduno ardeva. Dea di Pqfo. Dea d' Amatunta. Dk', or donna del terzo giro. YUL- Of Improper, and Obsolete Words. 273 VULCA'NO. Zoppo Bio, II JDio distorto. Fdbro adusto. II divin artista. II genitor d'amore in Lenno.. SEVENTH TREATISE. Of improper and Obsolete Words. npHE Italian, as well as other languages, has a great- many improper words, which are used only- by the vulgar and illiterate. It is a mistake to think that the Italian tongue is spoken and pronounced best at Florence, for this is one of the places where the pronunciation of it is the most harsh and uncouth. The court and the academies speak well there ; but ail the rest have a bad accent, and pro- nounce through the throat and nose. The writings of the Florentine authors, both ancient and* modern, are in a beautiful style ;. hence it is that the Italian proverb says,, in regard to their pronunciation, Lingua Toscdna in bocca Romdna. It is most certain the inhabitants of Rome and. Sienna; speak the best Italian ; therefore we say, Par ben parldr Itali/inOy Bisogna parldr Romano. Nevertheless, the vulgar at Rome generally- commit a mistake in the preterperfect-definite, by making it end in the first person plural, in ssimo, instead of mmo : ex- ample, We loved, "J r amass imo. We went, f . ... . . 1 anda&simo. We believed, \ ls lU e *P ressed b r < a -edessimo. We wrote, ) tscmessimo. We 27* Of Improper and Obsolete Words. We should say, amdmmo, anddmmo, credvmmo, scrivemmo; and so all the rest of the verbs. Neither must we say, amaresshno, crederessimo, and the like, to express we should love, we should believe ; but ameremmo, crederemmo : and the same with regard to all verbs in the second imperfect. The first person plural of the present tense ought to ter- minate in iamo, in all verbs without exception, as well in the indicative as the imperative and subjunctive ; so that we must absolutely say, amidmo, and che amidmo, to express we love, and that we may love ; and in like manner abbidmo, sidmo, parlidmo, credidmo y vedidmo^ dor- midma, conccpidnio, &c. and not ave?no y se?no, parldmo, credemo, vcde,no^ dormimo, capimo, conccpi??to, which are Calabrian and Neapolitan words, derived from the Spanish; for by adding an s at the end of them, we should find, ave?nos f semos. psdarmos, dormimos, &c. words entirely Spanish. Avoid saying, as the Florentines do, voi dicevi, voi amdvi, voi credivi, voi anddvi, and the like, instead of voi dicevate, voi amavcde, voi credev&te, voi andavdte, because the termination in vi is never used but with tu in the singular ; as, tu amdvi, tu dicevi. "%* Read those authors who have written on the purity of the Italian language, whom I have quoted at the end of this treatise; and all those that -have written since the origin of that language to this present time, and you will see they disapprove of voi avcvi, voi amdvi, which is a great blunder in the Florentines, and in illi- terate persons. The reason of it is indisputable, for there must be a difference btetween the second person singular and the second person plural. To convince those that say voi amdvi, instead of voi amdvate ; voi dicevi, instead of voi dicevdle ; voi vedevi, instead of voi vedev&te, &c. ; I shall only refer them to the remarks of Grdcomo Pergamini, who in his book intitled, Trattdio della lingua Italidna, says, page 173, La seconda persona ddV imperfkto nel numero del piu, deve esser termindta in vate ; as, cantavdte, dicevate. E contra questa termwmone rfcfvdie universalmente da' regoldti dictori Of Improper and Obsolete Words. 27$ diclvri, hdnno alcuni modcrni usdto di serivere, cantavi, vedevi, il che e an manifesto errore. Ferrante Loneobardi, in bis book intitled // torto ed il dritto, condemns this manner of speaking, voi cantavi, as impertinent. For the same reason as that above given, you must not say, voi arndsti, voi credesti, voi vedesti, but voi amdste, voi credeste, voi vedeste. To express, we read, we remain, we say, we go out y vou must say, leggidnto, rimanidmo, dieidmo, usci&mo ; and not leghidmo, rimanghidmo, dichidmo, eschidmo ; and that for two incontestible reasons : First, because there are none but verbs terminated in the infinitive in care and gare, as, cercdre, purgdre, that take an k in the tenses and persons, where the letter c or g precedes an e and an-*, as I have said before. So that the verbs in ere and ire are not included in this rule. Secondly, because leghidmo comes from legdre, signi- fying to tie ; and so of the rest. ' Neither must you say, as those of Lucca do, io direbbi, iofarSbbi, io sartbbi, to express, / should say, I should do 9 I should be, instead of io direi, iofarei, io sarei. You must not say nor write dmono, cdmono, bdllono, in the third person plural of verbs of the first conjugation, which all terminate in ano ; therefore write and speak dmano, cdntano, bdlluno ; because there are none but the verbs in ere and in ire that end in ono in the third person plural of the indicative. Before I finish this second part, it will be proper to mention three things worthy of attention. The first re- lates to the letter h ; the second to the letter z, when used instead of ti ? and the third to the conjugating of all verbs in the first persons singular of the imperfect indicative. Let us begin with the first. The dispute concerning the letter h, is of no small consequence. The point is to know, whether it ought to be retrenched in those words where it is not pro- nounced ? Some pretend that it ought not to be re- trenched, because this will occasion ambiguity in se- veral words, and the reader will thereby be led into mistakes ; for instance, if we leave out the h in the word 270 Of Improper and Ofsolete Words. words k&nno they have, and hcmno y a hook, anno, and dmo, there is no distinguishing them from dnno r a year, and d/no, I love. The same difficulty occurs in a great many other words, which for the sake of brevity we omit. See, page 28, what has been said in regard to the use of the ieUer h. Others (of which number are the members of the aca- demy of La Crusca) maintain, that it ought absolutely to be retrenched. Their reason is this, that they look upon? it as altogether superfluous in words where it is not pro- nounced : and moreover, by using it without necessity, it becomes a stumbling-block to foreigners, especially to the Germans and Swiss, who, being accustomed in their own language to pronounce it wherever they find it written, do the same in Italian * r which is w rong, if they intend to express themselves with any propriety. The second point 1 have to mention relates to the letter z, when used for t, followed by two vowels, thed. to sleep, to watch, to rest, to fall asleep. to dream. to snore, to wake, to rise. Per vestirsi. Vestirsi, spoglidrsi, calzdrsi, scahdrsi, pettindrsi, acconcidrsi il capo, metier si la p 6 here, fdrsi i ricci, Uscidrsi, metter 7 suo cappello, coprirsi, abbottondrsi, fillacciarsi, qffibbidrsi, To dress one's self* to dress one's self. to undress one's self, to put on one's shoes. * to pull off one's shoes, to comb one's head, to dress one's head, to powder one's head, to curl it. to paint one's self. to put on one's hat. to be covered, to button one's self. to lace one's self. Azioni ordinarie all' uomo. Bidere, pidngere, sospirdre, sternutdre, sbadeglidre, The ordinary actions of men. to laugh, to weep, to sigh, to sneeze, to gape. SOtjich A COLLECTION of VERBS. zn sqffidre, fischidre, ascoltdre, odordre, sputdre, soffidrsi il ndso, uscir sdngue dal ndso, gli esce sangue dal ndso, suddre, asciugdre, tremdre, gonjidre, tossire, essere raffredddto, riguarddre, mi rare, pizzicdre, grattdre, solleticdre. to blow. to whistle. to hearken. to smell. to spit. to blow one's nose. to bleed at the nose. he bleeds at the nose. to sweat. to dry or wipe. to tremble. to swell. to cough. to have a cold * to look. to pinch. to scratch. to tickle. Azioni d' amore, e d'odio. Amdre, accarezzdre, lusingdre, far carezze, abbraccidre, bacidre, salutdre, insegndre, nudrire, correggere, punire, castigdre, frustdre, loddre, biasimdre, dare, concedere, negdre, difendere, strappazzdre, Actions of love and hatred. to love. to caress, to flatter. to show a kindness, to embrace, to kiss. to salute, to teach. to nourish. to correct, to punish, to chastise, to whip. to praise. to blame. to give, to deny. to forbid. to use ill. lattcre f 324 A COLLECTION of VERBS. bdttere, odidre, scaccidre, manddr via, perdondre, disputdre, contrast are, liiigdre, proteggere, ' abbandondre, bene dire, malt dire, to beat, to hate, to drive, to pardon, to dispute, to quarrel, to plead, to protect, to forsake, to bless. to curse. Per gli esercizj. Can tare, battdre, salt are, giuocdre, sonar e fa ehitdrru, sonar e 7 liuto, iirdr di spdda, caralcdre, montdr' a cat alio, giuocdr' almdglio, giuocdr' alia p alia a corda, giuoedr' d'la carte, giuocdr 1 a picchetto, giuocdr 1 all* ouibra, giuocdr* alia basse 'ita, giuocdr' a' ddd't, guadagndre, vincere, per dire, scommettere, risicdre, essere pace, scurtdre, mescoldre, ahure, irastulldrsi, scherzdre, burldrsi, ■moUeirfridre, For diversions or exercises. to sing, to dance. to leap. to play. to play on the guitar, to play on the lute, to fence. to ride the great horse, to play at mall. to play at tennis, to play at cards. to play at picquef. to play at ombre, to play at basset. to play at dice. to win. to Jose. to lay a wager. to venture. to be quits. to lay out. to shuffle, to lift up. to divert cne's self, to joke, to laugh at. to make one laugh. sta A COLLECTION of VERBS. star in piedi, inchindrsi, girdre, \fcrmdrsi, trattenersi, to stand up. to stoop downwards. to turn. to stop. Per le malattie, Medicare guarire, star meglio, peggiordre, cavdr sdngue, piglldr medicina, pnrgdrc, far wi* incision?, fascidre, taglidre, pungere, tenidre, esamindre, For distempers.. to give one physic. to cure. to be better in health, to grow worse, to let blood, to take physic. to purge. to make an incision. to bind up. to cut. to prick. to probe, to examine. Per comprare. Bomanddre it ' prezzo, qudnlo vdle ? qudnto costa P prezzoldre, fare 7 prezzo, mercantdre. misurdre, comprare, pagdre, ojferire, soprajfdre, far una doman- da esorbitdnte, vender cdro, vender'' a buon metxdto, prestdre, torre in prestito, pigldr in prestito, impegndre, For buymg. to ask the price, how much is it worth, what does it cost ? to haggle. to measure. to buy. to pay. to bid or offer. to exact. to sell dear, to sell cheap.- to lend, to borrow. to pawn. des swipe gn are. 26 A COLLECTION of VERBS. desivipegndre,^ dare, ingunndre, Per la chiesa. Anddr' alia chiesa, sentirc 'la prcdica, pregdi'' Jddio, communicdrsi, predictire, sentir la predion, omtire, battezzdre, confermare, sondre le campdne, seppellire, sotterrdre, cant Are, inginocchidrsi, rizzdrsi, alztirsi, to take out of pawn, to give. to cheat. For the church. to go to church, to hear a sermon, to pray to God. to receive the sacrament, to preach, to hear a sermon, to adorn, to baptize, to confirm. to ring the bells. to bury, to inter. to sing. to kneel. to rise. Per le azioni di movi- mento. Arid are, stare, dimordre, venire, torndre, fermtirsz, . cummintire, cdrrere, seguitdre, fuggire, scappdre, par tire, andar 1 inndnzi, avanzare, andtir in dietro, rinculdre, allontandrsi, avvicindrsi, appressdrsi>ac~ costdrsi, For the actions of motion. to go. to stand, to dwell. to come. to return. to stop or stay. to walk. to run. to follow* to fly. to escape. to depart. to advance. to stand back. to be distant. to come near* voltdre. A COLLECTION of VERBS. vol tare, cu scare, cad ere, sdruccioldre, far si mdle t ferirsi, giiitigcre, arrhdre, or giu- ; gnere, * incontrdre, anddr nil' in- contro, entrdre, uscire, satire, montdre, scendcre, trattenersi, star'' a bdda, sedere, spasseggidre, anddr' a spdsso, anddr a cammindre, a spasseggidre, affrettdrsi, to turn. to fall down. to slide. to hurt one's self. to wound one's self. to arrive. to go meet, to come in, to go out. to go up. to go down, to stand idle. to sit down. to walk, to go a- walking, to make haste. Azioni manuali. Lavordre, toccdre, maneggidre, legdre, sciorre, slegdre, sciogliere, attaccdre, staccdrc, allentdre, levdre, togliere, torre, priglidre, prendere, rubdre, raccogliere, straccidre, sirappdre, presentdre, dondre, ricevere, stringere, strignere, ienere, ferrdre, rompere, spezzdre, nascondere, Manual actions. to work, to touch, to handle. to tie or bind. to untie. to tie. to untie. to let loose. to take away, to take. to steal away. to gather again. to tear. to present, to receive, to squeeze or crowd. to hold, to break. ' to hide. copri 526 A COLLECTION of VERBS. coprire, scoprire, manifestdre, sporcdre, insuciddrc, nettdve, pulire,forbtre, strojjiridre, stroppic idre, testdre s add it (ire, mostrdr' « diio, piziicare, soiled care, graffign&re, § sgraffidre, to cover. to discover. to dirty. to cleanse. to rub. to feel. to point with one's finger, to; pinch. to tickle. to scratch. Azioni di memoria e d'imaginazione. Riccrddrsi, di?nenticdre, pensdre,. credere, dubitdre, sospettdre, osservdre, avvertire, conoscere, Jigurdrsi, imagindrsi, bramdre, desiderdre, sperdre, feme* re, assicurdre, giudicdre, conchiudere, risolvere, fingere, intestdrsi, ostindrsi, adirdrsi, anddr in colkra, pacificdrsi, inganndrsi, perdcre la tramontdna, 8*1- broglidrsi, aver per certo, Actions of the memory and i?nagination, to remember, to forget, to think, to believe. to doubt, to suspect. to observe. to take care, to know, to imagine. to wish* to hope, to fear, to assure. to adjudge, to conclude, to resolve. to feign. to be conceited of. to be obstinate, to fly into a passion. to be appeased. to mistake, to embroil one's self. to be certain of. aver A COLLECTION of VERBS. S29 aver su la pdnta detle dita, to have it at one's finger's end. esser geloso, to be jealous. Per le arti ed i mestieri. Dipingere, intagliare, scolpire, dlsegndre^far mi disSgno, abbozzdre i ricamdre, smaltdre f indordre, inargentdre, incessdre, stampdre, I legaV un libro, . lavordre, For arts and trades. To paint or draw. to engrave. to design. : to draw a sketch. to embroider. to enamel, to gild. to gild over with silver. to in lav. to print'. to bind a book. to labour. Per l'esercito. Far solddti, toccdre, bdtcere 'l/ambum, sondre la trombctiay rnarcidre, accampdre, alloggidre, montdr a cavdllo, smontdre, far giomdto, riportdre, la vitloria, scompiglidre, disordindre, sbaraglidre, sconfiggere, svaligidre, saccheggidre, dare 7 gudsto, circonv allure, strinqcre, assedidre, dar' un assdlto, prendcrd' assdlto, far volar la ?nina i For the army. to raise soidiers. to beat the drum, to sound the trumpet. to march. to encamp. to lodge. to get on horseback, to alight. to give battle. to gain the viciorv. to put in disorder. to rout. to rob. to sack. to plunder. to block up. to besiege. to storm. to take by storm. to spring a mine. sparar 330 DIALOGUES. sparare, capitoidre, rendersi a p&tti, caccidr man alia spdda : ammazzdre, uccidcre^ dar quarliere\ ferire, aprire la trinciera, sonar la racco!ta, incaizdre 7 nemico, to fire. to capitulate. to surrender on terms. to clap one's hand on one's sword, to kill. to give quarter. to wound. to open the trenches, to sound a retreat, to pursue the enemy. FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. DIA!LOCHI FAMJGL1 A'RL DIALOGUE I. f 1 OOD morrow, sir. Good night, sir. How do you do, sir ? Well : not very well so, Very well to serve you. At your service. I am obliged to you. I thank you. How does your brother do ? He is well. He will be glad to see you. I shall have no time to see • him to day. Be pleased to sit down. Give a chair to the gentle- man. There's no occasion. DIALOGO L TjUON di a vosignoria. Buonaseraa vossignoria. Come sta V. S. ? Bene ; non troppo bene ; cosiy cosi. Benissimo per servirla. Al suo servizio. Son? ohbligdto a V. S. Ringrdzio V. S. Come st a suofratello ? Sid bene. Avrd gusto di vederla. Non avrb tempo di vederlo oggu V. S. seda. Date una stdia al signore. Non c necessdrio. I must DIALOGUES. 331 I must go to pay a visit in the neighbourhood. You are in haste. I will be back presently. Farewel, sir. I am glad to see you in good health. I kiss your hand. I am your servant. Your most humble servant. Your servant. Your most humble servant. Bisogna che vdda afar* una •visit a qui vicino. E molto affrcttdia V. S. Tomer o adesso adesso. Addio, signore. Ho gan gusto di vederla in buona salute. Bdcio le mdni a V. S. ■Sono servo silo. U?nilissimo servo silo. Servo, sua. Umilissima serva sua. D I A L O G U E II. DI ALO GO It. To make a visit in the morn- ing. WHERE is your master. Is he asleep still ? No, sir, he is awake. . Is he up ? No, sir, he is a-bed. What a shame 'tis to be a-bed at this time of day 1 I went to bed so late last night, I could not rise early this morning. What did you after supper ? We danced, we sung, we laugh'd, we play'd. At what game? We play'd at picquet with the knight. What did the rest do ? They play'd at chess. How griev'd am J, I did not know it. Who one ? who lost ? Per far/ una visita la mat- tin a. Ov'el tuo padrone ? pro- nounce Ovel. Dorme uncora ? Signor, no, e sveglidto. E' levdlo ? Signor, no, sta ancor al letto, Che vergogna di star at let to, a quest ora ! Anddi jeri al letto, tdnto tar- di, che non flo potiito le- v&rmi a buorC ora. Che si f ice qui dopb cena ? Si hallo, si canto, si rise, si giuocv. A che K giuoco ? Giuocammo a picchetio col signor cava Here. Chefecero git din ? Giuocdrono a sedechi, Qudnto mi displace non n- verlo sctptito* Chi ha i into f Che ha per- duto ? I won 332 DIALOGUES. I won ten pistoles. I Jo gundagnmo dttcidoppie, Till what hour did you Lin a che oiii giuocasie ? play ? Till two in the morning. Fin alle due dopo mezza notte. At what o'clock did you go A che ora sicte andato al to bed ? letto ? At three, half an hour af- Alle ire, all'e tre e mezza, ter three. I don't wonder at your Non ml maraviglio che vi rising so late. levidte cost tardl. What's o'clock ? Che era e ? What do you think it is ? Che ora crede'le che sia ? Scarce eighr, I believe, yet. Credo che non siano ancor U 6tto. How ! eight ! It has struck Come le otto ! sono sotwte le ten ! died ! Then I must rise with all Bisogna adunqae che mi tiui speed. qudnlo prbna. DIALOGUE III. D I ALO GO IIL To dress one's self. Per veslirsi. WHO is there? CHlela? What wili you please to Che commanda, V. S. have, sir ? fee quick, make a fire, Su,su, presto, fate fuoco, re- dress- me. stitemi. There is a fire, sir. Ce fuoco, signore. Give me my shirt. Ddtcmi la mia camiscia. Here 'tis, sir. Eccola, signore. Tis not warm, 'tis quite Nonecdlda,eanc6rafrldda, cold. If you please, sir, I'll warm Se V. S. brdma, la scalderb, it. No, no ; bring me my silk No, no, portdtemi le mie cal- stockings. zette di seta. They are torn. Sono rdtte. Stitch them a little, mend Dated un punto, ofdtele ac- them. concidre. I have DIALOGUES. 333 I have given them to the stocking-mender. You have done right — Where are my slippers? Where is my night-gown? Comb my head. Take another comb. Give me my handkerchief. There's a clean one, sir. Give me that which is in my pocket. I gave it to, the washer- woman, it was foul. Has she brought my linen ? Yes, sir, there wants no- thing. What cloaths will you wear to-day ? Those I wore yesterday. The faylor will bring your cloth suit presently. Somebody knocks, see who 'tis. Who is it ? 'Tis the taylor. Let him come in. Le ho date alia conciacaU zette. Avete fdtto bene. Ove sono le mic piane'llc ? Ov' e la mia zim&rra ? Peltindtemi. Piglidtc uri dltro pettine. Ddtemi 'I miofazzoletto. E'ccone un pulito, signore. Ddtemi quel cti e nella mia saccoccicu V ho dato alia lavanddra, era sporco. Ha portdto ella i miei pan- nilini ? Signor si, non ci mdnca niente. Che vestito metterd oggl V. S. ? Quel clC av evojcri. II sartore deve portdr presto quel dipdnno. Si pAcchia, vedete chi t. Chi e ? EH sartore, Fdtelo entrdre. DIALOGUE IV. The gentleman and the taylor. Do you bring my suit of cloaths ? Yes, sir; here 'tis. You make me wait a great while. I could not come sooner. It was not finished. The lining was not sewed. Will you be pleased to try the close coat on ? D I ALO GO IV. II gentiluomo ed il sartore. Portdte voi il mio vestito t Si signor, eccolo qui. Mi fate aspettdr molio, Non hopotuto venirpiuprestQt Non erafinko. La fodera non era cucita. Vuole V. S. provdre 'il gius- tacore. P • Let's 'S3* DIALOGUES. Let's see whether it be well Vedidmo £ e ben/duo. made. I believe it will please you. Credo die V. S. ne sard con- tent a. It seems to me to be very Mi pare molto lungo. long. They wear them long now. Si portano hinghi adesso, Button me. . Abbottondfemi. It is too close. Mi strin^e troppo. To fit properly it ought to Per esser ben fdtto' bisogna be close. cite sia giusta. Are not the sleeves too wide. Le mdniche non sono elle troppo Idrghe t iS T o, sir, they fit very well. Signor no, stdnno benissimo. This suit becomes you Quest' dbito le sta benissimo. mighty well. 'Tis too short, too long, too E troppo corto, troppo lungo, big, too little. iroppoldrgo, troppo stretto. Pardon me, sir, it fits very V, S.miperdoni, sta bene. well. How do you like my trim- Che dite del mio fornimento ? ming ? 'Tis vejry fine and rich. E bellissimo, e ricchissimo. What did these ribbons cost Quest?, ndstri qudnto costano a yard r il brdccio f I paid a crown. Li ho pagdtouno scudo. That's not too much, 'tis Non e troppo, e buon mer- cheap. cdto. Where is the rest of my CV e 7 rksto del mio pdnno f cloth ? There is not a bit left. Non i'e niente affdtto d'd- vdnzoi Have you made your bill ? Avetefduo 7 vosiro coni.o ? No, sir, I had not time. Signor, no, non ho avuto 7 tempo. Bring it to-morrow, I will Poridtelodomdni.zipagkerb. pay you. DIA- DIALOGUES. 335 DIALOGUE V. DI ALOGO V. To <*o to breakfast. Per far colazione. BRING us something for Pcridteciqudlchecosadafar breakfast. colazione. Yes, sir, there are sausages Signor, si ; ecco salsicrie, e and petiy-pattees. pasticcietti. Do you chuse the gammon Vuol V. S. ch'io pari? I pre- of bacon ? sciu'to ? Yes, bring it, we will cut a Si, portdtelo; ns taglieremo slice of it, una fat a. Lav a napkin on th« table. Mettete una sahiettu sopru la tdvola. Give us plates, knives, and Dated toadi, cohelli, e for- fork6. chetie. Rinse the glasses. Sciacqudie i bicchieri. Give the gentleman a chair. Date una sedia al signore. Sit down, sir; sit by the fire. V* S. seda, si 'metta vicino alfuoco. 1 am not cold, I am very ISonhofreddoyS&nobenissiino well here. qui. Let us see whether the wine Vedidqio se'l vino e bitono. be good. Give me that bottle, and Ddtemi quella bottiglia^ cd glass. un bicchiere. Taste that wine, pray. Digrdzia, F.S. assagiquhto vino. How do you like it? what Che gliene pare? che ne say you to it ? dice ? It is not bad, it is very Non e cattivo, v squisiiissimo good. Here are the sausages, take Eccole salsiccie, levute questo away ihis plate. pidtlo. Eat some sausages. V. S. mdrigi delle salsiccie. I have eat some, they are Ne ho mangidto^soao uu»,i:- very good. siiiie. Give me some drink, Ddtemi da here. Your health, sir. Alia sahita, di V. S. Sir. 1 thank von. Uingrdzio V. S. 1 P 2 Gir e 336 DIALOGUES. Give the gentleman some drink. I drank but just now. The petty-pattees were very good. They were baked a little too much. You do not eat. I have eat so much I shall not be able to eat my dinner. You only jest, you have eat nothing at all. I have eat very heartily both of the pudding, and ham. Date da here al signore. Ho bevuto adesso. I pasticcietti erano luonis- simi. E'rano un tantino troppo cotti. V. S. non mdngia. Ho mdngiato tdnto, die non potrb pranzdre. V. S. si burin, non ha man- gidto niente. Ho mangidto benissimo del sanguindccio, e del presci- utto. DIALOGUE VI. To speak Italian. HOW goes on your Ita- lian ? Are you much improved in it now ? Not much ; I know nothing almost. It is said, however, you speak it very well. Would to God it were true ! Those that say so are much mistaken. I assure you I was told so. I can say a few words which I have learnt by heart. And so much as is neces- sary to begin to speak. The beginning is not all, you must make an end. DIALOGO VI. Per parlar* Italiano. COME vd V Italidno ? Ha V. S. fdtto molto pro- fitto ? Non troppo, non so quasi niente. Se dice perb die V. S. p&rla benissimo, Volesse Dio die fosse veto ! Quei che lo dicono, sHngdh- nano molto. Hassicuro die rn e siato detto. Posso dir' alcune parole dte so a mente. E qudnto bdsta per comincidr a parldre. Non e il tutto di principidre, bisognafinbre. Be DIALOGUES. 337 Be always speaking, whether well or ill. I am afraid of committing blunders. Never fear; the Italian lan- guage is not hard. I know it ; and that it has abundance of graces. It is true ; and especially from a lady's mouth. How happy should I be, if I were master of it ? Application is the only way of learning it. How long have you been learning ? Scarce a month yet. What is your master's name? His name is Veneroni. I have known him a great while. He has taught several friends of mine. Does not he tell you that you must constantly talk Italian ? Yes, he often tells me so. Why do not you talk then ? Who will you have me talk with ? With those that shall talk to you. I would fain talk, but dare not. You must not be afraid, you must be bold, Parli V. S. sempre, o bene o male. Temo cUfar'errori. V. S. non terna^ la lingua Italidna non e difficile. Lo so, e so cKha molte leg- giadrie. E vero, e particolarmente nella bocca dclle donne. O me felice se la sapessi ! • Bisogna studidre per impa- rdrla, Qudnto tempo e che V, S, impdra ? Non t! ancor' un mese. Come si chi/ima 'I suo mae- stro ? Si chidma y l signbr Veneroni* E un pizza che lo conosco. Ha insegndio a mold amid miei. Non dice egli a V. S. che bisogna sempre parldr' Jtalidno ? Signdr sl y vielo dice $pe&so„ Perche dunque non pdrla ? Con eld vubl V. S. chH& pdrli f Con quei che le parlerdnnoo Vorrei parldre, ma non ar~ disco. Non bisogna temere, bisogna essei*' ardito. rs DIA. 338 DIALOGU E-S. DIALOGUE VII. Of the vjeatJicr. WHAT sort of weather is it? It is fine weather." It is bad weather. Is it cold ? is it hot ? Is if not cold; it is not hot. Does it rain ? does rain ? I do not believe it. The wind is changed. We shall have rain. It will not rain to-dav. It rains, it pours. It snows. It thunders. It hails. It lightens. St is very hot. Did it freeze last night ? No, sir, but it freezes now. It appears to me to be a great fog. You are not mistaken, it is true. You have caught a violent cold. I have had it this fortnight. Tis the fruit of the season. What's o'clock ? 'Tis early, 'tis not late. Is it breakfast-time ? 'Twill be dinner-time im- mediately. What shall we do after din- ner ? DI A LO GO til Del tempo. CHE tempo J a ? Fa bel tempo. Fa cattivo tempo. Fdfreddo f fa cdldo ? IS on fdfreddo ; nonfd cdldo. it not Pwve ? non piote ?- Non lo credo. II vento e cambidto. Avremo dell a pioggia, hi on pioverd oggi. Piove, diluvla. Nevica, Taona. Grdnd/na. l.ampeggia. Fd molto cdldo. II a geld to st a nolte ? Sigiwr jib, ma gela adesso. Mi par die fa una gran nebbia. V. S. Non singdnna, e vero. V.S. e molto raffredddta. Sono quindici giorni die sono raffredddio. Sonofrutti della stagidne, Che or a i ? E di buon'ora, none tdrdi. J'] tempo difar eolazione ? Sard presto tempo di desindre. Chefnremo dupo pranzo ? : We'll DIALOGUES. 3S9 We'll take a walk. Let's take a turn now. We must not go abroad this, weather. Andremo a spd&so. Andidmo afar 'un giro adesso. Non bisogna uscir per qutsto tempo. DIALOGUE VIII. DIALOGO VI L Of the charms of a young lady. THERE'S a beautiful young lady. She is finely shaped. She is charming, she is pretty. Do you know her ? I don't know her ? She has fine eyes. I never saw a better shape. She has an easy carriage. She has a noble mien. The shape of her face is well proportioned. Her cheeks are plump and delicate. Her mouth is little, and red. ■ Her nose well made. Have you taken notice of her complexion ? It is the finest in the world. A complexion fair, and lively. What white hands she has ! The vermilion of her cheeks shames the lilies and the roses. She has teeth as white as snow. It may be said that she's a fair beauty. Delle bellezze d'una zit tella. E'cco una bella signdra. E benfatta. E tietzosa, e leggiddra. La conoscete ? Non la condsco. Ila bSgli ocelli. Non ho mdi visto una piu bella statura. E dis-involta. Ha un aspetto ndbile. J I conldrno del suo viso e btnfdlto. Lc sue gudncie sono piendlle e delicate. La sua bdcca t picciola, e vermiglia* 11 hasp ben f dtlo. Avete osservdio la sua car- nagglone. El piu bel colore del mondo. Una carnaggidne bidncha, e vivace. O che belle m'dni ha ! J I vermiglio del suo viso fa senza dubbio torio ai gigli, ed dlle rose. Ha i denii bidnchi come la neve. Si pub dire cKella a una bella bidnda. P 4 She's. 340 DIALOGUES. She's the finest brown wo- man one can see. She has a noble gait. She has a sprightly coun- tenance. She has exquisite features. She's mightily cry'd up for her beauty. I think she has a great deal of wit. Beauty may be seen, but not wit. They say her wit is equal io her beauty, Then she's an epitome of all perfections. E la pile bella brum, che si possa vedere. Camm'ma con bel gdrbo. Ha una jlsonomia spiritoso, Hafattezze vdghe. E moko commend at a per /« sua belle zza. Credo clC abbia mollo spirito. Ben si pub vedere la bellezza, ma lo spirito no. Si dice che sia adequdto h spirito dlle sue bellezze, E adunque un compendio di tutto le perfezione. DIALOGUE IX, DI A LOGO IX, To enquire after news. WHAT news is stirring ? Do you know any ? I have heard none. What is the talk of the town ? There's no talk of any thing. Have you heard no talk of war ? I heard nothing of it. There's a talk however of a siege. It was reported so, but it is not true. On fhe contrary there's a talk of peace. Do you think we shall have peace ! I believe so. What say they at court ? Per domandar quel che si dice di nuovo. Che si dice di nuovo f Sapete niente di nuovo ? Non ho inteso niente. Di che si p aria ? Non si p dr la di niente. Av'ete sentito dire ch > avrema la guerra ? Non ne ho inteso parldre. Si pdrla .perb d? un assedio. Si diceva, ma non t vero. Al contrdrio, si pdrla di pace. Credcte cfiavrkmo kt pace f Credo di si. Che si dice in corte f They DIALOGUES, 341 They talk of a voyage. When do they think the. king will set out ? 'Tis not known. They do not say when. Where do they say he'll go? Some say into Flanders, others into Germany. And what says the Ga- zette ? I have not read if. Is it true what is reported of Mr. ? What of him ? They say he's mortally wounded, i I should be sorry for that ; he's an honest man. Who wounded him ? Two rogues who set upon him. Is it known why ? The report is, that he gave one of them a box on the ear. I don't [believe it. Nor I neither. However, we shall soon know the truth. Si parla d'un vidggio. Qudndo si crede che partwd 'Ire ? Non si sa. Non si dice. Dove si dice cJi andra ? Chi dice in Fiandra, chi in Ger -mania. E la Gazzetia cite, dice ? Non Vho letta. Sarebbe vero quel eke si dice del Sig. ? Che sene dice ? Si dice che sia feriio & morle. Mi dispiacerebbe, perch' d un galantuomo. Chi rhafcrito ? Duoi farfdnti che V hdmw assalito. Si sd 7 percht ? Carre voce che sia per aver ddto uno schidjfo ad uno di loro. Non lo credo, Nh men'io. Comunque si sia, si saprd presto. DIALOGUE X. D I A L O G X. Per domandare d'uno. To enquire after one, WHO is that gentleman CHI e quel gcntiluomo che vi that spoke to you a little par lava poc& fd t while ago ? He is a German. E un Tedcsco. I took him for an English- Lo eredevo Jn^lcse. man. He came from Saxony. E d/dla parte di Sassonia. P5 Ik 342 B I A L OC ITS He speaks French very well. He speaks French like the Frenchmen themselves. The Spaniards take him for a Spaniard, the English for an Englishman. It: is. difficult to be conver- sant in so many different languages. He has been a long time in those countries. Have you known him for any time ? About two years. He has a noble air, he has a good mien. He is a genteel person. He is neither too tall, nor too little. He is handsome, he is well shaped. He plays upon the lute, the guitar, and "several other instruments. I should be very glad to know him. 1 will bring you acquainted with him. Where does he live ? He lives just by. When will you have us go and wait on him? Whenever yon please; for he is my intimate friend. Jt shall be when you have leisure. We'll go to-morrow morn- ing. I shall be obliged to you. Pdi la henimmo Fr ancese. V atidremo domaitina. Vi restcro obligate* Pdrla Fr ancese cjuanto i Francesi fnedesimi. Gil Spagnuoli lo stiinano Spagmmlo, c gl' Ingles?, Invlese. E pur difficile d'esser prat- ico in tdnte lingue cos), dif- ftrcuti. E stdlo un pezzo in quel paesi. E' un pezzo che lo conoscete ? Sono due dnni incirca. Ha buoii aria, ha buona ciera. FJ di bella prtsenza. Mon c ne. troppo grdnde, ne trbppo piccolo. FJ ben f duo, e la sua stalura <} disinvolta. Suona 7 liuid, la chitdrra, e moUi dltri siromenti. Avrei a cdro di conoscerlo. Vene procurer o la conoscenza. Ove sta di edsa ? Sid qui vicino. t Qudndo volete c)i andidmo a riverhlo ? Qudndo vi piacerd, perch' c amico mio intrinseco. Sard qudndo avrete tempo. DIA- DIALOGUES. 343 DIALOGUE XL DIALOGO XL To twite. Per scrivere. GIVE me a sheet of paper, a pen, and a little ink. Step into my closet, you'll find on the table what- ever ycu want. There are no pens. There are a great many in the standish. They are good for nothing. There are some others. They are not made. Where is your pen-knife ? Can you make pens ? I make them my own way. This is not bad. I While I finish this letter, do me the favour to make a pacquet of the rest. What seal will you have me put to it ? Seal it with my cypher or coat of arms. What wax shall I put to it? Put either red or black, no matter which. Have you put the dale ? I believe I have, but I have not signed it. What day of the month is this ? The eighth, the tenth, fif- teenth, twentieth. Ddtemi un foglio di carta, una penna § un poco d' inchiostro. Entrdte net mio cabinet to, irovcrke sopra la tdvola qudnto vi sdra di bisogno, Non vi sdno penne. E'ccone molte nel calamdjo. Non vdgliono niente. E'ccone dltre. Non sdno temperate. Ov' eH i ostro temper ino ? Sapete temper dr le penne ? Le tempero a inddo mio. Qutsta qui non t cattiva. Mentrefi/ikco qttesta lettera, ■ favoritemi difar un piego di quelle dltre. Che sigillo volete the ci mkta ? Sigilldiele cdlla mia zijfcra ovcro colle mie drmi* Che cera ci mettero ? JMctletcne delta rossa, o delta nera, non importa. Avcle messo la data ? Credo di si, ma non ho sotto- scritto. Ai qudnto sidmo del mese ? Sidmo dggl agli otto, ai dicci % ai quindici, ai vend, V 6 Put DIALOGUES. Put the direction. Where is the powder ? You never have either pow- der or sand. There's some in the sand- box. There's your servant ; will you let him carry the let- ters to the post-house ? Carry my letters to the post- office, and don't forget to pay postage. I have no money. Hold your hand, there's a pistole. Go quickly, and return as soon as possible. Metteteci 'I soprascritto. Ov' e la pdlvere ? Non avete mdi ?it polvere, nt arena. VerU e nel polverino. E'ccoH vostro servo ; volete die port I le Utter e alia post a ? Port ate le mie lettere . alia posta, ty non vi dimeiiti- cdte di pagdre 7 yortcfi Non ho quattrini, signbre, non ho dandri. Pig Hate, ecco una dcppia. And ate presto, e torndte qudnio prima. DIALOGUE XII. D 1 A LOGO XII. To buy. WHAT do you want, sir ? V/hat would yon please to have ?. , I want a good fine cloth to make- me a suit of clothes. Be pleased to walk in, sir, you'll see the finest in London. Shew me the best you have. There's a very iine one, and what's worn at present. 1 'Tis a good cloth, but I don't like the colour. There's another lighter piece. I kke that colour well, but Per comprare. CHE brdma V. S. eke chca ? Vorrei un pdnno bello e bu~ bno da far un vestito. V. S. entri, vedrd qui i piu belli pdnni di Londra. Mostrdtemil migliore ch' ab- bidtc* E'ccone unbellissiino,ecome si porta adesso. E bueno, ma 'I color non mi pidce. E'ccone 'un dltra p'ezza piu chidra. 11 color mi pidce, mdl pan- the DIALOGUES. S4'3 the cloth is 'tis too thin. Look upon this piece, here, sir, you'll not find the like any where else. What do you ask for it as ell? Without exacting, 'tis worth twenty livres. Sir, lam not us'd to stand haggling ; pray tell me your lowest price. I have told yon, sir, tis worth that. 'Tis too dear, I'll give you six crowns. I can't bate a farthing. You shall not have what you ask. You ask'd me the lowest price, and I have told you. Come, come, cut off two ells of it. I protest, on the word of an honest man I don't get a crown by you. There's four pistoles, give me the change. Be pleas'd, sir, to let me have another, this is too light, it wants weight. Here's another. Farewel, sir, your servant. no non d forte abbcisldnza, h trbppo sotile. Veda V. S. questa pezta, non ne iroverk cos\ bella altrove. Qudnto lo tendete il br ac- tio ? Senza dire a V. S. mi soldo di troppo, ella vale vend franchi. Signore, io non sono avv'ez- zo a prezzoldre, ditemi di grdzia Vultimo prezzo. rho detto a V, S. tdnto vale. E tropyo cdro, vene daro 'set scudi. Non ve un soldo da levdre* Non yvrete quel ch' avete domanddto. V. S. mlia domanddto VAlti- vio prezzo, gliel* ho detto. Via, via, taglidtene due hrdccia. Le giuro da galantuomo che non guaddgno uno scudo con lei. E'cco qudttro doppie, ddtemi 'I resto, Di grdzia V. S. mi dia un' dltra doppia, questa e leg- gitra, non e di peso. E'ccone un dltra. Jddio, s ignore, sono servitor di V. S. DIA- T*1? DIALOGUES. DIALOGUE XIII. D I A LOGO XI II. To play. LET us play a game at picquet. What will you play for ? Let us play for half-a- crown (o pass away the time. Give us cards. Let us see who shall deal. You are to deal; I am to deal. Shuffle the cards, all a the court cards are together. They are shuffled enough. Cut, sir. Have you all your cards ? I believe I have. How many do you take ? I lake all. I leave one. I have a bad game. Deal again. Not this time. Have you laid out ? No, sir, my game puzzles me. You must have good cards, for I have nothing. Teil your point. Fifty, sixty. It is not good ; it is good. A quint major, a quint to a king, a small quint, fourteen by queens, a tierce to a knave. I have as much. Fourteen by kings, three aces, three queens. Per giuocare. Giuochiamo una 'partita a picc/i etto. Quanta volete giuocare ? Giuochiamo trenta soldi per passatempo, Ddteci carte. Vedidmo a chi tocdierd a Jdre. Tocca a voi, tocca a me. Mescoldte le carte, tutte le figure so ho insiemt: Sono mescoldte abbastdnza. Alzd/e, signore. Aveie le tostre carte! Credo di s}. Sudnte ne piglidte ? Piglio iutto, or le piglio tutte. Ne lascio una. Ho un cattivo giuoco. A monte. Signor no, per questa volia. Avete scartdto ? Signor no, il mio giuoco ?ii~ imbarrdzza. Dovete aver bcl giuoco, pci- clip non ho nicnte. Contdte 7 vqstro punto. Cinqudnta, sessdnta. Non idle ; e buono. Quinta maggiore, quint a ul re, quinta bdssa, qudrta alia ddma, ieiza alfdnie. Ne ho altrettdnto. S!uatt6rdici di re, tre dssi, ire dame. Play. DIALOGUES. 34-7 Play. Giuocdte. Hearts, spades, clubs, dia- Cuori, picckc.fiori y quddru monds. The ace, the king, the Vdsso y il n\ la dduta, il queen, the knave, the fdntc, li died, il novc, ten, the nine, the eight, VoUo, il setie. the seven. I have lost, you made a Ho perso, avettefdtto un pi- peek a re-peek. co, replco. You have won. Arete guadagndto. You owe me half-a crown. Mi dovete trenta soldi. You owed it me, pardon Scusdtcmi, melt dovevdte, me. We are quits, or even Sidmo pdce, or pari. then. DIALOGUE XIV. D I A LOG O XIV. For a journey. How many leagues is it from this place to N? ft is eight leagues. We shall not be able to get thither to-day, it is too late. It is not more than twelve o'clock, you have time enough yet. Is the road good? So, so ; {.here are woods and rivers to pass. Is there any danger upon that road ? There is no talk of it; it is a highway, where you ' meet people every mo- ment. Do not they say there are robbers in the woods ? There is nothing to be Per un viaoo-io. oca - Qudn'e leghe soao da qui a N ? ' Ci sono duo leghe. Non vi pot re mo arrival oggi, t trdppo tdvdi. Non e piu di mezzo di, v'ar- riverete ancor' a buon' or a. E'bella lo s-'rdda ? Non troppo, m sono boschi, e fiumi a passdre. V't perkolo per quella strci- da ? Non sene pdrla, e una s/rd- da maestrct dove si irova gente ad ogni niominio. Non si dice die vi siano la- dri nei boschi ? Non v'c nulla da tenure^ nh feared. 343 DIALOGUES. feared, either by day or night* Which way must one take? When you come near the hill, you must take to the right hand. Is it not necessary to ascend a hill then ? No, sir, there is no other hill but a little declivity in the wood. Is the way difficult through the wood ? You cannot lose your way. "As soon as you are out of the wood remember to keep to the left hand. I thank you, sir, and am much obliged to you. Come, come, gentlemen, let us take horse. Where's the marquis ? He's gpne before. He will wait for you just out of town. What do we stay for now ? come, come, let's be gone, let's have done. Farewell, gentlemen, fare- well. I wish you a good journey. di giorno •, ne di nbtte. Che strdda bisogna piglidre ? Qudndo saretc vicini alia montdgna, piglicrete a man dritta, Non bisognerd dunque salir la ?nontds/na. Signor no, non ve ch un picciol cblle nel bosco. JL' difficile la sirdda nel bos- co ? Non pot he smarrirla. Qudndo saretefuor del bosco , ricorddtevi di pigliar 1 a man mdnca. Vi ringrdzio, signore, e vi resto molto obligdto. Via, via, signori, montidmo a cavdllo.' Ov' eH signor nfarchese ? E' anddto inndnzi. V azpetterd fuori della citid. Ck y aspettidmo ? partidmo, andidmo, via, via, fini- dmolu. Addio, signori, addio. V } auguro unfelice vidggio. DIALOGUE XV. DIALOG XV. For supper and lodging. Delia cena e dell' alloggi- amento. So ; we are arrived at the E'Ccoci, giunti alV osteria. inn. Let us alight, gentlemen. Smontidmo, signori. Take these gentlemen's Pigiidte i cavdlli di questi horses, DIALOGUES, 34-9 horses, and take care of them. Now let's see what you will give us for supper. A capon, half a dozen of pigeons, a sallad, six quails, and a dozen of larks. Will you have nothing else ? That's enough, give us some good wine and some desert. Let me alone, I'll please you, I warrant ye. Light the gentlemen. Let's have our supper as soon as possible. Before you have pulled your boots off, supper shall be upon the table. Let our portmanteaus and pistols be carried up stairs. Pull off. my boots, and then you shall go and see whether they have given the horses any hay. You shall conduct them to the river, and take care they give them some oats. I'll take care of every thing, don't trouble your- self. Gentlemen, supper is rea- dy; it is upon the ta- ble. We'll come presently. Let us go to supper, gen- signori) ed abbidtene cu~ ra. Or sit vedldmo che ci darcte da cendre. Un cappone, una mezza doz~ zina dl piccioni, uri iri- saldca, set qudglie, ed una dozzina dl lodol'e. iJonvoglioiib dltro le signorie low ? Questo bdsta 9 dated del buon vinO) e dellefriUia. Ldscino far* a me, sardnno content i. Fate hime a qufoti signori. Fdieci cenar qudnto prima, Prima che si siano cavdti gli stivdli, la cena sard in or dine. Che si portino lassu le nostrc vatigie, e le nostre pistole,, Cavdtemi gli stivdll, ed an- drete dopo a vedere se avrdnno ddto del fieno ai cavdlli. Li condurrete al Jiume, ed nvrete cura che sia l6ro data la bidda. Arro cira del tutto, V. S. nori si pigli fastidio. Signorl, la cena e in ordine, t portdta in tdvola. Adesso, adesso, ceri andidmo. Andidmo a cendr, signori; tlemen ? j50 DIALOGUE S. tlemen, that we may go to bed in good time. Give us water to wash our hands. Let's sit down, gentlemen, let's sit down at table. Give us some drink. To your health, gentle- men. Is the wine good ? It is not bad. The capon is not done enough. Give us some oranges, with a little pepper. Why don't you eat of these pigeons ] I have ate one pigeon and three larks. Go call for a chafing dish. Tell the landlord we want to speak with him. accioche possidmo anddr al Utto a bubn' bra. Dated V aequa dlle mani. Sedidmo, sigabri, entridmo a tdvola. Dated da here. Brindisi dlle signorie Ibro. FJ bubno 7 vino ? Non e caltivo. II cappbne non e cbtto ab~ bastdnza. Dated merdngoli con mi pbco di ptpe. Per die non mangldte di questi piccioncini? Ho mangidto un piccibne, e tie Ibdole. Anddte a domanddr' iino scaldavivdnde. Dite alV bste die venga a parldrci. DIALOGUE XVI. D I A LOGO XV L To reckon with the landlord. A Good evening, gentle- men, are you- satisfied with your supper 1 We are, but we must satisfy you too. What's the reckoning? The reckoning is not great. See what you must have for us, our men, and our horses. Keckon yourselves, and you Per contar coll' oste. BUbna sera, signori, sbno contente le signorie Ibro dclla cena ? Sidmo contenti, ma bisbgna soddisfdrvi. Qudnto abbidmo speso ? La spesa non e grdnde. Vedete qudnto vi viene, per noi,per i nbstriservitori, e per i ncstri cavdlli. Contino le signorie Ibro, e will DIALOGUES. 351 will find it comes to se- ven crowns. Methinks you ask too much. On the contrary, I am very reasonable. How much do you make us pay for the wine ? Fifteen pence a bottle. Bring us another, and to- morrow morning we will pay you seven crowns, with breakfast included. Methinks the gentleman is not well. I am very well, but weary and fatigued. You must take courage. It would be better for me to be in bed than at table. Get your bed warmed, and go to bed. Bid my man come and un- dress me. He waits for you in your chamber. Good night, gentlemen, I wish you merry. Do you want any thing? Nothing at all but rest. Order them to give us clean sheets. The sheets you shall have are whitened, and wash- ed in lie. Let us be called to-morrow very early. I will not fail. Farewel, gentlemen ; good night. vedranno che sbno sette scudi. Mi pare che domanddfe troppo. Ainzifo buonissimo mercdto, Qudnto cifdte pagdr per il vino ? Qumdici soldi la botttglia. Portdiene un dltro fiasco, e vi dttremo domattina sette scudi facendo perb cola- zibne. Pare che'l signer non stia bene. Sto bene, ma son 1 affattiedto e stdnco. Bisbgnafdrsi dnimo. Certo che sarei meglio in let- to eli a tdvola. Fdccia seal dare 'I suo letto, e vdda a dornure. Dite almio servo che venga a spoglidrmi. L'aspeita net la di lei camera* Bubnanbtte, signbri, stiano allegramente. Avcte bisbgno di qudlche cos a ? Di niente off at to, che diri- posdre. Date vrdine che si diane lenzubla bidnche. Le lenzubla ch'avrdnno sbno di buceto. Fated sveglldre domdni a bubn' bra. Sardnnoserviti. Addio, sig- nbri,buo7ta sera, DIA- 352 DIALOGUES. DIALOGUE XVII. D I A LOGO XVII. To get on horseback. THERE is a horse me- thinks looks very bad. Give me another horse, I will not have that. He cannot go. He's broken winded; he's foundered. Are you not ashamed to give me such a hack as this? He has no shoes, he'sprickt in his foot. You must lead hiiii to the smith's. He goes lame, he's maimed, he's blind. This saddle will gall me. The stirrups are too long. too short. Let them out then, shorten them. The girths are rotten. , What a wretched bridle is here ! Give me my whip. Tie on my portmanteau, my cloak. Are your pistols loaded 1 I forgot to buy powder and ball. Let us put on, let us go faster. I never saw a viler beast. Per montar a cavallo. E'CCO un cavallo che mi pare cattivo. Ddtemi uri dltro cavdllo, non voglio questo. Non pud cammindre, E' bblzo, e rappreso. Non avete vergogna di ddr* mi una carogna di quella s'orte ? E' sf err ate, t inchioddto. Bisbgna condurlo dal mart* scdlco. Zbppica, e stroppidioj cieco. Questa sella mi fara male. Lestdffesbno tfbppoliinghe, trbppo cbrte. AUongdte It stdffe, Urate su le stdffe. Le cinghie sono mdrcie. Che cattiva briglia ! Ddtemi la mia frusta. Attacdte la valtgia, il mie mantello. Sono cariedte I e sue pistole? Mi sono dimentiedto di com* prdr dtlla pblvere, e delle pdlle. Spronidmo, andidmo piii presto. IS on ho mdi visto una piu cattiva bestia. He DIALOGUES. 353 He will neither go forward, Non vnol m andar innun- nor backward. zi, nc indietro. Let go the bridle a little. Lascidtegli la briglia. Hold the reins shorter. Piglidiele redinipiu cbrte. Spur him stoutly, make him Sprondte con vigore, fatelo go. andar' inndnzi. I have spurred him in vain. Pbsso btne spronare, non ne posso vemr' a capo. Alight, I will make him go. Scendete, chh lo faro bvri anddre. Take care he don't kick Avvertite die non vi tiri you. un cdlcio. He winches then, I find. Tira edict adunque per quel die vedo. See if I have not tamed VedetescVhomputedomdre. him. DIALOGUE XVIII. DIALGGO XVIII. To visit a sick person. Per visitar' un* ammalato. ]HOW have you passed the CO' ME arete passdta la night ? - ndtte? Very badly, I have not slept Malamente, non ho dormito. at all. I have had a fever all night. Ho avido la j chore tiiita la nbiie. I have pains all over my Sentodoloriperiidtalavita. body. You mtrt be let blood. Bisbgna fdrvi cavdr sun-' fc> we. 1 have been bled twice. M e stdto caidio sdngue due volte. Where does your apothe- Dove std di edsa 7 vostro cary live. spezidle. Go bid the surgeon come Anddte adir ol cirusico die and dress me. venga a medicdrmi. I cannot imagine why the Non so perche 7 medico non doctor does not come. viCnc. We do not know what health Non si sil cbsa' sia sariiin^ is, till Nve are \YU die quundo si sta male. You ■*J4 DIALOGUES. You must have a good Bisbgna first anim heart; it Mill be no- sard niente. thing*. My wound pains me prodi- Sento un gran dolbre nella giotisly. mia pidga. iave you been purged 1 Siete stato purgdto ? How much physic have you Quant e medicine arete preso? taken 1 I am tired of physic. . Sbno faticdto di medicine. I am afraid of being light- Temo di dar' in dclirio. headed. ~)rink some ptisan. Bevete dcqua cbtta. -i'ake nothing but broth. Nonpiglidte dltro the hrbd>. The doctor has ordered me II medico niha ordindto 7 some whey. I am not able to stir my- self. siero. Non mi pbsso mubvere. Ddtemi un guancidle. Accommodate 7 mio capez- zdle. Tirdte le coriine. Give me a pillow. Put my bolster right. Draw the curtains. They want to bleed me in Ml si ruble far cavdr sdngue the foot. dal piede. Every thing I take seems Tut to cib che prendo mi par' bitter to me. amdro. How my mouth's out of O.qudnto sbno svoglidto ! taste ! It is a long sickness. Questaeunamalatttalunga. How tired I am of lying Qudnto mirincrtsce lo star abed! in Icito! How happy are you in the Bedto vbi the state bene ! enjoyment of health ! DIALOGUE XIX. D I A LOGO XIX. A person cheapens goods of Si parla con un mercatante a shopkeeper. per comprare. YOU see that I always VE DE bene che vengo scm~ come to your shop. pre da lei, I am DIALOGU E; S. 355 I am infinitely obliged to you. I shall endeavour to render myself wortby of the confidence you repose in me. I hope to please you as usual. You must not mind a little more or less, provided you are well served. I do not complain of the goods, but of the price only. You have no occasion to complain of me. Let us see in what I can serve you. I should like to make me two suits of cioaths, one for summer, the other for winter, but I do not know of what stuff to chuse. I should be glad to have a suit in taste, well chosen. You might make the close coat of a very good scarlet embroidered in gold. Or of another fashionable cloth, with a vest of gold tissue. I should rather have a sur- tout of black velvet. This would be also very elegant. For your, summer suit you may chuse a Brussels cam- let, with a little silver lace. Let us see the camlet. Le sbno sommamhitc tenuio. Aon mi renderb indtgno ddla conjldenza che V. S, ha in me. Spero che sard centfoito di me all ordindrio. Non bisbgna fisguardare a quahhc cvsa piu a menu, perchh sia ben servita. Non mi dolgo delta rbba, ma del prbzzo solamente. Non ha occasibne di lag* r, first di me. Vedidmo a che dtbbo seruirla. Vorrei f-'irmi due dbiti, imo di estate^ V altro d' inter ~ no, ma non saprei di che, Vorrei tin vestito di gusto, un vest it o ben inttso. Potrebbe fare 7 giustacbre dun ultimo scar Mi to ri- camdto d' bro. O di un' altro panne alia mo- da, con ina vtsfe di cana- vdecio d'bro. Avrti piu a euro fdrmi un surtii di velluto 7iero. Ancbr qu'sto sarebbe nubile. Per Vabilo di estate potrd prendere un camelletto di Brussells, con un piccbl gallbne d'argtnto. Vedidmo I cameUitio. This 350 DIALOGUES. Tiiis dark grey pleases me best. Don't you think that a grogram lining of a red colour wjll suit it best 1 The grogram lining might do very well, but not of a red colour. For tins in the summer would be prejudicial to the sight. It is true; we will chuse another. And have you no occasion for a spring or autumn suit? No, I have enough of those. Now tell me the very lowest price. You know I do not like to make many words. Here it is not at all ne- cessary; we deal upon conscience, I will tell you in a word. You shall pay for the scar- let cloth two-and-twenty livres, and eighteen for the camlet. I shall not abate one penny. Cut me ten yards of one, and four of the other. We should previously settle the old account. I have a partner at present, and am no longer at liberty to give credit. I do not ask credit, I buy with ready money. Questo cenerognolo mi puke 7 piil. Crede che lafodera di spo- miglioncino color difuoco convenga ? La fodera di spomiglion- cino starebbe bene, ma non rossa. Perchequhto colore I'estdte fa male alia vista. E vera, ne prendere'mo un dltra. E per un' dbito di mezzo tempo non ne ka bisognol No, ne ho abbastdnza. Or a mi dica 7 prezzo al piu gtiisto. Sa che non dmo molfo asti- racchidre* Qui non e necessdrio ; siven- de in coscienza. Le dirb de una par old, sola, Pagherci lo scarldtto venti due lire, el camellotto di- cidtto. Non vi t un soldo da levdre. Mene tdgli died brdecia dell' uno, fy quatiro dell' dltro. Bisognerebbe pr\ma soldare 7 conto vecchio. Ord ho un compdgno, non sono piil in istdto di dare a credenza. Non domdndo credenza, corn- pro a dandri ccntdnti. I beg DIALOGUES. 357 I beg you will not be offend- ed ; we have been so of- ten imposed upon, that we no longer know whom to trust. I vow I do not gain ten pence a yard in the piece. Here is the money ; and I am obliged to you. Farewell. I hope you will be pleased with me. DIALOGUE XX. On civility. I AM overjoyed, sir, to meet you here, because I intended to wait upon you this very moment. You do me too much honour, far beyond any thing I can possibly merit. But what is your pleasure ? please to lay your com- mands on me. All I wanted, sir, was to assure you of my most humble respects. And at the same time to beg a favour of you, which was to recommend me to your mother's pro- tection. You may rest assured that my mother and myself are entirely at your' ser- vice. La supplico non offender sene; sidmo stdti tdnte volte in- ganndti, eke non sappidmo di chi piu JiddrcL Le givro die non guaddgno died soldi per brdecio nel pdnno. Ecco' 'I dandro, e le sono obligdto. A rivederci. • Spero che sard conUnta di me. DI ALO GO XX. Delia civilta. GO'DOj signore, ditrovdrlu qui per accidente, pevchh intenziondto ero d y anddr- mene in questo momtnto a edsa sua, V, S. mi fA troppa grdzia, ed un onore che non me- rito. Ma che comdnda, signore ? in che posso to ubbidirle ? Altro non volevo, padrbn mio y se non assicurdrla de' miei rispetti vmilissimi. . E nel medesiino tempo fdrle una preghiera ; cio & di raccommanddrmi alia pro- tezione della signora sua madre. Essa pud viver sicura eke tdnio mia madre, quant* io vividmo dipendenti d(C suoi cenni. Q I may 358 DIALOGUES. I may therefore expect your mother and you will, on this occasion, favour me with your interest? Do not make the least doubt of it : and believe me, that both my mo- ther and myself will re- ceive a particular plea- sure in serving you. By these noble expressions I am enabled to form a judgment of your gene- rosity and goodness. And from your strong professions of friendship, I can easily perceive, that you arc the worthy offspring of so worthy a mother. Truce, I pray you, sir, with your compliments; the event will afford you a sufficient proof of the sin- cerity of our friendship. I will be silent now, but when I have obtained the favour, I shall wait upon you with my thanks. Will you do me the favour to pay my respects to your mother ? Dunque pbsso sperare die la signora sua mddre, e lei mi fuvorirdnno in quest* cccasibne delta lor' ejjica- cissima interposizione ? Non ne dubiti punto, signor mio, e creda pure die la mddre tnia, ed io ci fare- mo un sensibilissimopiackre servendola. Conosco in vero dalle nobili sue esprcssioniy qudnto ge- nerosa sial'dnima die porta in petto. E ben nCaccorgo da suoi cordidli sentimenti, esscr V. S. d'tgno figlio delta degnissima sua genitrke. Nonpiu eomplimenti, signare; gli effetti le dardfino prove sicure delta nostra servitu. Tacero adesso ; ma, oztenuto die avrb la grdzia, verrb da lei per ringraziarnela. Mi favorisca di riverire di$- tintissimamenie per parte mia la signora sua mddre ? DIALOGUE XXI. DI A LOGO XXI. SPRING is of all seasons LA primavcraelapiu grata the most agreeable. di tutte le stagioni. Every thing then smiles in Tutto ride allc?*' ne'lla natura. nature. The DIALOGUES. S59 The country looks like a vast garden. The meadows resemble a large green carpet. The weather is both verv mild and serene. The air is temperate. The trees are full of leaves. The melody of the birds en- raptures me. The weather is neither too hot, nor too cold. It is very healthy. All the living creatures are then in love. Nature seems to revive. We have no spring this year. The spring is backward, It is winter-like. I am fond of the country in summer-time, and of the town in winter. We have a very hot sum- mer. The heat makes me both dull and idle. The harvest will be very plentiful. It would be still more fertile if we had a little rain. There is a great plenty of fruit. We want a little rain. Rain would be -very bene- ficial. Tkey begin to cut down the corn. La campdgna e come un gran giardiao. I prdii somigliano ad ungrati (aj)eto vcrde. II tempo t molto dolce e molto "Sereno. Vdria e tempcrdla. Gil dlberl sono coperti di fog lie. II canto degV uccelli rriinna- mora. II tempo nonenetroppocaldO) ne troppofreddo. E molto sdno. Tutti gli animdli all6r y Jdnno V amove. La natura par che rindsca. Quest 1 anno non abbi&mo pun- to primavera. La primavera t> tardiva. L y un piccoV inverno. A'mo la campdgna nelV estate, e la cittd nelV in- verno. Abbidmo una est ate ben cdlda, II calore mi rende pesdnte e pigro. _; La raccolta sard molto ab- bonddnie. Lo sarebbe ancbr piu, se avessimo wi poco de piog- gia. f V 'c una grands abbonddnza, difrutti. Abbidmo bisogno d' wi po di pioggia. La pidggia ci farebbe molto bene. Si commincia a taglidr i gram, <* 2 Summer 360 DIALOGUES. Summer is gone. Summer did not last long. Autumn has taken its place. Autumn is the season of fruits. "Wine will be good this year. We shall drink good wine. The vines are very fine. They are loaded with large grapes. The days are very much shortened. We shall soon use candle at five o'clock. The mornings are cold. We shall soon be obliged to make a fire. Winter comes on. Winter draws near. The mornings are short. The evenings are long. The trees are divested of their leaves. Nature appears benumbed. Winter does not please me. It pleases nobody. Nevertheless it is pleasing to walk in the sun. It is soon night. The days are very short. We scarcely have eight hours full of daylight. Twilight does not make its appearance before seven o'clock in the morning. Vest ate e passdta. Vestdte non ha durato un pezzo. Vautunno ha preso il suo luogo. Vautunno e la stagione de' frutti. II vino sard buonoquesC anno, Beveremo buon vino. Le vigne sbno bellissime.- Sono car ic ate di grosse -Lve, Igiorni sono molto accorcidtu Accendercmo qudnto prima la candela a cinque ore. Le mattindte sonofredde. -Saremo ben tosto costretti d' avere delfuoco. V Jnverno viene. V hvoerno approssima. Le mattindte son cbrte, Le serdre son lung fie. Gli dlberi sbno spoglidli delle Ibrofbgie. La natura sembra intormen- tita. V Imerno non mi pidcc. Non pidce a nessuno. Nulla dimeno e dblce di passeg- gidre al sole. FJ presto presto notte. I gibrni sbno mblto cbrti. Appcna abbidmo nbi 01? ore di gibmo. II crepusculo non comm'mcia mat ad apparire avdnti le sette ore dclla mattina. They DIALOGUES. 361. They light the candles at A cinque ore dopo prdnzo five in the afternoon. s'accendono le candcle. It is not daylight the next II giorno non ritbrna a com- day before eight o'clock. parir avdnti le ot£ ore del giorno dopo. The days are somewhat / giomi sono alqudnto slon- lengthened. gdti. That foretels the return of Questo ci annunzia il ritorno spring. della primavera. lis return will exhilarate Na- II suo ritorno rallegrerd la ture. naiura. DIALOGUE XXfl. D I A LOGO XXII. WHENCE do you come UO'nde vieneella? from? I come from the city, where Vengo ddlla citta ove incon- trdi suofratello. O ve va el la, ve cbrre cdsi frettolosa- rnenic? Di cite parte va ? Che via prende f Posso io and/ir con Hi ? J met your brother. Where are you going ? Where do you run so fast ? Which way do you go? Which way do you take ? Can I go with you ? Stay a little, I will go with Aspetti, che V accompagnerb. . you. Will you wait for me ten Vorrebbe dsptttdrmi died minutes? minuti ? I shall be ready in less than Sarb pronto in meno di died ten minutes, mintiti. Tell, me where you are Mi dica 6ve va? S oin 2\ I am going into the coun- Vddo alia campdgna. try. Come up in my room, I have something to tell you. Come in, and sit down. Don't you stir from thence. Stay there. Now, you may go out. Monti hella mia earner a^ ho qualche cosa da dirle. E'ntri) e si seda. Non si muova di Id. Stia Id. Pub uscire adesso. a3 Come 362 DIALOGUES. Come down with me. Adieu, I wish you a happy journey. But, stop, come hither. Wait a little. Stop, that I may speak to you. Don't go so fast. You go too fast. What do you stop me for ? Don't touch me. You make me lose my time. My time is too precious for me to-mis-spend it. Leave that alone. Don't touch that. Touch nothing. Why do you recommend me that ? Because I recommend it to every body. I am well here. I Had myself very well here. The door is shut. Who has shut the door? 1 can't open it. I can't turn the key. The lock is not good. Open the door. It is open. Shut the door. It is shut. Open the window. Shut the window. What do you look for ? What have you lost ? If you have lost any thing, I have not found it. I never find any thing. Smonti mtco. Addio, le auguro un buon vidggio. Ma; aspetti, tenga quu Aspetti un pbco. Sifermi, ch'io le pdrli. Non vdda cosi presto. V. S. va troppo presto. Perche miferma ella ? Non mi tocchi. Mi fa perder il mio tempo. Jl mio tempo e troppo prezioso per perderlo cosi. Ldsci quest o. Non tocchi quello. Non tocchi niente. Perche mi raccotnmanda ella questo ? Perche lo raceommdndo a tutti. Sco bene qui. Mi trovo tmlto Mm qui, La porta e thium. Cht ha chiuso la porta > Non posso aprirla. Non posso voltdre le chidvc. La serratura non h butma. A'pra la porta. Il aperta. Cluuda la porta. IP chtusa. A'pra lafmeslra. Serri lafmeslra. Che cerca, V. S. Che ha perdvto f Ss ha perduto qudkhe cosa f non l y ho trovdta. Non trovo mai niente. Speak DIALOGUES. 36$ Speak aloud. Speak distinctly. Open your mouth. You speak too low. Why do you speak so low ? Don't be bashful* To whom do you speak ? Do vou speak to me ? Tell, is it to me that you are speaking ? Speak to me then. Speak to him. Speak to us. Speak to them. Do you speak French ? I speak it a little. What do you say? Do you say any thing? I say nothing. What have you said ? I have said nothing. I don't believe it. What does he say ? He says nothing. Does he not speak ? I thought he had spoken. What has he told you ? Has he told you nothing r What does she say ? She does not speak. What has she told you ? She said nothing to me. Dw-n't tell her that. I will tell it her. I won't tell it her. Don't tell it to them. Have you said that ? No, I have not told it. If I had said it, I would not deny it. What do you ? Pdrli forte. Parti distinlamcnte. A'pra la bocca. V. S. parla troppo piano. Perche parla ella cosi piano? Won sia tlmido. A chi parla ella ? Par I a a me ? Dica, e a vie clt e'la parla t Mi pdrli dunque. Gli pdrli. Cipdrli. Pdrli loro. Parla, V. S. Franche ? Lo pdrlo un poco. Che dice ? Dice, V. S. qudlche cosa ? Non dico nulla. Che ha ella detto ? Non ho dCtto niente. Non lo credo. Che dice egli. Non dice nulla. Non parla egli* Credevo cli avesse parldto. Che le ha detto ? Non le ha detto niente? Che dice ella ? Non parla . Che le ha detto essa ? Ella non m' ha detto niente. Non le dica (juhto. Glielo dirb. Nanglielo dirb. Non lo dka a loro. Ha detto questo ? No, non V ho detto, Se r avessi detto, non to neg~ herei, Chefa r V. &? a 4? I do 364 DIALOGUES. I do nothing. What have you done ? I have done nothing. Have you done your work ? No, I have been idle. Shall you soon have done ? Yes, in half an hour. Have you not done ? I thought you had done. You go very slow. You are very long. What does he do ? Is he doing nothing. Has he nothing to do ? Has he no business ? How does he spend his time? What is she doing? What is her amusement I Is she fond of music : Does she write? Does she read ? Does she go to the play ? What do you ask ? Do you ask for any thing ? Say what you ask. If you want any thing,speak. Answer me. Why don't you answer me ? Are you afraid, or do you scorn to answer me ? If you don't answer me, I'll speak to you no more. Nonfo nulla. Che hafdtto ? Non ho f duo niente. Ha ellafdtto il suo lavoro ? No, sdno stdtopigro. Avrd, V. S. finilo presto ? Si 9 in una mezz' or a, Non ha ellafinito. Credh'O che avessefnito. Va mclto adagio. E s molto Unto. Che fa egli ? Non fa egli niente ? Non ha egli niente a fare ? Non ha egli atcuna occupa- zione f Como passu egli 7 suo tem- poP Che fa ella ? Che e 7 suo passatempo ? A* ma ella la music a ? Strive ella ? Legg'-illa ? Va ella ai tediro f Che dimdnda, V, S. ? Bimdnda ella qudlche cosat Diva ella rib cite dimdnda. Se ha bisogno di qudlche cosa, pdrli. Mi risponda. Perchc non mi risponde ? Te/ne, 6 sdegna ella di ris- pondermi ? Se non mi risponde, non le par lei b piu. DIALOGUE XXIII. DIALOGO XXI IL I HAVE a good stomach. HO buon appetito. I could eat something, Mangerei volontieri qudlche cosa. I could DIALOGUES. 365 I could willingly eat. Eat something. Make no ceremonies. Do just as if you were at home. What will you to eat ? What would you wish to have ? Say what you like. Which will you have, some meat or fish ? Give me a knife, a spoon, and a fork. I have eaten enough. I have eaten sufficiently I can't eat any more. 1 ate a good dinner. I am satisfied. You gave me a princely en- tertainment. Will you eat any more ? You eat very little. We had buta very indifferent dinner to-day. But, if you don't eat, do drink at least. What, will you neither eat nor drink? I could drink a glass of wine. I like red better than white wine. Drink which you please. I hope you like this wine. I have the honour to drink your health. I thank you. Drink another glass. Mangerei volontieri, Mdngi qudlche cosa. Nonfdccia cerimonie. Fdccia ella come se fosse a cdsa sua. Che vuole V» S. mangidre t Che desidera ella d'avire f Dica quel che dma. Vuole dilla came o del pescet Mi dia un cokello, un cuc- chidjo ed una forchetta* Ho mangidto assdi. Ho mangidto sufficientemente* Nonpotrei mangidr di piu. Ho ben pranzdto. Sono soddisfdito* Rfha trdttdto come un prin« cipe. - Vuole ella mangidre davan- taggio? _ Non ha mangidto quasi ni- ente. Abbidmo avuto un cuttivissi- mo prdnzo oggi. Ma se non mdngia, ahneno beta. Che ! non vuole m here, ne mangidre ? Beverei volontieri un bicchi- fc'rc di vino. Prcferisco il vino rosso al bianco. Beva di quel che le pidce< Spero cIik ifoverd buono ques- to vino. Ho I* onore di here alia sua sa ute. La ringrdzio. Ne beva un dltro bicchiere. Q. 5 I have D I A LOGUES, I have drunk enough. I drank more to-day than I commonly drink. It is a long while since I drank so much. My thirst is quenched. I would not drink for all the gold in the world. I earnestly entreat you will not make me drink any more. Your wine is exceeding good, or else I would not have drunk so much of it. Yet, I could not possibly drink any more of it. Ho bevitto assdc Ho bevuto oggi piu die non bevo communemente. E un pezzo che non ho be- vuto tdnto. La mia sete e seddta. Non beverei per tutto V oro del mondo. La prego instantemente di non fdrmipiu bere. II siio vino e ecceU'ente^ allri- mente non ne avrei bevuto tdnto. Nientedimeno,, ni sarebbe im~ possibile di berne davan- tdggio. DIALOGUE XXIV. DIALOG XXIV. DO you know that ? I don't know it. I know nothing of it. Did your friend know it ? Did he not know it ? He has never known it, nor shaft he ever know it. He shall know nothing of it. Have you seen my uncle ? Do you know him ? I know him very well. Have you ever seen my aunt? Do you know her. You speak of my sisters, Do you know them ? I don't know them. I have never seen them. SA ella quesio ? Non lo so. Non ne' so nulla. II siio amicQ lo snpeva ? Non lo sapeva ? Non V ha ?ndi saputo, ne lo saprd mau Non ne saprd niente. Ha V. S. veduto mio zlo ? Lo conosce ella ? Lo condsco molto bene. Ha ella mat veduto mia ziaf La conosco? E'lla pdrla di mie sorelle, Le conosce ? Non le conosco. Non le ho mdi vedute. As DIAL O G U E S: 367- As to your cousin, I have known him. He has left a son, whom you ought io know. I know him by sight. He has also a very amiable sister , I know her by reputation. But, sir, you speajc to me as if you knew me. Do you know me ? I know you very well. Yet, I have forgotten your name. I am surprized at it. What ! is it thus you forget your friends? Have you entirely forgotten me ? Had you not sworn to me an eternal friendship? I have not transgressed my oath. I love you as much as I ever did before. Your brother does not re- collect me neither. He has forgotten me. He has made fresh ac- quaintances in my ab- sence. I have seen Mr. C. at Pa- ris. I have the honour of being known by him. Don't you recollect me ? We have played together at school. W r e are nearly of the same age. You are younger than I. A rigudrdo di suo cugino r l f ' ho conosciuto. Ha lascidto unfig-io cti ella deve conoscere, Lo conosco di vista. Ha parimente una sorella motto amdbile. La conosco di riputazione. Ma, signore, mi pdrla come se mi conoscesse. Mi conosce ella ? La conosco moito bene. Perb mi sono scorddto delsdo nome. Ne sono sopreso. Che ! si scorda cdsi dc' suoi amid. ! S'e interamente scorddto di me ? Non maveva ella giurdto una eterna amicizia ? ' Non ho violdto il mio giura- mento. V dmo qudnto V amdva q- vdnti. Suofratello non mi riconosce neppure. S't scorddto di me. Ha fdtto nudve conoscenze durante la viia atsenza. Ho veduto il signore C; a Parigi. Ho V onbre d'essere conosciuto da lui. Non mi riconosce ella ? Habbidmo giuocdto insieme alia scuola. Sidmo quasi dcW istessa eid, Ella e pin gidvane di me. a 6 U 368 DIALOGUES. If you are not younger, at least, you appear to be so. What are for. I have lost both the best of fathers and the best of mothers. 'My father is dead. My mother is dead. My sister is married again. How many children have you ? I have four. Sons or daughters? I have a son and three daughters. How many brothers have you ? I had three, but now I have hone. They are all dead. Unmerciful death . has car- ried them off. The physicians, with the assistance of the surgeons and apothecaries, have cured them of all their diseases. Wear© all mortal. Se non t piu giovane, almi' no lo sernbra. you in mourning Perche c ella inlutto ? Ho perduto il ??iigliore de' pddri e la migliore dclle madri. Mio padre e morto. Mia madre c niona. Mia sorella t maritdta im dllra volta. Quanti jigliuoli ha ? Ne ho qudltro. M dec hi o feminine ? Ho unfiglio e trefiglie. Quanti fratelli ha ella ? Ne avevo tre, ma adesso non ne ho alcimo. S6no tutti mcrti. La spietdta morle li ha presi tutti. J medici ajutdti d<£ chirurghi e ddgli spezidli, li lidnno guariti de tutte le loro ma~ lattk. Sidmo tutti mortaJL £ 369 ] A COLLECTION OP" ITALIAN PHRASES, IDIOMS, which constitute the peculiar Delicacy of that Language. HP H E Italian language surpassing all others in the deli- cacy and elegance of its expressions, I apprehended it would be of public utility to print this small collection, which contains the true idioms, or modes of speaking, and the turns of the Italian phrases, divided according to their respective subjects. For Example. To pray or exhort* T\ E A R sir, do me that fa- vour, My love, My delight, my soul, I conjure you, I pray you, I beseech you, Do me the favour, QA'RO voi, fdtemi questo favore. ben mio, dnima mia, amor mio. tcsoro mio, dnima ?nia. deh ! vi scongiuro, deh .' vi prego. per cortesia. V. S, mifavorisca. ToJIiew civility. Your servant, sir, Servitor, padron mio, I am intireiy yours, eono tutto suo. Your slave, schidvo suo. I kiss your handsj bdccio k mdni a V. $. I thank 570 ITALIAN PHRASES, I thank you, You may depend upon me, See if it is in my power to serve you, Command me, Do what you please with your servant, I wait for your commands, Since jrou will have it so, You are the master, At your service, I am obliged to you, I am infinitely obliged to you, I will not be guilty of that fault, Away with these titles and ceremonies^ If is my business to serve you, You are very obliging, I know not how to make a proper return, for so many favours, laringrdzio. fdccia capitdle della mia per- sona, veda V. S. se son capdee di servirla. V. S. mi comdndi. V. S. disponga del suo se?vi~ tore. aspetto i suoi comdndi. poicti ella comdnda cosh - V, S. e padrone. al suo comdndo. resto con obbllgo appresso a V, S. son obbligdto a V. S. resto obligate infimlamente a V. S nonfarb questo mancamento, lasciamo questi titoli, questc, ceremonie. tdeca a me di servirla. V. S. t troppo cortese. non saprei come contracam- bidre tdnti obblighi. " To complain, hope, or defpair. How unfortunate am I, if Gudi a me y se questo e .' that be, Poor miserable wretch that poverettome 9 meschinomel I am! Poor miserable creatures that poveretti noi ! we are! r sventurdto, sciagurdto^ in- How unfortunate am 1 1 } felice. ( disgrazidto me ! O my God, what sad pain ! o Dio y che penu ! Ah cursed fortune ? ahisorteaversa ! To what are we reduced I a che siam giunti; nddtti, conddtti ! We or MANNERS op SPEAKING. 371 We are undone ; we are ruined ! There wanted only that, We are at last come to it, That was the cause of my grief, There is what completes our ruin, That is the misfortune, It is really a pity, the poor child ! 1 am the most unfortunate of men ! What is to be done ? We must have patience, We must conform ourselves to the will of God, Nothing farther can be done, I hope that God, I hope that heaven, It is enough, in the name of God, We must swallow that, We must die, sooner or later, We fiad bread to eat every where, sidmo morli; spedid ; rovi- ndti ! qnesto ci mancdva. ci sidm pur giunti. ecco dove mi doleva. ecco Vultima nostra rovincu questo e'/ male* e peccdto veramente, o povero figliuolo ! io* son pur it re delle disgrcU zie ! che c' e da fare ? eke faro ? chefaremo ? hisogna aver pazienza. bisogna conformdrsi, bisogna rimettersi alia volontd di Dio. non si pub far* dltro. spero in Dio, spero nel cielo. bdsta, in name di Dio, forza e che cela hevidmo. ad ogni modo bisogna niorire* dnche alirdve simdngia pane., To give tokens of affirmation, conjent, belief, or rtfufaL However it is true, It is but too true, To tell you the truth, Indeed it is so, There's no doubt of it, I believe yes, I believe no, V I lay E f pur zero. e pur troppo vero. a dirvi H vero. infdtlie cosi, cosi e. non v' e dub bio. credo di sh credo di nb t 372 ITALIAN PHRASES, I lay it is, I lay it is not, I think so, I think not, Not to tell an untruth, Nobody would say such an extravagant thing, Say likewise that the snow is not white, I can tell you she is very handsome, I would lay a wager, You jest, I speak in earnest, You have guessed right, I believe you, one may be- lieve you, Let it be then, so let it be, You shall be satisfied, Softly, not so fast, Nor that neither, I would not give thee a trifle, Yes, truly, They are trifles, Do not break my head, Po not make me giddy or deaf, Get thee to bed. scommetto di si. scommetto di 7io. penso di si, penso dinb. salvo V vero. niuno direbbe una stravagdn- za simile, dite dnche che la neve non £ bidnca. vi so dire cK ella e bellissima* scommetterei qudlche cosa. oh bur la V. Si pdrlo da senno. V avete indovihdta. lo credo, vi si pub credere. sia dunque, cost sia. V.J>, r ester & serttia. adagio, adagio, a belV agio* ne mdnco questo, non ti darei unfrullo. teramente si, senza dubbio. son cipolle. non mi rompete 'I cdpo, non mi star* ad introndre le orecchie, vd a dorm ire. To deny. I say not, It is not true, It is not so, it is so, Positively I will not, I joked, I did it only by way of jest, Dico di no, non t vero. questo no, questo si. non voglio in conto alcuno. I in nissun modo, in nissuna manCera. io burldvo. lofacevo da scherzo, or MANNERS of SPEAKING; 373 To confult. What is to be done ? What course shall we take ? Let's do so and so, Let's do one thing, It will be better that, Stay a little, It would be better that. Let me alone, I had rather, Were I in your place, Che c'e da fare ? che parlito piglieremo ? faccidmo cost, faccidmo una cosa. sard meglio che. sdldo un poco. sarehbe meglio che. lascidtefar' a me. vdrr i piu toslo. se iofossi in luogo vostro. Heavens preserve you, God send you good luck, I wish you every thing that's good ?> God assist you, God forgive you, God be with you, May you be happy, I wish you true content, God grant you all the pros- perity you desire, Till I see you again, I am your most humble ser- vant, You are welcome, Well met, Much good may do you, To wijli well to a per Jon, II cielo vi gudrdi. Iddio vifeliciti. m prego ogni vero bene. Iddlo v'djuti, lddio vi perdonu anddle con Dio. and ate f dice* vi prego ogni maggior con- teni'ezza* - prego D'so che vi conceda ogni prosper a a piu desiderdb He* a rivederci. la riverisco. ben venUto. ben irordlo. bum provifdecia, Upon my faith, In my conscience. Upon my life, Upon your life, To [wear. AUa fe y a fe di Dio y per ?niafL in coscihza mia. per vita mia. per vita V93tra* I swear 374 ITALIAN PHRASES, I swear, as I am a gentle- vi giuro da cavaliere. man, As I am an honest man, As I am a man of honour, As I am a poor man, As I am an honest man, May my eyes be plucked out, if, That I may die, That I may be killed, By Bacchus, As God shall keep me, Shall save me, da galantuomo che sono, da ubmo onordto. da paver' uomo che sono. da iwmo dabbene. che mi sian cavati gli ocelli, se. possa in morire. pbssa io esser amazzdlo. pel cbrpo di Bdcco. > che Dio nCajuti) mi sdlvi* I will break thy head, I will beat thee, Thou wilt make me give thee fifty blows with a stick, May the plague take me, if I don't kill him, I will affront thee after such a rate, I will give thee a Rowland for thy Oliver, Let me alone, I will know if, Thou will pay it me, I swear thou shall repent it, Thou hast done it, I will give it thee, go, Thou wilt lauoii with me, but, If you put me into a pas- sion, If I put myself into a pas- sion, Do not stun me, To threaten or infult. Ti romperb la testa, ti batterb. tu mi caverdi dalle ?ndni tin- quanta bastondte. si io non V a?ndszOj ml pbssa tenir in rdbhUu tifarb uno sc6mo (ale. ti rendero pan perfocdecia, Idsciajar' a me, clC io saprb. tu melft pagherdi. giuro al mbndo che lenefarb pent ire. tu meV Itdifdtta. te la darb t va. se tu mi fdi andar' in col- kra. se mi comincia afumdre. non mi stuzzicdr le orecchie. Do or MANNERS of SPEAKING. 375 Do not waken a sleeping non destdre 7 can che dorms. lion, Softly, softly, Woe be to thee, Thou shalt not escape me, Hold your tongue, don't speak to me, 5 Tis enough, 'tis sufficient, Thou art undone, In spite of thee, To his face, pian^piano. gudi a te. tu non mi scapperdi. non piu parole, tdcL bdsta, tanto bdsti. sei mono va. at tuo rndrcio dispetto. alia barba sua* To admire. O God I God! O blessed Jesus ! Jesus Maria ! Is it possible ? (These marks of admira- tion cannot be turned into English without los- ing all their beauties.) Who ever saw the like ! Who would have thought, believed, said ! Look a little now ! What a beast it is ! 1 did wonder, strange ! 1 don't wonder, How can that be ? So goes the world, Dio mio ! Dio buono 1 Cristo benedetto ! Giesii Maria ! poter di Cristo, piio far' il morido, piio far' il cielo ? poter di Bdcco t poter del mondo cdspitta, cdppari. chi vide nidi cose tiimili f chi nvrhhbe pensdto, creduto^ ditto ! giiarddtemi un pdco ! che bdstiu ! Jo mx maravigliotvo. che moravJglm / nonjjii maraviglio, come pud essere ? com* e p$£- sibife ? cosi vdnno le cose del mondo^ cost va 7 mondo. To JJiew joy, or difplcafure* What pleasure ! O che gusto What glory ! What joy o che gloria ! o che allegrezza t 376 ITALIAN PHRASES, How pleased I am ! O, how happy am I ! happy day ! What happiness ! " O, how happy are you •' 1 am sorry for it, That touches my very soul, It pierces me to the heart, che contento e 7 mio ! o me f dice ! o gibrnofellce ! o chefortuna ! bedlo voi .' mi displace^ mi rincresce. mi displace firi all' tmima, tni trafigge 7 cubre. dealing Is this their gentlemen ? Oughtest thou not to be ashamed ? To affront me thus! To such a man as I am, Tome, is it not ? Do you deal thus ? All, is it so ? So and so, is it not ? See the simpleton ! O, what fine manners ! What a fine way of proceed- ing ! ■ O, that is fine ! Thou oughtest not to treat me thus, Dost thou think that is well? We shall see immediately, What the devil has he done ? Do but see what a rascal he is, What, are you obstinate still? To reproach with Cos i si tratta cc? galdnt' uo~\ mini f ?io?i ti dovresti vergogndre ? a me far quest' ajrbnto ! ad un pari mio. a ?ne, eh ? a questo mbdo si tratta ? a questo mbdO) th ? cost, eh f guar da minchione ! oh che heila crednza ! che bel mbdo diprceidcre ! - bel mo do certo. non doveresti usclr s'unili ter- mini me co. parti che stia befe ? adesso si tedrd. che didvolo hafdtto f mirdfe un poco che furf ante a costui. ancor* ostindto ? Hark, Listen, To call. Asculta. odi. Where or MANNERS of SPEAKING. 377 Where art thou 2 - Hark ye, Hear you, •Hark ye a little, A word, I will speak but two words to \ou, Stay, Stay you, bve set? sent He una par bla. sent it e, udite. sentite un pbco. una parbla. due parole solamenie, fermati. Jermdtevi. To shew uneasiness, trouble , or sorrow. I am sorry, Leave me alone, Prithee get thee gone, Do not break my head, Away, away, Go, go, God be with you, Get you out of my sight, Get thee gone from hence, Go, mind your own business, Do not make me giddy, Do not split my ears, How tiresome you are ! You have told it me a hun- dred times already. Mi dispidce, mi rincisce, lasciami in pace. va via, ti prego. nbn mi romper e 7 capo, via via, ti prego. via, vdttene con Dto. levdtevi d' inndnzi, levdtevi di qua. anddte afar* ifdtti vbstrL non mi st or dire. non m'introndr le orecckie* o che sei noibso ! meV hdi ditto cento volte, To give courage. Cheer up, sirs, A'nimo, signer i. Come on, gentlemen, come sil su, signbri. on, Come, let's see to work, or sh a nbi alle mdnu Let's give over, Jinidmola. To ask. What news ? What's that? Che si dice, di nuovo ? che e'e ? Where 378 ITALIAN PROVERBS. Where are you going t Whence come you 1 What means? To what purpose ? What do you think 1 To what end? Why do you make such ado? Tell me, may one know ? Tell me, may one ask you ? Who is it that has been so bold? dove si va ; dove andate? dbnde si viane? che vuol dire? a che serve ? che vi pare ? a che proposito? a che fine? a che tante stbrie, per che tante smbrfie ? ditemi se si pud sapere ? ditemi s'e lecito di doman- ddrvi ? che ha avuto cotdnto ardire ? To forbid. Let that alone, Do not touch, Say not a word, Do not stir from hence, In the name of God, do not doiti Have a care, Take a care, I forbid it, Lascidte stare. non toccdre. non dir niente. non ti partir di qua*. non lofdre in nbme di Die, guarddtevi bene, avvertite. lo proibisco. COLLECTION RACCO'LTA OF DI Italian Proverbs. Proverbj Itali&ni. nr*0 expect, and not to jSpettdre, e non venire ; come ; To lie a-bed, and not to Starinletto,enondormire; sleep ; To ITALIAN I'ROVERBS. «*/ To serve, and not to please ; Are three things enough to kill a man. Your mouth heals what it touches. A hackney horse brings in money, but does not last long/ A house built, and a vine planted, is never sold for what it cost. There's no one happy in this world, but he that dies m his swaddling clouts. Without bread and wine, love is cold. To travel post, requires the purse of a prince, and the strength of a porter. It is better going alone, than in bad company. Misfortunes aud pleasures never come single. Fine to fine is not good to make a lining. A woman is like a chesnut, Fair to the outside, foul within. We must not choose women nor linen by candle- light. Raw herbs, and sleeping on the ground, send a man to his grave. Love and greatness will not associate. A good stomach needs no sauce. We think no more of vows, when the danger is past. Serv'tre, e non gradtre ; Son tre cose da far morire. La v'ostra bbeca sdna quel che tbeca. Co v alio di vettura fa pro- fitto, ma non dura. Casafdtta, vigna pbsta. Non si pdga quant o cost a. Nel mbndo non £ felice, se non quel che mubre in fdscie. Senza Cerere e Bacco, Ve- nere e di ghidecio. La pbsta c una spesa da principc y ed un mestiere dafacchino. E meglio anddr solo, che mal accompagndto. Le sciagure, e le allegrezzt non vergono mat sole. Duro con auro f non c babri afar' muro. La donna ecbmelacastdgna, Bella di fubri, e dentro ha la magdzna. Ne donna, ne tela non com- prdre alia candela. E'rba cruda, e dorpiire in pidna terra, munda V ubmo sotto terra. Amor, e signm^a non vbg~ lion compagnia. Appettto non vubl sdlza. Passdto 7 pericolo, gabbdto 7 sdnto. Old }S0 ITALIAN PROVERBS. Old crimes, new penance. The beast once dead, the venom dies also. Fair words are very power- ful, and cost nothing. A hundred pounds of sor- row won't pay an ounce of debt. He that goes to bed without his supper, will toss and tumble all night. The ravens never pluck out one another's eyes. Tell me your company, and I shall know what you do. Let every one mind his own business. He is fallen out of the frying-pan into the fire. Time and straw ripen medlars. One scabby sheep infects a whole flock. Every bird likes his own nest. A barking dog never biles. Do not wake a sleeping lion. He that is fonder of you than usual, Either has cheated you, or designs it. To ask better bread than is made of corn. To ask my landlord if the wine be good. Sorrow for a dead woman Peccato vecchio, penitmia nubva. Mart a la btstia, mbrto 7 ventno. Unbel parldre di bbcca assdi vale, poco cost a. C?nt' ore di malinconia nan pagdno un quattrino di debit o. CM vd a letto scnza cena, tidta la nbtte si dimma. Cbrvi con cqrvi non si cdvan mai gli bcchi. Dimmi can chi tu vai, saprb Quel chefdi. Ciascun' attenda a' fdtti subi. E caduto ddllapadclla sulla brdgia. Col tempo, e la pdglia si /maturano le nespole. Una ptcora mdrcia neguasta un brdnco. Ad bgni uccello suo nido t Ullo. Can cti abbdja, non mbrde mai. Non dtstdre 7 can chc dbrme. Chi ti fa carezze piu die non suble, O t'ha inganndto, o ingan- ndr ti vuble. Cercdr miglior pane die di fromento. Domandar all' bstc se ha bubn vino. DogUdidi donna mbrta dura gues ITALIAN PROVERBS. 361 goes no farther than the door. Good wine needs no bush. It is better one's foot slip than one's tongue, Wine brings out the truth. The poorest hog has the best pear. He that waits for another's porringer, often dines ill. He complains that his wife is too handsome. A hidden sin is half pardon- ed. He that buys land, buys trouble. He that cheats is often cheated. Who lies with dogs, rises with fleas. The maid surpasses the mistress. The Devil's not always at the poor man's gate. Fair words and foul play 1 cheat both the young and the old. There are no roses without thorns. There are no roses but what become heps. With artifice aud deceit we live half the year ; With deceit and artifice we live the other half. He that serves the publick, obliges nobody. God preserve me from such people as flatter me to in fin* alia porta. Al bubn vine non hisogna Jrdsca. E meglio sdruccioldr co' piedi che col la lingua. II vmo £ una mkza cor da, Al piii tristo pbrco men la miglior per a, Chi per man d' altri s' im- bbeca, tdrdi si satblla. Si lamhita del brbdo grdsso, Peccdto celdto a mezzo per- dondto. Che cbmpra terra, compra guerra. Chi cerca d'inganndr, resta inganndto. Chi dor me cot cdni, si leva collepulci. La serva super a lapadrbna. Non sempre ria fori una un lubgo itene. Belle parole, e cattivi fdtti, ingdnnano savj, e mditi. Non si pub aver la rosa senza le spine. Non f a cost bella scdrpa, che non dkerddsse brutta cia- vdtta. Con arte, ed ingdnno, si vive mezzo V dnno ; Con ingdnno, e con arte, si vive l' dltra parte. Chi serve al comiine, non serve a nissimo. Dio mi gudrdi da quella gdtta, che dinndnzi mi R ray 382 ITALIAN PROVERBS. my face, and betray me behind my back. A good friend is worth a hundred relations. Fevers in autumn are long or mortal. To sell bladders for lan- terns. Every country has its fa^ shions. To mind two things at once. To be on both sides. To have two strings to one's bow. To cheat two at once. We must love the dog for his master's sake. To set the fox to keep the geese. The priest errs at the altar. We must hide nothing from our physician and our . lawyer. Nuns, monks, priests, and chickens, are never sa- tisfied. Short reckonings make long friends. Eggs of an hour, bread of a day, wine of a year, fish of ten, a woman of fifteen, and a friend of thirty. Wine of three virtues, that moistens, washes, and ne freshes, without any strength in it. lecca, e d'utro mi grtiffia. E' hiSgtio 11711)11011 amico che cento par hit i. Febbreautunndle, o elunga, o e mortdle. Vender luccioleper lanterne. Tal paese, taV usdnza. Aver un' be eh io alia phi tola, e V dltro alia gdtta. Dar un eblpo alia botte, ed un altro al cerchio. Tenere 'I piede in piit staff e. Pigliar due colbmbi ad iaia Java. Bisbgna portdr rispetto al can per ambr del padrone. Dar le laitughe in guard la di pdperi. E'rra ilprtte all' alt are. A! medico, ed all avoedto non tenere 7 ver celdto. Man ache, f rat i,preii, e pb Hi, non si veggon rndi sa- iblli. Pdtto chidro, amico Carp. Ubvo d'tm bra, pane d'un d), vino d'un anno, pesce di died, donna di quindici, amico di t rent a. Vino di tre virtu, bogna, lava, e rinfresca, ne ha forza alciina. Bread ITALIAN PROVERBS. 383 Bread that sees, wine that sparkles, cheese that weeps. A salad, to be well sea- soned, ought to have little vinegar and plenty of oil. It is better being a bird in the field, than in a cage. A bird in the hand is worth two in the bush. It is better to be friends at a distance, than enemies near at home. When it is fair weather, take thy cloke ; when it rains, wear it if you please. If thou wouldst be revenged of thy enemy, govern thvself. Pan eke veda, tin eke salti, forrnaggie eke pianga. Insaldta ben salata, poc* aeeto, ben' ogliata. E meglio esser' ueeello di eampagna, cite di gabbia. E meglio tin novo oggi, eke domani una gallina. E meglio esser amiei da Ion- tdnojche nemici d'appresso. Ne di state, ne. d'invtrno, non anddr senza mantello. Vuoi far vendetta del tuo nemico, govemati bene. R 2 ["• 384 ] A COLLECTION OF JESTS, Several diverting Stories, Sentences, and the choicest Italian Proverbs. D y un Birbante. U ! N Birbante, per meglio procacciarsi la Hmosina, andava accattando col suono d'un campanellino, mostrando co' suoi cenni esser muto, e sordo : il che vedendo un galantuomo, lo chiamo a se, ed in presenza d'alcuni amici suoi ai quali aveva detto ch'egli voleva far' un miracolo, disse al Birbante, mostrandogli nella destra un quatirino, e nella man sinistra una pezza di quattro soldi : vedi qual vuoi scegliere. Se tu sei vera- meute muto, saia. tuo '1 quattrino : ma se confessenii la verila, ti giuro da galantuomo di darti la pezza di quat- tro soldi. Ii Birbante, senza indugiare, confesso 11011 esser muto; £bbe la pezzettiiia di quattro soldi, ed andossene via, poco curandosi delle risa degli altrL D'un Furbo. UN mendico tristo, e furbo contrafaceva con cosi verisimili maniere 1 moribondo nelle strade publiche di Parigi, e particolarmente appresso delle Chiese, che i Preti medesimi venivano a fargli la raccomandazione dell' anima. Mentre un' altro furbo, piangendo a diiotte lagrime, diceva esser suo fratello, ch'era cosi venuto meno, e tramortito di debolezza, per npn aver mangiato in tutto 1 giorno antecedente. E per muovere maggiormente la gente a compassione, soggiungcva, ch'essendo essi d'ono- rata famiglia, non avevano avuto ardire di domandare la limosina. Sicche mosso a pieta ogn' uno nel veder due giovani ben fatti, con buoni vestiti adosso, si sforzava ciascheduno di dar loro quaiche cosa. Pochi giorni dopo furono quei medesimi furbi riconosciuti da un certo, signore, ORE DI RECREAZIONE. 385 sjgnore appresso della Chiesa di san Luigi dell' Isola ; il quale come prima vide quel baronaccio disteso a terra, cbe pareva esalare gli ultimi spiriti, prego alcimi di quei ehe stavano attorno a quel furfantaccio d'ascoltar' una parola in disparle, e fatto loro palese 'i suo intento, 1'ap- provarono gli altri, e ne feeero consapevoli i loro amici. S' accosto quel sign6re al moribondo, nel tempo che tin Prete gli gridava con aita voce ; Giesu Maria. Fece '1 sopraccennato signore cenno al prete : e ringendo aver compassione di quel giovinetto, domand6 un poco di p%iia, per mettergli sotto la testa, f u portata la paglia, ed accesa io un punto dalle due Mnde, per via di due candele. Sorse inimantiuente '1 briccone, ed a tutto potere si diede alia fuga. S'imagini chi legge, qiuii furono le risa, quale '1 rumor de' faneiulli, die gli cor- revano dietro, gridando. Al fuoco ; fermate, fermate, e un morto risuscitato. Bispdsta Morddce (Pun Servo. UN Napolitano, uomo molto ricco, e fac&o, aveva Uli servo fedelissimo, e mottegiatore al maggtor segno; € perche cestui spesso pigliava a scherzo i detti e fotti altiui, il padr6ne lo faceva star zitto, col dlrgli : taei, taei, bal6r'do, che tu sei '1 Re de' niatti. Dispiaceva non poco al servo il vedersi chiamato Re de' pazzi, e dal padrone, e dagli altri servit6ri, Sicebe una v61ta die credeva'J padrone imp6rgli silenzio, tassandolo al suo golito di e de' pazzi; quello soggiunse: volesse Dio che fessi io '1 Re de' pazzi, e de' matti ? Sarebbe maggiors '1 mio regno di quel di tutt'i Re della terra ; e vol anche, signor padrone, sareste iiiio vassallo. Astuzia (Vun Contadino. UN Contadino portando una soma di Iegna per ven- dere,.benche gridasse spesso, Guarda, guarda ;■ un besiiale non volendosi scostare, fu urt^to dal contadino, e gli .fu stracciato '1 manlello; e volendo che 'I contadino glielo, pagasse, lo condiisse innahzi al Podesia, il quale, udito '1 caso dal querelante, domando al contadino se cio fosse vfcro, il quale non rispose mai. Onde 1 Giudice voltatosi R 3 a quel 336 ORE DI RECREAZIONE, a quel del mantello : che vuoi tu, gli disse, ch'io faccia ad un muto ? che muto ? non e nmto : perche poco fa gridava a tutta voce : Guarda, guarda. S'egli gridava, dovevi dunque guardarti, e cosi non t'avrebbe stracciato 'i mantello. D\in Francescdno, e (Piin ministro. UN Francescano, essendo in up bosco, montato su un asino, incontrd an ministro a cavallo sopra un bellissimo Ronziuo* EKSpo i complimenti ordinari, e piu raggio- nainenti ch' ebbero insieme, disputarouo un pezzo, su l- fattodeJle vera ed {mica religione Callolica, ne mai si potettero aecordare: con tutto che 1 rrancescano avesse con bupnissime ragioni, e per via de' testi de' santi Padri provato la coulinuazioiie della religione Roiuana, da san Pietro sin' adesso. II che negaudo '1 ministro ; non po- tette ii Francescano eontenersi di dirgli, ch' egli era un vera boja della. sua anima, giacche conoscendo la verita, non la voleva credere. Non ebbe tempo di rispondere 1 ministro, perche ailora si trovarono con molte altre per- sone, vicini ad un Mine, che si passava per via d'una barca, nella quale entrarono, con tiitti quei che volevano passaY all' aitra banda. Vedeudo '1 ministro che l'asino del Francescano tremava tutto, crcdendo fargli nno scorao, in presenza di quanti erano nella barca, di cm la maggior parte era Calvimsta, disse: Padre, se son siete piu sicuro nella vostra religione che '1 yostro asino non e nella barca, dovreste pur tremare come fa egli. II Fran- cescano piu astfito del ministro, con be! garbo gli rispose : Se vi trovasie, come si trova questo asino, signore, coi ferri ai piedi, la corda al collo, un confessore da una parte, e '1 boja dali' altra, sicuramente avreste maggior paurache non ha i'asino. Di due Franceschii, e tVwn Contadino. UN Contadino gelato di freddo, smonto da cavallo per eamnmiar a piedi. II che vedendo due Francescani, che in Francia sono chiamati, Cordeliers, disse Tuno a! compagiio : se avejssi io un cavallo, non sarei tanto pazzo di ORE DI RECREAZIONE. 3S7 di condurlo per la briglia, ma bensi mi farei portare sin' al convento. L'altro ch'era d'umor allegro soggiimse ; mi basta l' animo di far' una buria a quel Gontadiup, e levargli '1 cavallo, purche vogliate darmi un poco d'ajiito. Acconsenti subito '1 frate, e pian piano saccostarono ambidue al Contadino, senza che sen' accorgesse. . Lev*) 1 Francescano con destrezza la biiglia'al cavallo ; sela mise in testa seguitando ; i Contadino : mentie 1'aitro con la cavezza condusse '1 cavallo in disparte. Quindi a non molto, il Contadino volendo rimontar' a cavallo, si \61se in dietro ; ma ebbe da morire di paura, vedendo tanta metamorfosi. E sgridando con terribile voce, ohime ! ajuto ! fu fennato dal Francescano, che prostratosi in ginocchione richiedeva con grand' urniUa la sua liberta ; dicendo, che per i suoi disordini, e lenornnta de' suoi peccati era st ito condannalo a idle trasformazione ; e cli' ora essendo veriuto 1 tannine delta penitenza, era tomato all prinib essere. 11 Contadino alquanto rasserenato, non solo gli diede la dpmanctafa liberta, ma non accor- gendosi della burla, scioccamtote soggiimse : andate in santa pace, adesso non ini maraviglio, se dopo una vita tanto disordinata, siete riuscito un cosi cattivo animalaccro. II frate si parti, dichiaraudosegli obbligato, ed ando a ricercare 'il compaguo : quando viddero i frati dilungato '1 povero Contadino, per altra via si condussero ad una terra vicina. Pocbi giorni dopo, pregarono i Francescani un' amico loro, che si compiacesse d'andar' alia iiera per vendere '1 cavallo, e mentre andava col comprat6re per ricevere '1 pagamento, venne loro incontro '1 primo Contadino, che riconoscendo '1 cavallo disse al compratore, che lo pregava d'ascoltar una par 6!a in disparte ; e donian- datogli di chi fosse 'I cavallo : il compratore rispose ; l'ho comprato adesso adesso, ma non l'ho pagato. Deh per vita vostra, replico 'I Contadino, rendetelo, non lo pagate. Non siate tanto sciocco di credere, che quella carogna sia un cavallo, e Tanima d'un Francescano cli' e tomato nel!e sue dissolutezze. Rendetelo, vi dico io, ch' e'l phi tristo animalaccio di quanti n'abbia 'I mondo, ed a me ha falto venire la rabbia cento mila volte. R 4 D'un 3S8 OKE D£ RECREAZIONE. D\cn Gentiluomo Francese. _ PER intelligenza di> questa storietta, basta sapere che la parola, digiunare, significa in Francese jeuner ; e che per esprimere, dejeimer, bisogna dire, far colazione. UN gentiluomo Francese, curioso di veder l'ltalia parti da Parigi, con intenzione d'osservare, e di far una memoria distinta $&\\e c6se pin memorabili ch' avesse vedute pe*r il viaggio. Arrivato in Bologna, voile trat- ten£rvisi. Partito dal suo albergo, il giorno seguente assai per t£mpo, ando per due ore camminando di qua, di la, per la citta. Dopo averne vista la maggior parte, tcrnd con grandissimo appetito all' osteria ; e subito neIF cntrare disse all' oste, Signor oste, oggi voglio digiunare. L'oste credendo che '1 gentiluomo per c€rta divozione volesse digiunare da dovero, rispose : V. S. n' e padrone. In quel mentre il gentiluomo sail su in camera sua, e scrisse per un buon pezzo le cose osservate da lui. Ma stimolato dall' appetito, e dalla seie, tralascid di scrivere, c s'aflacci6 alia rineslra, chiamando l'oste, a cui disse : hig:i6:-' 6ste, v'ho detto che volevo digiunare sta mattina, vene i icordate ? Lo so, sogghinse l'oste, e mene ricordo. II gentiluomo seriz' aspettar altro, tornd a scrivere ; ma un qyarto d'ora dopo, mosso e dalla fame, e daiia sete, chiamd di n novo l'oste, e con voce disdegnosa gli disse: Che modo di procedere e questo 1 non v'lio detto un' ora fa, che volevo digiunare sta mattina ? E' vero, replico l'oste, e V. S. e padrone di digiunar' snchetutto '1 giorno. Come, come, disse laltro, lutto '1 giorno! non ho mangiato ancora niente, mi burlate. Voglio mangiare, portatemi da mangiare, e da bere. Se V. S. vuol mangiare e bere, non vuole adunque digiunare, soggiunse Foste : perche digiunare vale a dire non mangiare, e non bere. Allora, il Francese, accortosi deli' equivoco, piacevolmente disse : Sia maledetto il digiunare : dovevo io dire far colazione. Mai piu diro digiunare, che troppo bene ho imparato a inie spese, che cosa e digiunare. Del ORE DI RECREAZIONE. 389 Del Papa Giulio Se conch. UN nobile Romano, amico intrinseco del Papa Giulio Secondo, gli disse che molti si lamentavano che sua santita attendesse coti troppo calore alia guerra contro i Francesi; giacche Iddio gli aveva dato le chi&vi delta sua chiesa, per serrare le porte della discordia, ed aprire quelle dclla riconciliazione. II Papa rispose al nobile : Quei tali che dicono simili co.se, non sanuo forse che san Pietro, e san Paolo sono st£ti compagni, & ambidue principi della chiesa. I predecessori miei si sono serviti della chiave di san Pietro, acfcsso io voglio adoperare la spada di san Paolo. II nobile replied : V6stra santita sa perd che Cristo disse a Pietro : rime tti la tua spada nel fodero. E' vero, soggiunse '1 papa, ma ricordatevi che Cristo non lo disse prima, ma dopo che Pietro ebbe ferito, Di Sisto qulnto, e d'urf Agostiniano. FE'LICE Peretti fu prima porcaro, si fece poi fr6te dell' ordine di san Francesco, e subito fatto sacerdote, e Bacceiiere, si fece chiamare '1 padre Montalto. Pervitauao!i abbasso, amniazzami, se tu puoi, clie io lie suno coutento. iy Ull Pittore. UN Pittore monstrundo un cattivo quadro in presenza a molti Piitori di gran grido, si pregiava d'averlo finito in poelnsjsjnro tempo; il che sentehdo Apl'lle, gli disse piacevofoiente : non occorre che tu ci dica d'averlo finito id poco tempo, che '1 quadro lnedesimo lo dice abbastauza da per se. /)' uno Sadt ore. DISEGNA'NDO i consoli di Firenze di far' una siaiua, chiamarono, Donatello, famoso ed eccelleute Scullore, il quale inteso 1 disegno, domando per la fat- tara cinquauta scudi. I consoli senza proferhgli nulla, la diedero a far' ad un' altro Scultore mediocre, Costui fatta che l'ebbe, il meglio che seppe, ne domando ot- tanta scudi. Maravigliatisi i consoli, gli dissero che questo e un buritu'si di loro, giacche Donatello, u6mo R I R£Cft£AZlON£. tanto illustre, non aveva domandato per farla piu di cinquanta. In sorama non poiendesi accordare, rimisero la causa ad 6sso Donatcllo, il quale sentenzid che i con- soli dovessero pagare settanta scudi. Del che alteratisi, ricordandogli ch'£gli medesimo di cinquanta s'era voluto contentare ; Donatcllo graziosamente disse : e v£ro, ini potevo contentare, perche avrei fatto la statuta in in£nb d'un mtee : ma qu£sto pover' uomo che a p6na potrebbe essere mio scolare, ve stato piu di sei m6si. Cosi Dona- tcllo si vendicd argutam^nte dell' ingiuria ricevuta da* console Dhin Contadino. UN Contadino non potette contenersi di ridere nel vede> passar 1' arciv^scovo di Bologna, accompagnato da un certo numero di soldati. L'artivescovo accortosene v611e sap£r la ragi6ne delle sue risa, e domandatogli per- che ridesse cosi, il Contadino rispose, che gli pareva cosa strana, ch'un arcivescovo caminasse arniato, ed accom- pagnato, non da preti, ma da una man di soldati. Sog- giunse allora Tarcivescovo : sappi halordo, ch' io sono duca, ed arcivescovo insieme ; ch'in chiesa vado vestito da arcivescovo, e dico I'offizio col clero : ma in cam- pagna vado da duca co' miei soldati. Ho inteso, mon- signore, replic6 '1 Contadino, ma ditemi in grazia, quando '1 sign6r duca andra a casa del Diavolo, che sara ' Donne a che son buone. NEL Romolo di Malvezzi si legge, che Ie donne in casa possono ajutare, fuori non fanno se non impedire. E adduce per ragione, che '1 uienarle a spasso & ai diporti, o condfirle alle fesie, niuove talora chi le vede, se s6:io bnitte, a disprezzo ; se belie, a libidine. E con tutto die sian' onestissirae, bisogna ricordarsi, die 1' one- sia e un color delicato, che teme l'aria, ed un cristailo che s'appatma per guardo iiupuro di coloro ch' hanno agitata la mente daiie lascivie. Devouo per questo fug- gtrsi le occasion! del pericolo, dove . 1 pericolo e 'dell' onore. Quando Isabella Andreini park dell' onore, dice che, II seggio dell' uomo e la terra, De' pesci, l'acqua, Degii uccelli, l'aria, Delia donna, 1' onore. Naiura, 3£6* ORE DI RECREAZIONE, Nat ura, e costumi de > Franctsi. - ADRTA'NO Nego^inte, dottissimo astrologo, e di profondissimo ingegno, dice nelle congetture astrologiche, sciitte di suo proprio pugno, che la spica nobilissiraa Stella, e benefiea, lia dominio speci&le sopra '1 regno di Fr£ncia. II che facilmenle si pud comprendere dalla proprieta de' suoi influssi convenient niolto alia natura, e costumi di questa nazione, Mercuriale, Venerea, e Marziale ; imperrocche sono i Francesi, Mercuriali per Findustria, curiosita, agilita, inconstanza, eloquenza, e vivacila. dell' ingegno, e perfezione in tutte Ie artj. Venerea, per rornamento, civilta, eleganza, polizia, genti- Jezza, ed inclinazione alle delizie. Marziale, per il genio bellicoso ed esserclzio militare in cui non cedono in valore ad alcuna nazione antica, e modema. Simpaiia, ed Antipotia. SICCO'ME la Matrigna per soverchio odio non dis- cerne la virtu del ftgliastro, cosi la madre per soverchio amore, non comprende i difetti del fig!iu6!o. [ 397 ) COS T U'M I. de' FRANCE'SI, TEDEfSCHI, I T A L I A' N I, SPAGNUO'LI, ed LNGLE'SI, IN COSTU'MI. *N STATU'RA. IN VESTITL IN PAST!. JN UMO'JR-E. |L Francese h cortege, II Tedesco benevolo, L' ltaliano civile, Lo Spagnuolo disprezzante, L' Inglese altiero. I! Francese k di bel garbo, II Tedesco grande, ti' Italia no iiedi6Cre, Lo Spagnu61o piccolo, L' Inglese di bella presenza, II Francese e novat6re, 11 Tedesco imitatore, L* ltaliano mesclifno, Lo Spagmioio lesinante, L' Inglese spenditore. II Francese e delicato, II Tedesco bevitore, L' ltaliano sobrio, Lo Spagnu6Io scarso, L' Inglese prodigo." II Francese e moiteggiatore, II Tedesco aftabile, L' ltaliano piacevole, Lo Spagnuolo grave, L' Inglese xnulabile. IN •398 COSTU'MI DELLE NAZIONI. IN EELLE'ZZA. IN CONSL'GLIO. IN SCRITTU'EA. IN SCIE'NZA'. IN RELIGIONS. IN ARDI'RE. IN SERVITU'. II Francese e bell' uomo, 11 Tedesco non £p cede, L' Italiano ne beilo ne bralto, Lo Spagnuolo ha del' brutto, L' Inglese dell' angelo. II Francese 11011 e lento, 11 Tedesco e piu tardo, L' Italiano e soitiie, Lo Spagnuolo cauteloso, L' Inglese risoluto. 'II Francese parla bene, scrive.miglio, II Tedesco scrive moltd, L' Italiano sodamcnte, Lo Spagnuolo poco, e buono, L' Inglese dottamente. II Francese sa di tutto, II Tedesco k maestro* L' Italiano c ddlto, Lo Spagnu6)o e prof6ndo, L' Inglese iilosofo. II Francese e zelante, II Tedesco religioso, V Italiano cerenioni6so, Lo Spagnuolo superstizi6so, L' Inglese e div6to. II Francese e come un' aquila, II Tedesco come un' orso, L' Italiano come (ma volpe, Lo Spagnuolo come un' elefante, L' Inglese come un bone. II Francese e fedele, II Tedesco buou comp^gno, L' Italiano rispeltoso, Lo Spagnuolo soggetto, logic. schii IN COSTU'MI DELLE NAZIONI. 3f;9' II Franeese e lifeero, II Tedesco e padrone, IN MATRIMO'NiO. L' Italiano carceriere, Lo Spagmidlo e tiraimo, - L' Inglesc servitore. In Francia, son le dame fastose, In Germania, risparmiano,- e sod LE DO'NNE. T **!$*> . . ., < In Itaha, pngionere, e cauive, jn Ispagna, schiave, ed a morose* In Inghiiterra, regine, e virtuose, Diccva Cdrlo-Quinto the parlerebbe. Francese ad un' amico, Tedesco al suo cavallo, IN LINGUA. Italiano alia sua signora, Spaguuolo a Dio, Jugllte agli uccelli, [ 400 ] E P I T E' T T I D E' L L E CITTA PIU PR1NCIPALI DITA'LIA. Roma la Santa. Padoua la D6tta. ; Napoli la Gentile. Bologna la Grassa. Firenze la Bella. Milano la Grande. Genova la Superba. f Ravenna 1' Antica. Venezia la Ricca. I Nomi dtlle Accademie d? Italia. N Ro'ma, Umorista, Lincei, Fantastici, Arcadi. Fire'nze, la Crusca, Immobili, Infocati, Alterati, Rinovati. Bolo'gna, Gelati, la Notte, Ottusi, Oziosi, Ind6miti. Vene'zia, Incogniti, Discordanti, Guss6ni. Pa'jwua, Incogniti, Orditi, Inflammati, Ricovr&ti. Na'poli, Ardenti, Oziosi, Intronati. Gf/noua, Addormentati. Rie'na, Intronati, Fiiomitt, Fisiocritici. Lu'ca, Oscdii, Freddi. Mila'no, Nascosti. Ma'ntova, Invaghiti. Macera'ta, Cahmati. Alessa'ndria^ Imm6bi!i. Anco'na, Caligin6si, Bre'scia, Occfilti. Cese'na, Offuscati. Fabria'no, Disuniti. Fae'nza, Filipp'6ni. Fe'ktvio, Raftrancati, F E R r a' E a , El e va ti , Pa'uma,' Innoniinati. Pavi'a, Assidati. Peru'gia, Insensati, Tr e v i'so, Perseveranti. Vero'na, Filarinonici. Vicf/nza, O limpid. Vite'rbo, Ostinati. UkBl'WO, Assorditi. [ 40L ] A SHORT INTRODUCTION ITALIAN POETRY. In this Treatise we shall consider, I. The Italian Ver- sification. 2. The different Compositions in Verse. 3. The Poetic Licences. I. Of the Italian Versification. THE Italian verse consists of a certain number of syllables, and rhyme. But they have also their blank verse. There are eleven syllables in the heroic verse, which is used in Epic poems, theatrical pieces, sonnets, &c. Non e questa colei, che coil' ardore. Besides the heroic, there are lesser' verses, consisting of eight syllables, as A sfogdr I' antica pena. 0,r of seven, as Amor nelk parole. Or of six, as A'lmo spendor mirdfr. Or of five, as Chi pud mirdrvi. Or of four, as In pid modi. The Italian verse, of whatever number of syllables it consists, has always the accent on the penultima, ex- cept it be what they call versi sdriiccioli, or slippery verses, 402 A SHORT INTRODUCTION verses, which are accented on the antepenultima ; but then they have a syllable more than the ordinary sort of verse. Thus if the ordinary sort of verse has eleven syllables, the sdrucciolo belonging to it lias twelve, as V drco ripiglia il fanciullin di Venere. If the ordinary verse has eight syllables, the sdrucciolo will have nine, and so on. The heroic verse, or that of eleven syllables, is divided into two parts; the place where this division is made, is called the cesura. The cesura is not always equal, that is, the first hemistich or half verse does not always contain the same number of syllables; for this depends on the predominating accent, as the cesura is always at the end of the word on which you find this accent. Now this accent may be either on the fourth, or on the sixth syllable of the verse ; which occasions several sorts of cesuras ; the best are those on the fifth or seventh syllable. On the fifth. Giunger gid pdrmi, e dirlc, o fida Clori. On the seventh. Qudlche nuovo sospiro imparerdi. Whenever a word ends with a vowel, and the next word begins also with a vowel, this admits an elision, as Presso e il di, che cangidto'l destino fio. Sometimes a concurrence of vowels forms but one syllable, whether in the same or in different words, as Disse, e ai vend spiego vele, ed andonne. Diphthongs form but one syllable in the middle of a- verse, and two in the end, as Ed io del mio dolor ministro fui, where io and mio form each but one syllable, and fdi two. Whereas in the following verse, Fdvola fui gran tempo, onde sovente, fui, because it is in the middle of the verse, makes but one syllable ; so in the following verse, Odd'- } l risponder dolce, o Ttrsi mio, mio, because it is at the end of a verse, makes two syl- lables. Tins is to be particularly minded. II. Of to the ITALIAN POETRY. 403 II. Of the Rhyme. The Italian rhyme begins from the vowel of the penul- tima; hence amdnti does not rhyme to dhti, but to sembianti, and so on. The Italians do not rhyme, as we do, in couplets, but make several mixtures of. their rhymes ; and these form their different compositions in verse. III. Of the different compositions in verse. The Italians compose their heroic poems of stanzas of eight verses, which they call octaves. In these the first verse rhymes to the third and fifth, the second to the fourth and sixth, and the seventh to the eighth : as Cinta di vivo fonte, onde discende Onda mormoratrice in suo viaggio,. S' ergeforesia, che del sol. coniende NelV anno drdente ivi V entrdta til rdggio ; Doppo sentier, che s'interseca fende In qudttro parti il belV orror selvdggio, IE, di bell 3 deque crisia/line e cliidre Ha ciascuna net grembo un picciol mare. Chiabrera. There are other sorts of stanzas, called sestine, con- sisting of six verses, the first of which rhymes to the third, the second to the fourth, and the two last to each other; as, Dive che 'I sdcro ed onordto fonte Dove gloria si beve, in gudrdid avete 3 Dal vostro ombroso e soljtdrio monte Un tempo meco afa'nicdr seendete, Un t'empio OV- immortal pdscia s' adori Qtiesta donna de' Gdlii, e dea de' cori. Marino. The Italians have a third manner of disposing their heroic verse, which they call terza rima, or terzetti. They put three verses ia every stanza, the first and third 404 A SHORT INTRODUCTION third rhyme to each other ; the second rhymes to the first and third of the second stanza ; and the second of the second stanza, to the first and third of the third stanza. But at the end of the canto or poem there must be a stanza of four verses, in order that every verse may have its rhyme ; as, Gli dnni son' al volar, si lievi e presti, Ch* alfine dltro non e ch' un volver d' occhi. Questo, che poi vi lascia afflitti e mesti. Pero pr'ia che C ojfesa in noi trabocchi, Annate 'I petto incontro dllafortuna, Che vdno e V aspettdr che } l colpo scocchi. Cosi dicendo, al rdggio de la luna, Che gli occhi miferia, rivclse il visa, Poi saluto le stelle ad una ad una; E lieto se n" ando nel paradiso. Sannazar. There are also ttrza rima in the verse called sdrueeiolo, or slippery ; as Quantunque pico mio si vecchio, e cdrico Di senno, e di pensier, ch'en te si covano, Deh pidngi or meco, e prc-ndi il mio rd?nmarico : Nel mondo oggi gli amid non si trovano, &c. A fourth manner of ranging their heroic verses in Italian, is what they call quarta rima, when the first rhymes to the fourth, and the second, to the third. This is made use of chiefly in elegies. Contra gli assdlti di Nettun spwndnti, Qudndo Austro a sdcgno, ed Aquilone il move ; E contra i Idmpi e } l fulmindr di Giove Ha l' ingi'gno mortdle, onde si vdnti, Ma contra i colpi dellafdlce oscura, Che drma di morte V implacdbil mdno, Invdno ingegno s'affcilka, invdno Stdme di vita contrastdr procura. Chiabrera. Rut the sonnet is the favourite composition of the Italians; it is divided into two quaternarii consisting each to the ITALIAN POETRY. 405 f acli of four verses, and two terzetti, each of three verses. The two quatterndrii are ranged two different ways : the first and most usual is, when the first rhymes to the fourth, fifth, and eighth, and the second to the third, sixth, and seventh. The other, less usual, when the first rhymes to the third, sixth and eighth; the second to the fourth, fifth, and seventh. There are also two different sorts of arrangement, in Tegard to the two terzetti, or the six last verses ; one is to make the three verses of the first terzetto, of three different rhymes ; and the last terzetto answering to those three rhymes in whatever order you have a mind ; as, Solo e pensbso i piil deserti cdmpi Vo misurdndo a pdssi tdrdi e lenti, E'gli occhi pbrto per fuggire inlenti, Dove vestigio umdn V ar na stdmpi. A'ltre schermo non trbvo, eke mi scampi Dal manifesto accbrger de la genti : Perche negli dtti d' allegrezza spenti Difubr si legge, com io dfntro avvdmpi. Si ch'io credit omdi, che mbnti e pibgge, Efidmi e selve sdppian, di che Umpre Sia la mm vita, ch' e celdta altrui. Ma pur s) dspre vie, ne siselvdgge Cercdr non so, ch' amor non venga sempre Ragiondndo con me, ed' io con lui. Petrarch* The other arrangement of the two terzetti, is to mak? the first verse rhyme to the third and fifth, and the second to the fourth and sixth; as, Interditte speranzt, e van desio, Pensitr falldci, ituerie e cieche voglie, Ldgrime triste, e voi sospiri, e dbglie, Date omdi pace al lasso viver mio. jE s' al mio mdl non vdlforza d' oblio; Ne per disdegno it nbdo si discwglie ; Prenda mortc di me V uliime spoglie, Pur ch' dbbia fin mio stato a verba e rio, U'sin le stelle, e I ciel tutte lor prbue ; Che a quel ch' io senio, mi parr anno un giubco; S Dm 406 A SHORT INTRODUCTION Da si profonda parte il dubl si moue y Gatia amor 7 drco, e le saetie, t 'Ifbco : Drizza il tuo ingegno, e le tueforze alt rove ; Che nova pidga in me non ha put loco, Sannazar. In the two preceding sonnets the two quaternarii are ranged alike, that is, the first verse rhymes to the fointh, fifth, and eight. We shall give here an instance of the other sort of quaternarii, where the first verse rhymes to the third, sixth and eighth; the second to the fourth, fifth, and seventh. Se lamentdr augelli, a vtrdi frbnde Mover soavemente all' aha estiva, rbco mormordr di lucid' bnde S' ode d } unafiorxta, efresca riva ; La v io soggia dl amor pensoso, e scrim, Lei, che 7 del ne mostro, terra n' aseonde ; Veggio,td odo, ed intendo: ch' dncor viva Di si lontdno a sbspir miti rispbnde. Deh ! perch? inndnzi tempo ti consume ? Mi dice con pietdte : a che pur vtrsi Ddgli bcchi tristi un dolorosa Jiume? Di me non pidnger tu, ch' i miti di fersi Morendo, eterni ; e nelV ettrno lume, Qudndo mostrdidi chiuder gli bcchi, aphsi. Petrarch. There are likewise other compositions, consisting of an intermixture of larger and smaller verses, which may be infinitely varied ; some stanzas consisting of twelve or thirteen, some of seven, eight, or eleven verses. The most common are of twelve, which frequently consist of two sorts of verses, viz. those of eleven or seven syllables. Sulpunio di mia mbrte, O'cchi, d'nn guar do non mi fidte avdri, Esia di quel, che sono a vbi men cdri. Con sollecito studio amvr non Urga 1 rdi di sua beltdte, Ecol to the ITALIAN POETRY. 407 JE col riso, e col gibco, e col diletto, Ne di quella dolcezza egli V asptrga, Nit di quella pietdte, Che altrui ragibna i freddi cot nel petto; Solo un giro negletto Nefian morendo i miei sospir amdri. Chiabr. There is also a singular beauty in stanzas of seven, eight, or eleven verses ; examples of which may be seen in the Lyric Poets. Chiabrera particularly abounds with great variety in his canzonette ; as, O'cchi armdti di splendbre, i O'nde amove Per bedrle drde le genti, Se la gioia del mirdrvi Giitsto pdrvi (lie costdr dSbba tormenti. Or, Pokhv amor fra /' erbe e iJiSri Tra dolcezze, e lieti cdnti, Per temprdr del cor gli ardhi Scorti avea gli accesi amdnti Ne' sembidnti; J J to diich' H con lor sasside Sail' erfa'ifa, e scherzo, e rule. Or, Core di si tee alphtra, Ftrvido ad innasprir gli altrui tormenti, Con nuova crudeltdte 1 Qmdi stanza e mia destra In sulla lira ad iterdr gli accenti U'si a sveglidr pietdte ; IStfemminil beltdte ; Spzrapregio sembidnte en Elicona, Se di qubi vdghijier tesse corona Per tuo gentil valbre. S 2 Or, 408 A SHORT INTRODUCTION Or, Vdni desiri Co' rei martiri Non piii ci stieno intbrno ; Che pompa, ed ostro ? H viver nostro Pubssi chiamdr un gibrno Cingiti Clbri di bel mirto adbrno E di rubini Cospergi i crini Via piu eke lucid' bro, a mirdr cdri. Or, Qudndo V Alia in oriente, & dlmo sol s'apprfota a scbrgere ? Giu dal mar la veggidm sorgere, Cinta in gonna rilucdnte, O'nde Idmpi si diffondono, Che le stelle in cielo ascdndono. The Italians are famous for their madrigals, which are a kind of epigram, in one stanza, composed of all sorts of verses, long and short, according to the fancy of the poet. They have also their vtrso sciblto, or blank verse, of eleven syllables, where the measure is observed without time, as the following : Egia y la D?o mercd Idsciano i Ptni La lor fiertzza ; e la regina in prima S' imbeve d'un affetto e d' una mtnte. Annibal Caro. This verse is used in tragedy, and often in Epic poems. IV. Of the Poetic Licences. The Italians use very great liberties in their versifica- tion, not only as their poets adopt several words that are n ot allowed in prose; but likewise as they make such frequent to the ITALIAN POETRY. 409 frequent use^of elisions ; these elisions are introduced for the sake of variety, but are never suffered at the end of a verse. But they not only drop the final vowel before words beginning with a vowel, but even before those that com- mence with a consonant, as fier' draconi, for fieri ; and sometimes they drop the consonant that precedes this final vowel, animai for animdli. They likewise lengthen a great many words that have a grave accent on the final, by adding an cor an o, as fue ioxfuyfee for/e, poteo for pote. It is customary with them also to have recourse to contractions and syncopes, as porre for ponere, pbnno for possono, vo* for vdgliono, ii for ove, and others, which may be learnt by the use of poets. Some words they write in a particular manner, as sui for suoi, nui for noi,ferdte for ferite,firo for/wro, spene for sptme, &c. In short, there is hardly a language, not even excepting the Greek, that uses more figures or changes of words in their poetry, than the Italian. [ 4io ] A COLLECTION OP BEAU T I FUL PASSAGES From the most celebrated Italian POETS. Per edminciaruri impresa. Guarini nel Pastor Fido. GIJI ben comincia, ha la meta deli' opra, Ne si comincia ben, se non-dal cielo. Per persuader € ad amare. Torqudto Tasso nell" Aminta, atto 1. scina t. FO'RSE se tu gustassi una solvolta La millessima parte delle gioie Che gusta un cor' amato riamando. Diresti ripentita sospirando : Perduto e tutto '1 tempo Che in ama> non si spende. O mia fuggita etade ; Qua nte veclove notti, Quanti di solitarj Ho consumato indarno, Che si poteano impiegaYin quest' fiso ! II qual piu replicato e piu scave. Cangia, cangia consiglio, Pazzarella che sei, Che'l pentirsi da sezzo nulla giova. ldem> atto primo, scena prima. ~ MOSTRO'MMI l'ombra d'una breve n6tte, AUora quel che'l lungo corso, e'l lurae Di mille gi6rni non m'avea mostrato. D*un f ONCE'TTI POET I CI. 411 II D'nn Medico, lO batezzo o!a maligno, ? gni mal che non inteudo, La moneta in tanto prendo: E depoi tra me sogghigno ; Che vi sia geute si pazza, Che stipendii chi 1' amazza? Soliloquio cP Amarilli, nel Pastor Fido di Guarinu O MIRTI'LLO, Mirtillo, aninia mia, Se vedesti qui dentro, Come sta il cor di questa Che chiami crudelissima AmarilH ; So ben, che tu di lei Quella pieta che da lei chiedi, avrSsti. O aninie in amor troppo infelice 1 Che giova a te, cor mio, l'esser amato I Che giova a me l'aver si caro amante f Perche crudo destino, Ne disunisci tu, s'arnor ne stringe? E tu perche ne stringi, Se ne p&rte il destin, perfido amore ? O fortunate voi fere selvagge, A cuii' alma natura Non die legge in amar se non d'amore, Legge umana inumana, Che dai per pena dell' amar la morte ! " Se'l peccar e si dolce, * c El non peccar si necessario, o troppo " Imperfetta natura, " Che repugni alia legge! " O troppo dura legge, " Che la natura offende !" Ma che? poco ama altrui, chi'l m6rirteme, Piacesse pur al ciel, Mirtillo mio, Che sol pena al peccar fosse la m6rte ! Santissima onesta, che solo sei D'alrna ben nata inviolabii Ntime : Quest' amorosa voglio, s4 Che 412 CONCETTI POE'TICL Che sven&ta ho col ferro Del tuo santo rigor, qual innocent* Vittima a te consacro. E tu, MirtUlo, anima mia, perdona A chi t'e cruda sol dove pietosa E'sser non pud : perd6ria a questa sola Ne' detti, e nel sembiante Rigida tua nemica ; ma nel core Pietosissima amante. E se pur hai desio di vendicdrti, Deh ! qual vendetta aver puoi tu maggiort Del tuo pr6prio dolore ; Che se tu se'l cor mio, Come s& pur malgrado Del cielo, e della terra, Qual6r piaugi, e sospiri. Quelle lagrime tue sono il mio sangue, Que sospiri, il mio spirto, e quelle pene* E quel dolor che senti, Son miei, non tuoi tormenti, Le tre sorti (P Orologi additan la m6rit* OMBRE, rote, ed arene a passi lenti, Atre, dure, minute, il di togliete : In linee, in terri, in atomi cadenti, I moti, i c6rsi, I precipizj avete, Ombre letali al viver mio nascenti, R6te crudeli, che l'eta struggete : Arene gravi a' miseri viventi ; La pena, il crucio, e'l peso mio voi siete, Triplice m6rte occulta, edace, e trita, Che presta ogn'ora, manifestate, ingorda, Lacci, stracci, perigli alia mia vita. Qui m'intima l'orrore un' ombra s6rda : Cieca la rota il mio pass£ggio addita : E p6ca polve il mio morir raccorda. Dun CONCETTI POETICI. 413 IX un che patisce di pietra. SON nelle reni mie dunque format! I duri sassi, alia mia morte infesti ; Che fansi ogn'or piu gravi, e piu molesti, Chan de' miei giorni termini segnati. S'altri con bianche pietre i di beati Nota, io noto con queste i dl funesti : Servono i sassi a fabricar, ma questi A distrugger mia fabrica son nati. Ahi che pos9o chiamar mia sorte dura ! S' ella di pietre ha preso a lapidarmi Nelle parti di dentro la natura. So che su queste pietre arruota l'armi La morte ; e ch'a formar la sepoltura, Nelle viscere mie nascono i marmi. Descritione (Tun Cristo logato alia Colonna. Madrigale. DI marmo e la Colonna, Di marmo son gli empj ministri, e rei { Etu pure, signor di marmo sei! Marmo ella h per natura, Marmo quei per durezza, Tu marmo, per costanza e per fortezza, Ed io, che di pietade, e di cordoglio Spettator ne rimaugo, Marmo son, se non p&ngo. O'cchi BZlli. Guarini ne' suoi Madrigali* 0'CCHI,stellemortali, Ministri de' miei mali. Che'n sogno anco mostrdte, Che'l mio morir bram&te, Se chiiisi m' uccidete. Aperti che farete 1 * 5 Amr're* 414 CONCETTI P OFT I CI. Amove. Ligi AlniandL CHI vuol dar legge all' amoroso nudo. Non sa ben qual sia la sua natiira. L'un d'una cosa, ed io dell' altra godo, Chi ama lo spirto, e chi sol la figura. Chi diletta la vista, chi Y udire, Chi sfoga ogni desir solo in servire. Diibbj Amorosi. Petrarca. S'AMOR non e, che dunque e quel ch'io senlo ? Ma s' egli e Am or. per Dio che cosa £ quale? Se buona, ond' e Y e$etto aspro, mortale 1 S'& ria, onde si dolce ogni.tormento? S'a raia voglia ardo, ond'e'l pianto, e'i lamento. S'a mal mio grado, ii latnentar che vale ? O viva morte ! o diLettoso male! Come puoi tant' in me, s'io no'l consentot E s'io'l consento, a gran torto mi doglio. Fra si contrarj venti, in frale barca Mitrovo in alto mar senza governo ; Si lieve di saper, d 'error si carca, Chi medesmo non so, 'quei ch'io mi vcglio? E tremo' a mezza state, ardeiido il verno. Amdnte alV amdta. Guarini, FELICETche Vi mira, Ma piu felice ehi per v6i sospira. Felicissimo poi. Ben' ebbe arnica stellaj Chi per donna st bella, Pud far content© in un l'6cchk>, e'i dcsio E sicuro pud dir, quel cor' e nyo. Am ante Perfido. Acihsio. L'AMANTE per aver quel che desia, Senva guardar che Dio tutt ode, e vede., Ayviluppa CONCE'TTI POE'TICI. 415 Awiluppa plomesse, giurain6nti ; Che tutti spikgon poi per l'aria i v£nti. Amante Timido. Tasso. El che modesto e si, com' essa e bella, Brama assai, poco spera, e nulla chiede, Ne sa scoprirsi o non ardisce : ed ella O lo sprezza, o no '1 vede, o non s'avvede, Cosi sin' ora il misero ha servito, O Hon visto, o mal noto, o mal gradito. Marini nella Canzone sulV Tdalo, Tre'ma parlando, e i detti Fa tronchi, ed imperfetti ; Impallidisce, e poi rivien vermiglio, E mirando il suo Sole, abassa il ciglio. Donna Timida. Ariosto. Con cor tremante, e con tremante piede Fugge la tapiuella, e non sa dove ; In cio ch'intorno ascolta, in cid che vede, Vede di nuovo orror, sembianze nove, Lieve arboscel, cui debil aura siede. Lteve foglia che cade, o die si scote, Di terror doppio, il dubbio cor percote. Giiarini nel Pastor Fido. Atto 1. scena 4. La misera tacendo Per soverchio desio tutta si striigge, Cosi perde belta, se'l foco dura, E perdendo stagion, perde ventura. Amdnte assomigliato ad un Orologio. PetrdccL Orolo'gio son* io, I pensier son le rote, E la squilla e il mio core. S § 0V€ 41(S CONCF/TTI POE'TICL Ove lasso percote L'6re, e i minuti col suo strai' amore : E la vostra bellezza ch'io sospiro, E il caro centro, intorno a cui m'aggiro. Amore assomiglidto all A'pe. Tdsso nelV Aminta. Pi'cciola e '1 A'pe, e fa col picciol morso Pur gravi, e pur moleste le ferite. Ma qual cosa e pin picciola d'ani6re, Se in ogni breve spazio entra, e s'asconde In ogni breve spazio : or sotto all' 6 m bra Delle palpebre, or tra minuti rivi D'un biondo crine, or dentro le pozzette, Che forma un dolce riso in bella guancia. E pur fa tanto grandi, e si mortali, O cosi immedicabili le piaghe. Dmina com" e fdtta. Tasso. Or non sai tu com' e fatla la donna I Fugge, e fuggendo vuol, ch' altri giunga. Niega, e negando vuol, ch'altri si toglia. Pugna, e pugnando vuol, ch' altri la vinca. Iperbole. Se gli alberi del mondo fosser penne, II cielo fosse carta, il mare inchiostro, Non basterjan descrivere la minima Parte dell* v6stre perfezionu Se tante Imgue avessi, e tante voci> Quant' occhi il cielo, e quante arene il mare, Perderian tutte il suono, e la favella, Kel dire a pien le vostre lodi immense. Guarani. Guarini nel Pastor Fido. Atto 5. scena 2. Se le parole mie Fosser anime tutte £ tutte CONCETTI POE'TICl. 417 E tutte al vostro onore Oggl le consecrassi, alle dovute Grazie, non basterian di tanto d6no. Donna Picciola. Tasso. PICCIOLETTA Isabella, Picciola, o grande nominar degg'io La tua belt& ch'fiamma il mio desio 1 Che picciola la fronte, ii crin, le ciglia, Piccioletta hai la man, la bocca, il piede, I passi, le fattezze, i bei semblanti, Gli abiti, il velo, i guanti, La cameretta, il letticiuol, la sede ; Ma pur gran maraviglia, Fra tante cose picciole si vede, Che quel, che rimirando io sento al core, Non epicciolo ardore. Descri%ione d'un Cespuglio. Ariosto. F/CCO n'ou lungi un bel Cespuglio vede, Di spin fioriti, e di vermiglie rose, Che de le liquid' onde a specchio siede, Chiuso dal sol fral'alte quercie ombrose : Cosi voto nel mezzo, che concede Fresca stanza fra I ombre piu nascose, E la f6glia coi rami in modo e mista, Che'l sol non v entra, non che minor vista, Dentro letto vi fan tenere erbette, Ch'invitano a posar chi s'appresenta. Descrizione dell' E'co. UNA Ninfa ch'al dir d'altrui risponde, Ma comminciare a dir ella non puote, Replica il tutto, ma il parlar confonde, E lascia solo uudir l'ultime note ; Che mentre l'uno e Taltro dir, attende, II parlar, che precede non s'intende* Costei 418 CONCETTI POETICI. Costei ch' Eco chiamossi, e chiama ancora,, Che parla sol dall' altrui dir commossa. Voce sola non fix nuda com ora ; Ma forma e quantita di came, e d'ossa, Benche comor quell' infelice aI16ra, Desser prima ai parlar non avea possa ; L'ira il principio al dir tolto le avea, De la sempre gelosa, e mesta Dea. Bacio di vecchio sdentato. ATarini, I SUOI cauuti amori, Vecchio sdentato a la sua Ciizia avante, Cantava Alcou pargoleggiando amante ; L'udi la Ninfa; e'n lui volto il bel viso, Disse con un sorriso : Ben' ate si convieu di Cigno il vanto, Poi c'hai di Cigno il nei, di cigno il canto. Or de l'alta Armenia,, lo vo' che questo bacio il premio sia, Che se mi baei, i baci Temer non deggio almen, che sien mordaci. Semplicitaingrannata. Ario'sto, canto 32. stanza 39. FAC'IL ti fuingnnnar una Donzella, Di cili tu in signer eri idolo, e Nume ; A cui potevi far con tue parole Creder, che fosse scmo, e freddo il sole. In lode delle Donne, Ariosto, LE Donne antiche hanno mirabil cose Fatto neTarmi e ne' le sacremuse; E di lor' opre belle, e gloriose, Gran lunie in tutto il mondo si difm.se. Arpalice, e Camilla eon famose, Perche in battaglia erano esperte, ed use : Sa so, e Corinna, perche furon dotte, Splendono illustri, e # mai non veggon notte. Le Donne son veimte in excellenza Di ciascun' arte ov'ha'nno posto cura, E qua- CONCET'TI POE'TICI. 419 E qualunque a l'istoria abbia avvertenza, Ne sente ancor la fama non oscura. Se'l mondo n'e gran tempo stato senza, Non pei 6 sempre il mal influsso dura, E forse ascosi han lor debiti onori L'invidia, o ii non saper degli scrfttoii. Ben mi par di veder, ch'al seeol nostro Tanta virtu fra belle donne emerga, Che pud dar opra a. carte, ed all' inchiostro, Perche ne' futuri anni si disperga ; Eperche odiose iingue, ilmai dir vostro Con vostra eterna infamia si sonimerga, E le lor lodi apparirauno in guisa, Che di gran liinga avanzeran Marfisa. In lode delta Liberia pastorale. Guarinl. CA'RE selve beate, E voi solinghi, e tacit urni orrori, Di riposo, e di pace alberghi veri \ O quante voleniieri A rivedervi io torno ! e se le stelk M' avesser daio m sorte Di viver' a me stessa, e di far vita Conforme a le mie voglie, I' gia co' canipi Elisi, Fortunato giardiu de' Seniidei, La vostra ombra gentil non cangerei " Che se ben dritto mi 10 " Questi beni mortali, " Altro non son che niali. " Men, n'ha, chi piu possede, " Ricchezze no, ma lacci " De laltrui libertate. " Che val ne' piu verdi anni " Titolo di bellezza, " O fama d'onestate, ff E'n mortal sangue nobilta celeste ! " Tante grazie del cielo, e de la terra ! " Qui larghi, e lieti campi, " Ela 2 10 CONCETTI POE'TICI. " E la feiici piagge, '* Fecondi paschi, e piu fecondo armento, " Sen tanti benijl cor non e content© ?" Fel ce pastorella, Cui cinge a pena il fianco Povera si, ma schietta, E Candida gonnella ; Iticca sol di se stessa, E delle grazie di natura adorna Che'n dolce povert'ade Ne poverla conosce, rie i disagi De le ricchezze sente ; Ma tuito quel possede, Per cui desio d'aver non la tornienta, Nuda si, ma contenta. Co' doui di natura, I doui di natura anco nudriva, Col latte, il latte avviva, E col dolce del' Api. Condisce il mel de le natie dolcezze. Quel fonte, ond' ella beve, Quel solo anco la bagna, e la consigiia ; Paga lei, pago il mondo. Per lei di nembi il ciel s'oscura indarno, E di grandine s'arma. Che la sua poverta nulla paventa : Nuda si, ma contenta. Solo una dolce, e d ogni affanno sgombra Cura le sta nel core. Pasce leverdi erbette. La greggia a lei commessa, ed ella pasce De' suoi begli occhi il pastorelk) amaote ; Non qual le destinaro O gli uomini, o le steile, Ma quel le diede amore. E tra l'ombrose piante, D'un favorito lor Mireto adorno Vaggheggiata il vagheggia ; ne per lui Sente foco d'amor, clie non gli scopra. Ne' della scopre ardor, ch' egli non senta : Nuda si, ma contenta. O vera CONCE'TTI POE'TICI. 421 O vera vita, che non sa che sia, Morire innanzi morte. Potess'io pur cangiar teco mia sorte ! Amante irresoluto. Canzonetta pastorale* MIO core, die faremo ? Odieremo? ameremo? Per lo dubbioso calle Dell' amorosa valle. Andiamo, andiam, mio core, Dove consiglia amore. Vaga ; nol niego ; e bella E' la mia pastorella. Ma non meno e crudele ; E'mpia, ingrata, infedele, Odiamo: odiam, mio core ; Che lo consiglia amore.. E' nol niego ; crudele : Empia; kigrata; infedele, Ma non men vaga e ttella E'la mia pastorella ; A mia in o, amiam, mio core; Che lo consiglia amore. Sopra tutte e vezzosa ; Piu d'ogn' altra e festosa .* Ha modi amorosetti ; Costumi ha leggiadretti ; Amiamo, amiam, cio core ; CHe lo comanda amore. Stanze amorose. AMIA'M, o bella 161a, Amiam : che 'I tempo vola, Veloce piu che dardo, Che giugne il lieve pardo. Non e, non e immortale, Ma fior cadiito e frale, Quel fior di giovenezza, La vostra alta bellezza. Qua) 422 CONCETTI FOE'TICI. Qual la sera nelF acque. II gran pianeta giacque ; Tale, o piu vago ancora, Risorge coll' Aurora. D'ombrosa e verde fogiia La selva i'l verno spoglia : E la stagion novella Gliela rende piu bella. Dell' eta nostra il verde Mai piu nou si rinverde ; La morte a nostra luce Tenebre eterne adduce. E la giu neir inferno, In oblio sempiterno, In sempiterno or? ore, Non si pari a d 'am ore. Ah dunque mentre lice, Mentre non si disdice ; Mentre ch' ella e vezzosa, Cogliam d'amor la rosa. Delia eanuta schiera A gli arnanti severa, Sprezzin vani rom6ri Nostri aniorosi cori. , Amiam ; o bella 161a, Armani : che'l tempo vola, Veloce piuchedardo. Che giugne il lieve pardo. Capriccio amoroso. CHI pud mirarvi E non amai vi 1 « Jer vi mirai, Vi contemplai. Si, da dovvero, Son prigioniero, Delia Gentile, Bella Isifile Ma in ogni clima, Via piu si stima, Del conquistare II conservare. E pr ende in van© Leggiadra ma no, Se di tenere Non ha potere. Dunque CONCETTI POETIC I. 423 Dunque sentite. Se lo gradite, Qual vo' che sia. La donna mia. Sia graziosa, Vaga e vezzosa ? E sia modesta, Non perd mesta. Non sia ritrosa, Non isdegnosa Ma ritiosetta, E sdegnosetta. Picciol raartire Cresce il desire ; Ne il dolce e caro Senza l'amiro. Non sia crudele, Non infedele : E non si' ingrata, Ne dispietata. Ch'io sono ardente, Ch'io son fervente, Tiitto amoroso, Affettuoso. E'l Dio d'amore Non ha amatore Di me piu degno. Nel suo bel regno. Pietosamente, Ma vagamente, So lacrimare, E sospirare. Delle mie amatfe Nelle brigate In dolci modi Canto le lodi. In rima e'n verso Per T universo Delia mia dama Spargo la fama. Nol niego, amante Sono incostantc; E son geloso, E capriccioso. Ne per rivale, Giove immortal« Re degli Dei lo soffrirei. E'cco, ben, mio, Qual mi son'io, Qual voglio sia La donna mia. [ 424 j A Collection of Superscriptions of Italian Letters. TT is not my design to instruct you in the epistolary art, for in this every man follows his fancy, but to make you acquainted with titles and honourable appellations given to persons with whom we preserve an epistolary correspondence. But, since they are written with an abbreviation, I have here arranged them in an alphabe- tical order, that they may the more easily be understood. Affme, Affezionatissimo. Ajfettuo™- Affettuosissimo. Ajftttuo*' Affettuosissimamente. Jfto. Affezionato. A. Altezza. Amatmo. Amatissimo. \jima. V. A. Ser»"> Vostra Altezza Serenis- V. A. R. Vostra Altezza RedU. Beat™. Beatitudine. V. B. Vostra Beatitudine, Beat m0 . Beatissimo. Btat mo . P" . Beatissimo Padre, Car ™ . Carissimo. Car •>»«. Carts sima. Col™ . Colendissimo. Crist™. Cristianissimo. Crist ma > Cristianissima. Divot™- Divotissimo. Ecct«> EccelUnte. Ecc«* Of Titles and Distinctions, fyc, 4%a EccmO' Eccellentissimo. Ecc za - Eccellenza, V. Ecc*°- Vostra Eccellenza. £ m mo. Eminent! ssimo. Em za - Eminenza. V. Em™> Vostra Eminenza. Hire. Illitstre. Illma, Illustrissima. III™. Illustrissimo. M. M'd. Maesta. S.M. Sua Maesta. M. Crist*™* Maesta Cristianissima. Mag co > Mto. Magmfico. M'olto. Nro. N'ostro. Obbligmo- nor d°- Obligatissimo, Onortindo. Ossno- Osservandissimo. Pta. Patermta. V.P. Vostra Patermta. V. P. Rev**- Vostra PaternitaReveren- Pari™. Particolartssimo. Pre. Padre. Prone. Padrone. Prona. Padre na. Rev d <>- Reverendo. Rev mo > Reverendissimo. Rev ma ' Reverendissima. R lv mo. Reventissimo. Sia. Santita. P. Sta. Vostra Santita. Sant mo - Santiss'uno. Sanlmi. Saittissimi. Sermo. Serenissimo, Sergio. Serenita. Seryrt. Seroitore. S r <- Signs re, m. sing. Sigre. 426 Of Titles and Distinctions, #. Umilissimo servitore. Umilissimo ed obbligatisskao To a prior, rector, guardian, or superior, Al molto revwendo padre e prone osservandissimo it padre N. priore, rettdre, or guardidno, &c. d' PP. N. In the beginning. Molto reverendo e prone osservandissimo. At the conclusion. E le bdcio wnilissimamente le mdni. Di Parigi, i 8 Agosta, 1807. Di V. P. molto rev. Umilissimo eel obbligatissimo senritore. To a friar-priest. Al molto reverendo padre, or Al molto rev 4 ' padre c pfSne vsstrvandissimo il padre N. del 1 ordine di sari N* In the beginning. Molto reverendo padre. At the conclusion. £ per fine a V. P. bdcio con ogni qffctto le mdni t e mi racomdndo alle sue orazioni. Di V, P. molto rev, Umilissimo, ed obbligatissimo servitore. To a lay -brother. Al molto onordndofratello in Cristofra Agostino N. dell* vfdine di N. or nel convento de' PP. di, &c. In the beginning, Molto onordndofratello in Cristo. t At 430 Of Titles and Distinction >, ffc. At the conclusion. E per fine vi bdcio qfcttuosissimamente le ?ndni. Di Pa~ rigi, il 9 di Settembre, 1807. Motto onordndo fratello in Cristo. Divotissimo ed aflettuosissimo servitore. To the emperor. Alia sacra Cesdrea ed Imperidle Maestd delV imperatore Sacra Cesdrea 7?iaestd. In the discourse, Vostra maestd. At the end, E per fine a V. M. bdcio wnilissimamente le ?t;dni, pregdndo Dio, die la colmi di tutte le maggiori e piu desiderdbili felicitd. Di Parigi, i 10 Luglio, 1.807. Di V. Cesdrea Maestd. Umilissimo, divotissimo, ed ossequiosissimo servitore. To the King of France. Alia sacra real Maestd del Re Christianissimo. Or, Alia Christianissima Maestd del Re di Frdncia. Or, Alia sacra Maestd del Re di Frdncia. In the discourse, Vostra maestd, or Sire. At the end, Colmi Dio N. sign ore le felicitd presente della maestd vostra, d'dltre nuove, o piu grdndi nelV av- renire. Di Parigi, gli 11 Novembre, 1807. Or, Conservi Iddio lungamente V. M. a quelle prosper itd, che sotto il felicissimo, e gloriosissimo suo governo ellafdgo- dere a y suoi popoli. D. V. M. Crist. Umilissimo, divotissimo, ed ossequiosissimo servitore. To the King of Spain. Alia sacra Cattolica real Maestd del Re di Spdgna. SI'RE, E per fine prego Iddio ch' a V. M. conceda ogni grandezza, e felicitd maggiore. Di Parigi, i 2 Decembre, 1807. Di V. M. Cattolica. ' Umilissimo, divotissimo, ed ossequiosissimo servitore. To Of Titles and Distinctions, fyc, 43 1 To the king of Poland. Alia sacra real M. Ortodossa del Re di Polonia. SIRE, Prospcri Iddio lungammte la maestd vostra, ed a ?nisura dcW accrescimento degli dnni, accresca in lei la felicitd de* successi. Di Parigi, i 5 Mdrzo, 1807. Di vostra 3Iaestd Ortodossa. Urnilissimo, divotissimo, ed obbligatissimo servitore. To other kings. Alia sacra real Maestd del Re di Portogdllo, d y bighil- terra, di Suezia, di Danimdrca, di Sardegna, di Prussia. In the beginning, Sl'RE. At the end, as above. , To the dauphin of France. Al serenlssimo principe Delfino di Frdncia. At the beginning, Serenissi7/io principe. In the middle, V.A.R. At the end, Conservi Iddio per lunghissimo tempo quel bene alia Frdncia, die le ha ddto in ddr la serenissima ui lei persona, a cud con profonda rivwenza m inchino. Di Parigi, gli, 8 Mdggio, 1807. Serenissimo principe, or di F. A. R. Umilissimo, divotissimo, ed obbligatissimo servitore. To the duke of Burgundy. To the count of . Provencei AW altezza rcdle del sign ore ducadi ' Borgdgna, di Berri, Set.. In the body of the letter, V* A. R, At the end,, prosperi Iddio lungammte V Altezza V. : R. e le conceda quel pieno celmo di grdzie the meritano le redli virtu che'l mondo ammira nella serenissima sua persona. In the end, a V. A. R. bdcio umilissimamente le mam. Di Pa- rigi, Hi Giugno, i807 . Di V. A. R. Umilissimo^ divotissimo, ed obbligatissiiao servitore. T2 To 432 Of Titles akd Distinctions, fye* To a prince of the blood. AlV Altezza Serenissima del signor duca d* Orleans. AlV Altezza Serenissima del sig?wr principe di Conde. Or, Al serenissimo principe sign ore, e prone mio colendissimo, il principe di Conti. One may also put, AlV Altezza serenissima, &c. as above. To the doge of Venice. Al serenissimo principe N.N. Dogedi Venezia. Serenissima principe. E con profondo inchbw le bacio riverentemente le mani* J)i Parigi 8 d\ Agosto, 1807. Di V. Serenitu. UmUissimo* divotissimo, ed obbligatissimo servitore. To sovereign ..dukes. AlV Altezza serenissima del Duca di Parma. di Modena, di Mdntova. In the beginning* Serenissimo principe, or S. A. At the conclusion. JE per fine a V. A. serenissima bacio rispettudsissimamentc le mani, pregdndole dal cielo ogni.vera contentezza. Di Parigi, &c. To the grand master of Malta. AlV eminentissimo sign4re, e prone mio colendissimo il Gran Maestro delta religwne di Malta, In the beginning. Eniinentissjmo signore, e prone mio colendissi?)io. A{ the conclusion. E per fine a V. eminenza prego dal cielo ognipiii desiderata prosperitd, e le bacio riverentemente le mdni. Di Parigi, li, &c. Di V. eminenza* I shall Of Titles and Distinctions, fye* 4S$ 1 shall put the conclusion of letters no more ; you will- find a number of them at the end of this collection. To secular electors of the empire. All 1 Altezza serenissima Elcttordle del signor Daca di Baviera, principe Elettordle del sdcro Romano Imperio. To ecclesiastical electors of the empire. AW uillezza serenissfma Elettordle del signor Arcivescoio di Col on ia, principe Elettordle del sdao Romano Imperio. To dukes who are not sovereigns. AW iUustrksimoed eccellentksimo signore e prone colendissuno il signor duca, fyc. To ambassadors. AW 'illustrissimo edeccellentissimo signer pn drone colendissimo ii signer N, wnbasciudore di sua Maesid Christianissima, To aft carl, a marquis, or baron. 4W illustrissimo signore prone mio colendissimo il signore C6nte ft. Murck&se X. Bardne N. To a governor, If he is an ecclesiastic, as those of Italy. Alt' ittu$trissimo:e revcrendksimo slgn6re prone colendissimo monsignor jV. governatore di Roma, If he is not an ecclesiastic. AlV illustrissiftto signore e prone mio colendissimo il signore JV* governatore di JV. To a privy- counsellor. AlV illustrissimo signore e prone mio colendissimo il signore N. del consiglio di stdto di sua Macstd Christianissima. In the beginning. Illustrissimo signore prone mio colendissimo. At the end. m v. s. jf* T3 To 434 Of Titles and Distinctions, §c. To a president. Air illustrissimo signore e prone cokndissimo il signor N. Prmdente nella corte sovrdna del parlamento di Parigi. To a master of requests. All' illustrissimo siguore e padrone cokndissimo il signer N. Maestro delle suppliche, Consigiiere di S. M. Christ ianissima. To an ecclesiastical counsellor in parliament. AiT illustrissimo e reverendissimo signor padrone mio cofen- dissimo il signor abba tic N. Consigiiere nella corte sovrdna del parlamento di Parigi. To a counsellor of parliament. AW illustrissimo signore padrone mio coltndissimo il signor N. Consigiiere -nella cd te sovrdna del paiiamento di Parigi. To a counsellor of the court of aids. Alt' illustrissimo signore padrone mio colendissimo il signor JV. Consigiiere nella camera de' sussidj di Parigi. To a doctor of law or physic. Al molto illustre ed eccellendssimo signore N. dottore di Ugge, tiT dottor medico in Parigi. To a professor, a language- master. ■ Al molto- illustre, e molto ecccilente signore il signore N. leitore di Teologia ncl collegio di N. If he is aianguage-master, Maesto insigne nella lingua Italidna, virtuojo di liuto, di chitdrra, di scherma, maestro a balldre. To an advocate, an attorney. Al molto illustre signore padrone colendissimo il signore jV. ■Az-ocato, or Ptocuratorc del parlamento di Parigi. They "write, al mdlto illustre signore padrone osservan- dissimo, or singolarissimo, to a gentleman, a tradesman, a secretary $ DIFFERENT FORMS, -&c. 435 secretary ; but if he is a secretary to prince, they write aW illuatrissimo, as to a resident and persons of distinction. To a tradesman. AP motto magni/tCQ signore, il signer N. scut ore, foiiia.ro, /riacel/dro, &c. Or, Al mdlto magnifico maestro Francesco N. tinazzdjQ, ?narescdlco, sartore, &c. Bat it is better to write, alV illustre signor ?nio, &c. because the title of magnifico is become obsolete. To a waiting-man, or any other domestic. A Francesco N. Ortoldno cite Dio gudrdi. At the end, E sard sanpre disposiissimo a compiaccrvi. Different Forms of concluding Letters. /~\Bserve that these are the Forms used by the old writers, and such as in epistolary collections occur most frequently. £ per fine V. S. or a V. S. illustrissi?na, or a V. eccellenza, or V. A, or a V. Eminenza, or V. maestd bdcio umi- lissimamente le mdni. E qui per fine le bdcio con ogni piu riverente affitto le man?'. E te bdcio affeUuosamente le mdnL E bacidndole affettuosissimamente le mdni, le prego ogni bine, e contento. E per fine le bdecio con ogni maggior riverenza le mdni. E per fine a V. S. bdcio con ogni qffetto le ?ndni. E per fine a V. S. bdcio le mdni e le prego ogni teiv bene. E per fine k bdcio riverentemente le mani, E le bdcio wniUssimainente le mdni, E per fine a V. S. bdcio k mdni. E per fine a V. S. bdcio milk volte le mdni, E le bdcio le mdni. E con qucsto a V. & bdcio le mdni, eel al signor Pietro suo zir>> E con pari, e congiuntissimo affetto k bacidmo, cd atutti di edsa sua, le mdni. T 4 Man- 436 DIFFERENT FORMS, &c. Mimtmgami V. & il luogo nella grdzia ch'io le bdcio' k mdni di atore. E le bdcio k 711dm, salutdndo la signora sua consorte. Eper fine nella buona grdzia di V. S. ?ni raccomdndo, e le bdcio le mdni. E mi vi raccomdndo cordialmente. E per fine a V. P. mi raccomdndo pregdndola aver memoria di me ne y suoi sdnti sacrifizj. E bacidndok le mdni, alle sue orazionimi raccomdndo. Ed a V. S. bdcio wnilissimammte le mdni come ancorafo al signor Antonio. E per fine saluto V. S. ed ella si compiaccrd, a nome viio- bacidre le jnani al signdr Giovanni mio cagino, ed alia signora Caterina sua consorte. E river entemcnte a V. eccellenza bdcio le mdnk Ed a V. eccellenza fd umilissimo inchino. Ed a V. eminenza riverentemente m* inchino, Ed alle sue orazioni mi raccomdndo. E le bdcio con la dovuta riverenza le mdni. E restofacendok umilissima riverenza. To a mean person they write. s al servizio. j, J afftttuosissimo per serving sono \ vdstro avorevole. * a' vcstri piaceri. The forms most used at* present are, E msscgndndok h mia servitu, fd a V. S. umilissima riverenza. E con tutta la stima mi dico. Econ tutto I osseauio mi do I'onare d' assicurdrla del mio pro- fondo rispitto. Epregandola de y di lei sfimatissijni comandamenti mipregio d'cssere. E resto con tutto 7 desiderio dipoter' incontrdre gudlche oc- casidne di servir V. S. To s6no con tutta la stimfi ed il rispetto che k devo. E per fine mi do V onore d' offnrle la mia debolissima servitu. JS sia persu.dsa che sano e sard sempre disposto ad ubbidirla. And others of the like kind, L FT T E It E MERCANTI'L I. VE N E' % I A, al Sigr. N. N. AMSTERODA' MO y il^aC Agoste, 1807. Stimatissimo Signore ! AVendo risoluto col nome d'Iddio d'erigere cdsa di negozio in questa Citta (Piazza) sotto '1 nome mio, con facolta, e governo tale di poter* intrappendere qua- Iunque onorevole negozio, e tenendo voi nel numero de' piu cari, e parziali Amfci, vetie porto l'aviso con questa mia, accio, nelle vostre occorrenze possiate valervi dell' opera mia si per provisi6ni mercanzie, per le quali ho m6do di farvi goder ogni vantaggio, come in Cambi, ed altro che vi possa di qua bisognare ! sicuro di riportarne cttimi e leali trattamenti, esibendovi la mia servitii, colle solite e consuete provision}, con che vi dichiariate pronto ad una reciproca corrispoudenza. In tanto faretc nota di non prestar fede ch' alia mia ferma, c611a quale sara la. presente sottoscritta, e mi direte come dovro contenermi per voi, per isfuggire gli errori. Attendo l'on6re de' vostri stimatissimi comandi per farvi sperimentare 'I genio parti- cohire c'ho delia vostra grata corrispoudenza, accertandovi ch'alle occasioni saro per ricorrer' »' vostri favori, mentre affetuosameiite saluUindovi, vi bacio le ruani. VERONA, N.N. AMSTERODA' MO. PER mancnnza d'occasioni non v* abbiamo pi\H arritto, servira questa 6ra per caramente sakitarvi, e dirvi, che per ordine del Signor N. N. di Roma v'ab- T 5 biaiuo 438 LE'TTERE MERCANTTLI. biamo in Condotta di questi SS. N.N. spedita franca, c ben condizionata una balla con fiifkri roarca, e numero coutenente Panni d'Olanda clie vi piacera in tempo debito procurarla, per disporne a voglia del detto amico di Roma, dal quale vi valerete delle vostre spese con avvisare '1 se- guifo. Con questa occasione v'orYeriamo la serviiu nostra in tutto cit> che vi potesse occ6rrere, che prontissinii sem- pre ci avrete, e B. L. M. n O M A. A MSTERODA' MO. S'ENZA le carissime vostre si sono proviste le Pezze otto Panni ch' avete ordinato di perfettissima qualita, ed una Balla delta fuori marca e numero resta spedita a vostra disposizione in condotta di questi SS. N.N. ai SS. N.N. di Verona, che iarete a procurarla da* mede- simi per dircene a suo tempo la ricevuta, e soddisfazione, come non dubitiamo, avendovi procurato fior di robba, ed avantaggiatovi al possibile tanto nella compra, cbe n61Ie spese, il che sara motivo di continuarci in abbon- danza i vostri impieghi, e come dall' ingiunto conto vedrete, ov' abbiamo dato debito per il costo e speso di f . . . Bco. che di tanti ci darete credito, atteudendo che celi rimettiate al maggior nostro vantagio, e supra di voi, alia ricevuta del conto colla solita vostra puntualita, e favoriteci di nuovi, e maggiori vostri comandi, che pron- tissimi ci avrete con tutto l'aftetto, col quale caramente salutandovi, B. L. M. AMSTE RO D A' MO, S S. N. N. ii a m a. CO'Ll.A gratissima vostra dei . . ho ricevuto '1 conto delle Pezze 8. Panni d'Olanda che m'avete proviste, e spedite in Balla N .... al SS. N. N. di Verona a una disposizione, che la procurero da medesiiui. Non ho dubbio che saranno della pertetta qualita che dite, ed a suo tempo vi dir6 la ritrovata. in tanto per farvi valere '\ vostro avauzo ho ordinato al Sigre. N. di Venezla di provedervi subito f . . . Deo. importare delta XETTERE MERCANTI'U. 439 delta Balla, rhe 1 efifettueia con ogni puntualita, atten- dendo da \6i avviso die sia seguiio, e che mene abbi&te dato crediio a fronte di d£t*a-parl'-a : nel ln&ntre vi piacera far nota di provedenri Pezze due Panni di Berri per Tabarri che potrete pagare f. 5. incirca il bniccio in bianco, e farii tingere scaiiatto come la mostra, ed in appresso vi dar6 r.uovo orpine per compire una ballet ta, raccomandandovi che deto Panm siano di buon c6rpo, buon lanaggio e ben coperti per darmi &nimo alia con- tinuazione de' miei impieghi che non saranno scarsi, se mi trovero hen favorito, ed oiFerendomi a' vostrj comandi, prontissimo vi saluto, e B. L. M. A M STERO D A' M O, SS. N.N. VEN EZJ A. PER ordine, e conto del Signore N. N. di Roma vi rimetto a uso D . . . . Banco da N. N. lettera N. N. a grossi .... ducata che ne procurerete promessa, e pagamento in tempo intendendovene con detto Amico avvisando '1 seguito, e preg-andovi de' vostri comandi vi saluto caramente, e B. L. M. ROMA, N. N. AM STERO D A' M O. CO'LLA vostra carissima dei . . . Corrente ci ri- metKte da questo N. N. f. Banco ad uso lettera vostra, sene procurera accettazione, ed a suo tempo ne cercheremo 'i pagamento per creditarvene contro la Balletta tele d' Olanda mandatavi, e qaahdo altro in contraiio non sentiate, tenete 1'atfaie terminato. Non ci resta, die pregarvi della continuazione de' vostri stimatissinii coman- di per i quali prontissimi sempre ci avrete, salutandovi caramente vi B. L. M. T6 FTRE'NZE 440 LETTERE MERCANTI'U. FIRE'NZE, N.tf. AMSTERO DA' MO E' MOLTO tempo che non Vho scritto per mandtnza d' occasioni, servira questa per salut£rvi caramente, e dirvi die a persuasione, del S. N. N. di Livorno, ho riso- luto fa>e una piccola pruova della vostra fabrica, cora- mettendovi due c^sse drappi o mantini di bu6na qualita e de colori che vi mostra l'ingiunta faltura. Vi pia- cera fame nota per inoltrarle questa volta tolla maggiore celerita possibile per la solita Condotta facendomi alia spedizione Tratta dell' importo, che'l vostro carico incontrera il dovuto ricovero, raccomandandovi che i colori sieno ben vivaci, di buon peso e di perfetta qualita, cosi che mi facci&te vantaggio nel prezzo e risparmio aelle spese, se desiderate la continuazione de' niiei impieghi che saranno di qualche somma, se mi vedrd ben trattato, come non dubito del vostro affetto ; ed offeren- clovi la servitii mia in tutto cid che qui possa occorrervi affettuosamente vi B. L. M. Tiaccomandazionc d' uri Amico passaggiere, ed Assegnazione ftittagll dc' dandri necessdrj,Sfc. Mio Signore, SE'NZA ca>o vostro, mi rapporto sopra la mia ante- cedente, che fu ai 10 del passato. Questa serve solamente per pregarvi, che se '1 signor N. che parte 6ggi de qui per N. venisse a riverirvi da pa>te sua e nostra, con vicercaY i vostri consigli ed ajuti d' assisteilo nelie sue ©ccorenze: s'egli avesse bis6gno di danari, di ibrnirgliene sin alia somma di fl. 1000 nioneta corrente c6ntro quittdnza, e di mettermeli a conto senza darmeue aviso. Vi resterd con obbligo per questo, e per gli altri favori ch' avrete la bonta di far' al detto Signore, che molto nostro amico. Raccomandandovi '1 ricapito dell' inclusa, caramente vi B. L. M. SE'NZA LETTERS MERCANTTLI. ui SE'NZA cara vostra, ia presente sara per dirvi ch at- tendo abbiate riscosso da' Signori N di costi fl — e datomene credito ed avviso. In questo mentre vi rimetto altri fl - -, sopra '1 Signor N. pur di costi, per lettera di qu£sti Signori N. di cui vi piacera di procurar l'accettazi6ne, e pagamento al suo tempo, ed imborsati die gli avr6te, raene dar£te parimente credito, ed avviso. In tanto farete nota di provedermi le sotto notate merci e di spedirmele in due Barili, quando pero mele vogliate dare al prezzo avisatovi : in diffetto, tralasciate auco di riscu6tere suddetta rimessa con riman- darmene la lettera : ma quando avrete risoluto di spedirmi i detti Barili al prezzo accerin&to, sarete rhn- borsato subito del vostro avanzo, e sara causa di darvi Comvnissioni di maggior sostenza. Marcher£te i Barili di Num. 10. 11. colla solita mia marca avanti, e per grazia non vi dimenticate della fede di sanit\ sopra cotesti Barili, dove si attesti che la r6bba sia slata costi fabricate, e resto.— • DA'LLA cortese vostra dei 7 passato sentiamo con gusto come siete pronti a favorirci non solamente nell' occasione di negozj, ma anco in provederci le gallanterie delle quali vi pregamnio, per il che vi restiamo inflnita- mente obbligati; e per corrispondere nel primo capo, andiamo procurando Commissi6m de' nostri Amici di fuori da' inviarvi, e per Taltro vi mandiamo qui unita, (or annessa) una speoificazione di qu&nto brameremo, rimetiendo '1 tutto al vostro genio e piacere, e pregSn- dovi di tante cose curiose, che si fabricano in cotesta Citta, di scegliere quelle ch'a voi parranno piu proprie a regalare e dilettare certe Darnigelle nobili, a cui le abbiamo destinate. Quando saranno pronte, ne farete una scatola, ed inviando ai Signori N. di Bolzano, farete lorola tratta del loro importo, che, compiranno a dovere per nostro ordine ; e per fine vi B. L. M. PER dar principio a prevalerci de' vostri fav6ri esibitici, risolviamo di commettervi i sotto notati 7, Ba- rili ..... e come vedrete dall' anessa nota, che vi si roinda in tutta confidenza, ci vengono offerte quelle robbe 442 LETTERE MERCANTILE robbe da altri ai sottonotati prezzi, percio vi preghiamo d'avantaggiarci di qualche cosetta, se sara possibile per obbligarci a coiitinuare cou voi in commissioni piCi rilevanti, ed a passar' una buona corrispondenza a sodis- fazione comune. Quanto piu presto potrete, fated la spedizione di questi sette Barili, per ordinarvene subito, giunti quelli altri. Fate nota d'addrizzarci. detti Colli colla loro sede di sanita anticipate per N. al Signor N. dal quale vene faremo proveder costi colla dovuta pun- tualita I'ammontare. Vi preghiamo di procurar di ser- virci in liitta diligenza, e con tuiti gli estremi vantaggi, ma sopra tutto, tior di robba, accioche venga aggradita da questi nostri Avventori, e conforme le promesse fiitteci de' 10 Febrajo prossimo passaio. PER risposta della cara vostra de' 22. passato, godo di sentire abbiate rkevuto ed huborsito la cedola di cambio di fl. da me rimessivi sopra cotesti Signori N. Di grazia, s'egli e' possibile senza vostro pregiudizio, compiacetevi con sudetti fl. . . . saldarne la partita : meutre, come ben sapete, avete posto la robba piu cara a me che non avete fatto ad altri di qui avendo cio visto con gli occhi miei proprj, e v'assicuro, che se mi farete godere qualche vantiggio, non manchcrete mai di Commissioni dalla parte mia, cd in breve vene ordinero 2 Barili; ma saidate s 7 e possibile la partita suddetta, quando pero non lo vogliate tare, avisatemele, che subito vi faro pagare quel poco avanzo che preten- dete ; ma poi le mie Commissioni saranno scarse, perche non e di ragione ch' io paghi piu degli altri : e caramenle vi. B. L. M. SIA'MO ai 3\ di Lugli tuttavia senza vostre care, e cio sara causa di meno ciirvi. Solo questa servira per confermar 'I dettovi in copia, soggiungendo che dai .Signori N. di N. vi saranno puutualmenle provisti fl moncta corrente avendo anco quest' ordhi£rio scritto a cotesti Signori N. $$c. di pagarvi per nostro conto contro vostra s£mpiicc quittanza 6ltri fl civile quali due partite vi piaceia sollecjtare l'imborso per d ircene poi credito ed aviso, cosi colle nostre se- guenti vi iaremo altre riraesse per contrapporle tutte all' amniont&re LETTERS MERC ANTT LT. 443 ftmmontare de' selte .Barili merci commessevi' de' quail sen' attende quanto prima la spedizione e questa volta, per pot£rvene committer di mane in mano altre in mag- gior numero ; ma bisogna assolutamfrite, che ci facciate godere tfitti gli estremi avanlaggi ne' prezzi e nelkt squisitezza della robba. Con attender d'ogni cosa gr&lo successo facciamo fine con B. L. M. IN risposta della cara vostra de' . . . . ho ottenuto aecettazione dei fl . . . correnti sopra questi Signori N. per leltera del Signor N. di N. al!o scadere della quale procurero '1 pagamento con darvene credito al suo luogo. Dal conto iuviatovi oggiolto, avrete veduro quanto mi si deve per mio avanzo, il quale prego di farmi entrar parimente e d'onorarmi d'altri vostri ca>i impieghi. Qui inclusa va (or c e) una fatturae fede di sanita sopra '1 Barile Num. 6. mandato ai Signori N. di N. a vostra disposizione di cui procurerele la rice- vuta : con darmi credito del suo ammontare : e per fiue vi B. L. M. CON gratissima vostra de' 17. staute. In risposta vediamo che per la morte di vostro Signor Padre, che Dio abbia in gloria, avete risoiuto di far con ere in avvenire '1 negozio sotto nome vosfcro; di cui seu'6 fatta la dovuta nota, ed in particolare, di con credere per voi ad altra mano ch'alla vostra : e per n6i lo farete al solito. I qu&ttro Barili . . . giimsero poi in Bolzano, dove li facci&mo fermare per pro va rue la fine in iiera prossima mezza Quaresima, nella quale anco vediamo che vi varrete del vostro avanzo, il quale faremo ri- capit^ire puntualmente, e sta bene che procuriate qnanto prima d'inviar' anco gli altri sei Bardi per conto a meta, che di tutto ne procaccieremo lo sural timento a maggior benefizio comune, dandovi parte del seguito ; e pur fine vi B. L. M. CO'LLA gratissima vostra de' 9 corrente ci troviamo favoriti ; dalla qu&le vediamo i'inibrmazione che de- siderate di queste nostre tele supponendo bianche, e non grezze. Sopra cio vi dici^mo, che'n simili- niercanzie abbiamo da lunga mano buonissima occasione in far restar serviti gli^amici non solo con fior di robba, ma «uico 4U LETTERE MERCANTFLf, anco con ogni vantaggio possibile, Servavi che i Colli per Chiozza si possoiio fare tanto pesanti che si vuole, perche -v&nno fino cola per carretoni e per dcqua ; ma quelli che si spediscono per Mi!aiio e Genova, non si possono fare che di l6(). libbre ii Barili. Circa la spe- dizione Messina, sogliamo niandar' i Barili per Genova, perche ivi e sempre qualche buona occasione da poter' instradarli : aile volte si gode anco la commodita d'una Galera da poter tragettar la robba senza assicurarla, ma per Felucca si potra, chi vorrii farla assicurare ; basta che amici buoni cola non vi maueheranno e se noi altri siamo abili a secondare '1 vostro disegno, siamo a* vostri servizj prontissimi, e vi B. L. M. SJA'MO a' 14. Novembre colle favoritissime vostre de' 10. del passato, dalle quali sentiamo come avete fatto nota della Commissione datavi per conto nostro di tre Barili. ... in conformita dalla fattura e mostre mandatevi . il che sta bene ; cost che avr^ste procurato diligentemente di provederci fior di robba, e vantag- gia>ci nel prezzo e nelle spese piu che sia possibile ; speriamo adunque con prossime vostre d'iutendere cio clr' avrete operato. Frattanto risolviamo ordin&rvi di provedere per il medesimo conto nostro altri due Barri- li . . . dell' istessa quanta dellesuddetteconformeiamostra the tenete ; con mandarceli per via di Genova per mezzo dei Signori N. a nostra disposizione ; ese irove- remo questa strada raeno dispendiosa che qutlia di Firenze, si continuera. Frocurateci in tanto ogni sod- disfazioiie, nella robba, e nel prezzo, e nelle spese ogni rispiirmio come si confida nel vostro affetto, prendendo 'i vostro rimborso dai Signori N. di Vcnezia a' quali daremo buon' ordine per restinzioue del nustro debito. Vi preghiamo solamente, d'aver' a cuore '1 nostro inte- resse, accioche se'l negozio tornera piofittevole, come speriamo, si possar j replicarvi le Commission! con piu larga maiio. Faremo ancora riflesso a' prezzi che ci acceuuate che vagliano le .... cio e fl , e trovaii- dovi apparenza d utile, ci applicheremo anco a questo ; dovete pero sapere che altri amici cele darebbero, poste in Bologna, a fl . . . , . cioe . . . ., meuo che voi ci avete dinotato : LETTERE MERCANTIXf. 445 dinotato: cbe percio quando risolverSmo darvene Com- missione ci dovrete far' ogni facilita ; e per^ine caram£nte salutdndovi, vi baciamo le mani. LA passata fu nostra ultima delk quale qui eongiunta vi mandiamo la copia, per servirvene in mancanza dell* originate: dapoi ci troviamo colla grata vostra de* 15* scaduto da Bolzano, in risposta : Dei fl . . . che ei rimet- tete in due partite, procureremo 1' accettazione, ed at su«* tempo '1 pagamento. Quanto ai fl . . . che ci dovete per pezze 60 tele grezze, consegnatevi franche d' ogni spesa, celi potrete provedere per Augusta o Norimberga^ per saldar taL conto e comminciare un nuovo, e per fine vi salutiamo caram£nte» RISPONDE'NDO alia gratissima nostra de 6 stante ; vi diremo, che'n questa nostra iiera gia terminata, abbiamo fatto fine de' due primi Barili . . . . e di Barili sei .... che ci provedeste per conto a meta; del Kit to sene formerd 'I conto per mandarvelo con altra. Vedtemo ora per detto c6nto a meta ch' avete provlsto e spedita per Bolzano ai Signor N. a n6stra disposizione altri due Barili . . . . e Barili otto . . . . dei quali come 'anco di quelli che restano, procureremo lo spaccio, il quale se- guito, vene daremo raggudglio con mandarvene T conto; come per tanto T abbiamo ricevuto del loro importare,. che rived remo per scritturarlo, in mancanza di errori {di vostra conformita) abbiamo fatto nota che de fl. 682 ch' avanzate per la nostra meta di suddette merci, cene sara fatta tratta in fiera prossima di Bolzano dai Signori N. di N. la onde vi faremo le disposizi6ni necessarie, accioche resti puntualmente compita e secondo che s'an- dra esitando, s' ordineranno nuove proviste, come inten- derete, e nel r£sto in che vagliamo servirvi, comandateci liberamente, e per fine vi B. L. M. SIGNO'R mio, Sciiviamo a' 3 Dec6mbre privi di gr£te vostre» JLn preseute s6rve solo per dirvi, che per ordkie, e emit© del Signor N. N. v'abbiarao spedito due Colli di diverse .Mer- 416 LETTERE MERCANTI'LI. Mercanzie, come vedr6te a pie della presenle segnati con fuori marca, e vi saninno addiizzati dal Signor N. di N. si tosto che gli avrete ricevfrti; vi preghiamo di seguirne l'ordine, cbe supponiamo gia vi sara dato dal detto Sign ore, dandoci aviso del seguito. Prevaleretevi per le vostre spese dietro ia robba, o sopra la Mercanzia. Non occorrendo per adesso altra cosa, restiamo sempre disposti a servirvi, e caramente salutando vi baciamo le mani. N. N. P. S. Le nuove d! Italia sono molto contrarie alia Spagna, nientre riceviamo in questo mom en to l'avviso da imo de' .nostrr amici di Milano, che'l Genetale N. e stato t'alto prigioniere di guerra con cinque mila Spag- inioli. Signor mio, SO'PRA la copia della nostra ultima del primo Seltem^ bre scadttto, e per adesso vi diamo aviso che 'i Signor N. v'ha indrizzato per Carrettiere N. una cassa No. I. ch' abbiamo commesso per proprio conto, sendovi denho mille nove cento settanta sette marchi d'argento con (litre robbe di prezzo, come vedrete dalla nola qui s6tto uuita, e vi pieghiSmo di fame celere inoltrazione, e eolia minore spesa che si potra. Servavi Iaviso, e coman- date dove ci troverete cap&ci per. rendervi servizj gradili, non dubitate che saremo sempre disposli ad efretuyrli con tutta quell' aiunzione che meritate, e nella ttessa maniera, con cui ci fa\orite sempre, mentre carafnente vi salutiaino, ed augurandovi im fe lice via g- gio, ed 6gni vactaggio possibile alia prossima fiera di N. dove forse alcuno di noi avra '1 piacere di vedervi, restiamo. IL fallimento del Signor N. seguito in Parigi i ip del Corrente ci ha quasi rovinati, perche ci ha ratio perdere d6dici mila scudi da qualche. tempo ^ia spirati, ojtre un' altra partita di quattro mila otto cento florini, che dovra maturare al natale di qu6st' anno. Ma pa- zidnza, Iddio ha voluto cosi, cosi sia. Vi diremo, che tempo fa, deinmo Ordine al Signor N. d' addrizzarvi un C6II0, LE'TTERE MERCANTFLI. U7 Collo, quello ch' anco ci scrive d'aver fatto. Vi piaccia dunque andarloprocurando a suo tempo ben condizionato, e celo rispedirete quanto prima per Lindo a nostra dis- posizione. Vi preghiamo a restringere quanto mai sani possibile l'aggravio delta Condotta, non dimenticando d* nnirvi, (o d' aggiungervi) la bolletta di sanita. Avreie visf o colla nostra antecedente un Barile di Carle ail' indrizzo del Signor N. e mentre siamo entrati nel nuovo anno, v'auguriamo felicissimo capo d' esso coinio d' ogni bene e bramdta prosperita. L'istesso facciamo a quelli che v'appartengono, e siamo di cuore. Prima Lett era di Cam bio a due mesi di data. Pisa. Gennajo 1797' per mil!e Piastre. A DUE m£si di data pagate per qu6sta prima di Cambio all' ordiue del Signor N. mille Piastre, valore ricevuto contanle dal detto Signore, e li passerete secondo F ordine di. Al Signor N. . KomulIno. . a CAdice. Prima Letter a a Vista. Li6ne i 10. Marzo 1S07. per 300 Ducati di Banco. A Vi' ST A pag&te per questa prima lettera di Cambio air ordiue de* Sign6ri N. N. Fratelli, trecento Ducati di banco, valore ricevuto da' detti Siguori, che passerete sec6ndo 1' aviso di Al Signor N. Cristo'fouo Pauli. A Vmteia. Formula d\ Assegnazidne. SIGNO'R Filipno N. vi preghiamo di pag£re contra nostra Assegnazi6ne al Sign6r Daniele N, ad Ordine, ducento Scudi quaranta cinque Cruciferi in moneta, che passerete e6me per aviso di Francqforto, i 4 Agosto, Ca'rlo N. 1797 , Scudi 200. 45, Cruqftro Moneta. Formula 448 LETTERE MERCANT1XI Formula di Quittdnza. CONFE'SSO e dichiaro per la presente d' aver rice* vuto oggi dal Sign6r N. Mercante di N» la Sonima di quaranta cinque Scuddi, che rai doveva dopo la Fiera passata per diverse mercanze. Lipsia, i 9 Novtmbre, Ferdina'wdq N. iwf. Formula di Ricevtita-, HO ricevuto dal Signor N. raille fiorini a C6nk> cfr ante mi deve. • quanto Argentina, gli otto DeccmbiTp 1807. Anto'mo N. ^&ra Ricevfita. HO ricevuto dal Sign6r N. un plico di K per if S%- n6r Principe N. che m' obb'ligo di fargli tener' in wani pr6prie a mio risingo e pcricoto. Augusta,. Anse'lmo N* i lOSetttmbre, im7- Le.ttcva di Pettura per Terra. Frdncofort, i 15 Qiu- gno> 18<>7* Sign6re, ALL* A gu&rdia di Dio e condotta di Micbele Carrettiere di questa Citta, riceverete una Balla B. T. di Mercansie mercata come in margine, pesante quattro cento cinquanta libre, la quale avendo ricevuta ben condizionata, ed in tempo dovuto, gli pagherete per la sua Vettura a ragione di due Scudi per Quintile, come per aviso del Vostro umiV™ Servo Jttttera LETTERE di CIVILTA. 41$ Lettera di Vetiura per Acqua. Amsterodamo i 20 d* Agosto, Siguore, .1807. VI m&ido per la NaVe (o b&rca) di Giovanni N. Barcaruolo di N. quattordici Casse di Zuc- D. P. chero marcate come in margine, le quali avendo ricevuto i 25 del Corrente in buono stato, gli pagherete per la sua vettura a ragi6ne di duoi fiorini per Cassa, ma solameute a la meta, se non le consegua al detto tempo* Sono Vvslro until™ 6 Servztore, N. N. LE'TTEHA DI CIVILT A. Lettera civile ad un Uomo* I llustrissimo Signore, Padrone mio Colendissimo. LE rendo inille distintissime grazie per tutt* i fav6ri | usati verso mio figlio, mentre e staio Collegiale in questa sua regia Accademia, d6ve mi pare abbia fatto non mediocre profitto. Puo esser* ben assicurata V. S» Illustrissima, che mi ford sempre gloria di serviria in tutte le occasion!, nelle qu4ii vorra onorarmi de' suoi pregiatissimi Comandamenti, per testific&rle V indelebile gratitudine che conservar debbo verso 1* innata di iei gentilezza, ed in manc&nza mia lo stesso mio figlio, che si dichiara da lei favoritissimo, non manchera mai di compire Y obbligo suo per non rendersi imme- ritevolc della di- 16i continuata protezi6ne. Gradisca fratt&nto m segno della mia servitu e divozione ^un fornimeuto di bott6ni dell* ultima moda, venfcta, sola* mente la settimana scorsa da Ldndra, ne voglia far' attsnzione alL qualita del dono al di lei merito in nissun inodb 450 LETTERE Di CIVILTA. modo proporzionato, ma al cuor del Donatore fin' alie Ceneri. Di V. S. III™. Napoli, i 7 Agosto J 807. Divot mo Umil 1 ? ed osservandissimo Servitore. Lettera civile ad una Bonna'. Illustrissima Signora, Padrona mia Colendissima. PER farle vedeje quanto stimo 1' onore de' di lei pregiatissimi Cenni, al ricevimento dell' ultima sua in data dei 15. Maggior, ho pregato '1 Giudice di questa nostra Citta Amico mio stretto, affinche spedisca la sua causa ventilante nel suo Tribunale, e m'ha promesso che lo fara il mese prossimo, di maniera tale che spero, che V. S. Ill mo sara. servita senza dubbio, e le dico per suo riposo, che le manderd a suo tempo Copia della sentenza, colla quale potra essa interamente assicurarsi, che vivo impazientissimo d'ubbidirle, e renderla persuasa, e certi- ficata del rispetto, della venerazione, e stima con cui ho 1* onore di protestarmele. Di V. S. lll m \ Firenze Divotissimo ed obbligatissimo i 14 Luglio Servitore 1807. Sempro'nio N. P. S. Sua Figlia glide assai buona salute, griizie al Cielo, e per esser degna figlia d una degnissima Mad re, viene stim&ta ed amata non solam6nte da tutte queste Religiose che quasi V adorano, ma da tutli quelli c'hanno la bella sorte di conoscerla. td Tiittcra LE'TTERE di CIVJLTA. 451 Lettera Del Serenissimo Principe LEOPO'LDO al Signor" Egidio Mendgio, SIGNO'R Menagio : Gli amo- revoli sentimenti die V. S. mi signltica di compatimento e di duolo per la morte del Serenissimo Principe Multias, inio fratello, di felice memoria, sono pi oprj delK animo suo cortese, espei imentato da me in tante occasioni ; onde li recevo io con affettuosa parzialita ; e le rendo grazie ben grandi: desiderando di poter corrispoudere alia cordialita di V. S. colla pienezza della mia, in tutto cio che sia di suo gusto. Ed in tanto le auguro dal Cielo tutte quelle prosperity piu perfette die ella sappia bra- mare. Di Firenze, ai 25 Novembre 1807. Aruorevole di V. S. IL P R F N C I P E L E P'O L D 0. Lettera del Sig r MENA'GIO alia Signora Con- tessa della FAE'TTA. SO'NO obbligatissimo alia gentilezza di V. S. Ill" 5 * della grazia singolare che s'e compiaciuta di farmi colla sua cortesissima lettera. Che veramerite e fare (ma grazia singolare agli assenti, avergli irt memoria in cosi ameuo luogo, qua!" e la Villa di Fresne ; ed in compagnia di cosi amabili persone, quali sono Madama duPlessis e Madamigella le Gendrt: tut te cose capacissime d'occupare interameute 1' amnio suo, per grande che sia. Quant' a me, non dird gia a V. S. Ill ma ch'-' ogni dl spesse fiate anch' ella mi torna a mente, non essen- done n\ai partita. Le diro bene che sono a VUrt, luogo altresl ameno ; dove fra d6tii Pastori e vaghe Pastorelle si fanno tutt' i balli e giuochi che si scrivono del paese di Celadone e d' Astrea : ma che ogni lu6go mattrista dov' io non vedo V. S. Ill ma e che in questo amenissimo luogo, vo fuggendo tutt' i piaceri e passatempi di cosi riguardevoli Pastori e Pastorelle. Soto 462 LETTERE m CIVILTA* Solo e pensoso, i piu diswti cdmpi Vo misurdndo a pdssi tdrdi e leriti. Quindi pud ben cOnocere V. S. Ill ma : chlo non so» ineno ad£sso delle di lei virtu e gentilezze invaghito, ch* io n* era, allora cbe dimorando elk in Angib nella deli- ciosissima Villa di Ciuanpire. Tornero a Parigi, subito che vi sara ella tornata. Fra tanto le mando il Madri- gale Italiano, da me fatto per Ma dam a di Sevigni, ad imitazione di quello del Guarini, Occhi sttlk mortal), fye. tanto stimato e tanto lodato da V. S. Illustrissima. Epcr fine le prego dgni piu desiderata felicita. MADJUGA'LE DEL MENA'GIO. Pianto di bella Donna* Ah del Regno d' Amor prodigio tristof Sparger Idgrhm amdre §lue y dolci lumi ko visto ; ha* trd le Grdzie assiso Solea scherzdre il Riso. Spargean di pianto one 3 bogli occhi un mare? Ma pur co* rdggi ardenti Spargean fidmme cocenti : JS quel fatdle ardore Tdsto m* accese il core. misera mia vita! {yccki, lumi immortdli. JDeh qual per i miei mali Rosso sperdre dltaf Se nubilosi ardete, Sereni che f arete ? FINIS. >T. C. HAVSAtn, ftrintw, 3 ¥eterborou|h-court t, Fleetitreet, 1UL 291948 ■* m*- i ^o l . : ^ <* !: "X °a •'VV-., V ^•c* ^l 1 <£<3* ^ Jp > A'H v-° - m&M * ^ ° * a* ^ 6 Q, p "Civ V ^„,<3'"^ a*<3* «4 Q ^ %> .% 0°. >So. rP V > ^W/KS^ -OX